Master Class: How to keep customers longer
(Even if you have to turn a few away)
Taught by Marie Forleo of MarieForleo.com

Report issues | Get more courses

Master Class:
Keep Customers Longer


About the course leader

Marie Forleo is the bestselling author and marketing strategist and business coach who created “Rich, Happy and Hot,” a program that shows you how to use your unique talent to change the world while creating a lifestyle you love.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Rhhbschool.com

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to reduce your refund rate so you can avoid flushing more money and more customers down the toilet. The course is led by an expert. Her name is Marie Forleo. She is the best selling author and marketing strategist and business coach who created “Rich, Happy and Hot,” a program that shows you how to use your unique talent to change the world while creating a lifestyle you love. There’s her website. We’re going to show more and more of her site and her products as we teach this, but I want to show you first the big board and tell you what’s coming up here. I decided, actually, that, I should just be going over the main ideas here so you know where we’re going and then we’ll launch right into the tactics. Here’s some of the things that we’re going to be talking about that I want you to specially pay attention to. A lot of this stuff is counter intuitive, including, you’re going to make customers work and you’re going to see in this section, we talk about making customers work, why she sometimes turns people away and, some of the things that you’ll hear do turn people away and you’ll find out how that increases your sales and lets you keep more of the money you earn.

We’re going to talk about how to reflect people’s exact feelings. If you’re having trouble closing sales, never mind getting people to stay committed, if you’re even having trouble closing sales, this section is one that you’re especially going to want to pay attention to and, of course, once you get a sale, understanding this section of the course is going to help you keep that sale and keep that revenue coming in. You’re going to see how to show social proof and how to show all kinds of proof to your audience and you’ll see specifically how Marie does it. I think we’ve got some great screenshots that will show you. So we’re not just going to tell you, we’re going to show you how she does it so you know how to do it too.

Look at this. If you’re in a content business, we’re going to talk about why having no content weeks is in your interest and what you do when those no content weeks to make sure that people are excited about the product that they’re getting from you. So much else. I’m skipping over things, like brutally honest. I want to just call your attention to a few things that you might miss. Finally, how to create strategic bonuses and how having that bonus at the end of a session will get people excited and bought into your product and program and they’ll stick with it. That’s all that we’re going to be going over and Marie, thank you. Thank you for coming here and teaching us all this. Before we get into the tactics here, I know what our audience is thinking, which is, ‘What’s the pain?’ Let’s help them see that we’re going to do one of the tactics that we’re going to teach them later on, which is, show them that you’ve experienced this and what the problem is and, in fact, in 2010, you experienced this problem, what happened then?

Marie: In 2010, we had this amazing program called “Rich, Happy and Hot B-School,” and we sold about 330,000, $329,000, to be exact, in terms of revenue, in terms of sales that were coming into the company. And it’s a $2000 product and once we finished, and it was an eight week course, all video based. We had customers from all around the world and we’re talking a look at our numbers and we’re doing a little posting analysis and we saw that the refund rate was near 20 percent. And for me, this is what I do for a living. I create content, train people, teach people how to get results. The fact that we had a 20 percent refund rate was absolutely unacceptable to me. I just thought, ‘Wow. All these people said, ‘Yes,’ and then we gave them back their money? We’re not doing something right. What’s going on here?’ I was looking at it from a few different perspectives, maybe the people that we pulled in, I wasn’t specific enough about who should be taking this course. Then also I tried to look for the fail points during, especially, the refund period, why was I losing this many customers. To see that much money come in and then to see that much money go out, and if we look at those specific numbers, it’s about $64,000 going right back out the door. That’s painful for any business owner. More importantly, and what’s more important to me than money is my reputation and the results that I get for people. I want folks to know that if they’re going to sign up for one of my products or programs, that I’m going to do everything in my power to give them the best experience possible and, more importantly, to get them results. I really had to take a step back, deconstruct everything I was doing and look for ways to, not only keep more money as a business owner but, more importantly to get my customers better results and to have a better reputation and brand reputation out to the world.

Andrew: You did it, and people are going to see throughout this course how you did it and what exactly happened when you got this right, but let’s give them a taste of where you are today. What’s your refund rate right now?

Marie: We relaunched the program with everything that we’re going to teach about today, all the strategies that we use. We sold $1.36 million, so that’s a 314 percent increase in revenue. So there’s tactics which got us there and more importantly less than a three percent refund rate, 2.97 percent refund rate, which in the information product industry, in the teaching industry, in the seminar industry, that is unheard of. Very, very well and I will tell you this, the people that did ask for a refund, were kind of happy about it. They didn’t feel upset, they were just like, ‘You know what? I did this. I realize this isn’t for me. I really want to take advantage of one of your other offerings. I think I’m more suited, rather than a virtual offering, I should come learn with you in person.’ Great feelings. Great rapport with us and it was just an incredible experience.

Andrew: We’re going to show people how to get that done starting with, and everything we do here is very tactical so that you can see, learn and then go out there and do. And the first thing we’re going to ask you to do is to set boundaries. Specifically you want to be choosy and set boundaries before you accept customers, and can you tell people, I’ve got a screenshot here that we can show people when you let me know it’s the right time.

Marie: You can show it right now. One of the things that I’ve usually been very good at in my business is outlining who this is for and who this is not for and I think every single business owner, whether you’re selling products or services, you have to get very specific and clear about who you do your best work for. For example, you’re seeing a screenshot right now from our highest level program, it’s called Adventure Mastermind. It’s a $20,000 per year mentorship program. It’s very, very involved. We travel around, it’s a cool program, but as you scroll down in that particular site, you’ll see, we have a whole list of who this is for and who it’s not for. I started to outline some of the psychology of the kind of women that are going to perform great in this program. Women who take responsibility for their own success. They have a viewpoint that they don’t look at the world like it’s negative. They don’t look at the world like, ‘Oh, everything’s being done to me and I’m just the victim.’ They are fast learners. They don’t require a ton of handholding. They ask smart, strategic questions. I just started to make a list of the kind of women that we wanted to attract to this program and then conversely, underneath that, the kind of women who would absolutely fail in this program. Women who need a ton of handholding, it’s the mirror, the reverse of the women who would do well in it. Communicating this, it’s one thing to know it as a business owner, it’s one thing for your team to understand who your ideal clients are, but it’s another to communicate that in your sales process.

Andrew: Instead of a screenshot here I pulled up the website and right there we can see, on the right, you’re saying what they’re saying and you’re giving us an understanding of who this is for and you’re doing it right from the start. What about the entrepreneur who says, ‘You know what? I need to get customers in the door. Once I get them, if they ask for a refund, I’ll deal with it later, but I got a business to run and I need revenue now.’ We’re telling them, ‘No. You’ve got to turn some people away. You need to focus on just women.’ I don’t see even one man on here. I see that you’re specifically targeting a specific kind of woman. I could see a lot of similarities, I should say, in the women here. What do you say to the person who says, ‘Maybe I should stretch it out even broader at first, because I need more people’?

Marie: You can do that, but you will likely pay the price. Your team will pay the price, you will have, what we like to call ‘PITA clients,’ or ‘PITA customers’, Pain-in-the-Ass. If you think about the cost for your team and the cost for you, in terms of servicing these people, answering their questions and then giving them refunds. All of the admin and all of the time that gets eaten up that could be used for further marketing, reaching your ideal clients. Most people who’ve been in business for a little while will see that it’s just not worth it to have people consuming your products or your services who are not your ideal fit. Especially with social media these days and how our reputations are very clear online. Think about it from a service perspective. If you’re a tailor, and I’m just making this up, off the top of my head, and you know that you only deal with a certain kind of client, they need to drop their things off Tuesday. They’re not going to get things back ’til Saturday, you’re a little hard core with your timing. If you accept a rush client and you broke your own rules and then that person didn’t even like your service, they would go on Yelp and talk about how crappy you were. It’s not worth it.

Andrew: Even the psychology of it, of selling something to a customer who’s not the right fit and then they return it and you feel bad, like you’ve screwed up, like you’ve made a mistake, like you’re on the wrong track. Especially when you’re starting out, to hear that is painful. Later on, as you’re building, you want to keep identifying who you’re going after so that you know where to go and find them. You want to identify who you’re not going after so that you avoid the wrong places and so that you can customize the way that you sell. I don’t know that I could really show this and do it justice here, but the marketing material here all speaks to the person who’s represented in your ideal customer profile.

Marie: Yes. I think you hit upon, Andrew, something really important. I just want to highlight what you said and it’s something most of us gloss over, is the emotional and psychological impact of refunds that it has on a business owner. Especially if you’re just starting out and it’s just you and you have a small team, when you see a bunch of people asking for their money back, think about what that does to your psychology and how it takes you off your game, and your team off their game. Questioning, ‘Is what we do really worth it? are we in the right business? Do we suck at this?’ That type of psychological, emotional [??] being eaten up, that can put you out of business faster than having just a bunch of clients who are not the right fit.

Andrew: Target the right customer and you’re already starting to keep the revenue that you’re earning from the customers who are buying from you. Let’s go on to the next one which is, ‘Make the customers do some work. Hold them accountable by submitting homework.’ This goes against what many entrepreneurs want. We just want to close the sale. We just want to get the customers in and we want to do everything we can to service them and to make them happy and in comes Marie and says, ‘No. You are not their butler. You are not going to do every single thing. You’re going to make them work.’ Why?

Marie: This is really interesting. We’ve all heard, ‘Thirty day money back guarantee. Sixty day money back guarantee. No questions asked, just let us know you’re unhappy and we’re going to give you your money back.’ I tried that. With this particular program, the program we’re talking about is “Rich, Happy and Hot B-School,” part of my qualifications, going back to number one, was I only want to work with women who are committed, who are willing to implement, take action and see results. We set up that precursor before, those boundaries. Now we told them this, ‘You have 30 days to test drive the program. Take all the material, everything we released in the first 30 days. If you want a refund, we’re going to require seeing your completed homework.’ This is a business training course, so we have worksheets, there’s different things they need to fill out each and every module. We said, ‘If you complete all your homework, you send it back and you say, ‘I still have not gotten any value,’ of course we will give you your money back because we don’t deserve your money.’ Here’s the thing. The way that we design our courses and the way I design my curriculum, I know that if people actually do the work, we teach them how to think differently. We challenge them to grow as an entrepreneur and if they actually do the exercises, really unlikely that they’re not going to get value.

Andrew: What about the idea of even handing out exercises at all, beyond the fact that you can then say, ‘Do this in order to get a refund. Do this if you want a refund after the initial refund period is over.’ A lot of entrepreneurs don’t feel comfortable asking customers to do any work. We feel like, ‘If I went to the bagel store and asked for a bagel with cream cheese and they gave me the bagel and told me to go pull out cream cheese.’ Well, maybe that’s a bad example. If we went to a burger stand and they said, ‘Go and cook your own burger before you eat it,’ we’d feel wrong and that’s why we don’t want to make our customers work in the first place. Why does making customers work, why does it work for customers? Why are they happy to do it beyond the fact that it holds them accountable?

Marie: Obviously, this is going to be tweaked. I’m in an information product business so this works for the style of business and you have to get creative and think of how this could work in your business. For me, here’s what it means. People love to be challenged. So many, I think, content creators are freaking lazy. They just want to put out content and pump it out and, ‘I’m going to turn my laptop into an ATM machine.’ That is not how I run my business and that’s also not the client’s that I want coming to my business. My clients, they want to grow. They want to be challenged. They want to learn and they want to be held accountable but nobody has the balls to do it. No one has the guts to say, ‘Look. I actually care that you’re going to implement with this course. That’s why I’m going to require your homework before I let you off the hook.’ Does that make sense?

Andrew: Yeah. It does.

Marie: Completely different psychology and this is very, very smart because in business, when everyone else is zigging, you need to zag.

Andrew: What is this and at what point in the process do customers see, this is obviously the Buy button and right before they buy, you’re telling them, they have to complete their homework. After the 30 days.

Marie: Before the 30 days, so the refund period is 30 days and once you get past 30 days, then there’s no refund, because 30 days is a long enough period of time, especially, we release our content, we give people content immediately and then we release it week after week so there’s more than enough time to get to know the program, to try things out, to implement strategies, to really understand the full scope of what we’re offering. So, we let people know. I mean, I’m very, very clear in my sales process, and that’s the same thing we talked about with point number one, as far as really setting boundaries. It’s about being clear with your customers, letting them self-identify to say, ‘Oh, my God. This girl is no joke. If I sign up for her program, she is going to make me work.’ What does that do? It filters out all of the people who are tire kickers, and all the people who just want to try things out, or their just addicted to information products. I don’t want those people. I want real business owners who want to learn, and who want to be trained, and want to be challenged to grow. So, that refund policy is right there, so that they know, the moment that they click ‘Enroll’ and they start giving us their money, they know what they’re in for.

Andrew: Here, by the way, this is what I was looking for earlier, ‘The IKEA Effect.’ So this goes beyond information products. When people assemble IKEA furniture, turns out, according to this Harvard Business Review, that they feel more connected to what they’ve assembled, they feel a sense of pride over it, and it leads them to feel differently about IKEA furniture than furniture that they might have gotten home and not had to do anything to beyond just put it out in the living room or in the kitchen, or wherever it is. So, that’s another benefit of doing it, and of course, as we are talking about here, helps you get revenue and keep that revenue. All right. On to the big board, and the next big idea is, the next big tactic is, ‘Say no to what they want.’ What do you mean?

Marie: Okay. So, this is really fascinating. You know, I listen to my customers. We do a lot of surveys. We take a lot of information in through Twitter, through Facebook, through email correspondence, and one of the things that we heard from our women who enrolled in B School was, ‘We want community. We want community.’ And I know that community is so important, but what we created is an eight-week program. If we created community within the eight-week program, right? And then all of a sudden at the end of eight weeks we go and take that away, my customers would hate me, they would be so upset, because they formed all these conversations, there’s all this data and wisdom, you know, in the comments and things like that, that they’d want to have access to. So, I really took a step back and said, ‘A, this is not an ongoing course, it’s eight weeks long. It has a beginning, middle and an end, it’s not continuity. B, I really stand for empowering people. I’m not the kind of coach or business owner who wants to keep people in my little circle. While I love my customers, I love our key customers, I love empowering people to take what they learn and go out in the world and make it happen.’ So, we thought about this, and we said, ‘Why don’t we, you guys, form your own Facebook group?’ You know? ‘We’ll give you the tools, we’ll give you guidelines, we’ll encourage you to do that, but you run the community. If you want community so bad, step up and lead it. Take charge. Make it happen.’ And that’s what we did. So, we said no to what they wanted, and they formed this amazing group called the B School Babes, and it’s an extremely vibrant community. And we’ve been doing some follow up with our B School graduates, wanting to find out how their businesses are doing one year later. What’s the impact? What kind of results are they seeing now? And consistently, one of the biggest value drivers from the program, ironically, is community. And it’s community run. So, it’s a really beautiful, beautiful way. Again, we endorse the community. We support the community, but we don’t run it. They monitor it themselves. They make sure everyone’s staying positive and staying motivated and staying on the right track. But, it’s a great thing, and it came out of saying no to something that they want.

Andrew: It’s so hard to do that, because we are told constantly to listen to our customers, to only innovate based on what our customers want. And I know from experience, even from the early days of doing Mixergy, people would demand all kinds of things. They would demand not just transcripts, but certain kinds of color-coded transcripts. They’d want the video, especially in my audience, very techy, they want the video and audio available in more formats than I could ever provide. You know, if I were sitting and re-editing everything in their formats, I’d never get a chance to produce, you know? What is it they wanted? The open-source audio format, which I get. They wanted mp3, which I get. They also want mp3 lower bitrate, mp3 higher bitrate. You start offering all that, and you can’t do anything well, and of course, people are starting to get frustrated. And you, specifically with community, this is a tough thing to say no to when people are asking for community. You’ve said, ‘You know what? No, but.’ And you found a clever solution. You’ said, ‘No, but you guys can do it yourselves.’ And this is what I’m looking at here, is them sharing photos on the Facebook page that they created themselves. And this is the place, this is the community that they’re curating on their own.

Marie: Exactly.

Andrew: All right. So, it’s not just saying no, sometimes it’s, ‘No, and here’s another way that you could do it.’

Marie : Exactly.

Andrew: But definitely not giving in to every whim of a customer, just because they’re a customer.

Marie: Yep.

Andrew: All right. On to the big board, and we’ve got, ‘Reflect their exact feelings. Write emails that reflect their feelings. Talk to the customers in a way that reflects their feelings. Know the customer psychology.’ Do you have an example of how you were able to do that?

Marie: Yes. I call this mapping your customer psychology. You want to think about getting into your customer’s shoes and really experiencing life through their eyes. They’ve just said, ‘Yes.’ They’ve just purchased something from you, so we’ll just use B-school as an example because that’s our example. The first thing that they’re feeling is massive excitement. The first email that they get is not just about the content that I’m delivering, but I’m also mapping their customer excitement. I’m telling them, ‘I know how excited you are. This is going to change your life, it’s the most incredible thing.’ Just really staying with them in that emotional place of exactly where they are. Week two, is when they’re starting to feel challenged because there’s a lot of challenging exercises and homework, so in addition to sending out an email saying, ‘Hey. Here’s week two, module two of the course that’s going to be amazing and here are all the great things that you’re going to learn. I bet you’re starting to feel challenged by the exercise where we take you through customer avatar and maybe you’re starting to see how much work really needs to go into your business to take it up to that next level. I know that you want to be challenged, because you’re here to grow, but if you’re feeling challenged, it’s OK. All of us experience that and here’s what I suggest you do about those feelings.’ Make sense?

Andrew: It does. How do you know that? How do you know at week one how they’re feeling? Week four, how they’re feeling? Because I can get that if I’m feeling insecure and I get an email from you, the person who I just bought from and you say, ‘At this point you’re probably unsure of yourself.’ In fact, I’ll give you a great example. I did this workout video that was supposed to improve my abs and around week two of the video, the guy says, ‘You’re going to have highs and low. Some days when you just don’t feel like doing anything and days when you’re really super passionate.’ In that moment, I said, I still remember it, it’s been years, I said, ‘Oh yeah. I wanted to quit yesterday and I thought it was me. Maybe working out is not really meant for me.’ I stuck with it because of that. How did he know that at that point I was feeling what I was feeling? I know the value, but how do you know it?

Marie: This all comes down to us doing our homework. First of all, we’ve all been customers of something. This is where I believe really great business owners are born, is when you can take yourself out of your own little sphere, your own little universe, and step in your ideal customer’s shoes and really think about their life. For example, we know that our ideal customer has two kids, she’s got work piling up, her business is at a certain level, so we can imagine her day. We’re imagining on week two, if we’re this woman, we’ve got dinner to put on the table, the freaking mail’s like this, the kids are screaming. What the hell is she feeling right now? I can imagine myself going through courses, ‘What do I wish people would have said to me at this point?’ I shared this tactic, Andrew, with an insurance agent. He had a completely different business model. He said, ‘Marie, what you just told me right here is going to change my business.’ He never thought about what someone else experiences when they’re buying insurance and what they’re going to go through day after day or week after week, and he told me, ‘I can now think that through and address those concerns or insecurities or excitements or self doubt or fears, just through an email or a phone call.’ I don’t think it’s rocket science, I think it has to do with compassion and empathy and getting out of our own heads and really seeing life through our customer’s eyes, standing shoulder to shoulder with them and really digging into our humanity. That’s all it takes.

Andrew: I don’t have to massively survey everyone, though I imagine that helps. I don’t have to talk to every customer, if I have thousands of customers, that’s really tough to do. Maybe in the early days you can talk to every single customer to get a sense of where they are, but you’re saying, sometimes just sitting down and saying, ‘Look. I’m not going to think about how to create. I’m going to think about where the person is right now. Where would they be second week? Where would they be third week?’ And as you’re going through other people’s programs, you’re doing the same thing. ‘It’s week two. I give up,’ or ‘It’s week three. I’m a little bored.’ Write that down and be prepared to handle your customer in those situations.

Marie: Of course, from a more analytical standpoint, pay attention to your customer service emails. If you have a big enough team, and someone else is handling your customer service emails right now, get in there. I always have my team forward me stuff, in fact, I make my team create separate Google docs of objections, of challenges, of problems and then I go through and read them so I can get better at this stuff.

Andrew: Good idea.

Marie: You can start off from your own experience but really dig into customer service. If you’re in an information product model, going into the comments, going into their community, taking a look around and seeing what’s being said, where people are dropping off and then here’s the brilliant one, ask them. ‘How are you guys feeling? Where are you at?’ Most people, for any kind of service, are happy when someone just asks how they’re feeling. What are you experiencing? What’s happening right now? If you really are willing to hear, you’re going to get a gold mine of information.

Andrew: I was just thinking about how I installed software on Mixergy.com, my site, to help me figure out the sales funnel and I didn’t know what to do with it after I installed and I never went back into the software. If only they, and other software that sees that I signed up, maybe I’m even paying month to month and I haven’t even used it, if only they’d reach out and say, ‘We see you’re not using this. You didn’t even set up your first funnel. You did not tell us even where the sales conversion pages.’ If they did that I’d feel like, ‘These guys are really helpful because in my most desperate moment, they understood it and they were there for me.’ This goes beyond information, products and now you’ve shown us how we can do this going into customer service, thinking about the customer, writing down our own personal experiences when we’re teaching, when we’re going through other people’s products and also having that Google doc, which is really helpful. Someone else is going through customer service, we should have that Google doc and I know we at Mixergy need to have that. You just gave me one of the greatest ideas for the team to get feedback back to me without overwhelming me. [??], I also have another image here, what is this image of? Before we go to the next big idea. Let me zoom in really tightly.

Marie: This was a reply from one of our B-schoolers. “Thank you for the segment.” This is basically underneath a module. “I too appreciated the encouragement to not get too overwhelmed. You inspired me to post a blog entry.” It was just me talking about, at this particular stage in our program, it’s very natural to feel overwhelmed. This was one of 20 or 30 comments of women saying, ‘Oh my god. Thank you. This module is amazing and thank you for addressing the fact that, ‘Yeah. I feel overwhelmed right now.’

Andrew: I see. This woman, Tera’s [SP], noticing the impact of what we just discussed. I heard in one of our copywriting courses on Mixergy that if you could express the problem to a customer in the way that they express it, they feel like you already have the solution and I can see how effective this is here. Any other points on this one before we go to the big board and another big idea?

Marie: Just in terms of mapping customer psychology, really think through in terms of your specific product or service. Think about what people experience and do some, I call it, marketing detective work. I know we talked about Google docs and we talked about going through customer service emails but if you have some core key customers, maybe they’re returning customers, pick up the phone. Call them up and say, ‘Hey. Do you have five minutes?’ Maybe you can offer them a free service or just a movie ticket, who knows? Just take the time and talk to a few of your customers and find out what are their frustration points and what can you be doing better? They’ll be happy to help.

Andrew: Back to the big board. You say, ‘Show proof. Show real time social proof and success stories for motivation.’ Do you have an example of how you did that?

Marie: Yes. One of the things, again, this comes back to being in really tight communication with your team, also paying attention across social networks. As we started to release the content for B-school, people started writing in, like, ‘Oh my god. This idea just changed this,’ or ‘I use this one strategy and I just improved my conversions,’ or they’re having these breakthroughs that sometimes they don’t post in the members area, but they want to give me a shout out on Twitter. Or, again, they write into customer service just to let us know how much they’re enjoying the course and what results they’re getting already. I will pluck those exact stories, word for word, and go draft an email and send it out to the entire community to say, ‘Hey. Betsy just sent us this email, she just used strategy from Day Number Two and Module Two. Look at the results she’s got. Look at what’s happening.’ If it’s a tweet, if somebody sends us a great tweet we’ll take a screenshot of it, pop it into an email, send it out to the entire community. This does a few things. One, it confirms that they’ve made a great decision, because obviously if members of the community are getting results already, it increases their possibility for themselves that they’re going to get those results if they see it actually happening in real time. Two, it further cements the community, because people like to see other people win. That’s the only kind of people I want to attract. People that are happy because of other people’s success.

Andrew: I’m going to show a screenshot about it up here from your web page. I think a lot of entrepreneurs are reluctant to do that because they don’t want to boast. They don’t want to say to the audience, ‘Look how great I am.’ They don’t want to take someone who’s just complimented them and turnaround and say, ‘I’m going to use you for marketing purposes.’ It’s a hard thing to do. What do you say to those insecurities that some entrepreneurs feel?

Marie: To be really honest, most of the comments are not so much about me, it’s about the person. I’m always trying to frame it so, ‘Hey. Look at what Betsy just did. Take a look at what she just created.’ It’s not about, ‘Hey. Look how great Marie is.’ Yes, I’ve created this program but I don’t do it just to hear myself talk. I do it to help people get results. So, I’m showcasing the results. So, if you can again, keep your attention on how can you make your customers the star, how can you highlight their success, how can you really hold them up in the community, then it’s really not so much about you, it’s about them.

Andrew: You know what, I just realized that I was hiding behind generalities. Yes, other entrepreneurs feel that way, but I’m the one that I was talking about. I do insecure about the (?).

Marie: Sh! [claps hands]

Andrew: I do feel insecure about sending out emails about the praise that I get from the customers, and I do feel at the moment like, whoa, wait, wait a minute, this guy just said thank you. Now, I’m going to turn around and say, “Can I use it in public?” But you’re right, if it’s about them, then it’s more effective. And if it’s about them, then I don’t feel so bad.

Marie: Yeah. I’ll just get you this. This framework might help you, Andrew. One of the things that you can do is, and this is the truth. This isn’t just like a strategy. What I always say to my customers, because I know it’s true in my life, look, there are literally tens of thousands of women out there that I am mentoring each week through my free content that love to be inspired. They want to hear that other women are doing it.

So, for example, my customers are like, “Oh, it’s for you, Marie, you do these videos and you’re like, you’re great on camera” thinking that I have a special gift and that I can do this but they can’t. So, it’s my job, it’s my responsibility to showcase other people doing it and doing it well. And so, again, it’s like, I let my folks know. So, if somebody writes in a success story, I say, “Hey, look, you are about to inspire 50,000 women. Is that cool to you?”

Andrew: Hah, that’s a great way to put it.

Marie: You see what I mean?

Andrew: Yes.

Marie: That might give you a slightly different framing to help you just get over that hump because people do. We need more good news in the world. I think you’ll agree to that, right?

Andrew: Yeah. You know what?

Marie: There’s enough crap around. Let’s showcase some people that are making things happen.

Andrew: You know what? I’ve got to say this to the audience. Write that down. I’ve seen some good speakers say this, and it sometimes feels dorky, but it really sticks in my mind. And often, I will actually write it down in my Evernote. Write that down. You are about to inspire 50,000 people. Is it OK? That’s a good way to request a testimonial. And speaking of it, here is the testimonial page on marieforleo.com/praise which you can see for yourself, how people have done this.

You got praise from really impressive people, including Tony Robbins. You’ve got Richard Branson, Laura Roeder, of course, over here who has done a course and an interview on Mixergy that’s been really popular with the audience. So, you put it together on this page, and you know what, I’ve got to take this format from you. It’s so polished. I like the way that you’ve done this. Is there any way that we can specifically ask for feedback?

By the way, I’m going back to the main topic before I ask about how to ask for feedback, testimonials like this.

Marie: Yeah.

Andrew: I can see as a customer, if I’m feeling that oh, this isn’t working for me and I see all these people coming in with their testimonials, with their excitement, with the rewards of their work. I feel like, maybe, I’m not really applying what I’m learning. Maybe, I’m not really doing the homework because I’m getting lazy. Maybe, I’m not doing something, and I should just go back and try it again. I can see the effectiveness on this for retention.

Is there a way specifically to ask for testimonials so that they’re useful?

Marie: Yes.

Andrew: Or do we just … Yeah. What do we do to make them especially well written or useful?

Marie: We actually have a system for that. I try and create a system for everything in our business so that we can put it on auto pilot as much as possible. So, we create feedback surveys using simple Google forms, right?

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Marie: And we’ll ask very specific questions. I don’t have them memorized in my head right now, but I’ll give you a few of them. What specific feature do you like best about this program? What specific results have you seen in your business and your life as a result of taking B School? What challenges have you seen? Have you tried some strategies that have worked, and have you tried things that didn’t work? Please explain them. So, we have about six or seven questions that we ask people. So, it’s more about really getting feedback, not just a testimonial, but we ask them very specific answers to very specific questions and just let them roll.

And than, at the end we always ask, “Is there anything else?” One of our other key questions, “Would you recommend B School” If so, why? That gets people to really dig into, God, if I was going to recommend this to a friend, what would I say? So, then we go through that content, and we also ask people permission. If we have further questions, can we follow up and ask them? So, sometimes people will give some great feedback, but you know they’ve got a little more in them or you know it wasn’t really clear, so then we know exactly what to ask them to get a better answer and that’s it.

Andrew: All right. That is very helpful. I keep waiting for people to send me the perfect, well written email and instead I should be guiding them and let them know what I’m looking for and what’s helpful.

Marie: And, also, ask people – this is really a power question especially if you sell premium products or programs. What hesitations did you have before signing up?

Andrew: Ooh, that’s a good one.

Marie: This way, one of the things that you want to do, one of the things that we do really effectively, I try and highlight the hesitations so people have asked me before, ‘Marie, you have a mountain of testimonials on MarieForleo.com. Why is that?’ I was like, ‘You know what? First of all, we’re in an age where people have a lot of doubt and they certainly have a lot of doubt with anything that remotely is making money online.’ The new reality of business, every business is online. We have to understand how to make money online. As a business owner, it’s my job to give an avalanche of social proof so people understand, ‘I am not some huckster.’ This is my life’s work. I am here to stay and take a look at all these other people who have experienced my work and, in their own words, can tell you what it’s like.

Andrew: Let’s go on back to the big board and we just covered Social Proof so let’s go to this one which is, ‘Have no content weeks.’ What do you mean? What’s a no content week?

Marie: In B- school we have six key modules, but the program is eight weeks long. Knowing my ideal customer avatar, knowing that it’s a woman who’s juggling a lot of things, going through a pretty intense coursework for six straight weeks, ain’t going to happen. I thought about it and I was, ‘What if we built in implementation weeks? A little bit of a breather.’ So we do three modules, module one, module two, module three, week one, week two, week three and then week four, no content. It’s all about catching up. We all have busy lives and during that week, there’s extra coaching, there’s just room to breathe, there’s room to digest and then we get started in week five with the rest of the content, and at the end there’s another implementation week and room for more questions and taking action and all that good stuff. Just looking at the ideal customer and what’s going to fit for her life. How can I best serve her and get her through this program and make her not feel like a failure and help her really get the result that I promised her?

Andrew: I’ve got a screenshot here. How’d you get this email from Courtney and why is Courtney so excited? I wonder if people can actually see this.

Marie: This is a slightly different strategy. This goes down to ‘Being Brutally Honest.’ If it’s OK.

Andrew: Oh, I see that we’re going to move on to that? Before we do that, implementation weeks, let’s give us ideas for what it is. First of all, it’s just to catch up week, which, if you’ve fallen behind, if you knew you were supposed to do something but have been feeling guilty, now you get rid of your guilt to catch up. We’re not moving ahead before you take a little bit of time for yourself. That’s one thing we could do. Second thing is you can ask them for specific action to happen during that week. You take a step back from giving them more content, more product and you say, ‘Go and do this homework.’ I think you used the example of having customers create a customer avatar, which we talked about in a past course, the one with Cindy Alvarez of KISSMetrics, if you guys are watching and want to know how to do that, go watch that session and you’ll see how to create the customer avatar step by step. In this case, you teach your customers how to do it and you say go and spend a week doing it. So you give them an assignment, you said you also give support in that week, I guess in the message boards, what else do you do in that week?

Marie: We do fun things like there can be newsletter reviews, website tear downs, just extra good Q&A coaching. I’m very much a real time person, if there’s a live course, I’m taking a look at what are the conversations that are sparking, if everyone seems to be talking about a particular theme or if they’re all struggling with one issue, we can create some bonus content that doesn’t require necessarily more work, but just something to engage with. Something extra and unexpected. It’s also a great week to give your customers surprises. How can you delight them? How can you surprise them? How can you have open office hours or just little extra touches that will make all the difference in helping them move through your program and, of course, reduce refunds.

Andrew: I know a lot of people in my audience are creating software that they’re selling on a monthly basis and they’re doing an onboarding process where they email customers every week and they’re training them and then giving them things to do and to try out with their software to say, ‘You know what? In this email or in this part of the onboarding process, I’m going to give you a week to catch up,’ or ‘I’m going to give you a week to email us if you have any questions that you haven’t had a chance to.’ Take that no content, no direct request week and give people, actually I should say no content, but you sometimes are asking for specific action. To take that break is helpful.

Marie: What about this, Andrew? You’re getting even more creative. What if you just took a week and rather than, ‘Use this, use this, use this,’ you’re like, ‘Let’s celebrate.’ You just did something wacky and unexpected out of left field. Telling them how much you appreciate them as a customer and why don’t they take it a little easy this week, because they’re probably working their eyeballs out usually. Even an email like that, you can use these ideas. What I like about what we’re teaching right now, if you really get creative and you’re not just literal like, ‘How can this apply to my business?’ Just think about, ‘What can a breather do? How can I use something unexpected in my business to delight people?’ That can also work with this strategy.

Andrew: Let’s go on to the penultimate tactic, the next one which is ‘Be brutally honest.’ Should I show Courtney’s email at this point?

Marie: Yeah. Sure.

Andrew: Let’s take a look at Courtney’s email.

Marie: This is an email from a B-schooler that actually refunded, and I’ll just read it, just to make it simple so you don’t have to strain your eyes. She said, ‘Just wanted to thank you Marie, for being honest. I was in RHHB school for a bit and then bowed out because of her honesty. She was right. my idea was lacking and it wasn’t going to get me where I wanted to be. She didn’t say it like that but she asked the right questions. The point of this is to say that I am extremely grateful. Her honesty, her willingness to risk my request for a refund in order to be authentic in her work, well it’s clearly paying off. I’ve since developed an awesome new plan of action, I’m quite positive in a few months I’ll be moving and grooving. Hopefully some day soon I’ll be joining Mastermind Oral Access [SP]. Thank you, Marie, for being connected to her authenticity and for standing up for my own. Awesome Blossom, Courtney.’ This is just an example of, if you have someone coming into your business, whether they’re buying your software, they’re buying your service, they’re buying your program, just know that you can’t get them the results that they’re looking for right now. Be honest. Be brutally honest. Don’t just be hungry for the sales or to get more revenue in. All of us have that little internal meter inside where you know sometimes, when a customer comes across your doorstep, you’re like, ‘Gosh. They’re just not right,’ or ‘There not ready right now,’ or ‘What they’re trying to achieve we really can’t help them achieve based on where they are, what they’re thinking about, this stage in their business.’ I don’t think enough people have the courage to say, ‘No,’ and to be brutally honest and to turn people away.

Andrew: It’s really hard. I can see how it’s helpful for you and, is this a blog post on your site, on MarieForleo.com, about how to set boundaries?

Marie: Yes. Being brutally honest with your customer, one of my highest paying customers, she was a member of Adventure Mastermind, which was a $20,000 a year program and she was showing up to our coaching calls late and I said to her, ‘I am not cheap. I am very expensive, and for you to be pissing me off and showing up to coaching calls late, you’re not only hurting our relationship, even though I don’t take it personally.’ I knew that she had to be pissing off other people in her life. Her boyfriend, her kids, because when people are late one place they’re usually late everywhere. It was that being brutally honest and, of course, she could have been like, ‘I’m not taking this. I’m out of this program. I’m going to take whatever’s left of that 20 grand and go someplace else.’ She thanked me for it and it changed her life because no one had ever really been that honest with her and told her what was going on in a way where she could really hear it.

Andrew: Let me see if I can play a quick thing of this. I don’t think the audio’s going to come out. Let’s see.

Marie: Might not. My intros are a little funny. There’s a lot of [??] to do.

Andrew: I’ll let people watch this on their own but you do keep those videos moving. What do you do, a two second intro and then you go right to the intro video and then you launch?

Marie: Can I tell you, Andrew, it is funny when we shoot these videos, it’s the bane of our existence. There’s a two second thing that’s usually comedic and I never know what we’re going to do and I make them up on the fly and that one I was like, ‘I’m not saying anything.’ So you just hear crickets.

Andrew: Final big idea here, which is to create strategic bonuses. What’s a strategic bonus?

Marie: For most people there’s a refund period. For us there is a 30 day refund period and it was a conditional guarantee. A strategic bonus is if you think about wanting to keep someone and retaining them past your refund period, how can you create something that is really juicy, that’s really enticing. Something they’d really want to get but you hold it out past the refund period. You make them work and get through it and then you reward them for graduating. Because B-school, online business school, we have that them going, I created Graduation Bonuses. Content, experiences, goodies, things that you’re only going to get when you graduate. When do you graduate? After the refund period. When you’re thinking about creating strategic bonuses, think abut what your customer ultimately wants. What are the things that make your customer so excited, that they would do anything to get it? Rather than giving it up front, wait until the end. That’s all about strategic bonuses.

Andrew: Oh. That’s a great idea. What are some of the strategic bonuses that you’ve used? You’ve used oversized B-School mugs, what were they?

Marie: OK. I have on right here.

Andrew: Oh. Let’s see. I’ll zoom in.

Marie: It’s Rich, Happy, and Hot B-School. Then on the other side. Women have, not all women, but many of us… It says, “I freaking love marketing.” Many women I come across have a negative association with sales and marketing, and one of my missions in life is to change that. I think marketing is the greatest skill to make money and change the world if you really get it. So, we send out these big mugs after you graduate. Over time, because the brand has been around for a little while, people hear about these mugs and they always want to buy them. I’m like, ‘You can’t buy a mug. You have to graduate B-School to get your mug.’

People take pictures with them and it’s all kinds of fun. But then I hold back some content. I do a live event every year called “Rich, Happy, and Hot Live”. We don’t sell DVD’s to that program. It’s a live experience. You come, it’s amazing, and then you go home, but of course we record everything. So, I’ve held some strategic bonuses, graduation bonuses, like a session or two from the live event that you’ll get after you graduate.

Those are things that some people really want to see and be able to take advantage, but they can’t get it until they make it through the course.

Andrew: Here, I think, these are women that are holding with pride, they sent you pictures…

Marie: Yes.

Andrew: …of the mugs that they earned.

Marie: Yeah. We have little sub-communities all over the United States and all over the world. This is a group of L.A. B-Schoolers. One of them is a photographer. She invited some other women over to her studio and they all took these professional pictures with their mug. Then they sent us this photograph, which I think is amazing. It just goes to show you, nothing that we suggested today, Andrew, there’s nothing bad. It’s really about supporting people and challenging them to be their best, and to make it through something that they invested in. Something that they raised their hand and said, ‘Yes. I want to do this.’ Just like when you said, ‘God, this software could help build my business.’ Right?

Andrew: Right.

Marie: You signed up because you had a dream of it helping you get where you want to go.

Andrew: Right.

Marie: So, wouldn’t it be amazing if the business owners got on your side, standing shoulder-to-shoulder with you and saying, ‘OK. I’m going to understand human psychology, and I’m going to do everything I can to help you, Andrew. Use our software to get to where you want to go.’?

Andrew: This has been spectacular. I keep thinking of different ways that I can use this. I’ll tell you something that I feel, and I’m wondering if the audience is feeling it too. We covered so many big ideas here, and so many specific actions that people can take, and that’s intentional. We want this all to be tactical so that they can learn and go and use and see results. I’m feeling a little overwhelmed that there’s just so much here.

So, I’ll tell you what I do. First of all, I always, people see this, sometimes I lose connection I feel with a guest for a moment as I take my notes, but it’s important. So, I always take notes. If you haven’t taken notes, you might want to go back to the transcript, which we’ll give you, so you can highlight the sections that you want to remember.

Do find a way to just write it down, not so you’ll remember it later, but so you can pay attention to it now and be aware of what’s useful for you. The second thing is, what I’ve discovered having gone through all these courses and gotten all these great ideas is, sometimes you don’t want to do everything.

You just want to say, ‘What’s one thing I could do?’ In fact, what I sometimes will do is say, ‘What’s the easiest thing that I can do?’ Not the best, not the most impactful, not the greatest thing I could do, but what’s the easiest thing that I can do based on what I’ve learned from this course. Then I go and I implement it as quickly as possible. Maybe even the next day. Maybe I stop everything else I’m doing and I go and I implement right away, just so I could feel that sense of momentum start.

So, I’m going to suggest the same thing to you. We have lots of ideas here. If you’re feeling overwhelmed, if you’re feeling like you don’t know where to get started, find the easiest thing that you can do, commit to doing something about it right now, and then come back and tell us what you’ve done with it. Come back and report. Tell us what the results have been. Share the results with others, with me specifically, and with Marie and in the comments on the side. Let us know.

It’s not for me. In fact, I almost hesitate to ask. You know how I feel about asking you guys for testimonials. I almost hesitate to ask, but I’ll tell you the truth is, it’s not for me. It’s about you. If you can just commit to using one thing. If you’ve tune in to all this, all to the end right here, then there’s got to be at least one thing that you can use.

Find it, commit to using it, and use it. You’re going to see that if you keep doing that, how your life changes and how the results just keep flooding to you. I’m going to do one other thing that I recommend that everyone who watches these sessions do, and that is say, ‘Thank you, Marie, for teaching us.’

If you’ve watched this and you want to reach out, Marie, let me bring up your website so that people can connect with you there. Your blog posts just kick butt. They’re so freaking interesting and they’re cool. The videos, unlike mine, are really short, so they’re fun to dip into. This is the website that I recommend people check out, marieforleo.com to get to know everything that Marie is working on.

Is there one of these programs that they can check out if they want to see how you implement the ideas that we’ve talked about?

Marie: Yeah, sure. Rhhbschool.com is the program that I actually discovered all of this, everything we talked about today. We’re just about to go into our launch process, so depending on when you’re watching this, you might see a different page that comes up there. That’ll be the place that we’re sharing a lot of free training, absolutely free.

You’ll be able to watch how we rolled this out. We do the same thing. We just really try and be clear on who we best serve, so we only pull people into our funnel who we can really make a difference for, because we know that everyone else, there’s other teachers and there’s other programs that will serve them even better than we can.

Andrew: Well, rhhbschool.com. Of course we’ll link to it. Thank you for doing this session with me, Marie and thank you all for watching.

Marie: Oh, my pleasure.

Andrew: Thank you.

Marie: Thanks, guys.

Master Class:
How to position your company so customers buy from you first
(So customers will think of you first)
Taught by Sean Glass of EmployInsight

Report issues here

Master Class:
Positioning

About the course leader

Sean Glass is the founder of EmployInsight which builds on-demand tools for managers to help them hire the right people and help those people be engaged and succeed in their work.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

HireONE

Pinterest

Priceline

Twilio

Salesforce

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to position your company so customers think of you first and buy from you. The course is lead by Sean Glass. He is the founder of this company, of Employ Insight, which builds on demand tools for managers to help them hire the right people and help those people be engaged and succeed in their work. I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy, where proven founders, like Sean, teach. Sean, you know the mentality of this audience. They are thinking, “What’s in it for me and what has this guy done with what he’s about to teach me? Has he done anything with it?” And you have.

Sean: Sure.

Andrew: What do you answer people who say that? What have you been able to do with positioning?

Sean: So the first company I founded, which was when I was a sophomore at Yale, is a company called Hire One. We built Hire One over eight years from the three of us with an idea in a dorm room to a company that’s been valued at over $1,000,000,000, serves millions of college students and thousands of colleges and universities with its products. A lot of how we got there was being able to create a new market for a product that hadn’t existed before. We were able to do that with how we talked about the product, the way we named the product, and the way we introduced a new space into the minds of those students as well as university administrators.

Andrew: In fact, there was one analyst who was covering Hire One who did what, that really shows how well you guys positioned?

Sean: Yeah, the funny thing was, right as we were going public and immediately afterwards when the first research reports started coming out, there was a research report that talked about what they called Hire One as a leader in the refund management space. And I read that and, kind of, took a double take because we’d invented that term. I remember sitting around going, ‘What are we going to call this thing that we do? We don’t just cut checks for universities. We do a lot more than that.’ And ultimately we came up with this idea of creating a term which we called refund management, which was payments plus service plus error handling. And to see an analyst saying that Hire One is the leader in this new service space called refund management, showed that we’d been ultimately successful in taking this idea and turning it into a real market.

Andrew: Absolutely, but you weren’t always that good at positioning, right?

Sean: Right. I think this was one of the things for me; I founded Hire One with two other co-founders. They focused on operations and finance and my focus was marketing and product. With our first potential customer, we got a commitment for an early trial. In the beginning, we were thinking, “Well, we provide campus card banking and debit card solutions.” So we were really focused on wanting to help students have easier ways to bank and to use a card off campus for financial transactions. And so, with that first customer, we really got stuck in that model. That was what we were providing to them. That’s what they were expecting from us. That was actually, as we learned as we talked to them and other potential customers, that wasn’t really where the value for the school was.

The funny thing was, one of our earliest beta customers ultimately never converted into a full customer because, for them, they never thought about us as the potential solution to payments problems. And where we found the potential for the company was actually in solving the problem of helping move money from the school to the student or from the student or parent to the school. And as we figured that out and started to understand that, that’s when we were able to create the business.

Andrew: OK. By the way, what you said happened to you is what I want to have happen to our audience. The first story not the second one, where not only do you tell people how to think about your business, but you start getting them to use the language that you’ve invented and to describe the whole industry and everyone else in the language that you created. As a result they end up buying from you and your business ends up growing. In your case, you guys took Hire One public, right?

Sean: Yeah. It’s been public for just over two years and it continues to grow at a pretty fast rate, which I hope will continue as a shareholder still.

Andrew: All right, we’re going to go into these big ideas right now. But before I do, do you happen to know what the market cap is on the business? What’s Hire One worth now?

Sean: I think right now, it’s the high 800s. It fluctuates, but it’s been as high as, I think, close to $1.3 billion and went public at, I think, just over $550 million. It has done well since the IPO and hopefully has room to grow.

Andrew: All right so, strong physician and work for you guys, I wanted to work for my audience. These are the big ideas that we’re going to cover: the first one is you, “Guys find the pain. Know your competition and the pain points of your customers.” How did you do it?

Sean: I think I started to touch on this a little bit. As we got our first beta customer, the key is to head out and talk to as many customers as possible. I think, one of my Yale friends, Eric Reese [SP], has really done a great job of evangelizing the idea of customer development. A lot of customer development is that direct interaction, so there are two ways you can do it. If you’re a web based business, obviously, you can be interacting with customers through your application collecting data. In an enterprise environment, often it’s actually direct face to face customer interaction.

So for us, we were thought that our buyers were either the campus card officer or the university CFO. And so we tried to get introductions to people with those titles at different colleges and universities and we would sit down and talk to them. We say, ‘What are the issues that you see in your office? Here are some of the things we’re looking at. Would you have an interest in providing cheaper, easier to use banking and debit card services to your students? If that integrated with your campus ID, would that be interesting? What other financial interactions?’

The interesting thing was, we would ask this question, “What other financial interactions do you have with your students and where are their potential problems?” and we started having CFOs telling us, “Look, every year, you guys probably don’t know about this, but every year we get, schools get hundred of millions, the industry’s billions of dollars in financial aid, goes to the schools. The schools take out what’s owed to them and the remainders of those funds get paid out to students because often the money excess of tuition. It’s also meant to cover books or lodging or transportation.” And I said, “We cut checks and we have 10,000 students show up at our office and we have to hand these checks out. If you guys could solve that problem, we would buy that product.” Literally, someone told us what the big pain was. And so we started to think about how to solve that.

Andrew: Let me make sure that I understand what you’re saying before you go on to how to solve and then how to explain this. You’re saying that you walked in with assuming that they had one need. What was the need that you assumed that your potential customers had?

Sean: So, we thought that schools would want to offer more comprehensive financial services to their students, that is checking and debit card services.

Andrew: Right, OK. So you said, “Hey, we’re going to give you this piece of plastic that’s going to be like a super debit card because it’ll be connected to your school.”

Sean: Yeah.

Andrew: And instead, what was the problem that you noticed that they had?

Sean: And so they told us, “That’s great, but really our problem is getting money to students.”

Andrew: Right. And these people were walking in…

Sean: “We often owe student little bits of money and they way we solve it is with hiring extra staff, having checks stuffed in envelopes. We either mail them out or hand them out. We have all sorts of issues that happen with that. If you could help me solve that problem, I’d be interested in it.” That was, kind of, the response we got back.

Andrew: I see, OK. All right, so you showed us how you figured out the pain that your customers have. What does this have to do with, and we’ll get to how our audience can figure out the pay point, but what is finding out your customer’s pain point have to do with the big idea that we told people we were going to teach them, which is how to position their product?

Sean: Sure. So really understanding the pain, right? So we didn’t just go, OK. Your pain is just generally you need to get money to students. We tried to understand. So we said, “OK. Well, like, why is this such a headache for you?” And we got, “I have to add staff.” We could’ve left it at that and said, “Oh, you have to add staff. The problem is that you spend more money.” But we said, “Well, why do you have to add staff?” And they said, “Well, you know, if we have students come in and collect these checks, then we have these huge lines and that’s a big issue.” And we said, “Well, why don’t you mail them?” And they said, “Well, if we mail them, students change addresses. They change bank accounts. So we have lots of errors in the process. So we’ll send a check out to an address that’ll come back. We’ll have to get a new address. We’ll have to send a new check out.”

And then there was, as we dug into it further, we also found that compliance is an important part of this. The schools are required to meet certain compliance regulations around the timing of how fast this money that comes into the school that’s owed to the student is paid back to the student. They also have audit requirements. So as we were able to get more and more of these details, we were then able to craft, we were starting from scratch crafting our solution to this, and as we crafted our solution, we were able to craft a solution that wasn’t just the payment. So they weren’t saying, “We need a way to make these payments.” They were saying, “We need a way to manage the process and part of that is making the payment.” And so then when we came to looking at positioning, so we looked at what are the ways that schools could do this otherwise?

And the competition was status quo, which clearly we were being told they were open to changing. Outsource check writing, so banks would take a file of payments and write checks. But that really only solved this minor thing of: how do you create the check? It didn’t solve any of the customer service or audit or compliance issues. Or some schools would use a prepaid debit card. And that’s actually still Hire One’s number one competition, is companies that sell prepaid debit card solution. That is basically the equivalent of the outsource check writing.

Andrew: Because with a prepaid debit card, basically, instead of giving the student a piece of paper…?

Sean: Instead of mailing a check, you mail a card.

Andrew: Right, exactly.

Sean: It’s not really any different. So what we realized is that, both in the way we crafted our product and in the way we positioned it, we had to make it clear that what we were offering was different from those other solutions. We weren’t an outsource check writing solution. That was when we came up with this term of refund management and because no one had ever heard that term before. So if we called a school and said, “We do refund management.” They would go, “Well, I don’t know what that is.” We were able to then fill in the whole behind that. So refund management is: its integrated customer service, error handling, compliance, and audit back-up. So now you could talk to a school and say, “We do refund management. Refund management is these things.” And then as school start saying, “I want refund management.”, the other solutions don’t even fit into that bucket.

Andrew: I see.

Sean: So, “I don’t want check writing. I want refund management.”

Andrew: I see. So if a competitor walks in and says, “Hey, we can offer you debit cards.” You go, “We don’t want debit cards. We want refund management. This new thing is what we’re looking for.” And the reason you knew that refund management was the right phrase to use and to teach your potential customers and to train them to demand, is because you went it, you understood their pain, and you realized that their pain isn’t that they just want to handle payments. They’re pain is the whole process and that’s why we need to understand our customer’s pain point; because by understanding what they’re pain point is, we can position ourselves as the solution for it and we can do all those other things that we’ll teach later on in this session.

Sean: And a key point there is that you’re tying the language that describes your solution to the competitive differentiation. So in naming your product in a certain way, you’re able to immediately show how it might be different from something that’s not a direct competitor, because it’s not the same thing, but it might be a substitute otherwise in the mind of the customer. That’s a difficult thing to get right, but if you do get it right, there’s a big advantage.

Andrew: OK. All right, I’ve got a visual here as part of this section and it’s a long one. What is this and what is this…?

Sean: Actually, so, and honestly this…

Andrew: I’m going to find a better way to show this in a moment. Uh-huh.

Sean: This may have changed since we first talked about it, because it’s a home page of a start-up I’m invested in called UI, which is a on demand platform for website usability testing.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Sean: So Kyle, the CEO, is doing a great job and actually what they’ve done is they’ve clearly delineated the feature benefit pairs. Rates are like: here’s what you’re getting by using UI. What I’ve love to see Kyle do is actually have that one sentence overview that captures what UI is and how it’s differentiated from the substitute. So today, people who are doing usability testing, they tend to buy very expensive desktop software and they tend to hire a consultant. And UI lets you do the same thing for a much lower cost, on demand, with a sass model. The other thing they do is they actually have a whole population of users who what to do usability testing, so they’re able to actually bring the testers into the process. So I haven’t spent a ton of time and Kyle’s going to be much better than I am at ultimately framing what that is. He’s spending time with the customers and learning what people want. But I think there could be an advantage for them as a company to go from, to bring it back to Hire One, if we’d said, “Hire One is a payments company. Our payment’s process does error handling. It does the actual payments. It does compliance. It does customer service.” That’s a little bit like the way you see UI has things set up now. That’s kind of what they’re talking about.

If they can come up with a way to wrap those things together, to name that total service that they’re providing, they’re going to better be able to over time provide differentiation versus other options that are out there.

Andrew: I see. And then instead of, this is a mambo file, but this I what I’m going to, this is I guess our point, let’s zoom out. This is all the different features that they’re offering at UI. You’re saying, “It’s great but if they could come up with one phrase that encompasses all of this, that positions them as the one guys who do whatever that is, then they’ll own that space. Their competition won’t be able to compete with them because they invented this phrase, and they invented it around the things they understood their customers wanted, and maybe their page would be a lot simpler.

Sean: And ultimately they’re also able to create a new market segment. That is the key thing, right? There may be a competitor that comes along, and we’ll talk about that a little bit later. There might be a competitor that comes along and says that they do the same thing, but you’ve created the space in a potential customer’s mind that with Higher One, I’m looking for refund management, and refund management means these things. So as more and more people start looking for that, you’re going to get the bulk of that business.

It helps you separate from things that might be out there in the past that, as an entrepreneur, I hear this from entrepreneurs on the investment side all the time. Who competes with you? No one is exactly like us. But then, as an investor, you’ll think of seven things that are kind of like them. This is the way as an entrepreneur you can set yourself outside of that. You can say, there are substitutes, and there are other ways you might accomplish some of the things we do, but the comprehensive package of what we do is called this, and there is no one else that does this.

Andrew: I see, and that’s what we are trying to do here with positioning?

Sean: Yes.

Andrew: All right, let’s go on to the big board here. There’s one other thing that I think we should add on here. You think we need to make it grandma simple? [??] right on the fly. What do you mean by that? What does that mean?

Sean: I think at a certain level, you’ve got to be able to describe what you do. Sometimes your grandma might need to be a little technical depending on what you’re selling, right? So if you’re selling a solution to help people optimize their cloud utility spending, let’s say. There’s a certain point where technical language comes into it. But at the end of the day you want something that, when you do describe it in one to two sentences, if you’re talking to your grandmother she will get a good sense of what you’re doing. There are times where I will hear an entrepreneur talk about what they are doing and after three minutes, maybe I’m just dumb, but I’ll say I don’t understand what you’re doing. That description sounds like a lot of technical terms, or worse, a lot of buzzwords that when combined together, it’s not clear what you do.

Andrew: I have a hard time with that as an interviewer on Mixergy. Sometimes, people will tell me really long descriptions of what there company does, and as an interviewer I’m supposed to quickly decide whether for some reason I wasn’t paying attention to his answer, or if it’s really tough to understand it. So let me take a step back and ask him to really simplify it. You know what, I think I’m going to use that phrase, keep it grandma simple for me. Tell me, in language my grandmother would understand, what you do. So give me an example. How did Mark Zuckerberg of Facebook do this?

Sean: I don’t think Mark gets enough credit for being a great communicator. I remember seeing an early interview with him, I think Facebook had a couple hundred thousand users and he was on CNN. They say, Mark tell us about your great social network. And he responds back along the lines of, “Well, Facebook is a social utility. We’re creating a platform to help people enrich the way they interact with their social circle.” So, by coining that phrase, and I think Facebook, to some degree, still uses that. They will talk about Facebook as a social utility. While at the time the pundits, the news media, people in the tech community were all talking about social networks. It’s a subtle differentiation, but if you look at a lot of Facebook’s success, it actually is driven by the fact that it is a utility. It’s something that people use to interact more with their friends, and their network. They are able to use it to enhance their lives.

Andrew: I see. All right people all already know what a utility is, so he used language that even my grandmother would understand if she were still alive. And of course by saying social utility as opposed to social network he was separating himself from all those Myspaces and other sites, and that’s what you’re saying he’s doing?

Sean: Yes, and it’s interesting that you still see people launching things, and they’ll call it a social network for X. Maybe they should adopt the idea of being a social utility, and think about what they’re doing through those social connections, how they add value.

Andrew: Or come up with another phrase, and own that instead of being a social network. You say that AOL does this well? You tell me, well or poorly? This is another one, I have to skim this better. I’m going to put the camera back on you while I put it into Skitch [SP], this incredible utility.

Sean: Well, I think AOL is an interesting company to talk about. They’ve obviously been in the news recently. You’ve got a company that was, early on in the evolution of the consumer internet, was really successful. And now, it seems they’ve kind of lost their way over time. I think, one of the big problems, I mean I have no relation to AOL at all, I have some friends that AOL ventures which functions pretty separately, but they I have a hard time understanding what AOL is about and what they want to be good at. Do they want to be the content company on the internet? I think now they’re talking about commerce initiatives.

It’s just unclear, so, I think, even for a large company, having clarity of positioning of what your company is and what it’s about is really important. So Facebook, great example: social utility; that drives what they do. Google: organizing the world’s information; that drives what they do. Now it seems that Google does all sorts of different things, but, I think, as you look back at where they focus their efforts and where they’re most successful, it comes down to that organizing the world’s information and making it useful.

Andrew: All right. So, keep it simple. In fact, I’m looking even at the upper right, upper left; excuse me, of their site, near the logo. I was zooming in trying to figure out: do they have anything on there that maybe we can use that explains how they position it?

Sean: I think even if you go to about AOL, the language they use to describe the company is, kind of, non-specific corporate bureaucratic who-ha.

Andrew: I see.

Sean: Which is sad, because AOL is a great brand and they have a lot of resources. And, I think, there’s a lot of opportunity for them to take those assets, package them in a compelling way, and drive a business that could be growing. Content is obviously making quite a bit of a comeback. AOL has a lot of proprietary content. They do have advertising technology. They have relationships. And it’s just a matter of: how do you want to put that together in a way that’s unique and positions AOL as something… I think they get stuck in being or wanting to… A lot of the tech companies, I think, at a certain point start looking at; they have a little bit of envy of other large tech companies. So Yahoo wants to be Google or Google is worried and wants to be Facebook. I think, that’s sometimes where they loose their moxie a little bit. So coming back and refocusing could be valuable. If I was running AOL, that’s what I would do, but I’m not.

Andrew: Let’s do one other one and then I’m going to ask you about that sound in the background and where you are, because I’m sure the people in my audience are looking over your shoulder trying to figure out where you are today.

Sean: Yeah, sorry about that.

Andrew: We’ll get back to that in a minute, let’s do one other big idea here and that’s: you say, “Slug it out.” Slug it out with whom?

Sean: I think that a lot of entrepreneurs are scared of competition. And to some degree, I mean, look; if you can be in a market and you can dominate and be the only player, that’s wonderful. Generally, if you’re going into a market that’s big already or it’s growing quickly, you’re not going to be the only player. And if you’re able to be in a market situation which ideal, which is a new market and having multiple players in the market can actually be beneficial. So if you and a competitor are both using language that is creating this new market, it’s something that when either of you are calling potential customers, they’ve never heard of a product like that before, it’s working for both of you. So if you are able to execute better, you’ll win the majority of that business.

What will happen is your competitor will call on someone; they’ll go… so say when Hire One was starting to grow there was a Hire Two. And when Hire One would call on a school and the school would get interested in refund management, they would probably do a web search for refund management. They would find Hire Two and then as they were doing a request for proposals or they were deciding which direction they wanted to go, Hire Two would also get an opportunity. And the fact that they’re two companies, so they might’ve said, ‘This refund management thing sounds interesting, but I don’t know. Maybe it’s too ahead of the curve. Maybe it’s too new for me.’ But the fact that there might be another company might actually speed up the decision making process and help saturate the market faster.

Andrew: So having a competitor might even make it easier for you to get business because then people aren’t trying to figure out; should they use you or not, does it make sense to even consider this category or not. You’ve moved their decision making process from “Should we do this or not?” to “Should we pay these guys or those guys?” and that’s what you’re looking for.

Sean: Right, so in that case, you have a 50% chance and maybe in the other case you have 50% chance too, they either do nothing or they buy you. And maybe you think that’s better. But, I think what we find out is that in the first scenario when there’s a 50% chance, there might be five people that you’re getting a 50% chance at. And the other scenario, there might be two companies looking at zero or one. So you might get two sales, or zero. In the other case you get two and a half.

Andrew: These guys did something to you back when you were at Hire One. Do you remember what did they do?

Sean: Yeah. I still dislike Sallie Mae. So there, an evil company. At a certain point we got called by their core data group wanting to talk about a partnership or an acquisition. And so we signed NDAs with them. We had conversations. And they’ll claim oh, there was this business unit that we weren’t talking to that decided they wanted to launch a product to compete with you. So anyways, that’s what they did. The funny thing is, after we went public. They launched again product to try and compete with us. Almost trying to act as though it was a new product and they were going to kill us because they’re Sallie Mae and they’re big and it was funny, some of the analysts actually believed them.

The net of that was that they helped us, and they continued to help Hire One in that way. They go and say, we have a refund management product. Their product’s not comparable to Hire One. Hire One has a number of patents also protecting its products. And, they end up introducing schools who may not be looking at the time, to start looking. And then Hire One wins the majority of those deals.

Andrew: I see.

Sean: In the beginning, my reaction was those F’ing bastards. They’re one, trying to steal my language. And two, they’re going to go out and compete with us after having talked with us after having talked to us under NDA about our products and services. But you know, we quickly started to realize that they were doing us a favor. They were getting more customers to start looking at something in our market, before they may have otherwise.

Andrew: I see. All right. So they walk in the door, and they can open more doors than you could. And they explain what this process is and people go online and do some research. And they have conversations with their colleagues. And with other schools. And they discover, well Sallie Mae is okay. But there’s a way better company to deal with when it comes to refund management, and that’s when they find out about Hire One. Sallie Mae opened the door, and you guys closed the sale. That’s idea when you’re positioning and you’ve created the category and you own it. It’s okay when someone else comes in and uses your language and pretends that they’re in your world.

Sean: Yeah. And it’s, I would say it’s okay when you’re in the sort of new market scenario. I mean, I think if you’re product is an add-on to something that’s out there already, it can be challenging. Because the company that already owns the distribution, is able to add that feature and immediately distribute it to people. So you want to be careful. I mean you can’t assume that because you named a cool new feature in a unique way, that you have this sort of competitive positioning that’s helpful. But if it’s actually a full product and it’s a new market where most people consider buying a whole product. It’s not adding a feature to something they previously had. Then you get this benefit of when someone else comes into the market saying that they do the same thing. Then people are making that buying decision. They don’t just go, oh well it’s easier to just add this onto Sallie Mae because let’s just flip this switch. They go, this is a new product that I’m buying, do I want to choose Sally May, do I want to choose Hire One? They both said they have refund management. And then, they evaluate the solutions head to head. In which case usually, the start-up often wind. Because start-ups move faster. They tend to be more innovative. Their technology tends to be built on kind of newer underlying technologies.

Andrew: Right.

Sean: So, it’s a good place to be as a start-up.

Andrew: All right. Before we move on to this next one, to spying. Where are you? Usually when I talk to people, they are in an office they try to duplicate my background where possible. You’re not in an office today, where are you?

Sean: One of the things I did as we were lucky enough that Hire one was successful is, I bought a vacation house down in Key West, Florida. So, I try to spend some time down here. So that’s where I am today.

Andrew: I see.

Sean: Don’t worry tomorrow, I’m flying to Maryland, and Saturday I fly to Silicon Valley. I feel like I spend more time on an airplane than down here. But, at least I have a little bit of time to work. When it’s 80 degrees down here in January, and 40 or 50 in DC. It’s a good place to be.

Andrew: Yeah, I was going to say, I’m in DC and I’ve been cooped up in this office all day, I thought boy it’s nice out, it’s that nice out there today? And I discovered, no, you’re not anywhere near DC.

Sean: Well, you’ve got to come down and visit here. One of the things I try to do is actually get you know, entrepreneurs and friends down here for vacation. It’s actually a fun place to get to know people better. So, the people I get to know in the tech industry. You kind of get to know people in a kind of shallow way. Something that’s been important to me over time has been to build real relationships with people. And so, “Hey, look, if you’re coming to Florida, come down to Key West for a couple of days.” Go out on the water, play a round of golf.

You actually get to know people really well, and that’s ultimately where you figure out if you do want to do business together over time.

Andrew: First of all, thanks for the invitation. Yes, I’m in. And two, are you getting to meet, to connect with and really get. . . Oh, what am I doing? I’m trying to figure out, are you hobnobbing now with a higher class of entrepreneur, a higher class of person, now that you’ve done so well?

Sean: Yeah, I don’t know. I kind of don’t like that idea.

Andrew: I don’t either. I’m trying to come up with a way to class up what I was meaning.

Sean: I’m not sure if they’re a higher or lower class of. . . I mean, when you’ve been lucky enough to have success, it gives you some weight when you meet other people who are successful.

The way I think of it is that everyone’s kind of poised for that success. One of the guys I’ve known since his sophomore year at Yale is Ben Silverman, who founded Pinterest. Biggest investing mistake of my life was passing when he was raising his seed around and we talked about it.

I’ve known that Ben was going to be a great entrepreneur since then. He won the business playing competition with a pretty cool idea back then and it was kind of a matter of time, right? But look how fast it’s happened. I mean, Pinterest was going along and they were trying to figure things out. They got it and they went from to kind of interesting to behind Facebook and Twitter, in terms of another social utility or picture sharing.

Andrew: Yeah.

Sean: I actually don’t think of it that way. It’s cool to hang out with Aaron at Living Social, who is founder and CTO, but it’s just as cool to talk to the entrepreneurs just starting out. They’re putting together their team. They’re scrapping together a little bit of money. I’m kind of egalitarian, maybe, in that way. I just like meeting interesting people who work hard.

Andrew: I know what you mean. That is the thing about this space. Anyone out of nowhere could suddenly be the guy.

Sean: Yeah.

Andrew: I’ve seen it happen via (?).

Sean: In the legal and banking world there’s this like, “Oh, that’s this big banker, or this big lawyer, or this big venture capitalist.” Entrepreneurs are scrappy and hardworking. I remember meeting Jay Walker who founded Priceline. The thing that stuck with me afterwards was that Jay had been really successful with Priceline. I think at the time he was worth hundreds of millions of dollars. He then went to being not worth hundreds of millions, back to hundreds of millions, but he talked about it. He’d started 11 companies. Priceline was the third successful one out of 11.

So, that’s the way it is with entrepreneurs. It’s not like people have the Golden Touch. You work hard. The business I’m running now we’re doing some things really well. We had some great early momentum. We also have a lot of things we’re trying to figure out. It’s a ton of hard work. It can be really stressful, but it’s also fun and invigorating. We believe in what we’re doing and think there’s a big opportunity.

Andrew: All right. Anta[SP], there it is by the way, Employee Insight. On to the big board. The next big idea is you want to spy on the response you get. You want to listen to your market feedback to see how you’re interpreted. Can you give me an example of that, just to help me understand what you mean by it?

Sean: Yeah. I’ll give you a great example with what we’re doing with Employee Insight. It’s different than what you and I talked about previously. We’ve had this idea which we want to build tools to help managers get the right person into the job and then help that person succeed over time.

Really, it’s about talent acquisition and management, but the tools are focused on things to help the manager. We built a hiring product. Our first product helps a manager make a better decision about who they’d want to hire based on gathering data about the position you’re hiring for and gathering data about the people who are applying and showing how those two datasets intersect, where the match is. This is on a dimension that predicts engagement. We’ve been talking to a lot of different potential customers about this product. We’ve signed up the New York Stock Exchange as a large initial customer. What happens is that when we go talk to. . .

We might get an intro to a COO of, let’s say, a growing technology company. We go talk to them. We show them the demo. They go, “This is awesome! Here, talk to HR,” because HR owns the hiring process.

Then when we’re demoing our product and showing it to HR, it’s not actually something that’s. . . It’s beneficial for HR in that in can give them a great to help their managers succeed in selecting the right candidate and doing better interviewing. Those are the things that our product enables. But, it’s not reducing the amount of work that HR has to do, it’s not a process efficiency tool, it’s not like a benefits administration package, or an application tracking system. That’s a piece of software; there’s a company Twilio that was just sold for a large amount of money. Twilio is an application tracking system. If you’re a recruiter, you need to track the various people in your pipeline; you need an applicant tracking system.

So, what we’ve learned over the last couple months of interacting with real potential customers is about our product positioning. We were initially really focused on being, “Hey, we’re an HR technology company and we built this cool HR technology,” and what we’re realizing is, we’re not HR technology. We don’t build something that helps the recruiter or the global head of HR or someone else there; the benefit does not accrue to them of implementing our product across the organization unless they care about helping their managers. If they’re really focused on increasing engagement and helping their managers to be better mangers, or reducing retention, then this can be a tool they can bring into their organization, but the users and the beneficiaries of the service are actually the mangers and the employees.

And so we’ve gotten that feedback through those direct interactions and starting to understand that. And so we’re starting to change both our positioning in terms of the way we talk about the product as well as actually both the manner in which we’re selling and pricing structures and such.

Andrew: Let me make sure I’m understanding this: you positioned yourself how before?

Sean: HR Technology.

Andrew: HR Technology. Then you went into the marketplace you looked at your customers, you talked to them, and you wanted to see how they were using the phrase “HR technologies” and what it made them do. And what it made them do was pass you on to someone else who was-

Sean: Essentially, we got HR making a buy/no buy decision because we’re calling ourselves HR technology.

Andrew: Right. You were watching how they were interacting with it, it wasn’t the right move, and instead you switch to…

Sean: We’ve had some success with that, we have customers, but what we realized is that we would get a stronger response from the actual managers who would use the product. So we’re switching to, I think we’re almost making it along the lines of social utility. We’re almost building a management utility. It’s a way to collect data about potential employees or current employees or the work you’re going to have them do and use that to make better hiring decisions…

Andrew: I see.

Sean: …better manage the people who currently work for you, do better task assignment, better performance reviews, etc. But it’s really a tool for that person doing the hiring decision to the day to day management of a team.

Andrew: Gotcha, OK. So that’s the big take-away that you want us to have: that we’re not going to nail that phrase as soon as we come up with it. It’s not going to be the perfect phrase.

Sean: I’m still searching for the right one, with [??], so any ideas, people can send them my way.

Andrew: But once we come up with one that we think works, that seems to hit all the right notes, take it out, talk to people using that phrase, see how people talk to you about that phrase, see how they interact with it among themselves and then you’ll know whether to adjust it or keep it.

Sean: Yup.

Andrew: How long did it take you at Hire One to come up with that phrase that you told us about earlier “Refund Management,” which seems like, two words, how tough could that be? How long did it take you to come up with that?

Sean: The brainstorming session to come up with it was probably half a day, but the process to get there was probably two and a half years, I would say.

Andrew: Because, you come up with an idea before, you test it, it doesn’t really work, you test another one, it sends you in a different direction… I see.

Sean: And also having those discussions with customers, potential customers, trying to understand, so until we had conceived what the product would be, and then you go talk to potential customers, you get someone who buys it, and then as they’re using it…Often you’ll sell something to someone and they’ll get something out of it that isn’t what you thought they would get out of it. And actually the interesting thing with employee insight now is that this kind of switching of thinking from providing a tool to HR to providing a tool to managers that HR may support actually has come from the HR leadership at the NY Stock Exchange.

As we’ve interacted with them and rolled out the product there, a lot of the feedback we get from them is how useful the product is for their managers. Not how useful it is for the recruiter or for the director of HR or global head of HR. They find it useful in that they believe that their job is to work with the line managers in that organization to help them succeed and help the employees succeed. And so, we thought, “OK we’re going to help you with a tool that on the hiring side helps you hire for fit. You’re going to hire more engaged employees, that’s what our product can do for you.”

Andrew: Yup.

Sean: And they said “We believe that. We’re excited about that, but what we’re really excited about is to be able to bring something to our manager to help them have more confidence in their hiring decisions, to improve their interviewing skills, etc.”

Andrew: All right. So let’s see where we are right now before we move on to the next one. Before we go to the next idea, I want to go through the ones that we already covered. First thing that we’re looking for is that pain point. What is it that’s frustrating them? We’re going to use that to position ourselves as a solution.

Then, once we find the pain, we want to keep our solution for it simple, so that anyone could understand what it is. Refund management makes sense. It’s two words and it’s easy to understand. Then, if someone comes into our space, once we’ve come up with that phrase, it’s OK to slug it out because we own it. We are the guys who are good at it.

Sometimes having them out in the marketplace just means that they’re going to open up doors for you or it means that you’re going to have someone to compare yourself against and come across looking better. Then we spy on response. We keep wanting to listen to see how people are using this phrase. Are they using it properly?

I’ve seen people A/B test it to see if it’s getting them the conversions they’re looking for. I see you, I’m spying on you by the way. I saw you nodding at that. That is a powerful way to do it.

Sean: Yeah.

Andrew: Now, we’ve found that phase, time to program what people say. What you’ve said about that is, at this point with this tactic, we’re providing case studies, and making sure that our evangelists use the vocabulary that we created, this common vocabulary.

Sean: Yeah. That’s really important.

Andrew: Can you give me an example?

Sean: That’s really, really important. What we were able to do at Hire One, you’ve got to have customers who love what you’re doing. Right? Then, the important thing is that they’re going to have opportunities to talk about your product and service to the marketplace. It might be a user. It might be an association meeting that they get invited to speak at. It might just be with their other colleagues. It might be they produce a case study that you put online.

The key thing there is in your marketing organization, to know that you have specific ways you want your customers talking about your product. Your customers will love you, and they’re going to be willing to talk about your product using that language, as long as you’re consistent about trying to coach them into it.

So, hey we’d love for you to talk about the success you’ve had. For instance, with Hire One, there’s an annual meeting called the National Association of College and University Business Officers. They have requests for proposals for speakers. Our early customers were leaders within that University Business Officer community, and they liked getting up and talking about innovative things they’ve done on their campus. So they would say to us, hey I’m going to apply to talk about Hire One at the next annual meeting.

We’d go, that’s awesome, we really appreciate that. As you’re putting it together can we take a look at it, because we have certain ways we like to talk about what we want to do and we’d love if you could talk about it in the same way so that people aren’t confused when they hear what you’re talking about and then…

Andrew: I see.

Sean: …we talk to them. Something like that, and people are very amenable to it. You’re not writing the presentation for the client. I mean certain clients might say, hey I’d love some help with graphic design or certain phrasing, but you’re saying, look it’s really important if you talk about it.

So if a school is going to talk and the business officer is going to give a discussion titled, How We Fixed Our Payments Problem, we might say, hey a great title might be, How Refund Management Has Solved My Payments Problem.

Andrew: I see.

Sean: That’s a useful suggestion, and you’d rarely get someone who goes, no I really don’t want to call it that.

Andrew: [laughing] What most people would do, what I would do, is I would say thank you for going and speaking. Let me know if you need anything. Do you need any images? Do my logo image in whatever format you’d like. Now what you’re saying if you have a vocabulary…

Sean: The interesting thing is most of the time in these sorts of conferences, you don’t actually get the opportunity to have your logo. So often it’s, you can talk about something you did but we won’t let you talk about the specific vendor. This is, again, the advantage of having a phrase that’s tied to your company, because the customer evangelist can go up there and say, how we solved our payments problem with refund management. They say, we looked, we chose a vendor, we can’t tell you who. If you want, talk to me afterwards and I’ll tell you who. Here’s what we did. Here’s what refund management was for us. Here’s the results we had, etc.

Never say Hire One’s name, but anyone who goes, oh this is interesting. I want to add refund management, Google’s refund management and they find Hire One.

Andrew: You know what? Let me do that right now.

Sean: I hope you still find Hire One.

Andrew: We’ll find out.

Sean: I haven’t worked there for a while.

Andrew: So I come from a conference, I’ve heard about this refund management. Yeah, there it is. Higher One is the first result, hence, so that’s what I end up looking at. That’s pretty cool, huh?

Sean: Yeah.

Andrew: Can people see that? Do I need to zoom in on that? Let me zoom in just in case. There it is, refund management. Hire One is number one right there. I also have a note here to talk about Sales Force under this topic? And specifically, what am I looking for here?

Sean: Sales Force has, under customers, see how they have a whole section? This is really interesting. On their homepage, one of their headers is customers. You click on it, and it basically takes you to something that is all customer success stories.

Andrew: I see.

Sean: It’s just really well done.

Andrew: Okay, and you’re saying we need to do the same thing. Let our customers evangelize on our behalf, and have them use the phrase and positioning that we’ve created for ourselves.

Sean: Yes.

Andrew: All right.

Sean: Yes, Sales Force does a really good job of this out of large successful enterprise companies. When I first found this, I thought this is a great model. If I were still at Hire One I would copy this to a large degree. I think they do a great job.

Andrew: All right. The final big idea, the final tactic, is measure. Measure our success by seeing if the industry is using our language to sell the product. That is how we’re measuring success. Are people using the language we’ve created for them?

Sean: Yes. A really interesting case study there, in an area people like to joke about, is daily deals. The idea of a daily deal has grown to where there are literally websites that are daily deal media. They are news about the daily deal industry.

Andrew: Yes, I hear you. This is daily deal media, again this is way too big. Here, let me shrink this up. What we did is, you gave us a list of sites that you wanted to talk about, we grabbed screen shots of them, and I should have asked for screen shots like this instead of the full page. See now I can zoom in. This is daily deal media, and they are using the phrase daily deal which means what?

Sean: I think consumers think of daily deal as I get something in my email every day with special deals that are low cost. Groupon and Living Social being the primary examples. That’s something where this kind of naming of what it is has helped any of the companies in this space. But again, it’s an example of who does it help the most? Well it helped the ones who were there first, that kind of created it. Groupon and Living Social.

Andrew: As opposed to group buying, which is a little confusing, or coupons. Daily deal is the way they have trained people to think about the space. You guys had that happen to you at Higher One right?

Sean: Yes. I think over time, bringing it back, the ultimate acknowledgement of that success is Wall Street analysts starting to talk about the marketplace and the terms that you created.

Andrew: So you start seeing reports that aren’t necessarily about you, but do include your language because you’ve trained them to think the way you wanted them to think.

Sean: Right.

Andrew: All right. So there they are, the big ideas. I’m going to bring it right back to this. We want to find that pain. We want to keep it so simple that even our grandmother can understand. It’s okay to have a competitor in there, you want to slug it out with them. You want to spy on the response to see how people are using and thinking about this phrase that you’ve created for them, and this positioning that you’ve created for them. You want to program what people say about you. If people are going to go speak at a conference, don’t just let them use whatever phrase comes to mind. If you can, ask them to use the phrase, and the positioning that you’ve created. Finally, the way to measure success here is to see if, and how other people are using the positioning that you’ve created for yourself. All right, anything else that I missed in here?

Sean: No, that’s it. This is something that is hard to do, but when you do it right it creates a big advantage for the company. It’s something I spend time on with most of my Angel investments on actually trying to think these things through. I tend to bring it up a lot. Maybe some of the CEOs and investors are like, Sean give it a break, we’ll figure that out eventually. But for the ones who get it right, it does provide an advantage.

Andrew: Yes, what’s the advantage? Let’s be extremely clear about what people get if they go through everything that we’ve just taught them, because you’ve just gave them a lot to do. Especially when you’re saying that the hit idea that you came up with at Hire One took you half a day, a lot more time than people are willing to commit too. And even fewer people willing to commit to the two and a half years that it takes to go through all the iterations to get to that half day insight that changes everything for them. But if they do all that work, what’s in it for them? What are the advantages?

Sean: One, you’re the leader in a marketplace you’ve created. So, if you have a new and growing market, you’re seen as the leader because the language leads back to you. That gives you a competitive advantage in that, even your competitors start adopting your language. Anyone who’s looking to buy that solution is going to find you. You’re also able to reinforce your positioning with your customers over time by getting them to use your language.

So, it’s about the mindset that it’s a new market and that this is a product that someone needs versus a feature or an addition to something that was already there, better than sort of solution so it helps you be a new market product rather than a better than. It gives you a competitive advantage versus anyone who’s following on your heels because you’ve actually, I mean, you set the rules of the game, in a sense and so that gives you an advantage.

And then it’s self, there’s a bit of a kind of pseudo-network effect in that over time, the more people who use that language, the stronger that competitive position it puts you in and you’re able to disperse that and competitors are coming in second, kind of have to use your language, to some degree.

They can try to create something else but you’ve already created the [??] for people to look for a certain name solution.

Andrew: Makes me feel like with Mixergy. I shouldn’t keep saying I’m an interviewer because when you say you’re an interviewer, people keep thinking “Oh, yeah. Like Larry King” or “Oh, yeah” like whoever is it they think of and then suddenly I’m the poor version of the guy who they think so highly of that that’s who popped into their minds, as opposed to coming up with my own language and then if anyone else comes online and does what I’m doing it’s, they’re the cheap imitation of Andrew.

Sean: Yeah, I mean, I think you’re kind of the, I don’t know, I don’t know. I won’t have a great answer. I need half a day.

I mean, you could be that anywhere interviewer, right? I mean, the big difference is you’ve got me, I’m here in Key West and we’re having this conversation. You could be having a conversation with Mark Zuckerberg tomorrow and, you know, who’s in Palo Alto, with a Chinese entrepreneur in Hong Kong and you bring those together effortlessly and make them available to a broader audience.

So if you can capture something that describes that, then that’s what you are.

Andrew: That’s what I need to work on. It does take some time.

All right. I’ll come up with a few ideas and we’ll see how they work. I’ll test them out in the interviews and people won’t even know that I’m using them but we’ll see what their response is to it.

Sean: Really good idea.

Andrew: Sean Glass, thank you for doing this course with me. The site, if anyone wants to go and check it out and keep an eye on how the positioning of his company is coming along…

Sean: It’s going to change soon.

Andrew: It’s going to change soon. EZmployeeinsight.com looks like this today and when you get to it, it might look different. It might have a different explanation of what it does.

Thank you for doing this program and thank you all for being a part of it and for watching it and I’m looking forward to your emails about how you’re using what you learned here today. Bye.

Master Class: How to get your first 927 customers
(Even if you struggle getting users)
Taught by Josh Ledgard of Kickoff Labs

Report issues here

Master Class:
927 Users

About the course leader

Josh Ledgard, co-founder of Kickoff Labs which helps companies find more customers by generating word-of-mouth through stunning landing pages.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Quora

Bear Naked Granola

UserVoice

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to get your first 927 users.The course is led by Josh Ledgard, co-founder of Kickoff Labs which helps companies find more customers by generating word-of-mouth through stunning landing pages. In fact let me bring up their home page there so you get a sense of what they do. There’s the business. Here I am, Andrew Warner. I’ll help to facilitate this session. I’m the founder of Mixergy where proven founders, like Josh, teach.Right. Josh, we’ve a big agenda here which I’ll go over in a moment but first I know it’s on the audience’s mind, They’re trying to get a sense of who you are. Who you are is a guy who’s done really well getting users, but you also struggled like many people in the audience might be struggling right now to get users. Do you remember what it was like back in those struggling days?

Josh: Yeah, I mean I don’t think our story is uncommon, so my co-founder and I, we’re both engineering backgrounds, technical, you know we had all the background in developing a product and everybody sort of assumes that building a product’s the hard part and then we made the mistake that a lot of people make. and you say “If I build it, they will come” and we built a product to generate leads, ironically enough, and we put up a landing page and we’d done some little bit of marketing around that page and we generated some leads but in the first couple months after we launched it was more like crickets. We had maybe two to ten people in each month that we could say that we hadn’t sort of personally poked and prodded to get onto the site,

Andrew: And here you are in the business of generating leads, and you’re struggling to get leads

Josh: Yeah.

Andrew: And, did you, were you still working your full time job and this was a side business or at the time had you already quit and launched into this full time.

Josh: No. We had quit and we were eating into our savings. We had both set aside and said we got some bufferings, we knew we weren’t going to be successful overnight but, you know, at that point you’re just watching this money you’ve put in the savings account go tick, tick,

Andrew: Yeah.

Josh: You know, down and you’re getting up against a wall saying “If we don’t turn this around we have to consider doing more consulting or look for other jobs while we figure something else out.”

Andrew: Right, and you did figure it out. I mean, none of us have it all figured out

Josh: Yeah.

Andrew: …completely, of course, but the reason that you’re here is because you have an understanding of how to get users, how to get how to get leads, where are you guys today after using what you are about to teach the audience?

Josh: Yeah, I mean, so what we did is we set a goal for ourselves and we said we wanted to get 5,000 people to evaluate the service to become customers atone point of our service and we passed that in between the last time we chatted and now, and not only did we get, within the same day actually, we passed not only 5,000 users on the site, but we passed, we were about lead generation, we generated a quarter of a million leads for our customers.

Andrew: Before, let… That’s a quarter of a million leads for your customers. So not only have you gotten customers for yourself, but you are helping them and I should say me too as one of your customers, get leads. A quarter of a million is huge, okay.

Josh: Yeah. And so like, you used our product and you had your own ways of marketing it and, we help the customers get the leads and on the day that we did that, it was just amazing to me, because we passed those things, and I wasn’t stressed out like I was in my full time job. I actually had taken a half day to spend some time with my wife and my kids and I got the email notification that we passed it, and I was like, “Wow, this is really awesome.” I only want to go onwards and upwards to 25,000 customers. You know, two million leads generated for those customers, so that’s where we are, you know. It’s kind of uplifting and we go on from here.

Andrew: Right on. It is exciting when you start to feel that customers are coming in. I remember for myself, the first few hundred customers, the first few hundred users even to my site were painful and I was doubting myself and unsure of where I was. But once I got the first few hundred, the next thousand were easy.

Josh: Yeah.

Andrew: And then the next thousand after that easy. And then you start to feel, “All right. Now I know what to do and I’m hungry for more and more and more” and that’s what you’re doing.

Josh: Yeah.

Andrew: And I should say the way that we use your service we use Kickoff Labs here at Mixergy to create quick landing pages for ideas that we have or we did it for this course when we originally did this course live. I used Kickoff Labs. I created a quick landing page that allowed me collect email addresses of people that wanted to show off, show up at the live session and what I love about Kickoff Labs, one of the things that I’m especially exited about is after people gave me their email address and said yes I want to register and show up live you said to them, look if you, if you help promote this event you get a bonus and I of course came up with a bonus but your software enabled me to give that bonus and that’s what, that’s what really encouraged people who registered to spread the word and bring in more leads and more leads and more leads. That’s the idea behind Kickoff Labs.

So, you guys have done it and the audience says OK you have authority to teach this but what about me, I’m sure if everyone in the audience is thinking and so, don’t worry guys we have of course a packed course that’s all about you and I want to point out a few items here that you want to think about, that you â?¦ that I hope you pay special attention to. Which is how he, what he did before he launched that helped build up his customer base afterwards and that’s this item right here.

Then, I also want to take you, I want to also encourage you to pay attention to this section right here which is I call bribes but it’s encouragement. What do you do to get customers to, what, what did I write there? What bribes can do for, can do for you lets get right of the typo. What bribes can do for you? Typos not withstanding, that’s an especially powerful thing that when you discover that you’re going to see what happened to us which is our customers brought in more customers which is much better than me having to struggle to get more customers all the time. All right so, want to jump right into it?

Josh: Yeah let’s just jump into it.

Andrew: All right, first big idea is what do to before you launch? What should we do before we launch?

Josh: Yep. I mean the, the biggest things so I, I can say is put up a page and, you know, pull people a page and get sign ups, I don’t think we use that effectively like I said in the like, like in the intro. We actually have an email that goes out now as one of our, as one of our [??] emails that talks about how badly we used our own service. And . . .

Andrew: Well what did you, what did you, what did you guys do?

Josh: So we, we set up a landing page and we, we did a little bit of promotion, you know, we kind of went out to twitter and Facebook sort of the big popular networks and, you know, Google plus and said, hey, hey, you know, here it is, we wrote a couple blog entries and pointed at it and, you know, the tactics that we get thru are going to call out why those are big, you know, mistakes, you know, before, before you launch those are just the wrong things to do. The thing that we did that helped us before a launch was we did, we did start going into doing a lot of market validation with customers before we launched.

Now, it didn’t helped with, it didn’t helped as much as with the marketing and I can talk about how we can help with the marketing but the validation we did before made sure that when we started to get customers that we were on to the right, to the right product and the right idea and so we weren’t, weren’t as worried about that so, you know, one of the things that we did before we launched was we had this idea that we were going to make it really easy to put up a website that collected email addresses and enabled, you know, potentially enabled newsletters, we didn’t offer that right when we launched but just able to collect the, the newsletters, four newsletters for, for our customers we said, you know who really needs this, who needs this are all these people without websites who are, you know, maybe micro printers, or whatever your, your word for them is, is of the day.

But people that are advertising today’s on Craigslist and they said I have a service and I want to render it but they don’t look credible because they don’t have a website, they don’t, you know, email their customers, they don’t work via email we said if we just made it simple enough for these people to use then we’d be really on to something so I started calling them up thru Craigslist and I said here’s, here’s, you know, our service we can help you, we, here’s a service, you have a dog walking . . .

Andrew: This is one of the kind, this is the kind of service . . .

Josh: . . . [??] . . . person we called this and we’re a person that we called and said hey you know, your ad would look a lot credible if you had a webpage you, you, you could email your customers and they would flip the call back on us. They either, you know, didn’t want the, the service or they’d say “You know, I need a full website, I need a blog, I need a, you know, five different pages”. They have it in their head that they need this, you know, 3 to 5,000 dollar, you know, website customize word press thing and after you hear that enough times you realize that this is not the market, market were after for. Not only did they, you know, the people who didn’t want it don’t have the money to spend on it.

Andrew: Right.

Josh: And then, then not only that, but they, you know, the people that do think to see the value in it had been sold already on a, on a higher price concept and so they actually start pitching us say, “Oh you guys do websites, you can do our website” and that just wasn’t, you know, something we were invested in doing.

Andrew: I see so the whole idea of, of giving them quick landing pages that allowed them to, to be quick web pages where their users could come in and register, lost on them completely it wasn’t the right market.

Josh: Yeah, you’re, you’re part tied, at, at the time your more tied to the idea of calling it one page sites or one pagers and just that was all a lot of businesses needed. I still think that’s true, I just don’t think they get it and I don’t think they’re quite there yet so whether the markets not ready for it or maybe they’ll never get it, I don’t know but it probably won’t be us servicing that need. Somebody else can go after that market.

Andrew: All right, so that’s a big mistake that a lot of entrepreneurs I know make, that they struggle, they struggle, they struggle. They can’t figure out why they’re not getting users and it turns out for many of them that it’s that they’re going after the wrong users, the people who are never going to buy no matter how good they are at pitching, no matter how shiny their web page looks, no matter how hard they work and how many self help books they read, they’re not going to be able to convert these people because they’re the wrong people. You can’t sell a bicycle to a fish.

Josh: Exactly.

Andrew: And in this case, you can’t sell a quick landing to page to a dog walker. So then, what did you do? What should we do in that situation?

Josh: And so what we started doing that was a lot more effective and it’s still is effective for us today is really just going after and marketing to, once we realized that that wasn’t going to work and we figured out from talking to enough people, oh, OK, what we’re good for is these landing pages. There’s a market for landing pages. There’s a lot of places where people discuss landing pages out there and so we started actually just going and having conversations on one of the biggest places was Kora [SP], so if you look at Kora you can drill down into web pages and the specific sub topic of landing pages and right there, you know, that was just one screen shot of one day.

There are 18 open questions of people asking questions about landing pages and there’s probably, you know, hundreds and hundreds of answered questions in there. So we just started helping out these people without selling our services and just started answering questions on Kora and you know, I just started signing things, Josh, Founder of Kickoff Labs, we make stunning landing pages. And those answers started driving back traffic to what was at the time our product but what we’ve seen successful customers do of our own who are building successful landing pages, you can drive the traffic back to a landing page and convert them before you launch.

Andrew: So…

Josh: Yeah, what?

Andrew: No, no. You go ahead, sorry, I don’t want to talk all over you. I know last time you and I recorded this, when we did it live, I was talking over you and I want to be especially careful not to do it now.

Josh: Oh yeah, no problem. And so we built up ourselves an authority within these niche communities so when I talked in the beginning I told what we did wrong before we do it and this is something I learned from watching our own customers who in a lot of cases are smarter at marketing than we are. Was that building this authority within niche communities is far more powerful sometimes, or a lot of time, that trying to do it within Facebook or within Twitter because your sort of shouting to a crowd on Facebook and Twitter, if all you do is you use that to market your product.

But if you find where your customers are hanging out and where they’re having discussions, whether that be business forums or in this case a niche community like Kora is a great place to start. I always tell people to start and look for communities there. Get involved. You can see I am still one of the top answerers in this space. I still go and I answer questions in this space and that drives, probably at this point about 15 to 20% of our upgrades come from the hour or two a week we spend in these niche communities like this.

Andrew: So what do you say to an entrepreneur who’s watching this who says, I need thousands of people, I need millions of people, it’s not going to scale for me to sit on Kora and answer questions and get a dozen people a week. It’s not going to scale, it’s not going to let me get to these big numbers.

Josh: Yeah, so I think, I have to things to say to that. One is that I think there are a segment of celebrity entrepreneurs who can put stuff out there and they can instantly get 10,000 people to try out anything they do. I think 99% of people out there that are either thinking about starting a business or are starting a business don’t fit into that category. They’re not going to get themselves on Tech Crunch on day one when they open the doors or before they open the doors. And so people have to get in the mindset of forget about 10,000, focus on the first 100 and then focus on the first 1,000. If they happen quickly, it happens quickly.

Our method has been to do these investments that pay off over time too because I haven’t gone for three weeks, I should, I should, I don’t think I’ve gone for three weeks back to Kora, but the investment is paying off long term. So, you know, a couple weeks ago I answered, spent an hour and that just keeps coming back because people come to the popular questions and they see the answer and they go back. So it’s just as effective as sort of looking at SCO and doing link building, you know, with SCO saying how are you getting more links back to your site? Accept you know, you can place the links out there when you’re just starting out.

Andrew: And especially for this stage of the conversation. We’re talking about before you even launch. It helps you figure out if you’re talking to dog walkers or marketers. Dog walkers who don’t need your product, marketers who understand and want more of it.

Josh: Exactly. It’s the investment not just for marketing to get 1,000 customers. I guess that it’s for helping validate what you’re after. When I had these conversations in Cora and people would upvote my answer, it validates that, A, I know what I’m talking about, and B, I can probably sell to these people, because they’re getting right along with it. They’re not disagreeing, saying, “No, I couldn’t use a service like that,” or “No, I wouldn’t want something like that.”

Andrew: All right. On to the next big idea, which is to know where to pitch to get social proof. Where do we get social proof?

Josh: This is something that we’re going to assume you’ve done some initial marketing before you’ve launched, that you’ve gotten, even in our case, the five to 10 people, as depressing as it was. Within the first couple months, we worked really hard because in a couple of your courses, people have mentioned how important it is to have social proof. It’s true. No one wants to feel like they’re the guinea pig. No customer wants to feel like they’re first and that no one else has done it. At the time, we couldn’t brag and say, “10,000 customers, used by Microsoft, used by Dell, Intel,” or whatever else we could say.

Andrew: Is that, by the way, who is using your product now?

Josh: I made some of those names up. We’ve had people with those addresses, but . . .

Andrew: You had had big companies use your product. In the beginning, you couldn’t do that. You couldn’t say that because you didn’t have them.

Josh: I didn’t have them, but I had small people who were using it. What works well with small people . . . Small people, it sounds insulting. I don’t mean it that way. We did have some customers using the product that liked it, and we mined those first five, 10, 20 people for quotes really hard. We just contact them and say, “Hey, do you like the product? Would you be willing to say something about it to our other potential customers?” At least, that gave us useful quotes we could use. We were then able to go and fill up the home page with five quotes. The instant we did that on the home page, we went from, I think, a two or 3% conversion rate to signing up to a seven or an 8% conversion rate, whether the home page was just our own feature explanation versus essentially filled with quotes.

It was an amazing shift, and it clued me in, really validated the power. You can have people tell you how important social proof is, but when you see the numbers, it really sinks in. You say, “Wow”. With these quotes, that’s starting to build on that first 20 people. Then, the quotes helped us get to 100 really quickly because our conversion rate went up. Whenever we got someone to the site, they were much more likely to sign up, they were much more likely to become a customer.

Andrew: Can you tell us how you got those first quotes? Give us an example. I’ve got here Elizabeth’s story. Do you want to tell us that one?

Josh: I sort of believe that even if you are not targeting nation wide, multinational, or world wide service, if you can’t win a local market where you are in, how are you going to win a national market? I’ve heard lots of stories about people. The founder, he sells BARE Granola. It wasn’t in nationwide stores. He just went to his local Whole Foods and started pitching people in front of the Whole Foods to buy his granola product. I said, “I need to do the same thing for marketers that are looking.”

I looked for networking events, start-up pitch events, because our product can obviously used for new companies. I went to as many of those pitch events as I could to work on the pitch. We did a couple of pitch competitions, one of them we one. The winning pitch was, I gave the intro of our product, pretty much what you said in the beginning, which was 10 seconds out of three minutes. For the rest of the three minutes, to sell what we were doing, I read customer quotes from the first few people that we’d gotten using the product. I said, “We’re focused on customers. This is what our customers say about us.” That was the winning pitch. It just builds on itself.

From there, that quote led to me meeting Elizabeth Case, who was a marketing professional in the Seattle area. She used our product and had great success. She linked back to us on the web site. It’s just this cycle of as many links back you can get. I literally asked for it. People often forget, you have to ask for things if you want them from customers. I said, “Hey, if you like our service, can you give me a quote and could you link back to us on your web site?” It took me 30 seconds to make that request. I get the link back.

Her site is not Tech Crunch by any means, but having this out there is proof, it validates people are willing to use the product and people are willing to stand behind it with their name and say, “I believe in this product, it helped me,” so to summarize, just directly ask those first 20 customers for quotes and then use them, parlay them into more quotes and more links back to the site because you have more social proof and social proof builds on itself. Does that make sense?

Andrew: Absolutely, there we go, yes, so the answer that I had up on the board earlier, where the pitch is, you’re saying pitch as many places as you can and not only pitch and get people to help you pitch, get them to give you quotes like the one that we saw up there from Elizabeth Case (SP).

Josh: Yep.

Andrew: Eventually you get to a place like this where you have a collection of customer testimonials.

Josh: Yep, you could just say a great collection of quotes. We have a document with hundreds of customer quotes at this point that we can pull and reuse and put to whatever campaign we need, so if I have somebody who’s making a landing page about musicians, I have a quote about that now.

Andrew: Right.

Josh: So I can just reuse it, and having that library really helps over time when you start saying, ‘OK, we’re going to get into another vertical, do we have a quote that is social proof for this vertical?’ Yeah, it helps tremendously.

Andrew: All right, so let’s go on then to the next big idea which is, who to market to when you have no one, and really at this point, you have some people. It might feel like no one compared to this big aspiration you had when you started your business, but you’ve pitched to people individually, then you’ve leveraged your success stories to pitch to a bigger audience and close more sales, and now you feel maybe a little like you have no one, but you know what, you’re starting to really build a user base. What happens next, who do we pitch to?

Josh: I think users, you feel like you have people. It’s at that point, no revenue, you feel like you have no one, but so basically you realize that one of these mistakes made before we launched was that we were pitching to our audience so frequently on line, on line pitching, we were pitching to our audience and we didn’t have an audience. We started a blog, but nobody reads a new startup’s blog and even if you get yourself into Hacker News, for example, and you get promoted up, Hacker News’ people don’t buy anything. They’re not the people who go and buy products, especially ones like ours.

So we started, first thing is just from talking to our first customers, knowing more about them, where did they hang out. We found a lot of them hung out on Tech Crunch, so the first thing that we did was we started leaving comments on Tech Crunch stories, just one or two. It’s not a huge time investment. Again, it’s like if you spend an hour or two a week on [??] and an hour or two a week on Tech Crunch, I’m talking about four hours a week now. We made a couple of comments at first, just to get people pulled back to the site, which a comment can balloon up into something bigger, so the screen shots I think you have is a comment we turned into Tech Crunch, turned into not just multiple paying users came out of this comment, within the time spent to leave the comment, so I spent maybe 10, 15 minutes thinking about writing the comment and replying to it. For that 10 or 15 minutes, I know because we used tracking for this, we’re looking at referrals and measuring things constantly, which I don’t talk about, but I think is really important for people to do.

We know that we got five or six paying customers out of this. In addition to the five or six paying customers, when you zoom out, it’s a person who wrote a blog entry about our service which is just SEO gold. The more people you can get to write a review, a blog entry about your service, the better off you are and so from this is not only a big believer in reuse if you get the sense from talking to me, so from this I got paying customers from the comment, I got the blog entry which then helps for SEO and reviews, and then from his blog I get quotes because I can extract quotes from the blog post and use them on our website, so I get even more social proof from doing it.

Andrew: So when you’re small and you don’t have a huge audience yet, the thing to do is to look for people who have those audiences, who have existing audiences, to leverage them is what you’re saying, and in this case, you’re showing even a small attempt at that, which is the comment on Tech Crunch, ends up leading to big things which is more users, more customers and reviews here.

Josh: It just multiplies and I think I had a couple of other recommendations I have for people are, that have worked for us in the last few months is that I would have started way sooner if I was doing this again, was it’s hard to get a guest blog post on a more popular blog. So you know to get a writer at Mashable or Tech Crunch to write about you. But what’s easier is to look at what other products your customers use and get posts on those blogs. So, you know, it’s really paid off for us to look and say, hey, you know, a lot of our customers were using visual website optimizers so I contacted him after hearing his interview on Mixergy. So, listen to Mixergy and find people to contact.

I contacted him and I said, hey, do you mind if we do a guest blog post on your blog. I think your audience would really dig our tool and vice versa. I know our audience was already using his tool from talking to customers and so those posts, like other companies, like the ones that, you know, we know our audience are using like visual website optimizer, like Uservoice, like KISSmetrics, those corporate blogs their just like professional journalists since they need content too and the benefit for you is that those corporate blogs have an audience of people that have already bought something. So they’ve proven that they are somebody willing to pay for a product, which is important in our case, and they’re willing to read what you have to say and wink back and buy something from your site.

The other thing we did, that worked really well, was I said in the beginning, don’t use Twitter. I would refine that and say if it is used effectively you can Twitter to market to influencers. So we started following topics like landing pages, like start ups, like marketing and finding out who, not just anybody who mentioned things are, but who are the top people, the top sites being mentioned for this topics. Found the blog posts, found the influential users and just wrote them a quick note and said, hey, could you do a review of our service or would you try out our service and what do you think and those people got use re-Tweets because we looked for people that had an audience, you know, of 10,000, 20,000 or 50,000 followers and approached those peopled. In not a heavyweight form like could you, you know, could you please promote our product. Just sort of a, you know, hey, would you mind Tweeting about what your two cents are on our product.

So just a real lightweight way to introduce ourselves to ask them for a quick review or their thoughts on it. And you start leveraging their audience to build up. And the last thing we did mention, it came up in random conversation I think the first time we did the live version of this interview.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Josh: Was using App Sumo. App Sumo is the biggest, there are others out there. But these services have a huge audience. I don’t know how many are in App Sumo’s audience now so you’re even better off to get into App Sumo now then you were when we did it. But when you start thinking about spending money on Google ads or anything like that, which I’m not going to talk about here at all, but when you start thinking about that, you’re paying for people to get back so you know, would you be willing to trade 60% of your profit for a customer? Yeah, of course you’ll give people 60% off as a lead generation engine for customers. It’s no different than having to spend thousands of dollars on Google ads to pull customers in.

Andrew: What you’re saying is that by going App Sumo you have to give customers a big discount and then you have to share some of the remaining revenue with App Sumo but its worth it because they’re going to give you a lot of customers and even if you have to buy ads your going to end up having to give up part of your revenue to those ad buys.

Josh: Yep. And so that’s one of the ways, not just doing the personal marketing, that we’re talking about that you can scale and do something quickly that I would recommend anybody starting out would approach them once you have some proof. App Sumo is at the point where they want to see some proof that customers are using the service. You’ve got to still build up to users one through one hundred maybe first and have some success stories and some social proof build. But once you have that, you know, they’re great guys. I’ve contact them and said, hey, can we do something else and they’re all yours at this point for doing other deals once your in.

Andrew: All right. So this is something actually going back to this topic right here, who to market to. It’s a mistake that I made when I launched Mixergy. I kept thinking I do everything on my side and bring everyone over to my side and as I’ve been doing these courses I’m recognizing that the entrepreneurs who know their stuff end up thinking, where are the platforms where my customers already exist, how do I go on there and then I’ll start to siphon some of those users back to my site and keep them longer term.

We did a course with Ahmed from Lexity and he said the exact same thing. He had a brand new product. A lot of people still don’t know what Lexity is, I’m sure, as I’m talking about them. But he partnered up with Shopify which had his customers and by going on the Shopify platform they had tons of his potential customers, he was able to bring some users over to his site. I should have done the same thing. And it’s not too late, we should start thinking more along those lines at Mixergy. And the other big idea that you just talked about is the right way to use Twitter, which is it’s not just about promoting when you have no followers in the early days which is really common, it’s not just about promoting through Tweeting. It’s about saying whose out there, whose already talking to my customers, how can I engage them, just join the conversation with them and get them to maybe Tweet out about them.

I won’t say who it is but a well-known entrepreneur not only emailed a bunch of us recently to ask us to Tweet out but he also sent us a Google calendar reminder so that we’d get an alert about when to Tweet out for him. And I guess he didn’t do the time conversion properly so one of the guys on the list emailed me back and said, thank you, you just woke me up, what are you doing? And it was playful because this guy is very generous and so we’re happy to help out and we aren’t as bothered as, none of us were super bothered by it. But it’s interesting just to see that even at that level he is asking people to Tweet out for him. He is asking and doing everything he can to get them to promote. Alright, so that’s this idea right here. We talked about that. Now let’s move on to the next one, how to leverage powerful customer stories.

Josh: And I think we started at this a little bit backwards and so we started with the belief that one of the things we wanted to do was promote our customers because we knew that if we had customers that were successful and we could leverage what small audience we’d built at that point to help make their use of our product successful that they would then be happier customers, would then refer their friends. Which is really the gold that you’re after, that friend referral. And so we started asking customers if they wouldn’t mind being interviewed for our blog and when I realized we ended up doing after we did ten or twelve of these things was that we weren’t necessarily doing interviews that helped them and they certainly saw some benefit from doing it because we did promote them and link back to their site and their product in the interview, but what we were doing and we were dumb and didn’t realize at the time, is that we were building a library of case studies. And so now when, so for now.

Andrew: This is what you guys did, I’ll scroll in a little bit so people can see the top. Where is that? There’s the scroll, so this is a post that you guys did, this is one of your customers who you interviewed, right? Trend Lend, is that the name of the company?

Josh: Yes, Trend Lend [SP].

Andrew: OK. And you did an interview with them and you’re saying not only was it good for getting their audience to pay attention to your site but it also gave you a case study.

Josh: Yes. And it was good, it was a win/win, we pointed people back to their site, they promoted it so we got their audience to come back to their site, or to come back to our site. But then it ended up that once we’d done a bunch of these what we were building was, I think you mentioned this before, forget his name, I’m terrible with names but the guy who runs visual website optimizer, does a great job of.

Andrew: Cross Jobra [SP].

Josh: Yes, does a great job of promoting case studies and so we were essentially having the customers write the case studies themselves just based on the simple questions that we were asking them. And not only that but especially for the first ten that we did, we were learning more about the customers that we wouldn’t have found out because we were essentially doing customer interviews in this and so if you look through our questions.

Andrew: Who or what inspires you today? What other advice do you have for other people just getting started? What do you like most about Kickoff Labs and so on. So what you’re doing is you’re just getting to know them and their opinions there.

Josh: Yes. And it’s a little bit of an education by osmosis but the more you understand your customers and what inspires and what motivates them, the better off you are. So that’s really what drove that question. The what other advice is really almost selfish, you know, these people are also entrepreneurs, I wanted to learn from them. So if they had advice and tips they could share to us then we could learn from it and we could share that to our audience of other customers that wanted to know how they would get an audience on their landing page.

Andrew: And so, unlike here at Mixergy where I do interviews and courses where I get the entrepreneur on camera and I record and we do a lot of setup and pre-interviews and research and all that. You don’t even do that, you just email them a collection of questions looks like in this point, I mean in this example, you published three questions. So you send them a short list of questions, they answer it via email, you publish it on the site, big screen shot, you get the understanding, you get the traffic and you get case studies that you can use in the future.

Josh: Exactly. So you know, I want to do some experimentation with video and instead of having customer interview or customer quote on video but at the time, this was, you know, you mentioned how does this scale. This is something that was real easy for us, we had a template, we just emailed out a few customers every week that had popular sites on our service. So we knew they already had talent in building an audience, and so we wanted to get the people who were popular using our service and say, ‘Hey, would you mind answering these questions?’ And the questions were so small, they didn’t mind helping out and giving the time back. Then we emailed it out and I cut and pasted it to WordPress and there we go.

Andrew: I love that. That’s such an easy thing to do. All right, let’s go on to the next big idea which I call the ‘F Story’. It’s got people laughing in the live session. Do you know what I’m talking about here? Should I just bring up the website?

Josh: You can bring up the website.

Andrew: This is what “F” stands for. Who are these guys? Tell us about this company and what went on here with you guys.

Josh: Yeah, so they’re essentially an organization that’s trying to build awareness about global warming and is something I didn’t actually know when I talked to them at the time, but . . .

Andrew: You just thought that they were into farts.

Josh: Yeah, I was like, these guys . . . So I get a list of new sites that go up every day with Kickoff Labs, so I sort of peruse it and when you see that farts.com is hosted on your service, you say, “I should reach out to these people and see what’s going on.” Because when I clicked it, I was like, “What is going on here?” I still don’t know if this is the best landing page in the world, because I’m still not convinced it really tells you what it’s about, but it was just humorous. I never try to miss an opportunity to talk to interesting customers. So I get that daily mail that says here’s people that have signed up, here’s what they’re doing on your service.

There’s lots of ways you can do that, we just generated our own mail to just tell us when interesting, popular sites went up. So we saw this flew through the ranks pretty quickly and became a popular site fast in our service. So I called them up, and the great thing about it was I found out he had a support question, so I was able to answer the support question. And it was just funny because I was talking at the time when I called them up, I was actually also on Skype with my co-founder who was muted, because he wanted to kind of hear the conversation, too.

And I was sitting there explaining this technical step, he was like, “How do I set up the domain records?”, and so I’m sitting here, “OK, so you take the MX domain and you take the root domain and the A record and you point it at farts.com” and my co-founder is just cracking up. We’re all kids at heart. You’re sort of like, I can’t believe I just used the term “and point it at signups.farts.com”. [laughs]

Andrew: But the opportunity was to get on the phone with them and to really just understand their thinking, what are they doing with your site, why they’re using your product, what’s . . .

Josh: Yep.

Andrew: . . . working for them, we’re they struggling with it, and that’s the big takeaway that you want to leave the audience with, which is talk to your customers early on to understand what they’re trying to do with the site. And you know what, by the way? I agree with you on this. Now that I take a look at this site, this page . . . first of all, I see that your design is nice. It’s actually beautiful and it’s got all the elements that we need: the email collection box that’s really big, the button that they could replace the ‘Submit’. I hate the word ‘Submit’ on a button. In this case it’s ‘I will help’. You got the Tweets and so on. But you’re right; they don’t say what we’re getting here. If you fart, you can help. Enter you email below. Save the planet. I mean they’re not being concrete enough about the benefit of putting the email address in there, so they still need to learn . . .

Josh: They still need help, but it’s interesting what I learned from calling them up is I found out that, hey, there’s this thing that was really hard for them to do to set up the domain, that we could make easier. So we modified some of our help documentation to answer some of these questions, but I mean, I weren’t looking for opportunities to call our questions, to call to talk to customers, I might have missed that. A lot of people were probably just going and failing at it, and never calling me, and they’d just drop off and they might leave, and I’d never find out why they left the service; but because I was reaching out to people who were getting some quick traction or their site was trending that day, I was learning what bumps they were running into and then improving our product along the way.

Andrew: All right, let’s go on to the next big idea, which is the one that I told people in the beginning they should pay attention to, which is ‘Bribes. What bribes can do for you.’ Now Seth Godin actually when I talked about this concept, I said, ‘Seth, I’m catching a lot of references to bribes in my interviews.’ He said, ‘It’s not really a bribe, it’s you want to give people a reward and it has to be something that’s meaningful and connected to the business.’ But he agreed that it’s an important point. Maybe I shouldn’t be calling it a bribe, but . . . I do feel that you’re kind of . . . well, let’s go with the word incentive.

Josh: Yeah.

Andrew: How can we incentivize our users? I don’t want to use a word I think that . . . actually . . .

Josh: Yeah, I mean, it’s . . .

Andrew: How do we bribe our users to get them to promote us?

Josh: It’s ultimately a bribe, and so I tell our customers and I would tell entrepreneurs now too, that you basically are after two conversions. And most people think about the first one. They don’t think about the second one, and a lot of people don’t think about how incentivize both of those conversions and we certainly weren’t before we launched and when we launched Kickoff Labs but that first conversions is you want to get them to sign up and so what can you offer that’ll get them to sign up on your page.

What do you have to offer? You may not have a product, some of our customers have products, some of them don’t but you may not even have that but maybe you could offer yourself as a domain [?]. Say, hey, if you sign up I’m going to send you a newsletter with an auto response with five tips on how to grow your business or I’m going to send you a cheat sheet of how to do this. You can sell your information.

You can use your knowledge as a domain expert in whatever your building to parlay that into hey, it’s a bribe because when people are hesitant they see an email box, they don’t’ want to just give up their email address, there has to be something in it for them even if they think what you’re doing is cool and we look at stats on the page, there’s a lot of pages that sometimes people will share the page but they don’t enter their own email address and we can see that because we watch people’s behavior on the page.

So, we know on landing pages sometime people share the page but they don’t bother to enter their email address and you have to wonder why that is and I think it’s because those pages that have that trend, they’re not offering enough to get the person to enter their email address. They maybe have something that could be a potential product or interesting sell that they person say’s, oh, I’ll share this on Twitter which people sometimes think is less of a task then giving my email is more personal and so you need to bribe people to do that initial conversion.

Andrew: Do you have an example? Let me, I don’t want to pick on these guys because I think their fun and I’m glad but I feel like they don’t have an incentive here. They don’t have that bribe as I call it. Do you have an example of somebody who does it well?

Josh: I’m trying to think. Off of the top of my head, I mean, there’s been lots of examples. Often time I don’t have one. I know the visual we have is about the second conversion that we’re talking about. It’s actually about both so go to the next screenshot.

Andrew: What is this company?

Josh: So, they let the videos do the talking for the most part but what’s amazing is you probably wouldn’t guess this page converts at 40%.

Andrew: 40% here wow.

Josh: Yeah. 40% of people that hit this page enter their email address, right, and they do two things really well. For a long time what they were doing, basically they do two things and they made it simple into one. You enter email address for a chance to win this here, right, so your bribing them with a contest but what they do is they also focus, they realize the importance of that second conversion and the second conversion is get them to tell their friends about you, right, and that’s often time we forget about even our product to, is once somebody has bought we think oh, job done, they bought. Your jobs not done I don’t think until the person says I’m willing to tell my friends about you.

So, what they did to get people to tell their friends is they said, listen, you enter your email address, you effectively get a raffle ticket where we give away this scooter but when their email that they send back, in the auto response, they send back they say guess what, if you share this with your friends and they sign up, everyone of your friends that signs up is another raffle ticket to you. So it’s like the pyramid scheme of lotteries and there’s one guy on their site and they’ve had thousands and thousands of signups but there’s one guy who’s responsible for 3,000 of their signups because he shared it and then, we track in our product we track not just directly influenced but also the children of that and so the descendants of that, so they can attribute back 3,000 signups to this one person which is a huge, good percentage of their conversions that they’ve done,

I know that not only are they going to do the raffle like they said and give everybody a ticket but they’ll do something great for that guy to I’m sure because he was sharing, he shared so effectively with his friends but in that case they did the one, get a raffle ticket and they made it simple. They just said every one of your friends is another raffle ticket in the contest. People like contests, they like the chance to win. It’s just a great way to do it. The other examples I have are a little bit more common. I don’t have live examples but I know what people have done that has worked really well. Two things, one is giving a way an eBook, like I said, a cheat sheet, an eBook for a signup so that was leveraging the knowledge and the other is giving away a discount that scales really well and so actually if you go to, they’re not even our customer and I should have done this visual, go to, I don’t know if you can pull up a website.

Andrew: Let’s take a look. Let’s see. Usually we can do it. So while that’s coming up here, did we get this up”

Josh: If you can go to this site. Let’s see. And of course now they’re going to prove me wrong, they’re going to have taken this down.

Andrew: But we’re often told to give people an incentive to give you their email address, what’s rarely talked about it, after they give you their email address, once they’ve taken that big risk on you and trusted you on their email address they’re much more likely to share it with their friends than if they were just a random stranger that hadn’t committed to you.

Josh: Yep.

Andrew: But to get them to do that, you guys at Kickoff Labs say give them an incentive, tell them that if they do take that next step with you which is to share it with their friends on Twitter on Facebook et cetera, that your going to give them something in return to show your appreciation and that’s what you guys are especially good at and I’d love to be able to do that everywhere. I wish every web room incorporated ads into their forms, I wish that anytime I got someone to register for my list I could do it. But it’s too tough to code up and the reason that we used you guys and the reason that you and I connected is, we can’t code it all up, we just wanted it to run and so we turned over our page to you and you guys made it run.

Josh: And the best practices there are both whether you use our service or not, I mean, I would tell people, of course the lobby guys is the example I was going to pull up. They’re not using it anymore but they did a great job. They weren’t using it.

Andrew: I just brought up their page to, this is the site you were talking about.

Josh: Yeah, they used to, when they first were looking for their first kind of wave of users, they had a great bar at the bottom, it was like a progress bar which showed you basically where you were and it said, when you enter one email address great, we’ll put you on our waiting list. When you enter three email addresses, you’ll be within the first 2,000 people to get an invite. When you enter ten email addresses we’ll get you a t shirt and when you enter 100, I forget what their reward is for 100, when you get a 100 of your friends to sign up. So they staged out their rewards to kind of pull people through. I just thought it was a genius use of that reward system.

Andrew: Are they using your software? I was checking out the source to see if they were. Is this your site?

Josh: No, they weren’t using our software to do it. I mean, it is something that people have done similar things with our API but they’re using custom built stuff to do that.

Andrew: Well, I’m actually able to bring up web pages so if you need me to bring anything up we can do it to.

Josh: That actually worked other than that they had stopped doing the promotion that I really liked.

Andrew: And by the way, here is a list of, what is this, you guys worked well with them, you’ve been there so I can see how you have social proof all over the page here.

Josh: Yeah, if people click on our website, if they click the discover tab at the top of our website. Customers can kind of look if their looking for inspiration on the Discover tab of our website.

Andrew: Where is the discover tab? I don’t see that. Oh, there it is, OK.

Josh: Up at the top. Top menu.

Andrew: Ah, and you can see what other people have done.

Josh: Yeah, so we have people that have their pages on the right side, or the popular pages for that, you know a couple of hour span, and just in the middle are just as people get sign ups we push the site up to the top of that list. So you can kind of see popular sites on one hand and then in the middle is the other side, or the middle is just live sign ups as they’re happening on the sites.

Andrew: Cool. So back to the big board. We talked about what bribes can do you for you. And we talked about how to do it right. Let’s go on to the next big idea which is going overboard. You want to nurture your first customers like crazy and make them love you is what your saying.

Josh: Yeah, and that just plays off what I was talking about in terms of thinking about the second conversion. It’s not just for a landing page and getting people to sign up, it really us a thing that you need to think about for your business. You’re relationship with a customer doesn’t stop at the point that they’ve bought your product. Your goal is not just that they become repeat customers but that they, you have to think about your goal is that they become such raving fans of you and your work, to use Ken Blanchard or whatever, the book raving fans, that they are willing to tell other people about your service and your support.

And so, especially when you’re just starting out and those first couple hundred users, you know, I recommend just reaching out personally to them with an email or a phone call and seeing what they like about the product and saying, hey thanks for signing up, if there’s anything I can do to help let us know. And I think there’s a visual or a screen shot of a great example, not one that I wrote but it was better than what I’d written so I used this one. This is an excerpt from a blog post by Rob Fitz [SP]. He talks about, hey what better do you have before you have 1,000 signups that tend to be talking with each and every person that sign up.

You won’t find too many better uses of your time then to talk to these customers both from the marketing perspective to turn them into raving fans and get them to share with their friends but also from the improve the product perspective. In one case I called up one of our customers, one of our first 1,000 and he ended up saying hey, by the way, I’m in a startup incubator and your product is perfect for all the [?] incubator and he said can you give me some sort of discount for all the startups they [?]? Yeah, sure, you never know what opportunities there from talking to your customer because then we got 30 more customers out of that one phone call and we did features we wouldn’t have done for a long time.

When we started talking to these first 100 customers, we realized that they really cared about SCO and, again, another thing that we didn’t focus on early, not going to cover it in the course but SCO is really important, but we didn’t have a way for them to adjust the SCO’s setting on the page exactly the way they care about. The marketing customers, people who care about marketing, whose job it is to be a digital marketing professional that is extremely important to them. So unless we were talking personally to these first 1,000 we wouldn’t have added it because Scott and I were like, SCO’s black magic, black art we’re not going to focus on it.

We would have completely ignored it and but adding those settings now we get customers, I love it, I go in and I can tweak the SCO to my heart’s content. I can add, change any settings on a page and we wouldn’t have done it had we not talked to the first few customers. So it’s both a marketing opportunity and chance to learn about the customers out there. And they love it. They love you for it. They love hearing that the founder called them and talked to them. I still can’t talk to everyone that signs up today but I still look for the important people and I still reach out to them directly, that sign up.

Andrew: All right, I’ve got a couple other visuals here within this section. What do you want me to show next?

Josh: It kind of goes with the social trusting. The only other visual we can skip on in the section but the only other visual was, let’ see, it’s in the same section. You can look at our support page.

Andrew: OK, you’re showing how accessible you’re making yourself because you want to really go overboard and make yourself easy for them to talk to.

Josh: Yup. Especially if you’re building a solution where you taking some that’s challenging tactically and making, trying to make it really simple, making somebody feel like they’ll be supported along the way is extremely important. So, that’s why we have the phone number, that’s why I have the big giant help and feedback button and it’s worked out really well for us. Like I said, the opportunities we got from talking to the customers and just because I answer support question I make sure I throw in and say hey, how’d you hear about us?

Andrew: And you do want to say, here’s something you don’t like. You don’t like the opposite of this where people send an email from an address that you can’t respond to. You’re saying, if you’re a company sending out an email, be accessible especially at first. Allow people to hit reply and what you guys do on the bottom of your emails is say, is actually encourage people, you say you love to hear from them and you encourage them to email back.

Josh: Yeah, you’ll notice it’s the only, other then the blue links, it’s the only color we use in the email template is a around the word love in that template and it’s worked really well. I mean, I hate you sign up for a service and there’s not tactical reason why anybody has to have a no-reply that you cannot reply to this email address on the service. You could say, if you were worried about it, hey we may not get back to everybody or reply if you’re at Facebook or something but for any modern medium size, this is no reason why any email address that sends out a notification, you shouldn’t be able to direct all of the reply’s to a support address. In this case it did come from our support address when it does go out but we have a notify kick of [?] account that sends them account updates or when they get their accounts close to being expired if they bought a package and that we let people reply to, too.

There’s no reason, and people do, they reply to it all the time because when their thinking about you and they have a question or they want to tell you something you want to be accessible and so we try maybe, and we actually needed up convincing the guys at User Voice to do this, they read our blog post and we’re doing a gust post on their blog and within two days they converted all their email addresses to be replyable. So when User Voice sends out an email you can reply right to it.

Andrew: By the way, as a Kickoff Labs user, this is the email that I love most. This is the email that comes in to my inbox. It says, “You have new sign-ups” and it gives me the names of the people who signed up. It’s encouraging to see how many people sign up and to get that email everyday.

Josh: Yeah, people have it everyday or every week or just choose not to get it. Most people seem to get it on a weekly basis and, yeah, we hear that all the time that because they get this email it motivates them and say, oh . . . it’s either, wow, a hundred people signed up or it’s only two, I need to go promote harder . . .

Andrew: [laughs] I’m surprised by how many people we got to watch a live session. Our initial bribe was, ‘Watch this course live’, which I screwed up and I’m going to have to fix. Then, the benefit of sharing was we’re going to hire writers to create a guide based on this course and we’ll give it to you if you get two of your friends to sign up.

As we did that, we kept getting these emails, they just kept . . . where is that, is this the email? Yeah. Emails like this kept popping into my inbox which was encouraging, like you said.

Josh: Yep.

Andrew: All right. So, the next big idea is that we need to exploit our competitors’ weaknesses. What do you mean by that?

Josh: So, I think people are just super friendly sometimes and they look at the competition and they don’t want to go near the competition’s customers, but I think it’s prudent for anybody to set up alerts. We use both Google alerts and we also use the Twitter search and monitor several topics.

I mean one of the topics we monitor are sets of competitors and the other set of topics, and Google alerts will give you daily emails of important blog posts or articles written about them. Then, for kind of getting closer to the customers, we set up some safe Twitter searches as well.

So, we go to the Twitter search and set up searches for people mentioning our competitors, but also people mentioning the general market we are in of landing pages and start-up pages and sign-up pages and just see what people are saying. We can learn a lot from that.

But, especially, I think a lot of people kind of discover the differentiators as they go and when you enter a marketplace, you have an idea of what they would be. But as you start watching the tweets come through about your competitors and see on forums online and blog posts what people are saying, you learn, wow, my competitor is really good at ‘X’, but not so good at ‘Y’ and I bet there’s a lot of people who really need ‘Y’.

In our case we learned one of our competitors offers a free solution. And two of the things we learned from that was, A, because their solution is free, they force their brand on people and we knew there was a marketplace of people craving for white label unbranded solution. Then, we also knew that they were having problems supporting the volume. Because one of the choices you make when you say we are going to do a free business is you are temping the scale.

If you have a two to five person company and you say everything is free and we’re just going to try to get massive user adoption, you’ve got to somehow support those customers and more often than not, you can’t do it. Scott and I kick off, our belief is we wanted to be in a business and be able to support and help customers, even if that meant less customers, we wanted to form a closer relationship with them.

So, it helped us be able to highlight those things as differentiators from our competition.

Andrew: Yeah, I know what you mean. When your product becomes my home page, the home page of a new product that I’m launching, I don’t want your branding to be bigger than my branding. I don’t want some issue to come up and not be able to call you up and say, hey, how do I fix this, how do I solve it and you notice those two things by watching the competition on Google. . .

Josh: Yep.

Andrew: By using Google alerts and Twitter alerts.

And something happened with one person who you discovered while monitoring, can you tell that story?

Josh: Yeah. This person was setting up a carpooling service and they were having problems redirecting their page to a competitor and they had tweeted three or four times. I don’t generally just reach out and say, oh, I’m going to try and steal a customer from my competitor. Despite the title of my blog posts, which you might be highlighting up in a second.

Andrew: Yeah, let’s bring that up.

Josh: But I felt bad for the person when it was the third time he had been reaching out and hadn’t gotten an answer. So, I said, hey, I’m willing to help you out. We will see if we can do something for you. Sure enough he had a really simple problem he was running into and he was just trying to get an answer fast because he was trying to set it up before he presented at TED because he was going to be speaking at the TED Conference.

It’s just a few of these gems you notice when you do that because what happened was he wrote up this great case study of converting to our system and then he talked about us as part of his presentation and to the other start-ups in the area. He’s from Argentina so he talked about us there and then all of the sudden we got a little bit of minor press there. We got a couple of hundred more customers coming on board from, just reaching out and helping this one person who was having problems with a competitor.

Andrew: I see. And this is a case on your site, this is how you talked about it and told your audience about it.

Josh: Yeah. It’s this, since the [??], our site’s been targeting start-ups who are also offering not just stuff from our landing pages but sort of business advice so one of the things we said was he wrote this long email to us and asked him if he mind if I republished the email about his experience switching to us and why he did it and why he liked it and so I figured I share it on the blog.

Andrew: Great point and great example of what can happen when you’re watching what people are saying about your competition.

All right. Next big idea is to be crazy. What did you guys do that is crazy?

Josh: I don’t think that we do enough crazy stuff. I keep wanting to look for things to do more of but you have to do a lot when you’re trying to get press attention and as I go back and forth, I hate working with the press and sometimes I like it when I can make a connection but they get so many pitches. They’re inundated with so many emails to pitch this and do this and I launched this, that it’s hard to stand out and so, I said in the previous point, I was monitoring a topic about sign up pages and start ups and I saw these two reporters going back and forth on Twitter about “Hey, all these meta start-ups, helping start ups is a sure sign that the bubble is coming and before we know it pet, you know, pets.com is going to come back as pets.com version 2 and…”

So, I just injected myself in the conversation and used our product and said, “You mean, like this?” and I set up a landing page for pets.com 2 and said, “Hey, you know? I’ll sell this to you for, you know, a valuation, about $1 million or something. If you’re interested, you can own the domain and have the landing page for pets.com 2.” And the two reporters got a kick out of it and one of them reached out to me and we got a story on the next web because put ourselves in the conversation.

And this is just an example. It wasn’t a pitch. I didn’t email them. I think he was on my list of people that I emailed sort of a generic pitch that just never worked. But when I was following them on Twitter and I saw the conversation and injected myself, then he came back to me and he said ‘You guys have an interesting product. I can do a story about you and kind of pitch it this way’ and I helped him out. We did the story about us and that’s driven a lot of traffic and we got a lot of customers from that referral, from the next web.

Andrew: And that’s just a page. I know that that page can be created in minutes, maybe a few minutes, right? Did you buy the domain also? You did.

Josh: At the time I did. I let the domain go so it was just a sub-domain to but, the page itself as set up I think it took me like 10 minutes. Most of that was just coming up with the copy and quickly finding the images that I wanted to put on the page. But, yeah, it was really fast for me to set up and have that.

The funny thing about it, when the site went up and the reporter retreated, it was a, I had to put a warning on the page that said “Don’t sign up”. I didn’t disable our sign up button on the page because I had 40 people sign up for it as Coming Soon. I’m not sure why.

Andrew: They were using this?

Josh: What?

Andrew: The bottom of the page here, if we scrolled to the bottom, that, people just put on their email address and submitted it.

Josh: [??] their emails address on the page. I don’t know if they thought it was a joke or something and so I had to disable the form after I put the page out there because I didn’t want people out there giving up their email addresses for what was essentially just a one-off joke to help get our name out there.

Andrew: And you got some press off of that. All right. Let’s go on to the big board again and, the final big idea here is to turn your start up into a movement. How did you guys do that?

Josh: I think the biggest thing is just to understand a little bit about root psychology and just thinking about, people like to be part of something bigger than themselves.

I worked at Microsoft a long time ago and I worked under Developer Community Software and we’re just intrigued by these people who have got an answer 500 questions or 800 questions in a short amount of time in a couple of months in these Microsoft developer forms and they are not being paid by Microsoft to do it. They’re not official Microsoft support and so we bring them in and say ‘Hey, why are you doing this? Why are you helping us as this giant company to do it?’ and he said, well, he never looked at it and that he was helping make Microsoft lots of money.

He looked at it as he was moving the industry forward and that he was part of a movement that he wanted to work with smarter people so if he gave back then, if he gave back to the industry by answering questions and helping newbies get started and develop on Microsoft software, then he could be surrounded by smarter co-workers. So it was one part selfish and then one part he saw that he was part of a movement and so that’s always struck me as something, you know, powerful that people can adopt with their marketing and their messages. You know, you start out your cast and you say, hey freedom fighters, and you’ve got your intro and I love the intro, but your making people feel like their part of a movement, right, and anybody can do that.

And so, what we did was really just a simple thing and we put up on our site and said, hey, this is our goal, you know, our goal is we want to get to 5,000 customers, you’ve helped us and if you want to help more, you know, for every person you sign up that becomes a paying customer we’ll get you a month of free service. And so, you know, there’s a little bit of selfishness in it for them but then there’s also this, you know, hey it’s part of a bigger goal. Now it’s a strange goal because it’s not moving an industry forward, I think there’s smarter ways people could probably do this and I’m sure if people hear this interview I’ll hear it re-implemented in better ways but, you know.

For me, it was just, hey, you know, I might as well just be public with our customers and say this is what we’re trying to do right now. This is one of our primary objectives and help us be part of it. And I’ve gotten, since we did the interview, and since you had that screen shot, you know I had a lot of people email us, just random customers and people on the website, hey, congratulations, I see you made it, did you know I referred ten people. I say, yeah, I know you referred ten people, I gave you ten free months.

Andrew: Ha ha, that’s a lot to give.

Josh: But people were happy, people genuinely felt like, you know, hey, they needed to say congratulations to us for doing it and you know, it’s just because they felt like they were part of it and they helped out and I think anybody can use this strategy effectively to make their customers feel like their part of their goals. And I think people don’t do this a lot because they’re shy to scare, they’re too scared to share some of their goals with their customers, just let their customers in a little bit and when your small and your just starting out, there’s no reason not to. You know, what do you have to lose by sharing your goals with your customers.

Andrew: Well, here, I’m keeping the screen shot up for a reason, because I want to highlight a couple of things about this that were, that I underestimate the power of. See the thing is, I keep thinking that if you want to create a mission, you have to have like a Martin Luther King size vision and Martin Luther King size vision that people will rally around. But you did something different.

You said look, the mission is this, we are two guys here, and yeah, this is the part that I wanted us to highlight, this top sentence right here, in fact let me read it. Would you like to put a huge smile on the face of two scrappy co-workers with beautiful, young children who like to eat three times a day…and then you went on to do like saving money, etc, explaining what’s in it for them. But you brought them in to your personal mission, that you’re trying to build this new company and you need their help to get some new customers. And that’s the mission that you got them on and boy anyone who is your potential customer has got to identify with that.

And then the other thing you did was, you said, here’s what we’re going for, we’re looking to get 5,000 new customers and, again, I’m going to circle this part, and this is where we are right now. At the time that I took this screen shot, which was a long, long time ago at this point, you were at 4,412 customers and so people got to see where they were and where you were and got to root for you and of course there was something in it for them too, you said that you were going to give them the free month but this number is what, the one that I’m circling right now, is what a lot of people were trying to raise for you and get you closer to the 5,000. And so that’s what I thought was especially encouraging about this and of course, as you said, since I took this screen shot, you guys have blown through the 5,000 customer goal. Do you have a new one now?

Josh: Yeah, if you go to our site now, we’re maybe not as creative as we should be, we simply set the goal, the goal was originally 1,000, then we hit 5,000 and now we’re going for 25,000.

Andrew: So 25,000. Now you’re bringing people in to this. What about this fear that if you show people where you are and where you’re not that your competitors could get a better understanding of how big your company is and, you know, some people that want to do business with you might say, oh, they’re too small, they haven’t even hit their goal, why don’t I do business with them once they hit that goal.

Josh: Yeah, I mean, that was originally was my idea to do it back when we had in the 1 to 100 customers and I think Scott and I talked about it and we didn’t do it because we felt that was a little bit small at the time, although looking back on it I don’t think it would have mattered. I still think it would have been as good a [??]. The small thing is interesting because his point was he wanted to have some substantial numbers before we let people in and so that people didn’t think wow I’m a guinea pig for the service. But once we passed that, then the thought of a competitor looking at us didn’t really bother me so much because if you think about it if you knew how many customers your competitor has, what are you really going to change?

Andrew: Right.

Josh: What’s going to change and in them knowing it about us? I don’t think it’s going to change their strategy or what they do. And if they try to do some marketing or a competitor tried to do some marketing and said hey don’t go with the small guy go with …. That’s just going to look bad on them. So you’re always better off just ignoring the competition when it comes to your own messaging and your marketing. Not, as we talked about before, it’s smart to pay attention to what they’re doing so you can know how to differentiate.

But in terms of directly using some of that stuff against them is pointless and it’s not worth doing. But the other question I’ve had people ask that’s similar is like, oh well isn’t an investor going to see that you’ve only got this and they’re not going to want to talk to you or give you money. And I guess my answer is well if anybody’s going to give you a substantial sum of money they’re going to find out these numbers pretty quickly anyway because they’re not going to give you $50,000 in seed funding or $800,000 in funding or $1 million in funding unless they know what your customer numbers are anyway.

So, at least, if you’re up front about it then you can start demonstrating traction and I found it’s the other way, is that once we started putting the numbers on the site, this number plus we also show on that same page the number of signups we’ve generated for our customers. But that’s actually gotten investors and advisers calling us saying hey wow, you guys are making some real progress here in a short amount of time. How could we help? And it’s actually started more of those conversations. Now, maybe I don’t know how many conversations it’s stopped because they’ve just looked at our page and gone away.

Andrew: I doubt it has.

Josh: But it’s helping.

Andrew: Here let me show one other thing and then I want to ask you a question that we don’t have on the big board. I want to talk about one topic that we didn’t put on there. And that last thing I want to show, in the bottom left corner of my screen shot are your signatures. So you really personalized it in addition to making that personal call to action at the top, on the bottom you signed it. All right there is one other thing that we don’t have on here that you noticed after we recorded the first version of this.

And I should tell the audience that we recorded one version where I screwed up the technology. We were doing it live and live did not work for me for some reason. Then we recorded version number two, which worked out well. We were riffing; we were going great. And there was some issue with the video at the end. So here we are recording the last section, the part that had a video tech problem on it. So thank you for doing this three times with me now. I said I owe you and I owe you big. And you did something really interesting the second time we did it. You said Andrew, since the first time we recorded I’ve been thinking, did I leave anything out?

I want to really make sure that people understand what’s worked for us so that they get a full understanding of how they can get customers for themselves. And there’s one thing that you remember that we didn’t put up on the big board that maybe we can talk about now. Do you know what I’m talking about?

Josh: Yeah, I remember. So after we did the live thing and I knew we were recording the interview again, I said boy, I want to go back and make sure I do as great a job as I can for people because I really want to help people out. So I went back and I was looking through our customer sources that say for the 5,000 or customers we got to when we hit our goal, where did they all come from? And I realized these tactics are all building on it and a lot of it, just about everything, is measurable these days with the right tools.

So, I think I realized that I left off about one-fifth of the 5,000 customers, somewhere between one-fifth and one-quarter and it was a huge thing to leave off of the tactics which was in our case a large percentage of the customers do come from the fact that we have a free [??] model. So we do offer a free version with the branding as much as we said before we don’t like, I personally wouldn’t want the branding on my page but offering it has been successful in the sense that a good 20 to 25% of our customers come from another customer’s home page. They click on our branding, they come through; they say oh I want a page like this, and then they sign up and they go through the process with us.

So, that was the missing thing that we didn’t talk about is figuring out how you can turn your customers into your marketing, not just directly through this sort of affiliate program that I talked about but how their actions produce other customers. And you know that’s starting to become really popular [??] viral so a lot of things have become, it’s kind of automatic, like if your playing an asynchronous game like Words with Friends, all of the sudden it shows up on the person’s Facebook feed because they played a move and it shows on Facebook and somebody else on their Facebook friends list sees it but I don’t think it’s limited to just those things that are viral because there’s nothing, there’s not so much of that going on with a lot of landing pages. I mean, we do offer a social component but primarily it’s just, it’s a one off thing because you put the branding on it, it’s an opportunity for us to get other customers from popular sites.

Andrew: I’ve seen this done in several online businesses. MailChimp for example, have a free version that lets you email a thousand people for free without paying anything but on the bottom of all thousand emails that you send to your audience is a MailChimp ad. In KissingSights, let’s you pop up a box, a little survey on your site. If you don’t pay, then you get their KissingSights logo on there, on that pop-up and that’s how they get customers.

So, turning your free people into promoters is another way that helps you grow.

Josh: Yeah. So that’s been a big part of our growth, just figuring out. It’s difficult to figure out what the right model is of where you want to put the line of free versus paid but once you start figuring out that balance, I mean, it’s something you can adjust as you go, specially when you’re small and you’re just starting out, to just kind of play with those levers and say ‘Well, this is, we’re offering this free, this is not’ and then you play with the levers and say ‘What if we took this away or added this’ and it takes a while to find that right balance that attracts people to free being good enough for people to sign up but not completely but still enticing them to upgrade.

I thing that’s why a lot of people are worried about the premium models. Where do you pick that line and I think that’s where you just have to start measuring, making changes, taking something away, add something and figure out the right mix where you’re still getting the upgrade that you’d like to see.

Andrew: All right. Well, this has been a really comprehensive program. Thank you for going through all of it and I am going to recommend to the audience that, first of all, let me bring out the site. You go to KickoffLabs.com, there it is.

And I think I’ve, I don’t know if I, we recorded 3 times. I’m not sure whether I said it at the end before or not but I will say it right now, that most people think that Kickoff Labs is a place you go to create a landing page before you create your actual product so that you have a way of capturing email addresses and getting those, the people who give you their email address to promote your product to their friends and do all that before you actually have a product.

I think of your product, Josh, at Kickoff Labs, as the place to go when you’re, for just promotion. To implement several different promotion ideas. Of course, when we did the live version of this, instead of using the webinar software, email collection box, a lot of people register and put their email address on the webinar software site, I created a Kickoff Labs page where people can give me their email address, same as with the webinar software but where they’re also encouraged to go tell their friends about it.

And there are a lot of ideas like that. If you need someone to register for anything, I recommend that you check out Kickoff Labs and think of how can you use a Kickoff Labs form to collect that registration. Because with Kickoff Labs not only do you get a beautiful form that encourages people to give you their email address but you also get that virality that’s built in . As soon as they give you their email address, they’re also encourage to tell their friends and get their friends to register.

So, KickoffLabs .com and Josh, thank you for doing this first time, second time and now a third time.

Josh: Third time’s a charm.

Andrew: Third time’s a charm.

Thank you very much. Thank you all for watching and looking forward to your feedback on this and seeing how you use the course. Bye.

Master Class: How to rank on page 1 of Google
(Even if you’ve never heard of Black Hat SEO)
Taught by Brian Horn of On Page 1 Marketing, Inc

Report issues here

Master Class:
Black Hat SEO

About the course leader

Brian Horn is the founder of On Page 1 Marketing, Inc, an SEO consulting and publishing company.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Cracked.com

WPMUdev.org

PRlog.com

SEO Corporate

Majestic SEO

BlogCommentDemon (Update, see the comment below about this software.)

Socialadr.com

Legalnurse.com

Shortask.com

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about getting you to the top of Google including, as you see up here on the big board, a few Black Hat tactics that will get you scoring well. The course is led by, there he is, by Brian Horn. He is the founder of On Page 1 Marketing, Inc. an SEO consulting and publishing company. You can read more of his tactics on beonpage1blog.com. I’ll help facilitate. My name is Andrew Warner. I’m the founder of Mixergy.com where proven founders, like Brian, teach what they’re good at.Brian, we have a set of tactics here that we’re going to get into, and I know the audience is especially going to appreciate this set of black hat tactics here. I’m really surprised that you’re willing to talk this openly about them. You’re actually going to give people links to make this happen later on in the session. I know what the audience is wondering, which is, who is this guy, what has he been able to do, and I think the best way to tell people what you are able to do is to talk about… Well, this one guy who flew you out to South Beach. Can you tell people that story? And what you were able to do for him?Brian: Sure. Yeah, I’d be happy to tell that story. I had been doing SEO far a number of years but I mainly had been doing in-house stuff, and a little bit of corporate work, but not anything for entrepreneurs. This was a little bit different of a situation. This guy calls me because he had seen a post I had written online, contacts me, and offers to fly me out to South Beach to meet with him. He gives me a first class ticket as the limo picks me up from the airport, and takes me out to his beach house, which is this massive beach house down in South Beach. I actually stayed in his guest house, he had a guest house, across the street. So I had my own house across from him, it was amazing.

Andrew: Sweet.

Brian: We get up there, and we’re talking to him, and he’s closing as a client very fast. He’s very committed and knows what he wants. He wants something very, very specific, and after telling us for a short period of time, he’s convinced I can give it to him. What he wanted was, he wanted to rank top of Google, first three to five results, for the term bankruptcy. Which is a very, very competitive term. You’ve got all types of attorneys going after that term, and you’ve got major financial institutions going after that term also. The year that I was working with him, that was the seventh most searched term of the year, outside of pornographic terms and actresses I think. It was really, really high up there. And we…

Andrew: Bankruptcy was the seventh most searched for term?

Brian: Yes.

Andrew: That, and I know it’s profitable because people who need bankruptcy services, they have to pay right?

Brian: Oh yeah.

Andrew: They have to pay lawyers and they have to go through an expensive process.

Brian: Oh yeah. There are all kinds of stuff. His particular niche was outside of that, but people going through bankruptcy were his target market. It was a very, very keyword to get him on there for. Anyway, within seven months we were able to get him up there. I say we, I mean me. I was working out of my home in this little office you’re looking at, [??] right now, in a little suburb outside of Houston, Texas. Me and my cargo shorts and t-shirts were able to beat out all the big financial suits and everybody else, and just send a ridiculous amount of traffic to that sight every single day. We went from getting no leads at all, to getting hundreds, to thousands of leads a day. Not visitors, but actual leads coming in every single day, and just transform the business totally.

Andrew: Dollars and cents, how much money did you make for them because of the SEO search engine optimization tactics that you used?

Brian: Bad Company did about $30 million that year.

Andrew: $30 million. How much of that was because of you? I’ve got here in my notes that you took them from zero to four million on the specific product within nine months.

Brian: That was actually a different client.

Andrew: Oh, that was a different client. This client, how much did you do?

Brian: This guy was far more than that. It’s hard to break it down to exactly what it was. The majority of his business came from direct mail, but there was probably about 30% that came from pure Internet. So, we can guess that it’s right about $6 million to $9 million.

Andrew: OK. What business was he in?

Brian: He was in bankruptcy recovery. Helping people recover from bankruptcy.

Andrew: I see. Was he selling legal services, or I guess he was collecting leads and selling them to lawyers?

Brian: It was really regaining your life after bankruptcy. It was info products, and credit repair services, and stuff like that.

Andrew: I see. OK. All right. One thing that I notice about you it that, even in our prerecording conversation, you never brought up a company name. Usually, I talk to people and they give me all kinds of secrets before we start. They say, Andrew I’ll tell this just to you, and here’s the name of client, you can go check out the webpage. You are clamping down on certain information, you’re not giving client information throughout this interview. But you will use the same tactic, and you will show us the same sites that you used with your clients.

Brian: Yes, and let me just explain why. If this had been a few weeks ago, I probably would’ve shared more clients. But this is where Google has just clamped down on SEOs last two or three weeks. They indexed a bunch of blog networks they’ve really gone to war with SEOers, and people trying to optimize their websites, and I just don’t want let anybody know, let clients know I’m taking testimonials off my page I’m not sharing any of that stuff, it’s just getting to be very, very dangerous. And these people that are paying me thousands of dollars a month, (?) throw it out there because I shared an interview their name and then Google sees it and clamps down on it.

Andrew: Fair enough usually I want specific examples. I want the audience to see how it’s used but I know that in some cases that’s just not possible, and in this case specifically we absolutely have to make an exception. But I do want to go into the specific tactic. Our audience doesn’t care so much about your clients, as they do care about themselves, and I trained them to care about themselves and to hunt down for tactics that they could use, and results that they can actually measure. So I want to make sure that they get measurable results or else I’ll feel like a failure in this whole session, and all the time that you and I put into this I’ll feel bad about because we haven’t delivered for them. So let’s start delivering for them. On the big board we have this idea first. You’re saying use on site techniques. To me that seems a little bit basic, but when I just see it on the board. Especially considering what I know is coming up later on. Let’s talk about that. When you say use on site techniques what do you mean?

Brian: Put up the visual for this for that one also. I want people to see this.

Andrew: You want people to see what?

Brian: The visual for this one. Several things in this one, one of the things that’s becoming more and more important in SEO is how people behave once they come to your site. So you can’t just put up a blank or static article and expect it to work it’s just not. One of the things that Andrew’s doing right now is he’s scrolling down the page. Scroll rate is actually a ranking factor now.

Andrew: How fast or slow I scroll is going to influence the site’s SEO.

Brian: Not necessarily the speed. But the fact that you are scrolling down the page. Think about what Google wants. They want to give good results and if everybody comes to a page and looks at it and bounces off that says one thing. But they come to a page and they scroll all the way to the bottom of the page, that says something else. They are spending time on there. So if you notice what I did on this one I have a list at the top of three things. But I have big huge pictures on each one and a big headline and I have a caption under each picture. Even for the most casual person that’s not going to read it, they’re most likely going to scroll down and see the pictures and you’ve gotten your scroll on there.

The second thing we do we make it very easy to share socially so you see the widget I have off to the right hand side that kind of sticks with you the whole time so that no matter where you scroll on the page you always have the options to give it a plus one or a like, a Tweet or share on LinkedIn. So that’s the big thing about the on page stuff aside from the basic SEO type stuff. But that’s one of the things that’s changed and the design under pages makes a massive difference, and the people that do this better than anybody else is a Cracked.com

Andrew: Before I even go into cracked and I see that it’s coming up here on the next big tab. You’re telling me first of all I need to make sure that people scroll down my site or else Google’s going to think that they’re not engaged enough and ding me for it. And you’re telling me I need to have this kind of sharing on my site to it real easy for people to share. I know the audience is going to wonder, what’s the plug-in that you use for this link cluster here.

Brian: That one is Floating Social.

Andrew: Floating social, can we Google that quickly and try it?

Brian: You can get on WPMU.org I think.

Andrew: WPMU.org, and the plug-in that you’re suggesting is called Floating Social. Do you see it on here?

Brian: You have to go to plug-ins tab and you’ll see it on there.

Andrew: You know what, I don’t see it, but Andre (SP), you’re going to be putting together a collection of links for everyone who’s watching this course. Can you make sure to grab Floating Social even if…

Brian: I’m sorry, it’s wpmudev.org, so w-p-m-u-d-e-v.org. OK, I’m sorry…

Andrew: Yeah.

Brian: …and you’ll see it on there, and it’s plugs-ins, it’s called Floating Social. It’s one of their plug-ins in there.

Andrew: OK, all right, we’ll find that and of course, people will tell us in the comments if it’s not working for them, so now you were saying also that Crack does this really well. Let’s talk about Crack.

Brian: Yeah, any of the Crack ones. They do it [??] very, very good.

Andrew: All right, so what we’ve got there is a Crack post and, of course, they have pickers on every one of their numbers. The number tells me I need to keep, I mean the number in the headline tells me I need to scroll to see nine of them…

Brian: If you scroll to the bottom of the page, you’ll see what they do that’s really good also, scroll down a little more and you should get there in a second. Of course, it’s probably not going to do it on one, they are good usually, there, scroll just a little bit more, there you go. See page one of two, so they actually make you go to another page to keep reading, which is really good also. If I had longer ones, I’ll do the same thing.

Andrew: So as a user, that thing annoys the hell out of me. Why do I have to click on another page to artificially give them a page [??], but you’re saying that as a content creator, I need to respect the fact that if I get my users to click on one more page, I’m signaling to Google that these people didn’t just bounce off my site. They’ve engaged somehow, and that’s what you want us to take away from this, to use the photos to keep people engaged and scrolling, and to use the page numbers to keep people engaged and to indicate that engagement by clicking.

Brian: Right, that keeps the attention there, they’re actually interacting there. They’re doing stuff, they’re taking action and it’s just all better doing it that way.

Andrew: You know, let me see how well this has done for you actually. Oh, there it is actually, 203 Google Plus Ones, 753 Likes on Facebook for this post that uses the topics that you told us about, which is the numbers, the photos, the captions underneath that keep people scrolling.

Brian: Right, this one would do really well on Facebook. I remember it got shared a lot on Facebook. I think that one I got, no, there’s another one I did, I think it’s one or two before that one when I did the seven most fascinating internet marketers of 2011 or something like that and I got almost 6,000 visitors the day I put that one out, and sold about $16,000 worth of product that day from just doing that. That was kind of a cool little experiment, gets you a bunch of traffic really easily.

Andrew: All right, let’s go to the big board. We’ve seen on site techniques. Is there anything else that we need to talk about before actually we move on to the next one?

Brian: No, we hit those two things, they’re the most important ones for sure.

Andrew: OK, all right, then you tell us that we need to send out a press release and wait two days to put that out, two days after when?

Brian: Right, you put your blog post out, then two days later you put out a press release announcing that you put the blog post out, and what that does, your blog gets a chance to sit there and become the source for that press release and it also gets a little bit of stuff, you’re going to get some visitors from social media, from your regular readers and stuff who go in there and find it, and you do a press release, and when you’re doing the press release, you link right directly to that blog post.

Andrew: So I do a press release and we’re going to show the tools that you recommend that people use for it and we’ll tell the story of Vanilla Ice and how you did it for him, but I want to make sure that I understand this idea. The idea is, I write a blog post and then I send out a press release on that blog post?

Brian: Yep, I do every press release, every blog post I do, I do a press release on it.

Andrew: Really?

Brian: Every one.

Andrew: What does it cost you to do a press release?

Brian: Well, it depends. There are a couple of different services. For the blog post, I don’t do expensive ones unless it’s a really important blog. I’ll do the freebie ones and I go announce a free one on here and those I use free ones.

Andrew: I’ll take a look. What should I show people to help them see how [??]?

Brian: [??]. com.

Andrew: Sorry?

Brian: [??]. com is a free one and that one works really good just for stuff like this.

Andrew: What is the website, I’m sorry?

Brian: Prlog, P-R-L-O-G.com.

Andrew: There it is, prlog, is it prlog.org?

Brian: It could be. I thought it was .com, but it could be that.

Andrew: OK, I’ve got it up here on the screen, PRLog is the company, Press Release Distribution. This is free press release distribution. I just write it and they send it out?

Brian: Yeah, [??]…

Andrew: [??] press releases for one of your blog posts.

Brian: Yeah, so you’re just getting [??] on those. Those obviously aren’t going to get the same distribution as you would on one you’re paying several hundred dollars for, but it’s enough, the point of it is the story’s not going to get picked up, really not going to get picked up anywhere. It’s not the point. The point is to get those search engines and Google aware that there is stuff going on on that page. They’ll see a bunch of links from trusted news sites and that’s always a good thing.

Andrew: I see. OK. So we’re just trying to get more links and just trying to signal to Google that this is so important that there’s a press release out on it and that a few news sites are, that a few news sites are basically scraping these press releases and publishing them, they are also linking to you.

Brian: Right. The fact of, I guess, maybe the whole purpose, what we’re trying to mimic is what would really happen to a piece of really good content. So that, if you want your site, what would actually happen is a piece of your really good content, let’s say like a Tim Ferriss. Tim Ferriss put out some, you know, really good, new, you know, piece of content. What would happen? He would put the content up on his website? There would start to be some action on it. Then most likely he’d say, hey, news would come out and say, hey, there’s this press release, there was this blog post on Tim Ferriss’ site. Here’s kind of the story on it. Then, so that’s kind of where we are right now. As we go through this, you’re going to see the other steps that we use. But the whole purpose is just to mimic that exactly.

Andrew: Can I see a press release that you wrote for one of your blog posts, as long as I’ve got my blog, my web browser up?

Brian: Yeah. Let me pull one up real quick. I’ve got-

Andrew: And you’re writing your own press releases for your blog posts?

Brian: No, I have a, kind of a set formula that we follow. My V.A. does it.

Andrew: Oh, really? So you just have a plug-and-chug system that your virtual assistant takes it, converts your blog post into a press release. How do I get that? How do I get my hands on that for the audience?

Brian: Which one? The press release or the formula?

Andrew: The formula for the press release.

Brian: Oh, I can give you that. It’s, I’ll give you some samples of mine.

Andrew: OK. So let’s see a press release that you send out and the template that you use so that other people can learn how to create their own templates. I’ll tell you why, because it’s a pain in the butt to have to sit down and create a whole press release for each blog post. If we can give them a template so that they’re not staring at a blank piece of paper and trying to figure out how to fill it up, we’ve done half the work for them, maybe even more.

Brian: OK. No, I’m going to show you, I can tell you right now they’re not included [??] it’s pretty simple. We can just, you start off with, you know, Brian Horn, Publisher of beyondthepageone.com announces new blog post and then you put the title of your blog post in there. Then you put a, you know, two sentence summary in and then.

Andrew: Is this it?

Brian: Which one? That one?

Andrew: Let’s see, I think I might have one. Oh right. You’re not seeing the screen. Let me show you the screen right here. It seems like this is one of yours. All right, this looks like one of your press releases. Does this seem right?

Brian: Yeah, that’s one of, that’s actually one of, another person did for me when I hit, when my book hit on Amazon’s best-seller list, but that’s-

Andrew: It says Brian Horn, best-selling author and internet-marketing expert, along with a select group of leading marketing and business experts from around the world recently joined together to co-write and release the book titled The New Masters of Online Marketing. OK. This seems more like, let’s go back a page. I want one for just a blog post. Internet marketing guru consultant signs publishing deal.

Brian: I got one for you.

Andrew: OK. Yeah, yeah, send me.

Brian: I’m going to send it to you. I was trying to find it all of a sudden.

Andrew: I like how every step of the process you were sending out a press release.

Brian: You know, I’ve got one coming right here. It’s-

Andrew: I want to do that too. Not really, actually. I want someone else to do that for me.

Brian: Yeah, perfect. This is a perfect one.

Andrew: All right. It’s coming up in the chat box?

Brian: Yeah, coming in the chat box. This is exactly the formula that I use and how simple this thing is.

Andrew: Oh. OK. Here we go.

Brian: That’s actually, forward that.

Andrew: That’s the blog post that we just saw a moment ago.

Brian: Yeah. It’s for the blog post that we just saw.

Andrew: OK. Bam. Let’s go over to that page. Oh, alright. Very short. This isn’t at all what I thought. This is much simpler. Here, let me zoom in a little bit.

Brian: Yeah, no this couldn’t be any easier.

Andrew: OK. Beyondpageoneblog.com announces three small business tips learned from a little boy with Down Syndrome which is the post that you wrote about your son. Dateline February 8th, 2012. Emailwire.com. Portland, Texas. Brian Horn, editor and search engine marketing blog, editor of the search engine and marketing blog beyondpageone.com shares a personal story about his son Jackson that has Down Syndrome. Horn released a post last week titled Three Business Lessons Learned from a little boy with Down Syndrome, and that’s linked. Despite the fact that he has a learning disability, he’s taught me more in less than two years than any other person alive. I wanted to share a few lessons he taught me about running a business. I will share more of these lessons from time to time, states Horn. About Brian Horn and Beyond Page One Blog, and this is just [??] plate that you always use and I’m guessing that this right here on the bottom is either a grasshopper phone number or maybe even more likely a Google Voice phone number for this situation.

Brian: Yeah.

Andrew: Right? OK. I see. So this, I can pick out the template from this. This is not all hard.

Brian: Very, very easy, because again your point is you can add more but really with these I put more energy into the blog post earlier on and it was just a waste of time. It really wasn’t getting any juice out of it anyway, so instead of fudging all this stuff that nobody was really reading all that much, I just put basics in here and put a, one of the things that’s important in here if you pull that one back up, I can get it back up. Is like that quote, that quote of despite the fact that he has a learning disability, that quote right there is one, two, three, like four sentences that are a direct quote from that blog post.

Andrew: Ah, OK.

Brian: Google is aware of it. They are able to pick up and tell that that has now been cited. So this press release is citing an exact quote from that blog post. That gives that blog post a little extra credibility.

Andrew: I see. I see. By the way, I read that post, I think I must have seen it on Facebook, one of my friends or maybe more of them shared it with me. Really touching post and apart from what we’re learning from this course, I hope people go to your site and check it out. There’s a reason why it was shared 753 times. All right, and we’ll, of course, include it in the course notes so that people can take a look at it. All right, so tell me, before we move on from this, tell me a story so that I can really learn this. There was some Vanilla Ice incident that you can tell us about.

Brian: Yeah, let me, yes, we got a visual for that one also. At this point we’re going.

Andrew: This is the guy, the Vanilla Ice Project, what is it and what does it have to do with the CSO and the tactic that we just talked about.

Brian: Oh, the press release. That’s right, it was the press release. I’m working with a group that does work for Vanilla Ice’s latest project which is called the Vanilla Ice Project, it’s a TV show on the DIY network. There’s also a companion information product to help him promote. And we put his site live, we did a press release for it, OK? Just did a press release announcing, hey, this is Vanilla Ice, this is his new web site for this particular business he’s starting and that was basically it. We had just a flood of traffic that day. That day, that press release was the, or that story got to the home page of CNN, Fox News, NBC, CBS, ABC, Rolling Stone, Perez Hilton, TMZ, Time Magazine, it was one of the top stories on MSN, right, the little big banners right at the top. It was, we actually, they got traffic from TV and radio stations that were talking about it. It was just a huge, huge story that day and we got, yeah, that one day we got about 80,000 visitors.

Andrew: And so what I’m learning from this is yes, the press releases are great for getting Google juice, which is the ultimate goal of this interview or this program, I should say, this course. Which is to get search engine optimization secrets to rank high but you’re saying sometimes these press releases end up getting picked up by multiple news outlets which ends up sending even more traffic, according to me notes here you guys got, what does my research say, launched a website, did a press release and got 80,000 visitors to go to the site and got featured in all those other places that you talked about including TMZ and Time.

Brian: And the cool thing with that and that’s a harder one to duplicate. But if you have something that’s really kind of unusual and interesting you definitely want to do a press release on it.

Andrew: OK. So I’ve got two different press release sites here in my notes and on our website, the first we shows, where is that first one, the first one is…is this the first one? This is the first one. PRLog network. The second one is BusinessWire.com. What’s the difference between the two for our purposes?

Brian: The BusinessWire.com is the one that I consider the premier one. That is the best hands down press release service I think there is. Now, it’s not cheap. You’re going to spend several hundred dollars on a press release.

Andrew: OK.

Brian: But they have an automatic distribution that is just unparalleled. So you do it one time, you’re going to be on all, every major news site you can think of. Very, very good. The other one, PR Web, which is more well known by about everybody out there. That you can spend a couple of hundred bucks on a basic press release and you get really good distribution on that. That’s actually the one I used on the Vanilla Ice one, good distribution on that.

Andrew: You went to PR Web. So when you have something really good you go to PR Web and it seems to me like when you have something especially good, that when you go to BusinessWire.

Brian: Yeah.

Andrew: This is the spectrum. Anything that’s just a blog post, you’re not going to send to BusinessWire and pay money on but you are going to want a press release on so you’ll go if it’s just a blog post PRLog.org, if it’s a little more special, PRWeb.com. And PRWeb.com I can see is already starting to promote itself, not starting, it is promoting itself for search engine optimization purposes.

Brian: Oh, yeah.

Andrew: And then finally, the really good stuff you take to BusinessWire where you pay a little bit more but you get better distribution. That’s the break down of this. And the big take away is that even blog posts need to, maybe not need to, even blog posts can benefit from having a press release done about them.

Brian: Yeah, that’s another good point. Try to alternate them. So don’t always do, even on your website don’t always do PRWeb, you know, mix them up sometimes because each of those press release services has different distribution. There’s other free ones also. There’s, I’m going blank right now, but you can Google it and find any type of press release service and put your stuff out on those also. So kind of alternate those up as much as possible. I have about, you know, three or four different ones that I use. And there’s some services, there’s one that used to be active, I don’t think it is anymore, it’s called MassMediaCSO, I don’t know if they’re open still but there I think you pay like $97 a month you get unlimited press releases and they really do a lot of stuff for you.

Andrew: Hey, Brian, why did you tell us to wait two days after we publish a blog post before we send one out? Why don’t we just combine the two, do a blog post and at the same time send out a press release?

Brian: You want your blog to sit there and get the, become the source for everything else. because if you put that up there and you take, you write about it, and you have your quote, your citations from the blog post on your press releases and they start hitting about the same time, I just, I’ve done this and I don’t get as much juice out of it. When I have it sit there for a couple days and then do the press release it always works better for me. And if you could just think again about what would happen organically or naturally if there’s a really good blog post that went out there and it was there and the media picked up on it like a day or two later, it’s kind of like the standard MO of, the way things would happen. Not things go out at the exact same time. I’ve done it. That day, the day after, two or three days and more and just two days is where I seem to get the best results.

Andrew: All right. Onward. Next big idea is to use backlinking diversification to, in fact let me read it directly from the notes the way you guys had it in the prep. Create backlinking diversification to the original piece of contect, use book marks, blog comments, Wikis and blog networks to do this. Tell me about this tactic. What do we do here?

Brian: If you think about the way backlinking works to websites, backlinks are really the juice of what makes the site rank at the top where it’s been that way for a long time and it’s changing a little bit.

Andrew: Yeah, we’re going to talk about that.

Brian: Yeah.

Andrew: About social and what we’re going to do take advantage with Google’s fascination with social in a moment. But the backlinks are the cornerstone, OK.

Brian: Backlinks still are. The site that has the backlinking profiles are going to be at the top. The way to look at a backlinking profile is not the sheer volume of backlinks. It’s not who has the most, wins. Or who has the specific kind, wins. It’s who has the best profile.

Andrew: OK.

Brian: And what you’re going to look at, and this is something when we did the initial interview a couple weeks ago, this is before any of this stuff happens. It’s just, I have always hammered the point of backlink diversity and that just means having a wide variety of links going back into your site, not just all articles or blog networks or all Wikis or whatever your type of backlinking, not doing all the exact same thing. And if you do that you run a chance of getting smacked hard where if you’re falling and something happened in the last couple weeks where Google went and de-indexed all the blog networks. I mean, they hammered a bunch of them, and they de-indexed thousands and thousands of sites that people were using for years to build their links and all of a sudden they were completely gone because they relied on this one method of backlinking.

Versus if you, think of this as you will your financial portfolio, you wouldn’t just put all of your money into, or just say if you did like five years ago put every penny you had into real estate in Las Vegas you’d be screwed right now. You would have nothing left. But if you put a little bit into real estate in Vegas, put a little bit into the stock market, put a little bit into gold and some into foreign exchange sites. So if you would be fine right now.

Andrew: Let me use my telestrator, right here to see if I can illustrate what you’re saying. Now why is the telestrator not letting me change color? All right, wait, clear, hang on, I got this. All right, so, anyone in the past who might have just gone for this piece right here and only that piece, when Google made the changes recently they would have been wiped out. They wouldn’t have had any traffic. So you’re telling us to go for this piece and to go for this piece and to go for this, which is URL and we get articles. We just talked about press release and dot com and dot gov, and you’ve got something there that we’re going to talk about later on. Internal links, you want us to have them all in case one goes under, we’re going to have the other legs of our stool holding us up.

Brian: Right. You just want to, you just want to have every, you want to have as many as possible. When you think about the way a, the top sites that are out there, the ones who really get natural links, they don’t just get one kind of link. They don’t just have, all just, you know, blogs liken to them. They’re going to have the social signals. They’re going to have press release stuff. They’re going to have, you know, links from all different types of places, and that’s what you want to do.

Andrew: I see. All right, anything else on this topic? Do we have any, yes, we do. Do you want to talk about the domain that’s been around since 1990s? Do you know what I’m talking about there? Do you want to see the telestrator [SP] again, maybe?

Brian: We can do the telestrator. I’m going to get that exact because we paid a lot of money for that one. So I’m not going to give that one.

Andrew: You mean you’re not going to do the actual name?

Brian: This is a premium domain name of a [??] almost valuable, one of the most valuable terms out there, very, very, it’s in a real estate niche. I’ll give that one.

Andrew: OK.

Brian: Very, very, good term. That one had been sitting around for a long time, never, you know, a whole lot of stuff didn’t really happen with it. It was, you know, it had some recognition just because it was exact matches, like on page 2 or 3, but not really any traffic. We bought it. I threw it onto, I started doing the backlinking for it, my typical method, and then it’s already at the, getting good traffic. It’s already, I think we’re at number 5 right now for this, and it’s been a few months.

Andrew: OK.

Brian: Yes, the backlinking diversity is absolutely everything.

Andrew: Right. We have some sites we’re going to talk about, but first let me just quickly do some very important, I’ve got to try the telestrator one more time to [??] on me. I want to look at that. How’s that? Can you see that on your screen too?

Brian: I see your glasses now.

Andrew: This is very important stuff, to make sure it doesn’t get in there. Let me get rid of the telestrator. That’s a cool tool. I’ve got all kinds of tools in here. This is finally starting to, I mean, I finally have the tools to do stuff here.

Brian: Yeah.

Andrew: Like, blur.

Brian: Oh, look at you.

Andrew: That’s pretty good, right?

Brian: It looks better.

Andrew: I got it, hang on, city lights, I don’t know what that is. All right, back to the sites. So, what is this? What is majesticseo.com and what does it have to do with what you and I are talking about here? What does it do exactly?

Brian: This is a tool you can use to check your backlinking profile. You can, if you can, if you want to put something in there you can put in whatever website you want to and then we can go back. We can look and see what your backlinking profile looks like.

Andrew: All right, so I just typed in my own domain. Backlinks reviews on non-cumulative basis. What does this mean right here, this drop? Is that because, is that right?

Brian: Well, it’s, I can’t see what that-

Andrew: You can’t see it. It’s too, here, hang on, I also have another tool right here to zoom in.

Brian: I may have [??] down also.

Andrew: There you go. Can you see that or is that too small still?

Brian: No, that’s, I can see that now.

Andrew: Well, maybe that’s not even my real graph. Maybe this is, no it is, it does look like a real graph.

Brian: No, that’s over the last 30 days, so that’s just how many backlinks that give reviews for your sites, unless you had a big, [??] it’s going to stay at that level.

Andrew: OK.

Brian: So that’s-

Andrew: So, yeah. Go, go-

Brian: What should I be looking at here.

Andrew: Scroll up a little bit more. We’re going to look at the, look at your top backlinks.

Brian: Just click over.

Andrew: Yeah. OK.

Brian: Oh, right. You’re not a subscriber. Shoot.

Andrew: I see. OK. Domains. Can I see that? No, you have to be a subscriber.

Brian: If you want to, can we share my, [??] over and I can show my, or is that not a-

Andrew: Oh, you want to log in, how do we do that?

Brian: I can do it in Skype. Hang on. Let me just get, pull this, let me get logged in on my thing.

Andrew: You’re going to log me in and give me a URL?

Brian: OK. Let me see. Yeah, I can give you my-

Andrew: Did you use the same user name and password as you use for everything for this one?

Brian: I think so, yeah. If you want.

Andrew: Then I was going to say give me the user name and password.

Brian: OK. It should, I was going to say, I know what password is, but I don’t know what the log-in is on this one. OK. Good. I’m glad you, we checked. There’s the log-in and [??].

Andrew: All right. I will log in. Did you change your password? I don’t want to get your super-secret password for everything and then, oh boy, alright. I see what you just gave me. All right, where do I, I log in right here?

Brian: Just put the log in. You should be able to jump in there.

Andrew: OK. Your secret’s safe with me. I will not reveal to anyone what this super-secret stuff is. It looks like, actually, it looks like you really just gave me your, let me look at, the, let me see your reaction as I say this. You gave me your real user name and password for everything.

Brian: After this one for sure.

Andrew: All right. So this isn’t the same one that you use for your Gmail account and everything else is it?

Brian: No, no.

Andrew: OK. All right, so now I’ve got us logged in. The audience can’t see.

Brian: No, this does not go to Gmail at all.

Andrew: OK. This is not everything password.

Brian: Oh, no, no.

Andrew: We are logged in. We now get to see Majestic SEO as you see it. Look, I’m even going to X out so I don’t save your user name and password. Get rid of that. OK. So, what am I looking at here? First do you want me to go to top backlinks?

Brian: Yeah, go to top backlinks and go [??] end up having to and scroll down this page a little bit. This shows you all the, I’m not going to scroll, zoom in a little bit so everybody can see what you’re, OK, so-

Andrew: OK. I’m going to zoom in.

Brian: This shows all your links going back into your site and what the anchor text is.

Andrew: Oh, I see. OK, so the top one is Mixergy. The word Mixergy anchor text on Y-combinator and that’s an AC rank of 9. That’s because when you go to ycombinator.com there’s a Mixergy link right at the top linking to Paul Graham, the founder of the Y-Combinator site. Number two is the biography of WordPress with Matt Mullenweg, which is from Wikipedia. Does that count by the way, the Wikipedia link?

Brian: They all count. The Wikipedia links are no follow links. They still count.

Andrew: They still count even though they’re not following?

Brian: Yes. Yes. They count. Again, if you think about the natural, you know, the way the web works, there’s a bunch of, you know, no following links, but if you don’t have those they don’t look natural. It doesn’t look naturally, so they certainly count.

Andrew: All right, so what, now I’m understanding how this works and I see that it’s all ranked by importance. What are users supposed to do with this once they sign up and get this stuff?

Brian: I’m going to show you. I might have to go somewhere else.

Andrew: All right, and then what else should we be taking a look at here?

Brian: I’ll have to check this with this person. OK. Look. Go onto, scroll to the top.

Andrew: Yes.

Brian: Click on reports and tools.

Andrew: Reports and tools.

Brian: On the very top.

Andrew: OK. I see it. OK. Yes.

Brian: Scroll down and click on the one that says legalnurse.com.

Andrew: Which one dot com?

Brian: Legalnurse.com like-

Andrew: Legalnurse.com. OK.

Brian: OK. So click on that. Now scroll down a little bit. Now this is what you’re going to look like. When you write a report for your site you’re looking at this top anchor text one. You can see these are all the anchor texts coming back into your website. Now if you pull this up, this is an example of a good one. Everything is done very naturally, very cleanly, for this one, where their main terms are not overly done. For instance, if you would say you had a [??] lose belly fat type website and you would see their anchor text, number one at the top would be overwhelmingly at the top for lose belly fat. When you do that you run the risk of getting smacked because it’s not natural. You want to keep this natural. The thing you want to look at is when you pull this up you don’t want there to be an overabundance of any one thing.

Andrew: OK. In here what we’re saying is they don’t have any one thing sending them more traffic, any one thing dominating. We see where they’re getting their traffic. Actually we see the anchor text that they’re using and we see the referral domains. Actually it doesn’t look like a incezzine [SP]. I don’t even know what that is. Anyway 33 external links. Tripods giving them 4. All right, I get the big picture here. The big picture is diversify your links. I get that. I have the rudimentary understanding of Majestic SEO is a tool that will allow me to see where I’m getting my links, which links are most valuable to me, what anchor text is being used. Do you want to go onto the next one or is there something else on this site?

Brian: No, we can go onto the next one.

Andrew: The next webpage, what is this one? Let me see. Blog Comment Demon. What does this have to do with?

Brian: This is a way, if somebody wants to get some easy, they’re on a budget, and they’re wanting to get some links, there’s really no, the type of link you’re going to have to do to be really competitive is you’re going to have to get somebody, like myself, or another person to really do this stuff for you. If you’re on a budget and you’re kind of starting off this is a cool little tool to get some easy links, I think it’s $67 or something like that. It’ll go out and it’ll find, it’ll search for blogs in your niche and it’ll search for key words you want to rank for, pull them all down into the program and you can click on the links within the software and go out and you can automatically add comments to blog posts that then link back in to your content so…

Andrew: So it will automate commenting on other people’s blogs and as a result as a result of having this automation I could have more comments out on more blogs and as a result of having all those comments having links back to me I end up getting more Google juice and it helps me rank higher. You’re saying that the guy who flew you in first class and put you up across the street at his special guest house, that guy’s not using this kind of software, but he’s having you do it and having people do it manually for him, but if we can’t hire people like you to fly out first class to our home and stay at our guest house and we still need to get this done, there is a tool that you are recommending. It’s Blog Comment Demon.com You recognize that a lot of people who teach SEO would never talk about this publicly.

This is the kind of thing that you’re supposed to say, when you even introduce it you say “This is what other people use, and you don’t even need to use this. What you should be doing instead is not using this tool that automates it and gets it all done quickly. What you should be doing instead is commenting and naturally having conversations with people. Do not use this tool at blog comment demon.com.” In other words what most people would do is they’d have a back handed way of teaching that this tool exists without potentially tainting themselves with that tactic. You’re open, you’re saying “Hey you know what? I’m cutting the BS, I’m going to tell you exactly how we do it.”

Brian: Yeah, this is a cool too, this is, I’ve used this one for years and I’ve gotten other software developed for myself now that I use, I’m not using this one anymore. But this is one I recommend for the people out there that don’t have the money to go through the bigger one. There’s other tools out there that are more, you know, far more expensive that you can use. But this one, if you have a, if you’ve got more time than dollars, this is a cool, good little tool. I think with this one also you can get some good, you can get traffic back to your site also with this, because you’re just finding other blogs in your niche and you’re commenting on good blog posts. You have a link back to your website, people are going to click on that and come back. I’ve gotten plenty of traffic off of using this technique before.

Andrew: All right. I see it, you don’t have any concern about being associated with black hat tactics? We’re going to talk in a moment, this is the next tactic, the social sharing. Later on we’re going to talk about black hat hacks. You don’t have any issue, no problem with being associated with black hat? You just want to give people information that you have.

Brian: Yeah, it’s fun stuff. One of the fun parts of SEOs, not all the white hat procedure stuff we’re talking about, it’s good in that’s what I do for a majority of my clients, because their websites or their big money sites are the ones that provide the majority of their income off of, and they’re not going to risk it by these little black hat tricks. But, the black hat tricks are fun, and if you have a little site you want to experiment with, go all for it.

Andrew: They use it on their own little site and if it works bring it on to your main site. That’s what you recommend.

Brian: Yeah, I’ve always said to really watch using this on money sites. You kind of, you use it on sites that you’re OK that a year or two down the road, a couple months down the road something happens.

Andrew: By the way, how loud is the person who has the office right down the hall from me? Every time they shut the door I see the level on my mic go up. Yeah, does it have to be shut with such force? Can’t they just gently shut it and walk in and sit down? They must really hate their job, it must be one of those things, “Dammit if you make me do this job I’ll do it but I’m not going to be SLAM happy!” All right. I always wonder if people hear it. In the comments guys, let me know.

Brian: Yeah I hear it sometimes.

Andrew: Next big idea: use social sharing.

Brian: Yes, sir.

Andrew: All right. Social sharing, to use social sharing to signal to search engines that you are important, and you’ve got a couple ways to do that. Tell me how you use it before we get into the tool that we have up on the big board on the right.

Brian: Yeah, the big, the social sharing aside from what we talked about earlier, having the widget on the side for the little plug-in on your sites to make it really is to share, is you’ve got to get that signaling going on. And unless you already have a hot list or a big email list you can get to go on there and do stuff, you’ve got to kind of fudge it a little bit or fake it a little bit. There are two services out there that I know.

The one that I’m using right now that is just crushing it for me is social adder dot com. It’s socialadr.com. You can get a free, there’s free membership and then there is several levels of paid membership. I think the most expensive one is $140 or something like that, a month. Which I have several accounts with them with that one. But what this is, this is a crowd sources socail media sharing. So basically, the people that want to join for free, in order to get their own stuff shared, they got to do other work and show people stuff. They’ve got to re-Tweet people’s links, re-Tweet their posts.

Andrew: I see.

Brian; They’ve got to give it Facebook likes, plus ones on Google plus ones, or do bookmarking and because these are real accounts, these are real people doing this stuff if they’re not bots, so there’s nothing that can possibly be done to clamp down on this, or to tell the difference. You really can’t tell the difference. Now the Tweets, when they Tweet, they do put some type of mention in there that it is an ad of some sort, but other than that they just look totally natural and I’ve seen just ridiculously good results with this.

Andrew: So, these are people who are both Tweeting and what else are they doing? Blogging?

Brian: No, they either, there’s Tweets, they share like bookmarking, they can bookmark it.

Andrew: I see.

Brian: Facebook like. Google plus ones.

Andrew: So they’re all doing it to each other for free. I do it for you, you do it for me and we both do it for a third person who then does it for both of us. If you have time, that’s the way you get the free service and that’s what a lot of people on Social Lady are doing, social adder. What you’re doing instead is saying, I don’t have time to individually book mark all these people’s sites and I have no interest in doing it, but I’m willing to pay a little bit of money and have all these guys book mark for me. And when they do book mark for me they get credits which enables them to get other people to book mark for them. They work for free, I pay a little bit.

Brian: Yeah, so when you get, I mean by you get thousand, a little more than a thousand I think or close to a thousand actions a month for like $150 a month, something like that. So it’s really inexpensive.

Andrew: So, $150 gets me a thousand actions, meaning Tweets.

Brian: Something like that.

Andrew: Tweets, bookmarks. Can you tell the story of why this was significant recently for one of your clients. The guy calls you up and says what? What happened to him?

Brian: Guy calls me up. He’s been a client of mine for a bit. He’s been at the top of Google for a very long time for a term that’s about 4 million searches a month, so one keyword and calls me on a Sunday night and says, I’m gone. Says, we’re gone, we’re completely gone off the top of Google. We’re down around like page 5.

Andrew: So he goes from being at the top, number one, number three, suddently he’s on page 5. Humiliation.

Brian: Right, which is invisible, your dead then. There’s nothing. His other terms were OK and what ended up happening, this ended up before he came to me he was using a lot of blog network stuff and once those were wiped out that ended up being the reason he dropped down, we didn’t know at the time but that’s what had happened. But so, I’m an CSO syndicate, we’re a bunch of all CSO people that test that stuff out all the time and we’d always been talking about this social signaling being more and more important.

Once this happened we kind of figured out what the reason was for it. OK, social signaling, I’m going to test that out to bring that guy back. So I just went and got him his own social adder account and threw everything I could at this one and not just at the home page but put in a whole bunch of sub-pages, again you want it to look natural. And he was bounced back up very, very quickly. Within a few days he was back at the top. Now, since then there has been other de-indexation stuff so he’s gone down a little bit. We’re throwing more at that one and it continually pushes him back up as soon as we do that. And since I did that, I’ve done several other sites with that one, it’s worked with every single one. Every site I’ve used that on has come up.

Andrew: OK. and the reason is that search engine now say if there is a lot of sharing it means the site is more valuable and if the site is more valuable we want to show it higher in search results and the way that you get around waiting for people to individually share your stuff is you go to Social Adder and you have them share both your main site and all the sub sites within, all the subpages within your site and that’s how you get his site to rise up.

Brian: Right.

Andrew: It is just a constant, never ending game though because like you said, you do that and then Google does something else and then. But, if you want, if you want to play the game, this is the way the game is played. This is at least the way the game is played behind the scenes. This is the kind of stuff that people don’t like saying publicly that they do.

Brian: Right, but I think it’s a constant chess game and you know, Google is always, you know a few steps ahead but as soon as something happens our community can get together and figure something out then, you know, within a week or two we usually figure out what the big change was and now it’s even faster. With enough of us with the groups I’m in, we’ve got 10s of 1,000s of sites between all of us that we do different things on. Once a big change happens we are able to go back in and figure out the sites that got wiped and wiped out the ones that didn’t and determine exactly what happened. Actually, if we have time right now I’ve got another, a big reveal to everybody.

Andrew: I’ve got time for it. We have these two big ideas we’re going to go to, and we will make sure to include, but if you have a big reveal.

Brian: Yeah. Let me give this one before I give you the Black Hats, because this is not Black Hat. It’s a good little transition from what we were just talking about. With these last shake-ups that just happened, one of the things that was noticed was that some sites were doing exactly the same thing that were using Google Analytics and Google Webmaster tools were de-indexed while ones doing the exact same type of link building, content hosting, everything exactly the same, but the non-Google Analytics ones were saved, and did not get knocked out.

Andrew: Oh, really?

Brian: Right now I am taking every one of my sites and all my client sites off Google Analytics and off Google Webmaster tools. Getting all of them completely off them.

Andrew: I see. If you don’t want Google to stop you from doing these gray area things, don’t show then what you’re doing by installing Google Analytics and Webmaster tools on your site.

Brian: Right. I’m getting everything off. Even my completely white-hat clean ones. Everything off, just because there is no good that can come of it. I’m getting this for you right now. I’m getting this link.

Andrew: How confident are you about this, that Google Analytics is being used to catch people who are doing the wrong thing?

Brian: I am very confident.

Andrew: You are? Confident enough to rip it off your sites.

Brian: You are just giving them too much. You’re giving them information you don’t have to. I just sent you a link. There’s an open source tool, open source service with the exact same things as Google Analytics. You can get it for free, and it’s not tied into Google at all.

Andrew: Open source analytics. Let’s take a look at it. I’ll type it in right here.

Brian: You can Google all your information when you’re using Google Analytics. You’re giving them absolutely every bit of information about your business. They know how much traffic you’re getting, how much your leads are worth, what type of marketing you’re doing. They just know absolutely every little thing about you.

Andrew: This is the free open source web analytics package that you recommend called piwik.org. P-I-W-I-K dot org. I can see right here that this is what people would download and install on their sites.

Brian: Right. Download it and install it. It’s not particularly difficult to set up. It gives you very similar stuff to Google Analytics. Obviously, Google Analytics has a much bigger brand behind it and will have more to offer, but for most you people out there this will work.

Andrew: All right. Let’s include that in the program notes, and let’s go on to the next big idea?

Brian: Yes.

Andrew: All right. We’ve got two Black Hat, or I guess they’ve all pretty much, to be honest with you, have been Black Hat up until now, but these are the two you especially marked as Black Hat.

Brian: In my definition, let me think over what I’m calling Black Hat and what my thoughts are. The stuff I’m going to share with you is not malicious. You’re not hurting anybody else’s site. You’re not doing anything that’s detrimental or hurtful to another person or another company, which is where I draw the line at. I’ll do stuff that’s kind of fun, but it’s never anything that will hurt anybody else. We’re not going around hacking anybody else’s website or doing a link injection stuff or anything that’s bad.

Andrew: All right. Let’s take a look at them. What’s the first one.

Brian: I think there’s a lot of stuff, and it’s not evil.

Andrew: First one? You go. You take it.

Brian: The first one you have listed there is at . . .

Andrew: I’ll go for it. For instant authority back links and brand building, use dot E-D-U sites. Dot E-D-U means, of course, educational websites, but you have a specific way of getting our links on those edu sites. What’s that way? What’s that method?

Brian: That way is using a cool open source software that everybody is familiar with and have probably used it several times themselves, but college campuses use it a tremendous amount, and that’s using a Wiki, which is an open source software that Wikipedia is build off of. It’s just a software that anybody can get on, add content, edit existing content, and universities use that, like students will put those up for different projects they’re working on for a particular class project for one year. They will put one up, and everybody will be able to share content and ideas that way and keep it all in one central place.

Now what happens is sometimes also left wide open, when you don’t have to have a username and a password to create or edit content after after a couple years, or a year after the projects gone they don’t close it down it just sits there is wide open. Nobody is using it anymore, so you’re not hurting anything, but you’re able to go get in there and put your content in there. What’s cool about this I’ve gotten these from Harvard and Yale and Princeton and Purdue… everywhere, and what that means is I’m going to put my content in on those sites and get a back-link to it, back link to my site, from all these big major EDUs, which looks great because you’re having some really, really high trust in domains, .edu domains, leading back to your site.

Andrew: All right, so if I’ve got this right… in fact before I sum this up and show that list that you’ve put together for the audience, I think, are you on a Mac?

Brian: Yes.

Andrew: OK. Great, we should put your Skype on “Do Not Disturb” just so it doesn’t make noise every time someone comes on from your Skype list. It’s right at the top of your screen, click the green bubble, select the red bubble from the drop down and go to “Do Not Disturb” which won’t bring up noise when people come on and off.

Brian: And then what’s… I’ve never put this one on before, I’m sorry.

Andrew: No, no problem, a lot of people, this is the first time that we’ve done it and, I mean you and I have done it anyway.

Brian: Do not disturb… OK I got it, we’re on do not disturb.

Andrew: All right. So I can see this, right? A lot of schools decide that they’re going to put up a Wiki so that their students can all collaborate on some project, maybe they’re all going to do a business class together, maybe they’re all going to talk about a science experiment together, they set up a Wiki on their .edu domain, it’s our-school.edu/Wikiforscienceproject, use it, they’re done using it, next semester comes in, the thing is just sitting there, no one is using it at all. And you say, well guys, here’s a black hat tactic, go to this Wiki, and we’ll show them how they can find some of these Wikis, go to those Wikis, and add your links with the right anchoring texts.

What you’re going to get is an authoritative link from a .edu website, an education website which has a lot of authority, with the anchor text that you want, and I asked your before the session, what’s a quick way for us to show people how to find these wikis and you put together a list that we’re going to give out to people but we should also explain that this is probably going to get blown out very quickly, meaning that a lot of people who are taking this session or who know Brian are going to use these links and then they won’t be effective anymore when the schools shut them down. You know what, I’m not sure how I feel about this but I’m much more for open education than I am for expressing how I feel about every tactic we teach. But here’s one, this is on Tenooki, oh this is .eu, not .edu. I want an edu one.

Brian: Look at this, there’s a Berkeley one more up to the top.

Andrew: Edu, there we go. All right. Let’s take the very first one that happened to come up here.

Brian: OK.

Andrew: Actually I think they shut this one down.

Brian: These things are blowing up pretty, they get knocked out quick.

Andrew: There it goes. Now this one is on an… is this an edu site? If it ends in .tw?

Brian: I can’t say…

Andrew: You know what, the main idea is this: find it, create an account in the upper right right here, you can see that you can create an account, create a page within this Wiki and add your links, do it as normally as you can. That’s what people are doing right now.

Brian: Yep.

Andrew: What else do we have? You’ve got this whole list. My sense is that after we post this it’s going to stop working and people are going to have to learn how to Google for .edu sites that have mediaWiki installed on them. This is media Wiki right? Yeah, there it is, powered by media Wiki. All right. Are you using some sites like this right now? Some edu Wikis right now and having them point to your customers?

Brian: I don’t do this for my customers, this is more just one of the fun things that I like

Andrew: That you do for your throw away sites.

Brian: Right. Yeah, It’s more fun to just be able to, you know, I just like to be able to figure out little things like this, little link building techniques that are kind of, you know just fun things to figure out how to do. It’s out of, you’re doing it just to figure out the method of doing it.

Andrew: Here they are actually. All right, Andrea will have this and she will add to the course notes so that people can take a look at this. This full list here instead of trying to take notes as we go. I think that’s pretty much it, let’s go on to the big board then and our last tactic. It’s also a black hat tactic and this one is control Google’s suggested search. Suggested search is this: when you type in, what’s a good one for me to type into Google for suggestive search just to illustrate what we’re trying to…

Brian: Just type in your name.

Andrew: OK, Andrew Warner and suggested search is Mixergy and Twitter.

Brian: There you go.

Andrew: OK, right. Let’s see what happens when I type in your name Brian, by the way, Brian Horn.

Brian: Do space.

Andrew: Oh, space Brian Horn. Wow Brian Horn Linkarati [sp], Brian Horn trial, was there a Brian Horn trial?

Brian: Yes [?] Brian Horn that murdered somebody, it’s not me.

Andrew: Is this you? Are you a murderer, Brian?

Brian: I am not.

Andrew: I just want to ask you the question. No, this is not you.

Brian: That’s one of the things I need to go back and get fixed once this trial’s over with.

Andrew: Oh I see. [??] compete with them but if I do just Brian Horn space, I get Brian Horn Wow, Brian Horn Linkarati, Brian Horn Lincoln Financial. All right, you’re saying we can control this and you control this for your clients.

Brian: Right. What you do is there’s a, all you have to do is have more searches the terms you want then there are going on nationally.

Andrew: So, basically what there is there saying what are people searching for with Brian, with the name, with the key word, key phrase, excuse me, Brian Horn in front of it and its most peoples searching for Brian Horn trial so we’ll suggest that. The second most common type in phrase with Brian Horn in the beginning is Brian Horn Wow and then third is Brian Horn Linkarati so you’re saying if we can just get more people typing in the phrase we want our phrase will show up higher then the phrase that we don’t want. How do we do that? I don’t have enough time to sit and type this in.

Brian: Right, it’s all based just on current volume searches. It’s not based on strength of websites or quality. It’s just based on strength and volume of searches. [?] have more searches for your stuff for other stuff so websites are doing micro-tests. Amazon mechanical Turk is one and the one I like to use for this is a shorttask.com. And this one you can go through and put in, when I did this back in 2010, I was in the middle of a launch. I just started launching and all of the sudden the top suggestion returned my name and was scam and I, Brian Horn Scam, when you click on that there’s no pages for it at all. There’s nothing. So nobody posted content and putting a bounty up there.

A lot of people were, as a launch there were tens of thousands of people hearing about me for the first time so they didn’t know who Brian Horn was and checking to make sure I wasn’t a scam artist. So I went to Short Task and put in $200 and for five cents a search I was able to pay five cents a search to get my searches put on and I was able to get after about two days it was completely wiped out all of the five terms that I picked in there were all the terms that were showing up underneath my name.

Andrew: I see.

Brian: So all I don’t was this and there are a lot of cool ways you can do this. When I did mine I was just trying to get it off of there so I picked my name I put Facebook and Twitter and then my product Brian Horn SEO and that was it. You can do some really cool stuff. That’s what I’ve done for clients for this one is we put in their name and the phrase free gift afterwards and that would take them right, so you’re going to search for somebody and you can put in the term free gift, you can take them right to a squeeze page that normally would not be able to rank for anything and send them right to your best converting page possible.

Andrew: I see. I see. All right and of course since there are other people searching for that word and there aren’t other people typing in Mixergy gift, if I create the one page that’s called Mixergy free gift and I get people to type in on Short Task Mixergy gift over and over that becomes a suggested key word that starts with Mixergy and when people type it in they see the one page that I typed up and when they click on that they go to the page that I want to give me their email address on or to buy. So you just go in here, its five cents per search. You’re just saying look, I will pay anyone five cents if they type in the search exactly as I do it. They type it in, they collect their five cents. They do this over and over across multiple people. You start getting your suggested key phrase in there as you want it.

Brian: Yeah. The task in there is, I trying to remember exactly what it is, you’re asking, the way stuff has to happen go in here search for this particular term and then inside this answer box paste the website comes up at the top of the search results. That just makes sure they go in and do it and it just takes them a couple seconds to do it. That’s how you set up that particular task up. And then you just set several of the up. Set three or four of those up and you will own the suggested search terms, on only the search.

Andrew: All right. These have really been fun tactics to talk about. This is the kind of thing that most of us talk about, and I get to hear a lot about stuff like this at conferences over a beer.

Brian: Yeah.

Andrew: But I don’t get to hear it in interviews, and I don’t get to hear it in courses. If you ask me after we hit stop, after I stop recording, if you say, “Andrew, can you edit out this one piece”, I’m not going to do it. So, let’s stay friends and not ask for it.

Brian: I love sharing this. This is a fun one.

Andrew: This is a fun one.

Brian: Yeah. [??]

Andrew: I urge people to go check it out, and the reason I don’t want to is because I think these are all fine. We’ve got to share what’s inside information, and I want people to also get more than this, and that’s why I recommend that they check out On Page 1.com [SP], and one is the number one, the numeral one.

Brian: Onpage1blog.com.

Andrew: Excuse me. Onpagel.com, Onpage1blog.com where you can see some of these tactics in action, and you can learn about others. How does it feel for you to have done this?

Brian: Great.

Andrew: Good. Me, too.

Brian: I love sharing this kind of stuff with everybody. That’s the real fun of what we’re doing. Once I get to a certain spot, with SEO I can tell people, I can explain to them exactly what I do, and it really wouldn’t make a difference because the people are either not going to go out and do it or I’ll be able to do it better than most people. Even if I’m not, there are so many people out there that need it in different niches and stuff. It’s not going to hurt my bottom line at all to share with people.

If somebody hears one of these tips in here that enables them to just make that one little change and use this last tip and send more traffic to a free gift to really have a squeeze page and be able to get a couple more customers out of it each week, that’s awesome.

Andrew: I was pointing because that was a door again being shut in anger.

Brian: Oh, I see.

Andrew: You know what? I should have asked you before we started. Is there another secret, another tactic that you can share with people via email if they go over to your site and hit the contact page and say thank you to you. I keep wanting people to connect with the guests. Is there something else that you can link them to that would work or you can tell them?

Brian: Yeah. I’ll have something set up on that page. We have all those Wikis listed. I’ll have something set up on there for them.

Andrew: OK. All right. And this is the page right here, on contact on the site. If you want to connect with him and say thank you, I’m going to do it right here. I’m going to say, Brian, thanks for being so open in this course with me. The ones that are open are the ones that are the most fun for me to do, and that’s why I had such a good time doing this one. I’m looking forward to the results from the audience. Guys, use these ideas and then let us know what you think. Let me know about the results that you get. I love getting emails like that.

Thank you for being a part of this. Brian, thanks.

Brian: Thank you so much.

Master Class: How to control what appears when someone Googles you
(Even if you have nothing to hide)
Taught by Patrick Ambron of Brand Yourself

Report issues here

Master Class:
Personal SEO


About the course leader

Patrick Ambron, who is the co-founder and CEO of Brand Yourself. Brand Yourself is the first do it yourself platform that makes it easy for anyone to take control of their Google results.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

About.me

Squarespace

Meetup

LookUpPage

Personal SEO Tactics

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to control what people see when they Google you, and it’s led by Patrick Ambron, who is the co-founder and CEO of Brand Yourself. Let’s bring Brand Yourself up here. Brand Yourself is the company, it’s the first do it yourself platform that makes it easy for anyone to take control of their Google results. Patrick and I will be talking about how you can do this on your own. My name is Andrew Warner, I’ll help facilitate, and I’m the founder of Mixergy.com where proven founders like Patrick teach. Patrick, I know my audience, they’re going to say, “Who cares? What’s the problem that this is solving?”. And the problem that this is solving has something to with what happened with your co-founder, can you tell the audience what happened with him?Patrick: Yeah when we were in college, my co-founder and at the time friend, Pete, he couldn’t get an internship. We couldn’t figure out why until he realized that these employers were Googling him and they were mistaking him for a drug dealer. Someone with the same name from around the same area, you know, who sold drugs, and everybody thought it was Pete. And we realized then that Google is an incredibly important part of your reputation, but unless you knew how SEL works, and most people don’t, or have thousands of dollars to pay a reputation company, there was nothing you can do.Now, I had a background in SEL and was able to help Pete out but we realized that there were a lot of people who had similar problems, whether they were being mistaken for someone else or just had something embarrassing out there about them, or just they were being Googled by an employer and because it was all irrelevant or somebody else with their name or whatever it was, they were missing an opportunity to make a strong first impression in that moment.Andrew: Right, and in my case I know there’s, Andrew Warner’s not the most unique name out there and so when people were searching me in the beginning they would come up with the magician, who I think is in Ohio, great guy but, you know not related to me. I want them to know about me. Or they would see some random photo that someone took of me at a party, which makes me look like a crazy person, but because you know, it makes me look like a crazy person, more people were linking to it, and as we’ll see that meant that more people were viewing it on Google.

So, it’s not necessarily that you in the audience, you the member who’s watching this, who we’re fighting for in putting this together for, it’s not necessarily that there’s an axe murderer out there that’s got the same name and when people Google for you they end up seeing his story instead and confusing it with yours. That’s one example, another example is frankly you want to control which pages about you come up first. And as a result of what Patrick did, here in fact, this is what it’s like right now let me bring it up. This is the Google search result, for Patrick, for your co-founder. How many of his results does he own right now? I see the first one is his home page, the second one is his Linked In profile, Twitter after that, how many of those results are him?

Patrick: Yup, and as you can see Pete now owns the first sixty five results with positive relevant things that really put his best foot forward when he’s looked up.

Andrew: Absolutely. And, just so people know, you have the experience here because not only have you done this for people individually but you also run a business, in fact here’s the business right here, where you do this, you automate a lot of what we’re about to teach people, you do it for them. What do you guy’s charge?

Patrick: The product’s free. I mean that was our whole mission, was when Pete had the problem, I used to do it for businesses as a service, but I said when it comes to people, no one should have to pay a lot of money to control their own search results. So we created this software that makes it really easy for you to do the whole process yourself, and it’s maybe, it’s even actually fun. But it’s a free product with some premium features, but most people get everything they need for free.

Andrew: OK. All right, and we’re going to show them how they can do it themselves here, and of course using Brand Yourself is one tool that they could use or if they say, “Hey, I don’t want to feel as if they’re selling me anything, I refuse to use Brand Yourself”, they can use everything, you in the audience can use anything and everything in here to do this for yourself and to really just own your search results. So when people search for you they find you, and they find the best stuff about you that’s out there. And this is the big outline that we’re going to use. We’re going to talk to you about an overview of how SEO works. I know a lot of you think that you know SEO and you probably do, this is just going to set us up for a conversation later on, and maybe, just maybe introduce you to some new concepts.

We’re going to talk to you about how to Google yourself properly, not just for fun, not just because, you know, it’s a vanity check, but what to do when you’re Googling for yourself. How to buy the right kind of domain, it hurts me when people spend money buying a domain, then spend time really mapping that domain and doing everything that they need to, and then they made the one mistake in the beginning that’s going to hurt all those other efforts afterwards. We’ll talk about how to build your main hub and what is your main hub. If you’ve seen some people, well, you’re going to find out actually. How to have the right stuff on your website, if you’re going to build a website do it right.

And we’re going to talk about how to sign up for social media, not just because you’re going to chat, and of course chatting is good, but how to do it for search engine optimization. When you do it with search engines in mind, you do it a little bit differently, and I’ve got the screen shot here that you guys are going to want to see that will illustrate how to do that right. I’m going to talk about how do to your, well this is one that I think everyone needs to do, and it’s important because some of the guests who I’ve interviewed are really good at this.

They will make it hard for me when I interview them on Mixergy to find negative stuff about them because they’re so good at getting the right bio in the right places and it makes my job harder, but, if you do this right, it’s going to make your life a lot easier and your business easier. And then finally, Patrick but together an emergency tactic. This is what happens when bad results happen to good people. Patrick, you’ve actually said that we’re going to make search engines our bitch. Let me get the [??] you’re saying it. That was the title that you picked for this. So let’s get right into this. Let’s give a quick overview of how search engine optimization works. We’re not going to spend forever on it, because this isn’t the main thrust of the course, but what do we need to know to make all our other efforts really powerful here?

Patrick: There’s a few, so SEO can be and sound like a complicated thing, but I want to go over just a few general concepts some of you may know, but I’ll frame the tactics we talk about later, and it’s that search engine optimization is simply the process of making sure a link on the web ranks as high as possible for the right term. And what I want you guys to realize is search engines actually encourage white hat SEO because it helps them makes sure they’re not mis-ranking something or they’re not overlooking a rank, because search engines have to process millions of results for the right term. And when it comes to people, especially, sometimes they’ll make mistakes.

I’ll give you a perfect example. Some of you may have something like this – have a friend who might have a great portfolio site. You know, you might be Andrew Warner, and you might have all this great stuff, all these interviews you’ve done. And I have a lot of friends like this and you Google their name and it doesn’t show up. You find out they played volleyball in high school, or something like that, or there is someone else with their name.

Andrew: Right. The portfolio doesn’t show up but all this other stuff shows up about them, or other stuff about other people. OK.

Patrick: Right. And Google or Bing would want to see this. And by simply making some SEO changes, so let search engines know it’s about Andrew Warner, it will all of a sudden show up hot, number one. So what I want to get across is that there is SEO, white hat SEO it’s called, that search engines encourage because it helps them. And a lot of people miss these things and it keeps them from ranking high. The basic concepts you need to know, there’s literally hundreds, but if you can keep these ones in mind: there’s the on-page SEO, which means what’s on the page that helps search engines rank it.

There’s the structure and architecture. So when a search engine crawls a site, as they call it, they want to know, what is it about? What’s most important on the page? There’s hierarchies through things like heading tags and the code of the site. And you want to make sure that you structure it so they know your name is the most important thing on that page. There’s keywords and content. Simply put, if you want a rank for Andrew Warner, and Andrew Warner is nowhere on the page, how would search engines know to rank him for that. And on that same token, where that name exists matters, you know, the URL. Like I said, title tags, heading tags, bold words. Search engines look for important places to find the right keywords and you want to make sure you’re emphasizing what’s important.

Andrew: Here, let me bring up this visual. I think it will help.

Patrick: Yes. And then there’s relevancy. Search engines want to give you as the searcher the most relevant things possible. So if you have something that’s about ten years old or five years old, versus an article that was just written, the thing that’s more updated kind of seems more relevant. So you want to make sure your stuff is relevant as well.

Andrew: So that’s why even having just quick copy and paste, essentially, blog posts, helps you rank higher, because it tells the search engine, Hey, this is active. This site is new. There’s something going on here. Even if you just take a picture off of some other web site and put a caption on it to say I saw this and here’s what I think of this topic.

Patrick: And even that’s why, and we’ll get into it in the tactics too, but that’s why even putting your Twitter feed on there updates it automatically. Even finding it once a month, and I’ll get into this in blogging, writing an industry article. I mean, just keeping it updated is really easy to do, which I’ll show you, but it’s so important. And that’s why I’m giving these concepts now. And then there’s off-page SEO, which is what’s going on off the page that’s really important. And there’s links. So Google counts each link to a site as a vote, because if this is saying it’s all about Andrew Warner and this is saying it’s all about Andrew Warner, they’re going to say it seems pretty relevant. And where that vote comes from matters. So a vote from CNN is obviously more important than a vote from something that doesn’t seem as credible.

So you want to make sure, and we’ll show you how to do that, you have credible places linking to your hubs, so search engines know this is a really relevant result and social sharing goes along the same lines. Social media sharing is another kind of form of links that makes search engines know this is really relevant because Twitter and Facebook, they’re all saying this is something about Andrew Warner so this is making it more attractive of a result. But those are the basic tenants of SEO that’ll help guide the tactics I’m going through and should frame your reference. Those are the things you want to always keep in mind.

Andrew: OK, all right. This one visual captures it all. These are the basics and now we’re going to go on to the first tactic–there it is right there–which is Google yourself and see what comes up.

Patrick: Exactly. So, the first thing you want to do is you want to Google yourself. I like to say–because if you haven’t Googled yourself, somebody has. There’s a visual in here that has some stats on it.

Andrew: Yeah, let’s bring it up and take a look at these stats.

Patrick: 80 million names are Googled every single day. 75 percent of HR departments are required to Google you before they make a decision. There was a recent study done–I didn’t put this on there because I couldn’t find the exact thing–but it’s something like 65 percent of adults actually admit to Googling a first date. The point is you’re going to be Googled and what shows up matters.

Most people fall into one of three categories, which is the next visual. Negative, and that’s the worst. You fall into negative, irrelevant or not me. Negative is obviously the worst. Unfortunately, in today’s world it can happen to anybody. It takes one poorly judged tag from you or a friend, one blog post from a disgruntled ex or employee. That’s going to hurt you. That’s an easy way to really ruin that first impression.

Then there’s the irrelevant. Yes, they’re about you but they’re not–they found out you ran a 5k for your company three years ago, not that you’re an entrepreneur or you started this website or you won this award. It’s not doing you any good.

Finally, there’s the hey that’s not me category which is, at worst, really detrimental like Pete’s story. At best–you know, Pete, he was being mistaken for the drug dealer–or at best, just confusing. What you want to get across in this is you Google yourself because you want to know where you stand. Most people think it’s just about not having negative content, but that’s actually not true. Not having positive content is almost as bad just because yes, bad results hurt you but good results help you.

Put it this way. You’re applying for a job and you have three people in front of you. You Google the first guy, it’s all negative. Easy way to take him off the list. You Google the second person and you don’t really find anything, anything relevant at least. You Google the third person and you find out, wow, they went to school here. They’ve done this. They won this award; they see the blog post. Who’s going to get that interview? That’s what the rest of this series is going to be about: how to put your best stuff up there.

Andrew: You know, Patrick, and I’ve seen this, too, for interviews. People will hit me up to either interview themselves. Say, “Hey, Andrew, I’ve got experience. You should interview me,” or their bosses. I’ll go to Google and I’ll see just a new company that’s just launched and nothing else and I’ll go, well this guy is just not appropriate for Mixergy. He’s getting started and Mixergy is a site where proven entrepreneurs come to teach. Maybe in a few years. I’ve done this a few times where I’ve said no.

Then a friend, later on, will come on and say, “Andrew, why didn’t you have this guy on?” I’ll go, well because he’s a new entrepreneur. They say, “No, you don’t understand.” This guy built this huge company before or he’s had this big achievement before. How am I supposed to know about it? When I Google, all I see is the latest stuff because they’re getting started with a new company and they finally are starting to accept the power of search engines and the power of social media. That’s when they’re getting going and only talking about that.

Or I’ll come up with someone who used–running for an example. For me it’s–for some reason–the news. There are some people who are so hopped up on the news that when I search for them, all I see is their opinion on some random set of news stories that they got all excited about for a period there in their lives, but I won’t know who they are and I reject them. Often I reject them because I just don’t recognize how great they are because it’s buried underneath the stuff that’s just not showing up their greatness, that’s not the stuff that they want out there. They just assume that everyone knows because their friends know how great they are. I’m not their friend. I need to look them up.

Patrick: Yep, and you hit on the most important point there. It’s your first impression. You want them to find what you would say to them if they asked you to describe yourself, or something like that. That’s really what the point of this all is.

Andrew: Yeah, of course. Even at conferences, I see people walk around with their mobile phones and they’re just Googling the people who they meet. All right, so, you wanted to go back to the example that you had with Pete, just quickly touch back on that?

Patrick: Sure, and Pete’s a perfect example of not having anything negative out there. It’s not like he was being irresponsible online. But out of his control, he was being mistaken for someone else and that was hurting his actual livelihood. He couldn’t get an internship. And just for background, Pete was probably the best guy in our class. We were in Syracuse University in the information management program, you know which is tech. And he was the best in our class. He had started all these clubs and never got a call back until someone told him he was applying for a job, a person that worked there with him called him up, who graduated ahead of us, “Yeah,
I just had heard that, they had Googled someone and there was, he was a drug dealer.” [background laughing]

And that’s, like, going around the office. And Pete Googled himself and realized, “Holy Crap, it’s me and he had never Googled himself before. And when he saw it, that’s when he’s like, “Oh my God, this is really bad! This is why, what do we do, what do I do?” And that’s kind of where we paired up and decided we need to make a solution for everybody.

Andrew: Yup. Alright, so first thing we know what we’re looking for even if we’re not drug dealers; if all that’s coming up is our passion for specific news stories that are irrelevant to what we’re trying to in the World or it’s that embarrassing photo that we took in the shower, I guess, with beer cans or whatever for us. You’ve got to be aware of that. Next step, going back to the big board is, buy the right kind of domain. What’s the wrong kind? Before we get to the right kind, and I still see people do this.

Patrick: Well, the thing you need to know is buying a domain, number one, is one of the most important things you can do when you want to start controlling this, and, that’s because search engines always value the domain. So you want to buy our domain names, but a few rules you need to keep in mind is, number one; remember that keyword we talked about; the exact keywords they’re looking for in places like domains?

If you’re trying to show up for Patrick Ambron, too many people say, “Oh, patrickambron.com’s taken, right. So, I got Pat Ambron or Patty Ambron or you separate that name and that’s actually not good. You want your name together. So, a couple things; keep your name together and buy everything you can. If PatrickAmbron.com is taken, that’s the best one you can get, you know, get patrickambron.me or patrickambron.net; patrickambron.tv. There’s all these new domains, but you want to keep your name together because that’s the keyword and that makes a big difference.

Now, the other thing you need to know is, not all domains are created equal. So, a “.com,” for example, is usually the best. Now, people really like these “.me’s” and all these new ones coming in and while they’re good, and they’re becoming more relevant and this is becoming less of an issue, but, it’s not as good as a “.com” because search engines don’t value them as much yet. So, it matters that you want to get, start with “.com” and then you want to go down and make sure you get domain, you know, a good example too is you want a “.com;” you definitely want a “.com.” So, if your name is taken, instead of, get patrickambrononline.com or even [xx]

Andrew: Is PatrickAmbronOnline.com better than patrickambron.me or “.tv?”

Patrick: That’s hard to tell. As of now I would say yes; that might change soon because those are becoming more popular, but a “.com” is always really valuable. And, the point is what I’m getting is they’re a couple bucks. You should get all the one’s you can even if you don’t plan on using your domains right now. Which I’ll get into how to use them later, but even if you don’t, you’re keeping another Patrick Ambron from taking your domain and I’ll give you a little example of this.

Andrew: Yeah, please. Talk about maybe, the lumber yard?

Patrick: Yeah, so there’s a guy. So, I used to, I used to do stuff all the time for businesses and one time a guy contacted me. And this is while I was building the automated software. He contacted me and he ran a family business that was a fourth generation family business of, you know, lumber yard; providing lumber for things. And because they’d been around for so long he didn’t really have a web presence and they didn’t really think they needed one and he probably didn’t need to get business, right. He didn’t need it for lead generation. He had word of mouth. They’ve had clients for years. But, there’s a guy from the area who basically ran a, he did this to a lot of people.

Basically, he would find businesses and he bought up all the domains for the guy’s name, you know, “Joe,” I won’t use his whole name, but let’s call him JoeSmith.com. He bought all the guy’s domain names and, you know, this guy’s name was his reputation, and just filled them with terrible things. “This guy will rip you off,” “This guy doesn’t know how to do business,” etc. And, you know, they weren’t even his websites. And then he started getting customers calling him. And this goes back to why you should be Googling yourself cause he had no idea. He didn’t really care about his online presence, because that wasn’t how he got business. But, they’d call him and [xx] “Listen, I don’t know if you know about this, but you have all these things showing up at the top of your Google results and they’re terrible. Who is this guy? What’s going on?” And the guy did it on purpose, because he looked for money. He’s going to charge the guy $20,000 to take it down. And the guy had a history of doing this.

But the point here is, even if you don’t plan on building a website or you think, “I don’t need to care about it, because it’s not a marketing tool for me.” Reputation management is a different thing and it’s important for everyone. Because if you don’t buy your domain names someone else can swoop it up and it could be anyone. It could be, like I said, an ex-girlfriend. It could be someone you kicked off for whatever reason. They buy up your names, and those are hard to get down because the are your name dotcom, and he bought a bunch. He bought your name dotcom, his name on the line dotcom, and all these things are showing up at the very top of the results, overcoming the guy’s years of business that he had done.

Andrew: Oh, yeah. So, all right, what you’re saying is PatrickAmbron.com is the best. PatrickAmbron.me or PatrickAmbronOnline.com, second best. The worst is don’t do Patrick Ambron if that’s not what you go by or don’t do DudeWhoLovesCoffeeAndRunning.com because when people are searching for you, they’re not searching for DudeWhoLovesCoffeeAndRunning.

Patrick: That’s right.

Andrew: You want to keep the name together, and you want to go for dotcom if you can.

Patrick: That’s it exactly. Remember the keyword concept. The keyword is your name. You want to keep it together, and you want to get any other part that you can. You want to get as many as you can. It’s nine bucks a year if you go to GoDaddy.com or plenty of others. It’s an investment because you’re keeping someone else… You want to buy as many as you can so no one hijacks the results.

Andrew: OK. What about what I notice when I go and search your name. Let me bring it up. This is what I see when I search your name. Let me zoom in and move to the side. It’s not your dotcom that’s showing up first. It’s PatrickAmbronBrandYourself.com that shows up, even above PatrickAmbron.com. Should we be doing this with other sites, or do we need to do it just with our domain. What’s going on here?

Patrick: Well, we will get into the other tactics. There’s other things besides your domain that you can get to show up high. Now, PatrickAmbron.BrandYourself is actually just a profile you can create with our product, Brand Yourself. Even more than a domain, those are just 100% optimized for your name automatically. They’re just very, very good at showing up higher than anything.

So, that’s just our own software at work, but yes, besides your domain you’ll be signing up for other profiles because you’re going to use those in conjunction to get your stuff to show up higher.

Andrew: OK. Then, I’m jumping ahead. Let’s then continue back with our original plan which is to talk about the next tactic, which is to build your main hub.

Patrick: Mm-hmm.

Andrew: What is our main hub, and what goes into it?

Patrick: So, this goes along to what you were saying because you might have a lot of things showing up, but it might be missing some other stuff, what you did last. Maybe, all that shows up is like your latest project, but no one knows yet a really successful original project. Your hub, it’s the easiest, most important way. Just make sure you’re visible. All the other stuff you want is showing up there.

So, you want to build a hub, and that can be some sort of profile or website that has everything you want, your whole background. Now, the thing is, with free tools out there, like a WordPress and a Tumblr, About.me, all visuals of some of our favorites, like Webele (?). I actually prefer Word Press because of what it gives you, but it’s the most search engine friendly. It lends itself to search engine stuff which we’ll get into.

The point is you can create a hub, and the goal here is… There is where you put everything that someone needs to know about you. Remember Google likes to rank the most relevant thing and comprehensive thing possible. So, this is your chance to make the most comprehensive resource about Patrick Ambron on the entire web.

Andrew: So, Patrick, this is one page that has links to all the things, all the sites that I’m a part of. So, if I blog on Tumblr, this one page links to Tumblr. If I’m active on Twitter or active on HackerNews or active on Digg, this one hub, this page, has links to all of those. Do I understand that right?

Patrick: Yep So, you’re going to do a couple of things with this. You want to put all of your relevant background information, our bio. So, let’s actually start with saying, “There’s a visual on here of what to do first.” So, once you build your hub, here are the rules.

Number one, structure it well like we kind of talked about in terms of SEO reasons. So, you want to put your name wherever you possibly can, like if you’re doing WordPress. You can do this with any of them. Your title, you’ve already got in your domain because you bought your domain, as we talked about. You have it there in the navigation. You have it there in the headings, Trevor Elwell Home.

So, at first you just want to put your name anywhere that you can. Structure it well so search engines know that it looks like the most important thing on this page is Trevor Elwell.

The second thing you want to do, and I don’t know if there’s a specific visual for this, but as you said, fill it with the most relevant stuff. You want to put your bio on there. You want to write a good bio about yourself that says Trevor Elwell is whatever. He’s a web designer from Syracuse, New York, who does XY and Z. You want to put your education, anything that you can. Your education, your work history, your personal interests. Again, anything you would tell someone in an interview. And that’s a good rule though, anything you would tell someone at a job interview about yourself or someone who is like writing a report on you or writing a biography on you or writing a Wikipedia page about you, make sure that’s on there. Because it lets search engines know, wow this is amazing this is all about Trevor Elwell and there’s so much great information.

Andrew: OK.

Patrick: Number two, you want to also put some media on there. Because again search engines look more the most relevant results. So when something has media on it goes, it raises another flag for them that says…

Andrew: What do you mean by media?

Patrick: A photo, a video if you can. Something that says not only is this great information about Trevor but it’s giving the searcher pictures of them and that’s probably really good for the searcher, you know.

Andrew: I see.

Patrick: Search engines are pretty logical, their trying to give you who’s searching for [inaudible] the most, the best results possible. So there’s media on it, it likes that and says, oh look there’s more stuff that the user is going to find.

And then as you said, because this is your hub, you want to link to everything else that goes back to those links. You want to say, OK, besides this information if you want to learn more about me here’s Trevor Elwell on Twitter. Here’s Trevor Elwell on, you know, Tumbler, here’s Trevor Elwell on Facebook, here’s Trevor Elwell, you know, in the news.

You link to all the stuff you want someone to find because it does two things. A) if somebody finds your hub and gets to see all the other great stuff. And B) it’s letting search engines know this is really a great resource. It has all this information on it and then it gives people even more resources that we can go out and tell that’s actually really good too.

So you’re making this thing a great resource for people, meaning search engines are going to rank it really high, if that makes sense.

Andrew: OK.

Patrick: So you want to build your hub because it’s going to help all of your other stuff rank higher that you want showing up. And it’s going to rank high yourself. And you’re going to have something out there that’s really relevant that someone is going to find when they Google you.

And it’s so easy to do these days, you really have no excuse not to do it.

Andrew: All right. One page has it all you’re recommending Word Press is an easy platform to do it in. But you’ve also talked about Blogger as an easy one, Tumblr, About.me makes it easier to do this. Weebly you’ve even recommended. What’s the other one? Squarespace, whatever it is. There’s great ones.

Patrick: There’s a bunch.

Andrew: Do it. And we talked about all the things that need to go on there. Next, should we go onto the next item?

Patrick: Let’s do it.

Andrew: Sign up for the top social media websites for search engine optimization. What’s the difference between doing it with SEO in mind, search engine optimization and just doing it because you want to hang out with your friends? Which I put down earlier with my snarky attitude as I said it.

Patrick: Yeah. Well some people fall into two camps. They join in it and they have something to be funny, you know, they have some sort of different agenda. Which is fine, you know, if that’s what you do. But keep in mind social media sites will rank really high because they’re so relevant. You know, Facebook’s a really relevant domain as is Twitter. They’re incredible sites. So you want to create a profile no matter what with you name. Because even if you don’t plan on using it, it keeps someone else with your name from taking that. It’s the same idea with your domain, right?

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Patrick: Because if someone else with your name, if Andrew Warner Jokeboy signs up, that Twitter is going to have a really good chance of showing up really high if someone Google’s you and that’s what they’re going to find.

Andrew: So you say they might have Andrew Warner Jokeboy on Twitter?

Patrick: Something like that, yeah.

Andrew: I see, OK. All right, which ones do we go for?

Here actually. these are the ones that you think. These are the ones that you recommend. Sign up at least for all of these

Patrick: These I recommend. You know and everyone should at least start off with Twitter, Facebook and LinkedIn, like I said, and Google Plus for obvious reasons. Because Google does a good job of making sure their own thing ranks high.

Andrew: Right.

Patrick: Which should go without saying but these are things that show up really high so you want them. Because they’re result you can control. They’re a result you can fill with good content. And even if you don’t consider yourself a really active social media person that’s fine. At least you have a result and at least you’re not letting the other guy with your name take that from you and high jack your results.

Other good ones include Meetup. Meetup for the way they structure it, and it could have been intentional on their part or not, they show up really high. And I’ll show you, I’ll talk a little bit about that later. And Chloral, Chloral is another good one beside those main ones, which is a question and answer site. That show up really high for people and that’s why we encourage you to build one.

Andrew: What happens if my name is already taken on Twitter or a Facebook page already has someone else? I own, I own it. I have Facebook.com/Andrew Warner. But what happens to the next Andrew Warner who says I want to rank high for this name, what do I do? What happens if the person listening to us is faced with a situation where someone else already has their name on these social sites?

Patrick: So.

Andrew: I’ll put the camera on you.

Patrick: It goes back to the domain. You want to keep your name as a keyword there. So you want to, you know, Andrew Warner online, Andrew Warner, you know, mix mx or something, you know for Mixergy. Andrew underscore Warner. The underscore is one way you can separate your name without it being . . .

Andrew: Or hyphen? I heard Matt Cutts at Google recommend hyphen over underscores, what do you feel about that?

Patrick: Oh, actually, that’s actually a good point. You actually brought something. Hyphens actually are preferred over underscore. I’m just used to saying underscore.

Andrew: Oh, OK. All right. So, it would be Andrew dash Warner, but somehow keep it together, don’t put any nonsense in between. If you need to, put something at the end.

Patrick: Yep.

Andrew: Okay.

Patrick: And I will go into it. I’ll give you a little story, and then go into the specific rules really quick. I have a story that shows why you should be on these places in the first place. Even if you didn’t think it was important. When we were first starting off back in the day, we were . . . I created Twitter profile, and this is while we were building the product. And while we were building the product I said, well we should at least get a name for ourselves, so when we release the product in our niche, people would know about it and know who we are. Because we’re creating out content and writing blog posts. And be excited about it instead of just getting it out cold.

So, I created a Twitter account, I did all the right things. I’m on Twitter, and one of the . . . Guys, the people who aren’t familiar with Dan Schawbel, he’s a personal branding expert. He’s got a big voice. He gets literally tens and tens and tens of thousands of people every day reading his stuff about personal branding. Which makes a lot of sense for us, because personal branding people want to control their search results.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Patrick: So, he’s on Twitter, and then one day his site goes down and he tweets out, and I’m following him on Twitter, so I see this. I need someone who knows PHP. Because my sites, so, I was like oh, I messaged him back and said, let me help you out. So, we get on the phone and I fix it for him, and I meet him this way. We have a great conversation and I help him out. He learns a little bit more about what I’m doing, and then by the end of the day, I have a weekly spot blogging on his platform. Putting brands yourself and putting us in front of an audience, a very relevant audience, every single week. And that connection would not have happened if we had ignored creating social media profiles, because I never would have met Dan, he never would have known what we were doing, and I never would have been able to help him out. So, everyone should have doing these things.

Now, to make sure they are search engine friendly, let’s go a little bit into those rules that you kind of hit upon. The first one, and going back into those rules that we talked about. Number one is, keep it clean. Remember these are public. If you’re trying a search engine, optimize something, people are going to find these. And there are so many instances where people don’t realize it anybody can find these things. This is a good example right here. There’s literally thousands of these stories. This girl, Facebook status updated something about her boss. Calling him a pervy wanker. So, obviously she’s from England. We don’t say that here, but. The first comment on it actually is from her boss. Basically firing her right then and there.

Andrew: I guess you forgot about adding me on here. Firstly, don’t flatter yourself. Secondly, you’ve worked here five months, and didn’t work out, and didn’t work out that I’m gay? I know I don’t prance around the office like a queen, but it’s not exactly a secret. Oh, all right. This is a really fun one, I’ll let people read this and, of course, include it with the program.

Patrick: Yeah. I didn’t know [??] appropriate, I didn’t want to, for all of the younger viewers out there.

Andrew: Well, this is a good point, about what not to say online. We do see people do this all the time. What’s the next big idea here?

Patrick: So, once you realize don’t say anything that you wouldn’t want your boss to read, that’s a good rule of thumb right there. Going back to those SEO criteria in the beginning. Key words, structure. Number one, use your name, we just talked about that. Patrick Ambron is a good Twitter name, you know, Chill Dude 25 is not. There’s other ways, even if you’re name, you can see, you can put your title name there, you can put everything there. You want to put your name in there, and as we talked about, if your name is taken, you know, Patrick Ambron P-R. If you’re a P-R guy or Patrick dash Ambron or something like that The next thing is, tweet relevant things. Google wants you to find good things. And they have good things. if people start sharing their tweets ans start getting value in their and you start getting followers.

Suddenly that page, your Twitter page, is better results. So, how do you do that? I always tell people, no one cares that you had three bottles of liquor down between two of us. That’s bad. But, good read, Twitter adds another international Google exec to its sales team. Interesting read, and you have a link. That’s something my audience finds pretty interesting, That’s the kind of thing I’ll get re-tweeted on. That’s the kind of thing that makes someone then find me and follow me. And that makes Google say, wow this Twitter page is really good about Patrick Ambron, everyone seems to be liking it. Same thing with Facebook. So, be interesting. Try to be useful. No one cares what you had for lunch, that kind of stuff.

Andrew: All right. What’s next?

Patrick: The next thing is it goes back to again the SEO principles we talked about as linked to everything. Because let’s say, you linked to your hub. You’ve got your hub that’s really structured for Andrew Warner. Not only is this great for Andrew Warner, but it’s bringing out Twitter which you really trust is saying it’s also about Andrew Warner. That Twitter is really good and Facebook and LinkedIn and Google Plus. They’re all pointing back and saying it’s about Andrew Warner, and they’re all pointing back to each other.

So, suddenly what you’re doing is you’re making, when I say Google, this works for all search engines. Google is just an easier reference point, but Google is realizing all of these things are really relevant. They’re all linking to each other. They’re all interesting information. All of these should rank really high for this term, Andrew Warner. Over that irrelevant thing, over that drug dealer who had a news article about him and a police blotter ten years ago.

Andrew: Yeah. And you know what? Here’s a great example of why this is all helpful. Iâ??m going to go back to the example from your co-founder. When I search for him, yes, I see his site first, but LinkedIn is number two and Twitter is number three. I often see social media sites just pop up as the top results when I Google people who I’m about to interview on Mixergy. I think even nowâ?¦ I don’t want to turn on the browser right now and really kill our bandwidth, but I think if you search for Andrew Warner, you will start to see even Vimeo, a site that I think people have given up on because they’ve moved on to YouTube.

Vimeo shows high for me because I used that in the beginning, and every time I think I don’t need another social networking site, well, you know what, I won’t use it every day. But I should sign up and put something on there just so I can have that in my search results and control what’s there and not have someone else’s in there.

Patrick: And that’s something we realized. There’s a lot of sites you should sign up for, just for that very reason, and then whenâ?¦ That’s one of the things that our product can even help you do. We show you all the things and how to build them, just to go in and automatically create these things to help you because the more you have the better. The more you can push something else down and you can put your bio in there, the better.

So, you hit it exactly right. These things show up high in and of themselves, and then there are also tools to help your other things show up because you can link to them and Google love links.

Andrew: I can see myself with of these many sites on a Saturday with a Hulu window up in the right part of my laptop, sitting and signing up for all of these networks and making sure that my name is properly in there, making sure that there’s just good stuff in there and that they link as much as possible to all of the other things that Iâ??m working on, as you said here in this.

Patrick: Yep.

Andrew: And so, that’s what we need to do with social media when we want to start controlling our reputation online. Ready to move on to the next big idea?

Patrick: Let’s do it.

Andrew: Let’s do it. Here’s the big board, and on the big board is “paste your bio in the online people directories”. What are these?

Patrick: So, this is one of the most under utilized ways to get content out there and create links for yourself because they’re not as popular in social media, because you can’t do as much on them. But there are online directories, like LookUpPage, BusinessCard, WorkFace, all these things where they are little directories to find people. They’re giant directories, and they do a really good job of structuring them well and making sure there’s good information on them. So, search engines love them.

Sign up for five. It’ll take you about 25 minutes, maybe. Copy and paste our bio on them, and you’ve linked to them. There’s three links essentially that you can say, “Great. Here is Patrick Ambron, CEO of Brand Yourself. Here’s his Brand Yourself profile. Here’s his website. Here’s his Twitter. Here’s his LinkedIn. You’re just putting out links, more things that let search engines know that all of those other things are really important because these incredibly well structured directories on the web that are meant to help people find people are pointing to these things. Search engines really like it, and you can just sign up for them.

I’ll give you an example of how powerful they can really be.

Andrew: Yeah, please.

Patrick: One of our first users of our new product, his name is Cody and he’s applying to law school. When he was an undergrad, some of you may be familiar with sites like Juicy Campus. That one was specifically shut down, but there are places where college kids could go on and write anonymous things about other people. What would happen is Cody, specifically, he was with a girl, an undergrad, and I guess they broke up. He really upset her. Who knows whose fault it was? But she went on Juicy Campus, and she basically wrote that he didn’t knowâ?¦ just embarrassing stuff

If you Google him, and he was in his final year at law school, the only thing you really found out about him on the web, number one and number two, were these terribly embarrassing results. He said I really don’t want people reading this about me. It’s embarrassing. It’s notâ?¦

Andrew: It’s basically saying that he doesn’t know how to please a girl, that’s what was on there. Because she wrote it and it just kept going.

Patrick: Yeah and so he started doing these things and he got some stuff on the first page but, you know, he wasn’t able to push it down. He wasn’t able to completely overtake these because they were such big domains that he didn’t know what to do. But then he used a product, he started signing up for these extra directories, you know he had done everything else, he had social media profiles, he had a website, they were showing up on the first page, but he wasn’t able to completely overtake all of these other things.

And finally, by signing up for directories, and adding all that extra link juices, all those things on the web pointing to his stuff and not the juicy campus stuff, suddenly he was able to push it down to the bottom of the first page. Then it’s on the second page, and then it’s on, you know, the bottom of the second page, and now probably on the third page.

And now when the law school would Google him, they would find all this great stuff and if they even got to the second page, which 93% of people don’t, they just went through a whole, you know, page of great results that explain who he is and how involved with the community he was, and what a great student he was, and it’s a little bit more forgiving, they can be like, “OK, this happens to people”, rather than that being the only thing representing him and the very first thing they find. So these directories are an extra edge that make a much bigger difference than people realize, and they’re so easy to build. Everybody should be doing this.

Andrew: All right, and these directories are, let me just bring them up. You’re recommending BusinessCard, what is that?

Patrick: BusinessCard 2.

Andrew: BusinessCard 2, right? The number two?

Patrick: Yup, that’s the name of the site.

Andrew: OK. I want Andrea to be able to pull up the link for everyone here that’s taking this course. LookUpPage, and BigSite. These are the three big ones.

Patrick: And then there’s some others, too, that I would add to it if someone was getting ambitious. WorkFace, it’s called, WorkFace is actually a really good one because the way the directory is signed up. I would add that one as well if you’re going to start with four it would be those four.

Andrew: WorkFace? OK. All right, so there they are. These are the sites that Patrick recommends that you add your online profile to, excuse me, that you add you bio to. Go to these directories. All right, ready to go to the big board?

Patrick: Let’s do it.

Andrew: Let’s do it. Final point here, this is the emergency tactic, this is if all else fails and you need something quick, right?

Patrick: Yup. Yup, so…

Andrew: What do we do in that situation?

Patrick: As I like to say, in today’s digital world, you probably hear that phrase all the time, bad results can happen to good people. There are certain cases where just something out there is about you and it shows up and it completely overtakes your results. An example of this would be one of our product’s users was a high school principal. And he was a nice guy, he was actually a military guy, brought into a really tough school district to try to crack down. So, that was why he was brought in to this school, and he made a questionable judgment call. He knew these two kids, whose parents were never home, were playing hooky again.

So he showed up at their house and, if any of you have ever seen the movie Ferris Bueller, it was very similar to that situation. And because of that, the kids were like, “I can’t believe he showed up at my house” and then because of the likeness to the movie Ferris Bueller, all of these news organizations picked it up. You know, and wrote like, High school principal, you know John Doe, and I won’t use his real name, you know, pulls real life Ferris Bueller. He got all of these results, and that makes it really hard to go to another school district, because you Google and look this guy up, which everyone will do, you find all this incredible press about him doing this questionable thing. And whether or not you agree with it or not, this was a really nice guy, had good intentions in mind, and this is following him around forever. And what are you supposed to do in that case?

There’s another example, there’s another user of our product, Ivy league professor accused of stealing shirts from the Gap for whatever reason. Wasn’t charged, he didn’t do it, but because it got a little bit of press because there was some question around, was it racial profiling? Why did this happen? Every time you look him up these big news organizations followed him around and those are the cases where, you know, the way you can improve your results is by burying things right? Burying it off the first page, but when you have CBS and you have CNN and you have all these places writing about you, those are hard domains to push, to get ten results above to just get it off the first page?

Andrew: Yeah, so what do you do in those situations? They seem impossible to beat.

Patrick: So, there are extra things you can do. So, like we said, it might be hard to get ten things, to get your ten social media profiles higher than those CNN articles right? But there’s some little secrets a lot of people don’t realize, and it’s, number one Google only likes to rank one domain, one result per domain per page. And what that means is, let’s say you have a Huffington Post article, which is a huge domain, one of the biggest domains out there.

There’s an article about Andrew Warner on the Huffington Post and they show that up on the first page as a result #1. They don’t want to put another result about you from The Huffington Post on the first page usually because they already have one on there and they like to keep the results diverse.

So under that logic, rather than try to bury that Huffington Post article, what if you could get another thing on The Huffington Post that was more SEO friendly, more relevant about Andrew Warner than that article? So how do I do that?

Taking the same example, most news sites, most organization sites, you can create a profile on it, a reader profile, HuffingtonPost.com/andrewwarner.That right there is a great start because, look, your name is in the URL.

Andrew: So, create an user profile. Free, easy to do. So now I got one more thing on their site, another chance to knock them off the home page.

Patrick: Now, you want to SEO that result. You want to make it more relevant. More search engine friendly than that article so Google replaces it and then bumps that other thing off because they only want one.

So, what you want to do is fill it out as much as they let you with as much information. If they let put a bio, you put a bio in. If they let you put education, you put that it. You put your name wherever you can, Andrew Warner all over it. So Search Engines know, this is all about Andrew Warner on The Huffington Post.

The next thing you do is, a lot of them allow you to keep it updated. Remember relevancy is really important? That article’s eventually going to be 2 months old and then 3 months old and 4 months old. Your profile can continually be updated and you can start commenting on articles and usually they’ll stream your comments or something.

Suddenly, when it comes to The Huffington Post, that old article is not the most relevant thing about Andrew Warner on that page. Just read your profile once.

Andrew: That makes sense. In time, I start to bump them up because my page on Huffington Post becomes fresher, more relevant because it’s all about me and becomes better taken care of than that article, which is older.

Patrick: Exactly and, what you’re doing is, now rather than having to get 10 or 11 things above that Huffington Post article, you bumped it off by replacing one.

And it’s a trick, and not a trick, it’s search engine. But most people don’t realize you can do this.

Number 2. Let’s say in some cases, for whatever reason, you’re having trouble doing that, and you do need to get as many positive things on the first page, ranking as high as possible on that first page, as possible.

There’s some things you can do that would rank really high for your name, very quickly.

Andrew: Let’s bring them up so you can talk about them and we can show them.

Patrick: Number one. Write a press release. You can write a press release. It’s not going to be news worthy. You can write a press release about Andrew Warner creates his own personal website. And write little press release about yourself and then you can put it out. There’s news wires, there’s free ones, there’s some that cost money. I always recommend PR News Wire. It’s going to cost you a couple of hundred bucks to get it out but they distribute it.

No one’s going to pick this up, because no one’s going to read it and go “Oh, my God. What a great story” but you got content out there that got distributed throughout all these outlets that will start to show up high because it’s distribution, because it’s going to be all over the place. Write a press release. If you need something quick out there quickly, at least it’s positive, at least, it’s not that negative article in The Huffington Post.

Number Two. Start commenting on relevant news articles. Go to NewYorkTimes.com. You’re an Advertising Major. Go start commenting on articles about media and use your name because you can sign in as a Guest or whatever. Use Patrick Ambron or Andrew Warner. Now those articles will start showing up for your name because New York Times is such a great domain and that’s going to show up high. It’s not as good as having your own personal website, but again, you have a nice comment there, it has your name in it. You can even link to the bottom of it from another place and, at least, it’s not a negative result. And it will show up very quickly because of how credible that domain and how indexed it already is.

Andrew: Let me give you an example. This just happened to me, where I wanted to do some research on Frank Gruber, who’s coming on Mixergy to do an interview and I thought “I’m going to search for him on TechCrunch and see if there’s any negative stuff about him”
Well, I did the search. I typed in, I was even smart enough to do site colonTechCrunch.com Frank Gruber and see what comes up. And because he commented so frequently lately on news stories related to entrepreneurs that he knows, that’s what kept coming up.

I would have had to go through, I think, every article in order to find the one that was the right content, so he clearly buried it, and I forget about the value of comments because I keep thinking, who is going to bother reading comments. But the more I search for people, the more I recognize the comments show up. They use Facebook, and I guess his Facebook profile not only has his name but his company name, so when I search for Frank Gruber TechCocktail he kept popping up on TechCrunch. This works and for a guy like me who’s doing research, it’s stumping me sometimes.

Patrick: That’s the thing. If you want to bury something, these comments are relevant. Like you said, maybe they’re not the most relevant thing about him, but there’s certainly better than having you find that negative TechCrunch article about him. That was misleading or whatever it might be.

Andrew: Yeah, those comments. I forget the value of them.

Patrick: Yep.

Andrew: So, all right, back to this document right here. So, write a press release that you talked about. Comment on relevant news articles. Throw an event on MeetUp.

Patrick: Again, I talk about this a little bit in social media profiles. Because of the way MeetUp is set up, whether they did it on purpose or not, they probably didn’t, but they show up really high. Their domains are structured in an SEO friendly way. What that means is one of the things besides creating a profile, you can have an event. You can call it an actually spend the time and make it an event. Call it Patrick Ambron’s event for PHP lovers in Syracuse. Invite all of your friends to it. Have them RSVP. Throw a party basically, but have them place the hub of it where people can RSVP and let them know they’re going to MeetUp.

Because you’re creating an event around your name, that search engines goes, oh wow, look at this whole event Patrick Ambron’s throwing on this great domain. Make a good event. Have more people RSVP. Actually do it and that’s an easy way to get a really good result up there really, really fast, and it’s going to outrank a lot of things because it’s so credible. And that’s something most people never think of doing but it will work.

Andrew: And there’s that last one, and I’ve got an example again from earlier in the conversation that I see you guys have used this. You can talk a little bit about what this last one is, and then I’ll bring up the example that I have.

Patrick: So, we talked earlier about not all domains are created equal. There are two domains that out rank everything, .edus and .govs. And the reason is not anybody can get one. You have to be someway affiliated with a verified educational institution, like a university or a government agency which search engines know that wow, these are really creditable because it’s already gone through this verification process. So, if you can have something with your name on it under one of those things, that’s going to out rank almost anything.

So, most people say, well, I don’t have a university. I don’t have a government site. What do I do? But there’s ways to do it. For example, if you went to a university or even if there’s a university in your town, you can usually join some sort of club. It can be an intramural sport. It can be the Astronomer Lover’s Club at Cornell University. You can join this thing and you get a profile on them because of it, and then you have this .Cornell.edu/astronomerclub/andrewwarner. Or .govs, go to your library.

There is something in your town where you can probably create a profile online, whether it’s creating joining a library club, the library that has a .gov or a town hall type thing. Look at your local governments. Look at even your alma mater or even some sort of educational institution in your town, and you can find a way to create profiles on there, and those are going to show up high. They’re going to out rank things, and it’s going to be another result you can control that it will get on the first page and help you bury other things quickly.

Andrew: This is what I noticed earlier in our conversation, going back again to Pete using them. If I could zoom in, and I even have the telestraighter [SP] out so we can try using this. Watch this. So, I shouldn’t have picked blue. Let’s go with red. Is that his school? Is that where Pete went to school?

Patrick: Yeah. That’s where he went to school.

Andrew: So, there. So, it does show up. My school, whenever they ask me to participate in anything, I feel like that. I have bad memories of going to school. I don’t want to participate in anything that they’re up to, but this shows the value of going and, at least, setting up a profile on that site.

Patrick: And this is an example that we actually hit upon. If you’re trying to figure out how to get something on my edu, this is the blog post at Pete wrote for the school. Now, the schools are all trying to create blogs now.

Andrew: Oh, so he just wrote a blog post for them and got the comments on there.

Patrick: They’re all looking for contributors, you know. You write about your experience at the school, and what an easy way to get something out there that’s going to show up high. Look, his name is in the thing because he’s the author. That’s a great one. I forgot to even hit upon it. Go volunteer to write content for your school, and they’ll publish it on their site, because why wouldn’t they? And it looks great. Look at this. It shows up on the first page.

Andrew: Well, there it is. By the way, how about me? I’ve got a telestraighter here. Iâ??m like pointing to things. I get to crop. This software is really through. Those are the big ideas. Let’s go back over them and make sure that we’ve covered everything that we promised people. There it is. It’s everything that’s been in this course. If they want to work with you, you don’t charge. There’s a paid version of it, but if they want to use the free version of this site, Brand Yourself, what are they going to get?

Patrick: So, Brand Yourself, the do it yourself software, you sign up it’ll let you know where you stand. You know, if you look good or you get a score based on how good you look in search engines and what people are going to find about you. But basically it works really simple. You submit any links that you want showing up at the top. Could be your LinkedIn profile, it could be an article written about you, your personal website, anything.

We analyze that link the software does and tells you everything you can do to make it more search engine friendly and show up higher. And you can go through them, you can do them in a couple of clicks. You can boost something in literally a minute.

And it search engine optimizes it for you and then it’ll track it so you see it go up. Now if you don’t have a lot of content out there already. Like I only have two things and I want more, it’ll even show you, here’s some recommended profiles that you can build and how to build them. And then, of course, as we talked about as you saw with my results, you can also build yourself at Brand Yourself profile which is really valuable. Because it’s the only profile on the web automatically optimizes to show up high with your name. And it’s automatically designed to help search engine optimize all of those other things.

Now, to give you actually, just to show you how easy and how it works. There’s actually a visual if you have it, Andrew. There’s one in the beginning ones.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Patrick: Help with first visual where there’s like a screen shot of a link in a graph.

Andrew: Yeah. Let’s do it. Here this is it.

Patrick: This is a big thing to show you. There is an article, I think it was a Fox news article when the product came out which I thought was really great for my name. It showed up like number a hundred and something for my name. I went through it, it literally takes me a minute with our software to submit it. It tells me there are 6 things I could do. And this is the less week later. It’s now I’m on my first page but as you can see it went up 87 positions.

Andrew: You got, there was a story written about you and you wanted that story to rank high, so that when people like me look you up, they’re going to see this news article about you which is full of great credibility for you.

Patrick: Yep.

Andrew: And you wanted to rank high, and so you started using your own software to make this page rank high. And what we’re seeing here in the graph is how your software helps you rank high within, how long is this? About a week.

Patrick: This shows a week. In a week it rose 87 positions. And what you’re hitting upon is that the point is anyone, there’s no reason not to use the product even if you know SEO. Because it simplifies it all for you. It helps you manage it. And if you don’t know SEO, it completely makes it dead simple for you to do and it’s incredibly effective.

The nice part is we hated the fact that, if you wanted to improve your results in the past and you didn’t know SEO, you had to pay a reputation company thousands of dollars. That’s not realistic for the average person. And now that there’s nothing they do and that they can do that you can’t do yourself at our product. It’s inexcusable.

So the nice part is you can take what we learned today and apply it yourself. And that’s fine and you should. But this product is free. Sign up and it’ll make it easier for you. And that’s what our goal. Everybody should be improving their search results and now with a free Brand Yourself account anybody can.

Andrew: Brandyourself.com. I’ve done this and you actually will link me out to the sites that you recommend that I sign for. And I can go and fill out the profiles on those sites and you rate it. So it’s not all done on your site. You take me to the sites that I need to be a part of. And you do give me rankings and you make sure that this all happens. But you can do everything on your own. You can sign up for the program.

I’m not here to send anyone to any place that they don’t want to go to. But I am here to make sure that you guys, if you’re watching this, especially if you’ve tuned in all this way, that you take control of that search result. That you understand that we’re all Googling you and you have a way of determining what we see when we Google you.

And I specifically asked Patrick to come on here because I’ve seen him, we met at a party and we’ve talked about all the people who he helped out and I asked him to come in and to an interview about his business to talk about how he grew this business. And he said no, no way, I’m not ready for it yet. So I said all right at least can you come here and teach us what you did for all these people both before you launch your business and after you launched and we got to see it.

So, thanks for walking us through this very generously. I’m looking forward to everyone who’s watching this to, at least, pick one thing out of all of this big board that we talked about here, pick one thing that you can do, do it and then come back and let us know how you’ve done it. And I’m looking forward to all your feedback about that and, of course, check out BrandYourself. Patrick, thank you for doing this session with us.

Patrick: Thank you so much for having me. I’m a big fan and I’m really happy I was able to come on.

Andrew: Thank you. Thank you all for watching.

Master Class:
How to save money on your taxes
(Even if you know nothing about taxes)
Taught by Kyle Durand of TaxReceipts.com

Report issues here

Master Class:
Tax Tactics


About the course leader

Kyle Durand runs a law and accounting practice in Seattle. He’s also the founder of TaxReceipts.com, which will simplify your taxes with a straightforward system.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Tax Course

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about keeping more and more money in your pocket and keeping Uncle Sam off your back come tax time. The course is led by Kyle Durand who runs a law and accounting practice in Seattle. He’s also the founder of taxreceipts.com, which will simplify your taxes with a straightforward system. I’m Andrew Warner. I’ll help facilitate and I should also saw that this is not tax or legal advice. You guys should, of course, get your own accounts.

Our goal is here isn’t to replace your accountant, but to give you an understanding so you can do your job better and so you can have better, more intelligent conversations with your accountant. This is the big board that we’re going to use to lead us through this conversation. Those are the big ideas that you’re going to get throughout this program. Kyle, the first question I’ve got for you is what is this photo and what does it have to do with taxes? Where is this? What’s this photo?

Kyle: That’s a photo of the master bathroom in one of Saddam Hussein’s palaces. That’s where I started my entrepreneurial journey in 2006.

Andrew: What were you doing in there, by the way, before we continue with this story. What were you doing in Saddam Hussein’s bathroom?

Kyle: I was a JAG in the military and had been in the military for a long time. I had been serving in Iraq for about five months. My office is actually in his master bedroom.

Andrew: When you were in there as a lawyer in the military, you had a vision of what was coming up next. What was that? What were you going to say?

Kyle: It was that it was about time for me to move on from the military to go back to my entrepreneurial roots. I was laying in the tub looking up at the ceiling, thinking about where I was going to go from there and how I was going to get there. As soon as I got back to the United States, I started researching. I wanted to open my own practice. I started researching, raking courses on opening my own practice, taking refreshing courses on business law because that’s the route I wanted to take.

Andrew: As an entrepreneur, you probably were, and I know you were because you and I talked before this program started, you were gung ho about getting started and you were about to make a mistake that many people in the audience are likely to make and it would have cost you how much money before you explain the mistake?

Kyle: It could have cost me, at least, $50,000 at this point.

Andrew: It’s a series of mistakes entrepreneurs make. I shouldn’t say it’s just one. Can you tell us what one of those mistakes would have been, if not for your wife, who is a CPA who gave you the guidance that you’re going to give to the audience? What’s one of those mistakes?

Kyle: That’s not setting the business up with the end goal in mind. When my brother came to me after I set up my practice, he had an idea for setting up an IT and hardware consulting business. Like the typical entrepreneur, he just wanted to get out there and start hustling and start bringing in the revenues and start setting up the contacts and contracts. Knowing what I knew with my tax law background, I said, “Wait a minute. Let’s take a few steps back. Let’s think about where we want to go with this and how to set it up properly.” So we set up our corporation and we kept the right records to allow us, when the business really started rolling, to take that money out of the business tax-free.

Andrew: To take the money out of his business tax-free?

Kyle: Yes.

Andrew: You’re going to show us how to keep from paying all taxes?

Kyle: Well, it’s not all taxes. As you contribute the money, we set it up as an S-corporation. So, we were avoiding all the payroll taxes. We saved ourselves.

Andrew: Payroll taxes are you were taking money out for yourselves out of the business?

Kyle: Right, exactly.

Andrew: OK. All right. The other mistake that you were going to make was not keeping proper records, which we talked about before this program started and that can cost you. As you saw in your own business, it would have cost you tens of thousands of dollars because you would have made simple mistakes. With your brother’s business, you were able to save tens of thousands of dollars by thinking about taxes properly within the business structure. What we’re going to do is we’re going to talk about specifics here. These are the specifics that we’re going to get to. The first one is, as you alluded to, the importance of keeping records. Can you tell me about a lobbyist that you did some work with and how that factored into his success?

Kyle: Yes, this lobbyist unfortunately fell prey to one of the most common tax myths that’s out there, and I’m sure most of your listeners have heard it, and it’s that if I charge everything on my business credit card, then that’s a good enough record.

Andrew: You know what, when I saw this, you did a session with Jeremy, our producer, to go over what you’re going to talk about, and he showed me these notes, I said, “Really?” I always thought that if I’m using my credit card that I’ve got a record of all my expenses. That’s not enough?

Kyle: No. And it’s a huge surprise to the vast majority of entrepreneurs.

Andrew: It’s not just entrepreneurs who are used to everything just happening automatically without keeping any records. Every time I got a paper record last year, at least, I’d toss it in the garbage. And you’re saying it’s not enough, for what? My own personal records or the government’s?

Kyle: Right, for the government. To get to the story about the lobbyist, this guy he was doing that, and he had a lot of entertainment and meal expenses, which as a lobbyist you would expect. And, meals and entertainment expenses are one of the things that the IRS looks at very carefully. So he charged all these expenses, tens of thousands of dollars, on his credit card, thinking it would be enough. And he came in my office to hire me when he was audited, and in the audit, I told him that his record wasn’t going to be enough and asked him to get the credit card receipts and he didn’t have any of them. And, the end result was that the IRS disallowed all of those expenses and charged him penalties and interest on it and his tax bill ended up being well over $80,000 for one year, and all of those would have been legitimate expenses if he had kept receipts with it as well.

Andrew: So you’re telling me that, if I buy something, say, I go to the computer store and I buy a new monitor for work. Let’s say, I go to Best Buy, which I wouldn’t use. I buy the monitor, I have it here to work, and I think “OK, great. I can take the expense on that, right that off my revenues.” No, unless I have the receipt, the credit card is not enough, I can’t back it up and I can’t take the expense? Or, is it that if I’m ever audited I’m going to have to undo it because I can’t justify it?

Kyle: That’s absolutely the point. You can take any deduction you want, it’s just when you’re audited you won’t be able to substantiate that deduction.

Andrew: I see, so they say “Hey, look, Andrew, I see that you’re buying a lot of computers”, and I say, “of course, because I’m in the tech industry, I need to record, I need to watch, I need to do all kinds of things, so I bought computers.” “Can you prove that you bought it, can you show me the receipts?” “Oh yeah, here are my credit card statements! I’ve been so good about recording them.”, and they’re going to go, “This does nothing for you. We’re going to consider those expenses not having happened and you still need to pay taxes on it.”

Kyle: Right. Well, in that case that the auditor goes, “You went to Best Buy. How do I know you didn’t buy DVD’s? Where’s it say what you bought?” It makes intuitive sense once somebody explains it to you, but most people learn the hard way.

Andrew: At this point, I imagine a lot of people are pausing, pretending that they’re going to listen later, but internally are thinking “This is just going to be painful for me, I can’t continue to watch.” So don’t avoid this, keep watching, keep listening, keep reading if you’re a transcript person, because, Kyle, what do we do to handle this going forward? I don’t want to feel bad about my past, I want to find the solution that’s going to be good for the future. Should I bring up this next visual?

Kyle: Yes.

Andrew: Let’s do it. What do I do to avoid this, and what should my audience, who’s very, very special to me, do to assure that they don’t make the same mistake that I’ve just explained that I’ve apparently made?

Kyle: Yes, so, it’s not too late now. Start immediately. The idea is to collect all those receipts. Every time you get a receipt, make sure to keep it, if it’s for a business expense of course. And then, to create a system to organize those receipts. A lot of people put them into file folders or a box or something, but any way you do it, just make sure you’re collecting and organizing those receipts. With tax receipts we walk people through a simple system where we collect the receipts, we get them in a digital form, you classify those expenses, and they go into your accounting software and you’re done with it. It sounds like a lot of steps but, if you’re doing it on an ongoing business, it just becomes part of your routine and it’s just a couple minutes a week rather than tens of thousands of dollars later when the IRS comes and audits you.

Andrew: OK. When I am already classifying my expenses, if I buy a computer, I categorize it properly as the right kind of expense in my accounting software I use in Dinero. I am imaging a lot of people in the audience use QuickBooks, whatever it is, we are categorizing it, we are entering it into our software. The step that you want to make sure that we take as a result of this program is we keep the receipt. Now, where shall we keep it? Can I just stuff it in a box and then come back to it later on? Can I stuff if in a tickler folder so at least I have it by month? What I prefer to do is I take a picture of the receipt using one of those iPhone scanner apps. Is that enough? The picture of it?

Kyle: Absolutely.

Andrew: OK.

Kyle: A couple of years ago, the IRS came out with some regs. They authorized electronic records. They would be as good as paper records or hard copies. As long as you have electronic record, some sort of record of that receipt, then you are set.

Andrew: OK. All right. For the audience, Kyle just mentioned this website, taxreceipts.com. This is his site. We are not trying to sell you on anything. I know some people get frustrated when they watch a program and they feel like they are being sold throughout the program. Believe me. I would feel that same kind of frustration. There is frankly nothing as far as I know that they have got to sell on here. It is a new site where they are teaching people about taxes. Are you guys operating like true Internet entrepreneurs? You are going to figure out the real revenue model later on? You just want to get this up and running for now?

Kyle: Absolutely. Our main goal is to get the information out there.

Andrew: Right. Teach, do some good, build goodwill and then when you have got the model, there will be an audience of people who feel, “All right, I got something out of it. I’ll listen to them at least when they offer me the next step.”

Kyle: Absolutely.

Andrew: OK. It is a great. It is obviously very beautifully done here. Let me bring up the site. All right, there. Why did I click on the About? I think what I should have clicked on was this big button right here, Start Saving Money, and then there is some guide on here that people can go and get for free that will sum up some of what we are talking about here and some other big ideas for them. All right, on to the next big idea on our program, which is reduce your taxes, especially in this key month. What is the key month here that I was alluding to on the board?

Kyle: The key month is December. There are a number of things that you can do throughout the year to limit your taxes and to put more money in your pocket, but especially in December. There are some important decisions that you can make that can make a very big difference to your bottom line, your personal bottom line.

Andrew: December, all right. What should I educate myself on? What should our audience educate themselves on? In fact, do you want to tell us maybe about a client of yours in the printing business as an example of what we should be doing?

Kyle: Absolutely. This is not a normal example, but we do have several clients like this. He is an ongoing client of my firm. We work with him on a monthly basis and he comes to us. He schedules an appointment with us every December to do some tax planning. We look at his numbers. We do some calculations. We looked at it, we said, “Well, it looks like you’re going to owe $10,000 on your personal taxes.” He asked us, “Well, what can we do?” We started asking a few questions about his business. Is there an equipment you want to buy? Are they remodeling? How old is your company car? He ended up going and contributing some money to some plans, some retirement plans, health savings account. He bought a new printer for his business and when we did his taxes for April, instead of owing $10,000, he got a $30,000 refund.

Andrew: I wasn’t following. How exactly did he end up instead of owing money, getting money back?

Kyle: It sounds counter intuitive, but he was going to owe $10,000 personally, so he spent business money on equipment and by contributing to some retirement plans, these are pre-tax plans, and so by buying equipment for his business with business funds and by contributing money to retirement plans and other benefit plans, he personally benefited $40,000.

Andrew: Let me see if I understand this. He went out and he grew the expense of his business. That took his business probably from a profit to a loss, right? By taking his business to a loss, he didn’t have to pay taxes and maybe he paid taxes in the past because back when he was making money, he paid taxes. Now that he is not making money, he can get a refund of the taxes he paid in the past. Is that right?

Kyle: He could have. In this case, that wasn’t his situation. He didn’t have the carryover losses. You’re absolutely right. He took his business from a very profitable position to a loss. Because he did that, he was able to get a refund himself personally.

Andrew: Of the taxes he paid on his own salary throughout the year?

Kyle: Yes.

Andrew: OK. Got you.

Kyle: Yes. Because as an entrepreneur, as a self-employed person, you’re paying the taxes. SO he was looking at his revenue coming in and paying quarterly taxes on those. At the end of the year, he essentially got almost all those taxes back.

Andrew: I see. OK. So if I’m at the end of the year and I feel like, “Whoa. You know what? Next year I’m going to have to buy computers. Next year, I’m going to have to buy other equipment. I’m going to have other expenses.” You’re saying take the expenses right now? Maybe next year I’m going to have to hire a team of people to go do my past interviews on Mixergy, for example and pull out the key ideas and write articles for it. I might say “You know what? Let’s do it all in December. Hire all those people quickly. Pay all of them the salaries or the consulting fees that we need to. Really take the loss this year and that way I can get back some of the money that I paid earlier in the year in my tax estimates that I would pay quarterly.”

Kyle: Right. Part of the equation in December is also looking at ‘Where do I anticipate my business being next year?’. Are my revenues going to go up next year? Are they going to go down? Are tax rates going to change? There are a lot of different factors that come into play. That’s why it’s important to put a pin as to where you are now and project your revenues for the next year and make those decisions.

Andrew: I see. OK. If I were going to wait until February, for example, to redesign the site, I might as well do it in November or December and take those expenses. I mentioned earlier computers. Ordinarily, and the tax law changes, if I bought computers, hardware, equipment, like lighting or whatever it is that I need, I couldn’t write it off right away. From what I understand now, I can’t take my computer equipment and write off the expense immediately?

Kyle: Yes. Those hard assets like that are called capital assets. Generally you’d have to depreciate those over time. So the useful life of that asset. There’s a section in the US tax code that’s been enhanced since the recession started. It allows you to take those deductions, instead of amortizing it over five, seven, 10, 15 years, you can take the entire deduction at once in the current year.

Andrew: OK. Let me see if I can explain this in a more basic way and then we’ll move on to the next big idea. Actually, I’ll show the visuals for this idea and then go onto the next big idea. I’ll keep it really simple. Suppose I have $100 worth of sales for this year. Suppose that I bought equipment for $100. In the past, the government would say “How long are you going to use that equipment?”. I would say “Well, maybe four years.” They would say “Great. This year you have an expense of $25. Next year an expense of $25. The year after that, $25 and the year after that, $25.” So, if you have $100 in salary, you take $25 off of that as your only expense in this hypothetical example. Boom. You have $75 in profit, now pay taxes on that. That’s the way I said it at first because computers are now, what was it that you said they called equipment?

Kyle: They’re capital assets.

Andrew: Capital assets. Because we can all write them off on the same year now. I have $100 in sales and I bought $100 worth of capital assets, I end up with $0, nothing to pay taxes on. Did I get that right?

Kyle: Right, absolutely.

Andrew: I’m watching your face as I explain the before and after. Is there a before and after? Was it different a few years ago? I remember when I ran my past company and I bought computer equipment, my accountants told me to spread the expense over multiple years, not to take it all at once.

Kyle: Absolutely. The deduction, or the Section 179.

Andrew: Is it that it’s new that we can take our capital assets and expense them all in the same year?

Kyle: It’s not new. It’s just that it’s been enhanced. It’s been broadened to capture more assets and to allow for bigger deductions.

Andrew: I see. OK. It’s been enhanced now to include computers where before it wasn’t?

Kyle: Computers, yes. It’s been enhanced so you can include those assets. Plus, the limits were much lower before, probably, when you were doing that. Now it’s up to $250,000 in one year.

Andrew: I see. OK. All right. Let’s bring up this. What is a deduction? How do we know what I just discovered with you?

Kyle: This is a really simple equation. It goes back to the beginning. How do I reduce my taxable income? There are a number of different ways of doing that. The easiest way is by tracking those business expenses that you’re already incurring in your business. It’s a plus-minus game. The plus is the revenues. The minus is your business expenses. That gives you your taxable income. Those deductions are just those expenses that the government recognizes as valid business expenses that reduce that taxable income that you pay taxes on.

Andrew: I’ve got another visual here but I think we’ve got this idea. Should I show this other visual? Is there more you want to say about it or should I move on to the next big idea?

Kyle: I think we’ve covered that one pretty well.

Andrew: All right. Next one is “Know the right time to track your expenses and how”. What do you mean by that?

Kyle: It’s interesting. I run into a lot of startups, a lot of entrepreneurs who start investigating businesses, they start spending money by doing research, by going to conferences, by talking to people, by even testing in advertising, even buying Google ad words. That type of stuff. Then they don’t keep track of those expenses and then when they get into business, they have no record or they haven’t deducted those expenses. Those are all called startup expenses. I don’t mean to be demeaning. It sounds stupid. Of course those are startup expenses. But most people don’t track those expenses as they’re incurring them. The tax law says that if you don’t deduct those expenses the first year you’re in business then you’ve lost the ability to deduct those.

Andrew: What you’re saying is that most people in their first year of expenses say, “You know what? I’ve got all these expenses. I’m buying Google ads as you said. I’m trying to buy an ad on Facebook. Someone told me about some Twitter something. I’m going to buy that.” I’m not going to keep track of it because I’m running a business and, frankly, I don’t have anything to expense it against. I have no profit. So if I have no profit I’m going to pay no taxes anyway. I have no sales. So who cares about the expenses? I have no sales, I don’t care about the expenses because I’m not going to have a profit and they only tax profits. You’re saying, look, the government is telling you that you better keep track of these expenses right now and in the future, if you have a loss this year, in the future, it’s going to be counted against your profit. Do I understand that right?

Kyle: Right, yes.

Andrew: I see. OK. That’s why. Even if you don’t have a profit now, think ahead, entrepreneur. You, at some point, are going to have profits and you’re going to now be able to shield some of those profits by taking count of your expenses now.

Kyle: Absolutely. And a lot of entrepreneurs I run into don’t do that. They think “I don’t have a business yet”.’.

Andrew: Your first example, right, did you have this issue when you were starting out?

Kyle: I did.

Andrew: Do you want to open up and tell us about that?

Kyle: Absolutely. I started doing a bunch of research. I took courses. I flew around to conferences. In fact, I went to a conference where the total fees, the conference fee and lodging fee, was about $3,000. My wife came to me, this is before I went and got my post doctorate in tax, she said “Listen. The limit for these expenses”, at that point, ‘”as five thousand dollars. You’re bumping against those $5,000. We have to start the business now or we’re going to lose the benefit of some of these expenses”. Now, the limit is $10,000. So if you’re getting close to the $10,000 limit or if you’re incurring all those expenses and you’re getting close to $10,000, it makes sense to make the decision to start the business and take the couple of steps to make this venture look like a business.

Andrew: What’s the $10,000 number? I know at the time you were doing this it was $5,000, now it’s $10,000. $10,000 for what? I can keep no more than $10,000 of expenses for the future?

Kyle: No. The startup expenses, you’re limited to deducting $10,000 in startup expenses in the first year. Let’s say, you go out and do a bunch of research. You set up the company, you have $10,000 worth of expenses. You can deduct those in that year.

Andrew: I see.

Kyle: And you have to deduct those that first year or else you lose them.

Andrew: But I can’t deduct any more than $10,000 is what you’re saying.

Kyle: Well, this is where people run into trouble as well. There’s another tip. This is why I say to start the business before you get to that $10,000 limit. Let’s say you spend $20,000 before you start the business. You can take the $10,000 but that extra ten grand, you’re going to have to depreciate or you’re going to have to take those expenses over 15 years. The benefit is miniscule.

Andrew: I see. OK. All right. So if I’m spending $100,000 in startup expenses because I’m deciding that I’m going to really invest in my business and getting ready for the business and exploring ideas. $10,000 I can’t write off the future. I can expense it this year but I can’t get the benefit of that next year. I have to take it over several years.

Kyle: Right and, in fact, if you go over $60,000, then you loose the benefit all together at some point so, it’s a sliding scale and it starts to get convoluted. That’s why I recommend to people, if you get close to that $10,000, start the business. And then, you don’t have to worry about all, it makes it simple..

Andrew: What’s the difference between starting the business and not starting the business? Is there an official act that you go through that starts the business?

Kyle: There really isn’t so, what the IRS looks at is, they look at your intent at that point. So they look at have you filed for a business license? Do you have an EIN? Have you incorporated? Have you actually offered goods to the public? That’s one of the criteria the IRS looks at to.

You don’t even have to go and incorporate and do all the other stuff. You just have to actually start selling something to the public.

Andrew: I see. You need to do something that shows that you have an intent to really have a business here and we’ll talk more about the difference between a business and a hobby and how the government looks at it, not how you look at it.

You just need to do something that shows “Hey, this is a real business. I’m not just going to seminars because I enjoy hanging out with people and learning.” Got it.

EIN is what?

Kyle: It’s an Employer Identification Number. It’s basically the Social Security number for your business.

Andrew: Every entrepreneur who’s gotten one knows how many times you have to repeat it.

Let’s bring up this quick visual, by the way, largely because I just love the design on your site. This is off your site. What is this and how does it factor into this idea that we’re covering right now?

Kyle: I show in this diagram, you got the idea on the left, you got a bunch of expenses before the business begins and a bunch of expenses after. The expenses are the same. Start up and operating expenses are the same type of expenses except the start up expenses are limited to that $10,000 in the first year of operations.

Andrew: OK. If you can’t see it because you’re listening to the MP3 or reading the transcript or if I don’t have the right resolution here in the video for you, don’t worry, it will be included with the program notes here so you’ll have a clear vision of it. And I say that, of course, to the people in the audience.

Anything else before we move on to the next big idea?

Kyle: No. I think we’ve covered it.

Andrew: I think we’re going at a nice pace.

All right. Next one is Avoid the equity is free pain.

Kyle: Yeah. This is another one of these eye-opening issues that I hate to see people run into inadvertently and I tell people remember equity is not free and that means, if you are receiving equity from a business, if you haven’t contributed some tangible property to that business, then you’re going to be taxed on the value of that equity.

Andrew: Can you illustrate this with an example? I want to make sure that we understand this.

Kyle: I can. I had a client. They’re a company in California. They’re a software development company. They’re boot-strapping the company, as many of them do and they just gone through a round of funding. They received a valuation of about $1 million and they still didn’t have the funds to bring on as many developers as they needed so they offered some people equity in the company.

Andrew: Standard practice. You don’t have enough money to pay your employees or you want to really get them excited, you give them equity.

Kyle: Right. Exactly.

Andrew: I’ll give you a share of the business, you’ll have the upside. You believe enough in me to work here, you don’t want just the salary. That’s why you’re working at this startup. I’ll give you equity, a piece of the pie. OK.

Kyle: Right. So each of these developers received 2% and there was 3 developers. They each received 2% of the pie, of this million dollar pie.

And they came to me and said ‘Hey, we did this. We need to work out a few other things.’ I looked at it and “Well, did you tell these guys that they’re going to be taxed on $20,000?” and it was dead silence in the room and they’re like ‘Oh, shit. How do we explain this? We hosed these guys.’

Andrew: Right. So you are saying you give them 2% of the business, not cash, 2% of the business. That’s worth $20,000. The government says, “You just got $20,000 in value, you better pay taxes on this” so now these developers who didn’t get cash, have to go around and find cash to pay taxes because the Government is not going to take a percentage of the business. They need the cash equivalent of their share.

Kyle: Right.

Andrew: I see. So then, at that point, you have to really start hitting people up for cash. We’ve seen this happen in the past. That’s because equity isn’t free to the recipient. You still have to pay taxes when you’re being given equity. What should we do instead with our employees who we value, we want to make sure they’re not hit with the tax bill for an asset that’s really not worth that much and not sellable until some point in the future?

Kyle: I recommend options. Options to acquire equity is the best route to go. If the business does become something, they’re not taxed when they get that option unless they choose to be taxed. They won’t be taxed on it until they exercise the option.

Andrew: Options, not stock. Just recognize that if you ever give someone stock and there’s a value on the company they’re going to have to pay taxes on their share of the value they’re getting.

Kyle: Absolutely.

Andrew: What is this?

Kyle: This is a diagram to show what we call the equity tax bite. You’ve got a million-dollar business. If a service provider comes along and provides a service, it’s a service, not contributing property to the business, and they get 5%, then that service provider is going to be taxed on $50,000 worth of value. That’s not capital. That’s $50,000 of income. That’s an income tax rate. It’s not the capital tax rates, which are lower right now.

Andrew: By the way, how are you feeling about this? I know you had a lot more visuals you wanted to show. How are you feeling about the way we’re explaining these topics with a few visuals and a lot of stories?

Kyle: This is great. This is fantastic. Generally, people hear tax stuff and they say “Oh, my God. I’m just going to tune out.”. Their eyes glaze over. Generally, it’s not nice to know stuff. You need to know stuff. That’s the goal. I’m glad you’re doing this, showing this stuff in an interesting way.

Andrew: Good. I appreciate that you’re saying that. I know how important it was to you that you get this explained properly and so I thought I would check in with you in public to say “Am I doing a good job here? Am I helping you communicate these ideas right or am I doing justice to these ideas?” I’m glad you’re saying yes. So onto the next. The next one is to create the schedule you need. I alluded to the schedule that you have in our notes. But you tell me. You tell the audience. What’s the schedule you need to put together? A schedule of what?

Kyle: It’s a schedule of when you need to file tax returns and to pay taxes. As an entrepreneur, you’re inundated with deadlines. Deadlines from vendors, from customers, from whomever. But you have a ton of deadlines to meet from the government as well. The best way I recommend to deal with those is to set up what’s called a tax calendar at the beginning of the year. Look at “What do I have to file this year? What do I have to pay?” and just go in and put those into your Google calendar or whatever and set alerts for them and it’s off your mind.

Andrew: Do you have a client that you did this with that maybe we can use as an example?

Kyle: I did. She came to me, as many of my clients did, because there was a raging fire already because she didn’t set these alerts. So she was relying upon her accountant at the time. I always tell my clients to make sure to do this stuff yourself because in the end it’s your a*s on the line. It’s not your accountant’s, it’s not your tax attorney’s butt on the line. It’s yours. It behooves you to do this stuff yourself.

Unfortunately, she had relied solely upon her accountant to remind her and to do these things. That accountant had had some health problems, she had had a death in the family, she fell off the grid and didn’t take care of a couple of these things and as the government generally does, they’re slow to catch these things, but interests and penalties are building up. So she came to me. She had missed a filing deadline and it was three years later. Her bill was $46,000 because of the interest and penalties that had accrued on this somewhat small amount that she should have paid three years ago.

Andrew: This is giving me a pain in my stomach but I will find a solution for this. I didn’t know that I needed to keep track of my own stuff. I know that I’ve missed some because my accountant was the accountant that I had back in the Bradford and Reed days. Back when we were pulling in millions of dollars and I was an important account to him at that point. Now, everything is on auto pilot for him for revenue, right? I am not a huge client for him. He knows basically what he could expect from me. He is not alerting me and frankly, when I was traveling all over the world, when I was living in Argentina, I wasn’t touching in with the account the way that I was before, so shame on me there, and now it is time for me to keep track of all the deadlines myself if only to make sure that he is telling me about them.

I accept what you are telling me and I know when you say use Google Docs, Google Calendar, fairly easy to do. Frankly, I use Google Calendar for national holidays. I don’t book an interview on a date that I know that the Kyle won’t show up because he has a picnic and forgot about it. I now have it. I know how to do that. I don’t know where to find these deadlines to put on the calendar. How do I do that?

Kyle: Well, it does make it somewhat complicated because you are going to have federal, state, local, a bunch of filing obligations. For all the federal obligations, you can get to the IRS website. There is a link. You can download and you can actually order a paper calendar if you want.

Andrew: How about now?

Kyle: You can download a copy of the federal. . .

Andrew: Paper calendar?

Kyle: Yeah. You can get a paper calendar.

Andrew: You know, I am looking actually over your shoulder and I see all the different machines that produce paper. It makes me uncomfortable. You are in a very paper-based business.

Kyle: I am, but I have to tell you in the last year, my firm. . . I like to go minimal paper. We have used less than two reams of paper in the entire year.

Andrew: Oh, good. That is impressive.

Kyle: I don’t like paper. I don’t like the paper calendars, but some people do.

Andrew: Okay. You are saying I can ask them for a paper calendar or is this the URL right here? The one that we can go to? Let me zoom in at the bottom here.

Kyle: Yes.

Andrew: Zoom and move up. It is this URL right at the bottom?

Kyle: It is, yes.

Andrew: That is where we can go and we can get the federal tax calendar.

Kyle: Absolutely.

Andrew: Okay.

Kyle: You are right. Right now, there are a lot of. . . And you can see towards the top, there are a lot of filing and paying obligations and unfortunately, it is incumbent upon you to go out and to talk, get on the websites of your state and local entities and figure out when you need to do this stuff. Most of it is generally, for smaller businesses, on quarterly basis. Because this is such a pain point, one of the things that Nick, my partner, tax receipts and I are doing is we are working on a tool that will help automate this process for entrepreneurs and remind them.

Andrew: Bless you, yes. All right, but for now, this is a URL of course we will include if you guys are listening and you don’t see it. The URL is up there on the screen. We will have it in the course notes and of course, we will have the screenshot in there, too. In this screen shot, you are going to have an understanding of the kinds of things you should be prepared to file and to pay and what I am taking away from this is that I should just talk to my accountant and say, “Look, I got my Google Calendar here in front of me. Tell me what’s coming up for me or better yet, email it to me. That way, I have a good record of what you told me and I don’t miss anything.”

Kyle: Absolutely.

Andrew: OK. All right. Let’s see. That is the way to create a schedule. Let us go on to the next big idea on the big board, which is not taxes, getting your travel, there we go, in real time. Getting your travel subsidized. That means that, well, you tell me. What does that mean? How I can get the travel that I take subsidized?

Kyle: Well, Uncle Sam will subsidize your travel.

Andrew: Did you do this?

Kyle: I am a big fan of traveling, yes.

Andrew: OK. How did you do it? I don’t want to put you on the spot here, but I see here on the notes that there is a hint here that you did it and so I figured I will talk to you about that.

Kyle: Yeah, yeah. I like traveling so I generally turn it into business travel because then it becomes subsidized by the government.

Andrew: OK.

Kyle: I was going to Europe last year for some business and instead of hopping on a flight, I hopped on a cruise ship instead and the mode of transportation was irrelevant in that case and in fact, you get a much bigger allowance, or this is an allowance. There is a limit for the amount you can deduct when you take a cruise ship, but it is ridiculous. It highlights that you can subsidize some of your travel by integrating it in your business.

Andrew: OK. If I take a cruise ship to get to Europe, the cruise ship expense even though I am having a fun time on the cruise ship, that is an expense that I can write off. How else can I do it if I can’t take a cruise ship to a meeting?

Kyle: Well, if you are, let us say, in the United States, if you’re going for travel, and if more than 50% of the time you’re spending on that travel is for business, then you can deduct all the cost of that transportation plus any of the business related expenses. So, any of the lodging, any of the actual meals, the business meals you can deduct. That’s just if you’re spending more than 50% of your time on the business.

Andrew: OK.

Kyle: Once you get outside the United States, the rules can be much more complicated. One way to simplify it is to take a trip that’s less than 7 days that’s outside the United States, and it’s the same rule.

Andrew: OK, and of course we’re going to have this up for people to see this flowchart. Is this flowchart complete, is there anything on that’s not on here that we should be aware of?

Kyle: No. Most of it is covered, I would just say if you have any questions about this, or if your situation doesn’t fit within this, then talk with your tax adviser. If your trip goes over 7 days and you’re overseas, as long as you spend more than 75% of your time on business, then the rule is the same. You can deduct all of your transportation.

Andrew: OK.

Kyle: So, either make your trip less than 7 days or spend more than 75% of your time on business so you can deduct all your transportation.

Andrew: Alright, so if I have a trip that’s a legitimate business trip that takes 10 days, I can invite my wife out for 9 of those days and we can have a good time in the city?

Kyle: Potentially. It depends on, of course, because I’m an attorney, I have to say it depends.

Andrew: It depends on what? I know that this isn’t going to give us a thorough understanding, but give me a general understanding of what I’m missing there because I thought I was doing the standard math easily. If more than 50% is on business, you can take all those deductions.

Kyle: Oh, you can yourself.

Andrew: Yeah, that’s what I mean. Oh, I see, because I said the wife, now suddenly that’s different. OK.

Kyle: Now, let’s say, let’s say you hire your wife.

Andrew: I see.

Kyle: There actually are some opportunities there for planning. So if you hire your wife to do some business, and she comes out and does some business for you. You have to be careful because you have to document it properly because you’re what’s called “related parties”, but you may be able to deduct your wife’s transportation as well.

Andrew: I see, so I’m going to a conference. My wife is going to man the booth when I’m on stage, I’m going to man the booth when she’s on stage, we’re both working the conference for ten days. We’re done with the conference the other nine days, we can take another nine days and just have a good time in the city.

Kyle: Yes, absolutely.

Andrew: And all that’s documented, OK. What about weekends, by the way? What if I’m only Friday on a conference, because I’ve seen that there are some organizers that do their conferences on Thursday or Friday, let’s say I’m doing it just for Friday.

Kyle: Right.

Andrew: I want to stay for Saturday and Sunday for the weekend. Those don’t court, right?

Kyle: Well, they’re not business days, no. What a lot of people do, especially outside the United States, is they’ll sandwich conferences or meetings. So, if your conference ends on Friday you schedule a Monday meeting, or a Monday lunch with somebody or something like that. And then the entire weekend is considered in that realm and you’re covered then.

Andrew: We talked a little bit about hiring my wife. If I hired my wife, it wouldn’t be as a full time employee. In fact we don’t have any full time employees here. We have contractors, which brings up the topic that I didn’t put up on the big board, but started to do because I want to talk about it. It’s how to treat employees versus contractors. What’s the difference? We only have contractors here at [??] employees. What’s the difference and, how do we do this right?

Kyle: So, the IRS, and a lot of different federal and state agencies are really sensitive to this employee-independent contractor debate, so it’s important to get this right. Independent contractors essentially are self-employed people, they have the risks of taking on the job, they have to pay their own taxes, and an independent contractor also has the right to set his or her own hours and essentially just deliver a product to you as the hiring firm.

Andrew: I see, so, before we even go to that, I wanted to make sure people understand why this is important. I want to make sure I’m understanding why it’s important. The reason I don’t have employees is I don’t want to have to pay taxes for them. I don’t want to worry about hiring and firing them on a certain date. I don’t want to have to worry about the local laws here. There are other issues. I might want to travel to another country and I don’t want to have someone in the office. But those are the benefits I imagine. I’m learning throughout this session that I was wrong about a lot of things. Maybe you can tell me. What are the benefits of contractors over employees that make entrepreneurs want contractors and not employees?

Kyle: The biggest one is that employees are freaking expensive.

Andrew: Expensive how?

Kyle: Expensive in that you have a lot more administrative overhead. You have a lot more filing requirements if you have employees.

Andrew: Filing requirements? Do I have to pay taxes on their behalf?

Kyle: You have to pay taxes not only on their behalf but for them. So if you’re a W2 employee, you have a withholding from your paycheck. Your employer generally has to match that withholding. That’s only one half the equation. The employer is paying the other half of the payroll taxes. Then there’s unemployment insurance, worker’s compensation. There are all kinds of employment laws and discrimination things you have to worry about and concern yourself about with employees. If you can help it, if you’re a small business and someone’s doing something that isn’t necessarily integral to your day-to-day operations, then I do recommend that you use independent contractors.

Andrew: OK. All right. The reason we’re having this conversation is we now see all the benefits of having contractors over employees. But if we have contractors who are essentially employees, the government says “Hey, wait. You’re trying to get away with something. All those things you thought you didn’t have to do? Now you have to do them retroactively.” So what do we do to make sure that we keep contractors as contractors and not accidentally trigger this employee thing?

Kyle: I gave you a graphic.

Andrew: All right. Let’s bring that up. I’d love to get an example also so that we can include that. But first let’s get into what we need to do. Here is the graphic.

Kyle: There’s a lot of text on here. Essentially, this is a checklist to look at; some criteria of what’s an employee and what’s an independent contractor. What does one look like and what is the other? A lot of it comes down to the independent contractor works for him- or herself whereas the employee works for you. It’s important to keep these criteria in mind when you’re setting the hours, the requirements on the independent contractor. The way you do that, the first step is to have a contract with that individual independent contractor that lays out what’s required of the contractor.

One of the things that did happen., I had a client who’s a software vendor. They had an independent contractor that was doing all of their inside sales. That’s a fairly integral part of their business. The company told the contractor when to come in, where to work, how to work and said “But, you’re an independent contractor. You’re on your own for your taxes.” This client was audited by the state of Washington and the state of Washington looked at it and said “This person is not an independent contractor. Regardless of what you say he is, he meets all these different criteria for an employee. So guess what? You owe us all the back unemployment taxes, all the back payroll taxes, interest, penalties, workers compensation”. And then, to add insult to injury, the IRS came along and audited them as well and slapped them with the same thing. So they ended up with a $40,000 bill for one year for not treating this independent contractor like an employee.

Andrew: $40,000 for one year for one employee? Wow. All because they weren’t aware of this chart that we’re going to be giving people. This is yours. It looks beautiful. Is this something you guys put together yourselves? It’s based on a set of guidelines that are publicly available, right?

Kyle: It is, yes. It’s something we did put together but it’s just some guidelines. These are general criteria that a lot of these government agencies use to look at whether someone is an employee or an independent contractor.

Andrew: OK. All right. You can’t pretend that they are a contractor and then make them work at a specific location, come in at a specific time or else they are in trouble with you, work a specific amount of time, etc. This will all be in the course notes, thanks to Andrea who is a contractor here and she is so good that she actually gave me the contract as she was the first contractor that I hired.

Kyle: Good on her.

Andrew: Yeah, right on. Thank you, Andrea. She is used to doing work like that so she set us up. All right, so next big idea is establish your tax home. I am a globetrotter. What does this mean?

Kyle: I can start off with a story about that.

Andrew: Yeah, please.

Kyle: I had a software developer client and he loved to travel as you do, as I do, and he would be hired by firms all over the world and he instead of establishing a business, a tax home here in the United States, he could just go and get a new mailing address or didn’t have a mailing address and would move around every three months or so as he got these projects. He came in and he wanted to get his taxes done with my firm and we had to give him the bad news that because he had been moving around and never established himself in what is called a tax home, a regular place of business, that he would be classified by the IRS as a transient and couldn’t deduct thousands of dollars he had spent moving around the world.

Andrew: A transient? That is an official classification?

Kyle: Yeah. It is pretty harsh. It is pretty harsh, but there are just a few simple things you can do.

Andrew: Yeah. What do I do now to avoid being a transient? First of all, I like the title of transient, but if it is attached to all these penalties, I don’t want to be a part of it. What do I do to keep from making that mistake?

Kyle: Well, the first thing to do is establish. . . To establish a tax home, you establish a regular mailing address, a regular place of business. Even if it is like your parents’ house or a friend’s house, some place where you receive mail on a regular basis and is determined by your state to be your place of business. If you go and get a business license in your state and say this place, this mailbox, this UPS store or my parents’ house or whatever is my place of business, then you have established your tax home at that point.

Andrew: Ah, I see. OK. I have done that, but I didn’t realize that that is what we were doing. I have had the same mailbox in California for years even as I travel and have been paying tax in California and you are saying a mailbox is legitimate.

Kyle: Yes, yes.

Andrew: If that is where I get my paperwork, that is where I get paid by my customers and so on. You just need at least one place that you make your real home even if you are not really living in it.

Kyle: Right, right. It is important also, let us say, where you do your business on a regular basis, let us say you are a consultant and you work out of your home for instance, if you don’t establish that as your place of business, then anytime you go out to somebody’s office to do a job or you fly somewhere to do a job, those expenses are not going to be deductible because you haven’t established that tax home.

Andrew: I see.

Kyle: Then moving around out of the country, there are some other things you can do. They get kind of complicated, but if you are moving around a lot and outside of the country, then stay out of the country for over 330 days. As long as you are outside the US, you can potentially take advantage of another tax deduction that allows you to exclude all of that income you receive while you were overseas or, I am sorry, up to about $93,000. It is $92,900.

Andrew: I could have excluded that much money out of my income when I was living in Buenos Aires.

Kyle: Yes. Yes. If you are out of the country for 330 days or more, you have an exclusion of almost $93,000 and so that means you don’t pay tax on that $93,000.

Andrew: This is the worst course I have ever done. It is just me getting kicked in the teeth. I wonder if we did that. I need an accountant who can really have a conversation with me. Are you available? Can I hire you? Can other people hire you?

Kyle: Absolutely. Bring it on.

Andrew: Where do you live in Seattle?

Kyle: No, no. I have an office here in Seattle. We also have an office in California.

Andrew: You do? What if I don’t live in California anymore because I’m a, what’s the word you used?

Kyle: Oh, you’re a transient. That’s right.

Andrew: Transient. Then maybe we can’t work together, right? You’re more California and Seattle?

Kyle: Yes.

Andrew: All right. OK. Because, you know what? I was scrolling through your site earlier and I said “Where’s the contact information?”. Where is the contact information on here?

Kyle: Yes. It’s still in its initial beta stages here, so this is good information for me to learn, too.

Andrew: Yeah, contact information is really good. I could use it. Usually, I don’t care. I don’t want to contact anyone, but this is great. This is, by the way, what people can get from you. The over 1,000 pages of tax regulations on a business card. This is where you give people some guidelines that they should keep with them.

Kyle: Yes. We have a couple things on the site. That’s one of them. You can download the card. We have hard copies we’ll send as well. It’s just while you’re traveling around, it reminds you of things to keep track of.

Andrew: There’s the plain English deduction guide, what else is there? All right. You’re really at the point with the site where you’re in the giving, giving, giving mode. I don’t even see a place where I can give you my credit card, where I can give you my email address. Who knows?

Kyle: Yes. As you mentioned, we’re in the start-up phase. To be completely transparent, we have established some partnerships with some companies. Quickbooks is one of them. Shoebox is another one.

Andrew: Yeah. I saw that. Basically what it means is you’re linking over to them. You’re at the place where my audience should really be jumping into this site because this is the place where you guys are eager to give. You guys are eager to figure out what problems people have when it comes to taxes. This is the stage where it’s really good to be a part of it. Especially if the guy behind it knows his stuff, which you do. I’ve got one visual for this section, which is “Establish You Tax Home”. Why don’t you quickly give us an understanding of what this visual is that we’re looking at and then we’ll move on to the next one. Of course, we’ll hand this out and everyone will have it with them.

Kyle: Let’s say you run a home office. Anytime you go from your home office to a temporary work location, those expenses are deductible. Those transportation expenses are deductible.

Andrew: If it’s from a home office to another, like, to a coffee shop where I’m going to be working or one of these day offices that I sometimes have rented in the past, that trip is deductible?

Kyle: Right. Exactly. Exactly. Let’s say you have an office also. Anytime you’re going from your home to your office that you pay for, that’s not deductible. That’s a commuting expense. Commuting expenses are not deductible. But, if you went from that external office to a work location to meet someone, to work at their place or to meet somebody at a coffee shop, that’s deductible. The only time it’s not deductible in that transportation scenario is if you’re going from your home to your office or vice versa.

Andrew: Commutes you can’t expense, you’re telling me? I can’t deduct them but transportation while I’m at work or after I’ve gotten to my desk is deductible?

Kyle: Yes.

Andrew: Let’s look at the final big idea. The final big idea is act like a business or else. Before we get to the ‘or else’, what’s the alternative to acting like a business? A hobby?

Kyle: Yes. Absolutely. That’s exactly what it is. That is the word you never want to hear come out of an IRS auditor’s mouth is hobby. Hobby means that you can’t take losses. Those are losses that exceed the amount of revenue you bring in. If they call your business a hobby, you can take losses up to the amount of revenue. Let’s say you take in $10,000 that year, you can take losses up to $10,000. A lot of people, though, when you’re in this startup phase, you have losses that exceed your revenue. Obviously. You want to be able to continue rolling those losses forward to offset income in the future.

Andrew: That’s the key. If you have a lot of losses in the first couple years of your business and in the next few years, you’re suddenly bringing in money, you can counteract the profits with the losses from the past. As bad as you feel about losing money the first few years of running your business, at least there’s an upside, which is in the future, when you do make money, you can write off some of that profit. You can take deductions against some of that profit.

And so, unless it’s a hobby, unless they say ‘Hey, you know what, Andrew? I’m excited that you are doing this video show on the internet but, really, you got all these expenses in bandwidth, all these expenses in computers, best buy some shaky expenses that we can’t prove but let’s suppose even then that’s terrific. There’s no revenue here. It’s not really a business. It’s just really you entertaining yourself with your new Apple computer, it’s a hobby. I don’t care how much you lose, you can’t write it off against other profits that you have.’, that’s the danger. That they think that this is a hobby.

So how do I keep them from thinking that my business is a hobby, whether it’s this or software creation?

Kyle: It’s to treat it like a real business. So, if you, let’s say you set up a separate entity for it, you go start an LLC for it, or you’re starting a corporation for it, you’re fairly protected then. There have been cases where people have gone and set up LLCs and they’ve been in trouble because they haven’t really treated it like a real business so, instead of, they go to set up the LLC but they’re still using their own bank account to fund it. So, if you set up separate books, separate LLC or separate entity for this and then treat it as a real business showing that you’re actually trying to make a profit with this business and that’s the key the IRS looks at, is there a profit motive with this business?

One of the questions on our site, you look at our site and, like, I don’t see the profit motive. Well, that’s because we’re still on this testing phase and giving people information, seeing what people need and that’s what a lot of businesses are, the testing and trying. The IRS looks at did you try to make a profit in 3 out of the last 5 years? If you have, then you fall within what’s called the Safe Harbor. And so, if you attempted to sell something, attempted to make a profit within 3 out of the last 5 years, then you’re protected to a great extent from being called a hobby.

Andrew: I see. So the very least, I should be trying to bring in advertisers with whatever I’m doing or at the very least trying to sell back interviews or something, or else they’re going to say ‘You can’t write off all the expenses associated with it.’

Kyle: Right.

Andrew: You had a, did you work with a documentary filmmaker? Can you tell us that story?

Kyle: I didn’t but this is a case out of Arizona. And this filmmaker, she had a legitimate business. She set up an LLC. She was an attorney so this was a side deal for her and she went out. She created this documentary and it won a couple of awards, some film festivals. It was shown all over the country. The IRS audited her in 2010 and said “This is a hobby. You have all these losses. You have a full time job, this isn’t a real, you have no profit motive here either because this is a documentary. It’s educational.”

And so, they went and slammed with $300,000 worth of back taxes on this hobby, even though she did have a business entity set up for it. She made a few critical errors that they cited and she’s still appealing. It’ll be in the courts for years.

Andrew: And I can see that. Frankly, it does take a while for tech entrepreneurs just to bring in revenue. It takes a while for mobile apps and for the industries frankly that we’re targeting. It takes a while for the whole industry to start producing revenue, let alone one company. You are saying, do some of the things that prove that you’re a real company. Take it seriously. Don’t use the same bank account for your company as you do for yourself. Don’t forget to think about revenues and to maybe start putting some plans in place to bring them in.

That makes a lot of sense.

Kyle: And there’s one thing, if I could add one thing here. There is this one, again it’s almost a myth, and I don’t want to give people impression of this myth. If you don’t make a profit in 3 of the last 5 years, that doesn’t mean you’re automatically a hobby.

Some people have come into my office, some entrepreneurs and they’re like, crap. We have to start making money immediately or I’m going to be hosed. And that’s not the case. That’s just one of those criteria the IRS uses. It’s a Safe Harbor. So, if you do make a profit in 3 of the last 5 years, you’re safe but if you don’t that doesn’t mean you’re screwed. You just need to treat it as a real business.

Andrew: All right. So guys, as you saw, we put a lot of work into this. We have a lot of notes, we spent a lot of time picking out just the right ideas for you and making sure they’re explained through examples and through charts. But of course, all we are doing here is giving you an understanding that, well, we’re not replacing your accountant, I want to say over and over.

I want to say that because it’s at the top of the notes and it seems like it was important to you, Kyle, that we mention it twice. We’re not replacing your tax or legal advice. What we’re doing instead is saying “Here’s a better understanding that you might have gotten. Here’s some things that you might want to go over to your accountant and talk to” and, in my case, it was, where is that one slide? This is one that I’m going to have to go and talk to my accountant and say “Hey, help me put this together.” In other cases, it’ll gave me an understanding that I couldn’t have done on my own.

Regardless it’s there for you to help you improve your business. If there is one thing on this big board that you can use, use it and then come back and let me know how you’ve used it.

And, as I mentioned throughout, this is Kyle’s site, go to taxreceipts.com. You got a great domain. You guys are feeling comfortable with saying how much you spent to get taxreceipts.com as a domain.

Kyle: You know, my partner, he acquired it for a pretty good deal. It was pretty good.

Andrew: All right. I know the way you guys operate. He’s handling the tech side of things and eventually the revenue when that comes in and he picked you for the same reason that I picked to have you here. Because you know your stuff when it comes to taxes and you know the issues that entrepreneurs like me face.

So, I appreciate you doing this session with us. Thank you for teaching us, Kyle and the website is taxreceipts.com and thank you all for being a part of this program. Looking forward to hearing your feedback. Bye.

Kyle: Thanks for having me.

Master Class: How to stop getting distracted and get more done
(Even if you think productivity isn’t for you)
Taught by Jason Womack of the Womack Company

Report issues here

Master Class:
Productivity

About the course leader

The session is led by Jason Womack, founder of, let’s bring up your website, the Womack Company and author of Your Best Just Got Better: Work Smarter, Think Bigger, and Make More.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Reqall

E.ggtimer

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to increase your productivity. We’re going to be covering all these big topics one at time and the session is led by Jason Womack, founder of, let’s bring up your website, The Womack Company and author of “Your Best Just Got Better: Work Smarter, Think Bigger, and Make More.” I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy.com were proven founders, like Jason, teach

Jason, you got a phone call one time at 6:00 from your wife, can you tell the audience about that cause I think we’ll all identify with the problem that you experienced with that call.

Jason: Andrew, first of all thank you for allowing me to share some of this with your community.

Andrew: Thank you. This is a topic I personally need. I feel like I just get everything in order and then I go backwards and I end up needing this help and I’m really glad that you’re doing this today.

Jason: Absolutely.

Andrew: The experience that you’re about to talk about is one that I’m experiencing and have in the last week.

Jason: I started my career in education. Early, early on, one of my most significant mentors, my dad, he had told me, he said Jason if you can teach, you’ll always have job. He was right, yet again, and so I went into education. I actually became a high school teacher, I was teaching Spanish language, I was teaching World History and US History for a high school here in California and, like you mentioned, I got a call, it was about 6:00 on a late winter night here and it was my wife, Jody, and she was saying “Hey Jason, do you think you’re going to be coming for dinner tonight?” She was used to me working until late and about four or maybe three nights a week I’d actually make it home and I looked at my watch and I said “Yeah, I’ve got to finish up a few things. I should be home by dinner.” And then the last thing she said it really changed my life, she said “Jason, it’s Saturday night.” And essentially I put myself into this corner of giving myself a job that I felt was never done. I could always be doing more.

Andrew: And you know what? I used to think that meant that I was a super star entrepreneur, someone who’s really commented and harder working then everyone else who took time away from the office and then what I realized was by constantly going through my to-do’s by constantly being in the office trying to work off a workload that’s never going to go away, I didn’t give myself time to just step back and just think about where’s the business going, think back about what got me started and where are those next ones that are going to get my business to grow and it was just stifling my creativity and my purpose and the business suffered for it in the long run. And of course, famously, I’ve talked about how Bradford and Reed basically had to sell it because I was burning out. I didn’t know that guys like me could burn out. I thought we could go on forever but it happened.

Jason: I talk and hopefully we’ll have some time to talk about this later today Andrew, but I talk about the three main influencers to productivity. One of them is what I call homeostasis, meaning we’ll continue doing what we’ve done to get us to this level of success. I’ve got good news and bad news, the good news is that’s what got us to this level of success. The bad news is it will keep us at this level of success. So often times to break to that next level, I just watched the Mixergy class that you Ari did and what a wealth of information there about doing things differently, so ideally we’ll get to talk today about how do you start doing that on the individual side to step into many of the recommendations your other folks have suggested here.

Andrew: And we’ve going a lot of really actionable tactics that were going to be covering here but before we do, you use all these ideas that you’re about to teach us and as a result what happened? Can you tell us about that trip to Alaska? Just one example of what happened to your life.

Jason: This is probably most favorite example, back in 2007, actually late 2006, both my wife and I left a job, we were working for the same company actually, a consulting firm here in California, and she left in 2005 and it was late in 2006 and I was getting ready to leave to start our own thing and one of the activities I did, and I’m going to talk about this later today, was I went to breakfast with a mentor, Jim, and over breakfast he had me write down, he said, “What are the three indicators that you will have been successful?”

And one of the things that we both wrote down, Jodie and I, was life style, that we wanted a particular lifestyle. Well, within two years we got a gig, we got a consulting event up in Anchorage, Alaska. We went up for the two days, I did the seminar, I did the coaching work. We had half a day off in between, when were done with the work and were flying back to Los Angeles. So we visited this little town called, Homer, Alaska. I’d never heard of it. The only thing I knew about it was there was this lady down there. She was called the eagle lady. And for almost three decades she has single handedly decided to bring back the bald eagle population into Homer, Alaska. Well, I heard about this, and thought, I’ve got to go see this thing. Well, she had already passed on, and her one of her family members every morning, over 30 cases of fish and he fed the eagles by hand.

Andrew: Wow.

Jason: So, Jody and I went down there and I can go on and on about this story, but there we were, only four feet away from these bald eagles, Andrew, that were three, three and a half feet tall. We get back from that trip, and about a month later we were doing our normal meeting. Jody and I run two companies together, so if I can ever talk about businesses and spouses running businesses, and we were sitting there . . . did I lose you?

Andrew: No, go ahead. I’m still here. Is the video going on? No.

Jason: There we go. And we were looking at the schedule for the next few months, and all of a sudden I realized that we had the month of August without any work planned, without any delivery work planned. And I turned to Jody and I said, ‘Let’s block it and go back to Homer.’ We wound up renting a house. We left everything here. We had a friend of ours stay at our house, and all I brought was a case of books that I’d been waiting until I had time to read, and I brought an empty journal, and we went up. And for 30 days I let my clients know I was going to inaccessible. I didn’t do very much blogging. I did bunch of creative thinking, development, idea aiding. And one of the things that came out of that, Andrew, again was I’ve got to stop saying yes to the things that are even a bit off course from where I’m going.

Andrew: Yeah, and you don’t hatch those things until you get a little, I know I don’t, until I get a little bit of space. And just like you, what I do is take a pen; I take a journal, sometimes a keyboard and my little iPhone. But something that’s going to constrain me so that I can’t do too much, and I just write. What am I here to do? What am I trying to do? How do I get whatever the next vision is? How do I come up with that next vision? How do I implement it? Who do I hire to help me get there? And I don’t come up with those things when I’m sitting in my office answering emails eight hours a day, and then dealing with all the different issues that come on top of email, and just suck up the mission–suck up my energy. All right, so, I understand the purpose here. I want everyone who is listening to us to be able to see this kind of impact, just like you took a month off. I want them to be able to take a month off, even if they’re not yet ready to. I want them to have their business that organized that they can do it.

Jason: Andrew, I just want to jump in. That was our third trip away. Our first one was ten days.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: So we built up to it, we built up to it and we’ve taken 10 days, 21 days, and 30 days. It looks like the next one we do this summer we’re gonna back it up again to 14 days. And we’re testing it to see what the maximum I can get away. So, for those of you watching this, it might not be one month out of the gate. It might be a weekend where you put your IPhone in the glove box and you get on the plane to wherever.

Andrew: Well, I’m up for doing it. Yeah, a weekend. What a small start, but yeah, to some people that’s big. For you it would have been.

Jason: Absolutely.

Andrew: Let’s go on to the big board here. These are the different tactics that we are going to teach people to get them there. And the first one is to identify the big impact tasks. Tell us about that.

Jason: I remember I was working with a client in Chicago, Illinois. It was April 10th, 2003, and please, it’s not a big deal, but that’s my birthday. And that night I had to fly to Canada. So, I remember that. But there I was, doing the seminar, and during the program this one participant had mentioned the fact that he had this ‘to do’ that was on his list for a long time. It turns out the ‘to do’ is on his list for over ten years, and the task that he had finish was his living will.

Andrew: So, for ten years he’d wanted to do a living will, and just hadn’t gotten to it.

Jason: He said he didn’t have the time. And you know me, I’m sitting there going, “Come on, man. That’s 120 months. There was at some point where you had a little bit of downtime.” And that was my first foray into, and I journal a lot, Andrew. I get things out of my head. I write on whiteboards. I write on mirrors. I write in notebooks. And I first started managing and maneuvering with this concept of there being two different orientations people have to the workplace. And there are noun oriented people, and verb oriented people. My noun oriented clients tend to be visionaries; they tend to be interested in the process. They tend to be interested in the outcomes they are achieving. My verb oriented people are more interested in the tasks, the to dos; they’re great at delegation, and they are clean at follow-up. I always like to say my noun oriented people love working out of the inbox. My verb oriented people love working out of [incent] items. So those two approaching, when I was working with this guy back then I was realizing the reason that he had put things off is he had put noun as his most important task. When in reality the noun, ‘living will’, was his most important thing. He had not yet identified the to do, or the action, or the task.

Andrew: I see, so we’re not trying to identify things like living wills, things like blog posts, things like new ads, new Google ads, new Facebook ads. We’re trying to put up verbs, and what would a verb equivalent here be?

Jason: For some people it can be writing. For me it’s draft. So, I’ll give you a perfect example. This morning I was working on my next column for Entrepreneur Magazine. My action on my ‘to do’ list for today was ‘draft concluding paragraph to Entrepreneur Magazine article.’ Now, Jason, why would you draft the concluding article? Well, I have a mentor of mine, Steven Covey, who said ‘Begin with the end in mind.’ When I sit down to write something and I don’t know, Andrew, if you can hold yourself to that, but when I sit down to write something I usually start to freak myself out about how good it should be, how long it needs to be, how perfect it should be on the first cut. When I start with that lowest common denominator, verb, it turns the task into momentum. And again, back to that thing that I shared a little bit earlier about homeostasis, a body will stay in motion as long as it’s moving. but once it stops, God it’s hard to get going again. And I think that the big thing about productivity, especially the people that I imagine watching your Mixergy interviews, it’s they have so many ideas about what to fix, what to build, what to have, what to do, that at the end of the day unless they’ve got a very clear sense of what was the most important task relative to those nouns of engagement they won’t have for which to assess.

Andrew: So what you’re saying is that draft the concluding section. That’s what’s important to write on a ‘to do’ list as opposed to just having ‘concluding section’. And if we make that distinction then we’re ahead?

Jason: Then what happens is for the action or the momentum to begin it’s easier for me to dive into, let me chip away at something small, and then see how far I can get. I’ll give you this one, if there’s a to do on your to do list that’s been there for awhile, or have you ever rewritten a to do on a different piece of paper?

Andrew: Yes.

Jason: You know, it gets to the end and you rewrite it over, or in the email inbox, right? It starts to fall down, so you forward it to yourself to kick it back to the top? What I’ll have my clients do is actually change the verb, so instead of ‘call Barbara’ and then they write ‘Call Barbara’ and then they write Call Barbara, I’ll just say, email Barbara, because something is getting in the way of just starting. I think time management is less an idea of managing the time we have, it’s managing the starting we haven’t done.

Andrew: Okay. All right, let’s see if I understand this. Let’s suppose that one thing that I wanted to do is, and I’m trying to think of what the audience might want to do, is have an IPhone App created for my business.

Jason: There you go.

Andrew: That would be on my to do list; it would be ‘have an IPhone App for the business’ and that might be on top of or below ‘have someone do taxes,’ or ‘Look for a bookkeeper,’ and all those things that are important to business. Are you saying just having that on the list and writing it the right way is what’s going to help me get it done?

Jason: I would test it.

Andrew: Okay.

Jason: I’ve had enough people say that when they start going, and by the way, those verbs that you gave me, I just call those Big Verbs.

Andrew: Okay.

Jason: So, complete, install, handle, produce, present, those are the big verbs, and then I look at my day and say, all right today’s whatever day, say it’s Tuesday, and I know that I’ve got 15 hours before I need to be at the diner date with my girlfriend, or boyfriend or whatever, what is it that I’m going to physically visibly do about those three things you just listed.

Andrew: I want to make sure that I’m getting this right, and I know that we have a whole lot to get to here, but do I write down the small step that I need to take in order to get to this big goal, of having this app created, or you’re just saying it’s about the way that I phrase that to do of having the app created that’s going to help me get there?

Jason: Personally I would want them both. The flag that I’m marching toward is publishing the app. In between there and where I’m going, and where I am right here, what is A, a step that I can take that’s the smallest common denominator that to me when I look back on the end of today. I’ll say I moved toward that instead of I didn’t have time to create the app.

Andrew: I see, put both of them on my list. The big goal of having this mobile app finished and published, and the smaller step of maybe sketching out my first design or putting together a list of everything that the app needs to do. So both on the list.
Jason: Then which one can I check off, and then how does that resonate with can you bring that list of nouns and verbs back. Which one resonates with the way that I focus the most. Those of us who are time start starved we get to the end of the day, and there’s still more to be done, I want to look over on that right hand side and go, OK. Tomorrow what are the actions that I’m need to take, what are the physical to do’s that going to work toward, and then on the left hand side that acts kind of like as am arbiter of priorities. If building that iPhone a is the highest priority item that we can take, that we can move on then I made need two, and this is where your other Mixergy classes come in so powerfully. I may need to outsource I may need to sources my errands, I may need to put off some of those other decisions. I may need to get someone to help me in on a VA temporary basis. So that I could move furthest on that most important tasks.

Andrew: Let’s go on to the next big idea here. Which is to uncover what’s filling up the first six hours of your day. Why the first six hours?

Jason: The first six hours, and I’m totally going assumptions here about who’s tuning in to this program. But with 24 hours, we’ve got four quarters. And If look at my day and I say, all right, what am I going to break my day into quarters on? From that first wake up, through those first six hours it pretty much dictates at least how I am for the next series of 18. So for example take a look at, I always talk about the first screen. So if your alarm clock is your smart phone, and you wake up in the morning and you reach over to turn off, or hit snooze there’s always a first screen. What is it is it email, your calendar, Twitter, FaceBook, is it LinkedIn, it could be Evernote, remember the milk. But from the moment our eyes open in the morning, for some of us even before that. We start falling back into the routine of the day. I just wrote a blog post today on someone was saying if the first thing I’m doing when I wake up is consuming information before I start getting into my job, what I read was, if the first thing I’m consuming then I’m taking on other peoples ideas, which will influence mine. If the first thing is, I take a look, I wake up, I’ve got six hours to make a difference today. What can I chip away on to move toward that thing. So the tactic that I’ve got here that I use and that coach people with all over the world is literally I give them a little three by five note card, from the first time they wake up what takes energy time and focus, and if you will simply give yourself that gift of your own attention, and you just start writing down the big things, the little things, anything in between.

Andrew: What do you mean, what should I do today that takes up energy, time, and focus?

Jason: What do I already do? Let me give you an example. I take two newspapers where ever I go. So the Wall Street Journal, the financial times, then when I’m traveling USA Today. One of the things I noticed when I did this a couple years ago was I was going through those three newspapers looking for specific journalists. Sue Shellenburger, Walt Mossberg and the journal I was looking for Martin Wolf and Martin in the Financial Times and Craig Wilson and Gary Stoler in the USA Today. I was spending time, energy and focus flipping through 60, 80 pages of newspapers just to see if any of those six authors had written anything. When I realized that I was spending that time every day I went over to Google Alerts and I just set up Google Alerts for those six authors. So now if they write anything I get one email in my inbox, here’s everything that Gary wrote, here’s everything that Martin wrote, here’s everything that Sue wrote. If I want to go through the newspapers I can do that creative intellectual grazing but I’ve gotten rid of the have to look through everything just to find out what it is. Those who are doing research on competitors app, those of you doing research on other peoples whatever there working on, Google Alerts is one that I talk about all the time just because that’s running in the background for me for free.

Andrew: So what I’m supposed to be doing here is looking what’s filling the first six hours of my day, I guess I write it down?

Jason: Write it down, I’ve had some people dictate that. Siri can take voice notes; I’ve used a serviced called Reqall.com, R-E-Q-A-L-L. When I was doing a food log, for example, I hired in nutrition, I race triathlon and I’ve been doing that for about 12 years, and every second or third season I’ve been hiring a nutritionist just to help me out and going on the road about 220 night a year, I took 142 airplanes flights last year so for me keeping the physical vessel in line was important. Anyway, when I was keeping the food log, I did that by phone, I called my Recall number, I could dictate what I had eaten, I had a filter on my email so that if it recognized the words food log it automatically diverted that to a special folder that I can share with my nutritionist. Again, what’s taken me time, energy and focus, when we identify what that is over those first six hours, because if I can combine a couple things, if I can delete….

Andrew: I’m trying to go through and really just put together a list on a notecard that says what’s taking me time, energy and focus and then look for ways to do what with it?

Jason: Delete, delegate, pretty much that’s it.

Andrew: Delete or delegate.

Jason: Some people want to combine them but for me it’s like, let me get rid of this or let me hand it hand it off to someone who can do better.

Andrew: So if the first half of this period, the six hour period, the first three hours of my day are spend on email, I think what I can do to delete it, maybe it’s auto-delete by just forwarding to unsubscribe.com so that my stuff gets unsubscribed or may it’s delegating by having my team of customer service people start handling more of my email or virtual assistant doing it. That’s what I’m trying to do with everything. What’ can delete, what can I delegate and you literally will have people put out a list of the things that take up down. Just sit down and write a list of everything?

Jason: When I’m working with you we do it for two full days.

Andrew: Two full days. Where you watch them, make sure that everything gets written down.

Jason: Yeah. I published part of a list for one client in my book and we had written down from the time he got up all the way through there were, I think I printed in there 18 different things, and that was from when he woke up at 6:00 am, that was from zero to 7:45.

Andrew: Have we got that here? I think we might even have it here, let’s take a look. This is it, so here are the questions to ask yourself, what do I do from the time I wake up in the morning until about 10:30 am. Here’s a sample of what one client identified, Wake up with alarm, press snooze twice. So you want us to get down to that specific kind of detail. Check email on Blackberry in bed, check calendar on Blackberry in bed, let dog outside, turn on television to news channel, and shower. That’s the kind of list that you want people to make.

Jason: At that point, we can then go back and what can we delete, what we can delegate. Now I’m not going to be able to delegate letting the dog outside or showering but in this particular case we were able to address the email, because if you take a look at his entire list, he was checking email three times. It was the fourth time that he actually did anything about it.

Andrew: I see, yeah.

Jason: So by looking at that and just showing him I said “Hey, you’re using anywhere from 10 to 30 minutes a day where all you’re doing is cycling the same thoughts.” One of the things that I talk about, Andrew is that our day is made up of 96 15 minute blocks. I’ve heard you over talk about you do your meetings 15 minutes at a time and you and I both know there’s very few things that if we had an half an hour to talk about , we couldn’t finish in 15 minutes, if we were planning for that discussion. So with this particular client we were able to eke out about 2% of his day back, meaning one half an hour, If I can save about a half hour a day that’s about 2% of my day. Now I’m at 10 a month, that’s 120 hours a year. Just to cycle back to the example that I gave the guy in Chicago who had put his will off for 10 years, one of the reasons that he and I came up with up that he put his will off is that he kept thinking about the now. Will, will, will, what we got it down to, I got to call my neighbor to set up time for an appointment to make sure that we get the paperwork written out. When I did follow up with him, it was within a week he had the whole thing done.

Andrew: And that’s a different stair. Instead of having this big thing on the list that’s just get your living will done, it became meet with neighbor and that’s a much easier thing to do and when you do that it builds up momentum and help you get it all done.

Jason: When we talk later on about the social network, not my social media, but my social network, one of things that people can stay comfortable talking about how things could be, one of the things that we need to do is that we need to hang out with people who are very busy doing what is.

Andrew: Before we move on to the next one, do you want to talk real quick about Greg from London or is this Greg from London?

Jason: That was Greg.

Andrew: That was Greg from London. This is guy who used to check his email on the toilet and after the shower.

Jason: And I wish I could say that this isn’t happening and for anybody, whatever gender, you both do it.

Andrew: I got to get away from email.

Jason: The statistics show…

Andrew: And I also have this before we move on.

Jason: So that’s the main activity in my seminars when I do this in the seminar, you’ll notice I just left room for 12 lines there. The reason I only put 12 there is because when I introduce this for the first time, especially in a large group, people tend to get a little self-conscious because sometimes they don’t want to admit or write down in front of somebody else exactly what does take their time and energy and focus in a morning. I get a lot of my coaching from reading biographies and who did they write biographies about, well it tends to be people who’ve been highly successful. And so as I read through Steve Jobs biography, as I read through Thomas Edison’s biography, as I read through Helen Keller’s biography, one of the things that I realized is that they would work very diligently to get rid of the extraneous time, energy and focus taking things throughout the day.

Andrew: Alright, and so we want to identify them, they way is to have it listed out and then start to delete, to delegate. Let’s go on to the next big idea then, there it is, map out your ideal day.

Jason: So this comes from way back when I was a student teacher. I was learning to become a high school teacher and I had coach, a mentor, at the university and I was complaining about how hard the day was and how nothing was going my way and he looked at me square in my eye Andrew and he said “Would you know a good day if you saw one?” And it was like a smack in the face because unfortunately I had chosen a career back then that kind of pulled people together around the campfire to complain. I hate to say it but public education the way it’s working it’s easy to complain about it and what I did was I went home, I pulled out the proverbial piece of paper and I wrote out actually from the time I woke up until the time I went to sleep what and ideal day would look like. I’ve done this multiple times over the year.

Andrew: Do we have that to show people?

Jason: You have one that I actually printed in the book and what I did here, what you’ll see that I circled in red, not that these were the important aspects of it but what I wanted people to see is, whenever I’ve done this with a client, your ideal day is filled with elements, multiple elements across industries, across the field of the horizon. What I mean by that is, very few people that I work with, their ideal day is to sit on the beach with a beer. I mean, they could do that once, but after the 48th day of sitting on the same beach drinking the same beer, I’d be tired.

Andrew: Right.

Jason: So, what I do with people is I say, ‘Look, this is not vacation day once a year where you’re getting away to relax. This is, what is your ideal day? And if your ideal day incorporates launching your new app, if your idea incorporates wooing a new client, if your ideal incorporates having time with your spouse or roommates or best friend, you’ve got to put that into that. So, you’ve got here just the first part of a morning of mine. Now the reason I printed this one, Andrew, was this is one that I had written in the late 1990s, and I keep these. I keep them in a little folder behind me in my desk. This is one that I’d written, and in 2009 my wife and I had taken our month-long vacation at Lake Tahoe. And at the end of the day we’re sitting on the patio, looking over Lake Tahoe, and I just started laughing. And Joy looked at me, ‘What’s going on?’ And I said, ‘I think I did it.’ And I had to wait to get back to [Ohigh] to pull it out, but I mean, I was 90% of the way there. We had closed a deal with an agent, a client in Asia; I’d gone for a bike ride. It wasn’t a run, but it was a bike ride through the mountains there. And it just went on and on. And so, I guess, the takeaway here is for those of you watching this, if we get so busy in what is, and if we get so busy in what we can anticipate coming, what if we sat down and kind of gave ourselves that gift of ‘what would the ideal day look, sound, and feel like?’ And I always talk about those three learning styles, by the way, because once I understand that I need to see it, I need to hear, and I need to feel it, then I kind of set myself up for moving in that direction.

Andrew: And so, I want to read this, just the first sentence or two to people, just to emphasize what you did here. It starts off with, ‘I wake up before the alarm goes off again–different from my office in the city, it is serenely quiet outside, no noisy cars, airplanes, or sirens.’ So, you got down to that level of specificity, waking up in the morning before or after the alarm, where you are working. You want that kind of specificity from the person who is listening to us right now when they’re designing what that ideal day is, because if they’re going to get to the ideal day they have to understand what that is before they can get there.

Jason: There’s a ton of research going on, and over the next ten, twenty years, I can’t wait, because we are understanding our brains at a whole new level. But the way that the [omigdala] part of the memory works is it’s so emotional, and it’s so responsive that we can start to program down to the detail what we’d like to have remembered. And I get a lot of coaching on this from athletes. I’ve been able to spend a few days out at the Olympic Training Center, and I’ve worked with some–I’ve coached some Olympic athletes. One was a gold metal swimmer. She swam in Sydney for us and won the gold metal. And one of the things that BJ told me, she says, ‘Jason, when we got in the water one of the things we were trained to do was at any stroke or even stroke we knew what the clock looked like if we were going to be on a world record-breaking pace.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: They had so practiced what it would look like, what it would feel like, what it would sound like. And one more quick example if I can [inaudible?]

Andrew: Yeah, I love it.

Jason: She told me about a training exercise, and like I was telling you, I raced triathlon, and we had these swim drills, where they actually tie a belt around our waist and there’s a bungee cord. And they attach the bungee cord behind us to the wall; we swim against the bungee cord to try to reach the opposite wall. So, it’s kind of a strength exercise, if you can imagine that.

Andrew: Okay.

Jason: Anyway, at the Olympic Training Center I was watching one day and they were doing a drill where they put the belt around, and they tied something to it, but it was actually tied to the opposite end of the pool, the end they were swimming toward. It pulls them across the water, on a pulley system, right?

Andrew: Right, so it makes it easier for them to get to the other side.

Jason: And I’m sitting there, and it’s like, come on, man. That’s cheating, right? But someone told me, ‘Jason, until an athlete swims at a world record pace they don’t know how it feels to swim at a world record pace.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: To me, it was this bulb epiphany. So for example, those of you who are about to pitch your business to a BC or any kind of investor, how many times have you run that through on video? How many times have your run that through Skype? How many times have you stated the pitch and have your buddy pull the lamp so that the projector goes down and you have to go without slides. Because all of that stuff is a way to practice so that when it’s time to perform you say Oh, I’ve been here before. I was doing this seminar at the University of Memphis just a couple of weeks ago and they helped me set up and I don’t know if you’ve ever done a presentation where someone helped you, they weren’t helpful, they plugged in my computer and we forgot to plug in the power. It happens right? So there I am, I’ve got about 150 people in the audience and I’m going and then next thing I know, I read that that the audience focus is gone, I can read that, and I glace back and sure enough it say your batter is about done, 1% remaining. I just kept talking to them, I didn’t spin around, and I just kept talking to them. I broke into a quick activity where they can turn to their neighbor and share a quick dialog, reach back, plugged in the computer, came back, and bought them back. I had the guy at the end who hired me said “Jason, how on Earth did you do that?’ I just told him, I said “Practice makes comfortable.” And if I’ve practiced this in the past, then I’m comfortable when it happens under pressure.

Andrew: And it seems like it’s even just practicing in your mind. When we’re looking at this, this is you essentially practicing where you want to be. And the other thing that is interesting to me about this is, it’s a two do list that you accomplish but you weren’t walking around with this to-do list in your hand all your time saying I’ve got to wake up before the alarm goes off. You’ve prepared your mind to be there and just having that as a desire sometimes helps even more then having this piece of paper in your hand that feels like an obligation full of get ready to, I mean tasks like wake up before the alarm today, I’ve got to live one day in a serine place with no noisy cars, airplanes or sirens. True, have you experienced that?

Jason: 100%. I’m looking at this stack of books behind you, do you have the book Change the Way You See Everything yet?

Andrew: I don’t think I do. I’m afraid to lift anything up off of that pile or else it’s all going to fall apart.

Jason: Anyway, in this book called Change the Way You See Everything, they talk about ABT, asset based thinking, and they compare, contrast that to deficit based thinking and I always want to be on the ABT side. So my assets are time, waking up in the morning, energy, getting outside for exercise, closing a deal with a client and focus, looking around and realizing how things are moving forward in a good direction.

Andrew: Speaking of moving forward, let’s go back to the big board. The next big idea is map out your high impact influencers. Who are these people?

Jason: These are the folks that have been around for a little while. They, I’m just pulling up the same picture that you’re going to see, they’ve been around for a little while but more importantly then that, they are the five that you spend the most time in communication with. And by the way, nowadays communication is face to face, voice to voice, Skype to Skype and email to email. If there’s any doubt about who the five people are that you spend the most time in communication with just go over to your sent items and look for the 80% of the emails from the 20% of your group. The five people, this is a little activity if you can bring that one up for me, this one was life changing and a mentor of mine showed me this years ago and what she did is she went to a white board and she drew this matrix. On the left hand side and then she had a couple of different of columns and the matrix was, and she asked me, she said “Jason, who do spend most of your time with?” so I wrote down five people’s names and then she asked me, the three questions were, how much money do you think they make a year, how many days of vacation do you think they make per year and how many books do you think they read per year? Notice here I’ve changed it for this audience to conferences attended; I’ll get to that in just a second. So I did this exercise and it took me a few weeks because there was some people where I couldn’t just walk up to them and say “Hey, how much money do you make every year, how many days of vacation” but over a couple of weeks I was able to collect what I though was pretty close to where they were.

Now it’s easy because as a high school teacher I knew what every high school teacher made. There were a couple of other people who are entrepreneurs in the town, the woman who owned our local coffee shop, etc. I added up their annual salary, I added up their days of vacation, I added up what the books that I could imagine them reading per year, and when I divided all that by five, Andrew, it was like, oh, my God. They are living my average. And it was like this huge epiphany of my network absolutely impacts my viewpoint of how much money I can make, my viewpoint of how many days off I can take, and in this case my viewpoint of how many days of conferences I’m going to attend. Just last year I started spending time with someone via social media, where we haven’t met, but we kinda connect via email, and watch each other’s Twitter feed, etc. Because of that I’ve committed doing 20 days of conferences this year. We’re recording this in the beginning of March. I’ve already attended seven days of conferences. I’ve already made two contacts, and I’ve already signed one deal for work based on just those seven days.

Andrew: Why conferences? Why is that an important column here?

Jason: I think for this community, I’m paying my $25 a month to be a member of Mixergy, I want to learn. A secondary part of that is if learning were only in watching these interviews we’d be set–but it’s not. Now, I’m going to South by next week, and I know, I’ll guarantee you, I’ll make just as much contact, and actually, I might make even more contacts meeting people in the hallway of conferences than I will the people speaking from panels at conferences.

Andrew: So the conferences attended, that’s your way of saying, how connected are they? How much are they learning?

Jason: Are they expanding the world view that has gotten them to this level of success right now.

Andrew: Got it. I see. All right, and you found that for yourself you were the average of the five people who you were spending the most time with, whether it’s in your inbox or on the phone. Is that right?

Jason: And then, as soon as I started changing now.

Andrew: What did you do?

Jason: And by the way, I don’t suddenly cut people out. You know, what do they say? The best way to build a new habit is not to break the old one, but to replace it with something better. So what I started doing was I looked around and said, all right. My first goal, about eight years ago, I told Jody, ‘I want to hang out with a millionaire.’ I realized that I had never spent time with someone who makes $85,000 a month. I didn’t know anybody that did that. As a high school teacher at the time I was making $33,000 a year. So the idea of meeting someone whose revenue was $85,000 a month, that was just astronomical. So we went on a little quest and sure enough, I met this guy down in Woodland Hills. He was an author, a speaker, was doing kind of what I’m doing now. And he was willing to meet me. We met for I think three dinners in a year. And then he would take my phone calls from time to time. And I was just trying to learn as much as I could about how this guy saw the world, how he engaged in the world, what he was seeing and doing and hearing that I wasn’t. And then, what can I learn from that.

Andrew: This was David?

Jason: This is actually a guy named Steven Snyder.

Andrew: Another. So Steven Snyder became one of the five–actually he wasn’t one of the five people you spent the most time with.

Jason: No, he was one I started spending more time with, and what went away was actually a colleague of the school that I was teaching at.

Andrew: I see. All right, and you were trying to go to another world. It’s not like you were cutting a person out and saying I’m never going to talk to you again. It’s just that you were starting to spend more time with the people you wanted to be like, instead of spending more time where the average of who you are right now?

Jason: You know, I had me down. I had my average down, so I’ve got this; I’m comfortable. If I’m going to go here I might need to be uncomfortable.

Andrew: So, what happened when you brought in David and other people to be one of the five people you spend the most time with?

Jason: For me it was getting their library or their bibliography. And there were years where, and I continue to read about one book a week to this day, but I went through a real transformation in the mid 1990s and early 2000s where if someone who was at any level higher than me would even breathe a book, I was going to get that book and used book stores were my best friends. Generally they were about $.10 on the dollar and I’d go in, I remember picking up the book by Napoleon Hill, Think and Grow Rich. I was traveling a ton at the time and so literally I bought this paperback for $1.00 or whatever is was, and I ripped out the first few chapters, not little sections what I bought with me on one trip and then I came back and I ripped out the next section and I bought that with me on that trip and this was the way I was getting through anywhere from three to five to ten books a month because I would read four chapter of this, three chapters of that, three chapters of that, four chapters of this, So the biggest thing was gaining that influence. This leads into the next tactic that I want to talk about but just let me really quick wrap up with that one, through this activity game pull out a piece of paper go to a whiteboard, identify the five people that you spend the most time with and run through some matrix, and by the way, what I wrote might not be yours. Yours might be how many apps did they launch a year. It might be how many new clients do they close a year.

Andrew: How much money did they raise to grow their business and if you’re looking around and saying….

Jason: How many pitches did they do? If I’m going to start a new round and if going to start a pitching series I want to hang out with someone who’s done 30 of those a month for the past year because they’re going to be able to give me information. Lean by experience except when you can learn by example.

Andrew: Yeah, it does have a big impact on you. Wondering if I should give my own example or move on but why don’t we move on.

Jason: Let’s hear it, come on.

Andrew: The one that I wanted to give you is this, I never saw myself as a runner and just a few weeks ago I did four days of nothing but running. Yesterday, as tired of was, I did a twenty mile run and I still don’t see myself as a runner so I ‘m shocked and I say how did I get here and I realized one of the thing that I did, I started reading books about people who did long distance runs. I was reading on Saturday a book called Carved by God, Cursed by the Devil, about this guy, you know the book, this guy who did a seven day run through the Sahara where he is doing essentially a marathon a day in temperatures that are 110 degrees, 120 degrees. He has to pack everything he’s going eat for the week on his back, limited water and he’s doing this. And as I read him do it I start to imagine myself doing longer runs. Running at all doesn’t at all seem like a crazy thing anymore. In fact, not running seems a little bit odd when you’re reading all these stories off people who are runners and to me that’s what gets me to go out and run. Before that what I used to is, I used to actually on a calendar I’d put down I’m going to run on this day, that, and that day or I would in my mind say I need to run more and it never worked but just reading about these guys and it’s pleasurable, just getting lost in their stories, makes me become more of a runner and it’s amazing. That’s what I was thinking of it really does have more impact on you than what you’re determine to do. The people and the environment you’re in to me has more of an impact then what I hope to do and what I’d like to do.

Jason: If I can I’ll just give my understanding of it is action, thought, belief and if anybody wants to change what they do the first thing is we need to attack this bottom layer. The book that I can recommend is Phyco Cybernetics by Maxwell Malt and when I read that book it shifted everything, Andrew. When I realized that I do what I think based on my belief pattern, quick how I change that belief pattern. Mine was I am a triathlete and this started in 2000 when I was not a triathlete and just getting myself to imagine what that would look, sound and feel like. Can I give a tactic we didn’t write down?

Andrew: Yeah, yeah.

Jason: It goes with this. Whiteboard pen and those of you who stay home or live in an apartment or a flat, if you’re at home every single day, for those of us who travel on the road, expo pen works on mirrors and what I’ve been doing, and I’m kind of letting out all my secrets but I think that Mixer G universe deserves it, I travel about 230, 240 nights a year. A 140, 150 airplanes flight, when I check into a hotel one of the first things I do is I write on the mirror of the bathroom why I’m working for that client tomorrow–what I hope they get, what I hope I can provide. And I’ll longhand that up on the mirror. It’ll be anywhere from one to two sentences, because the last thing I do before I got to bed, after I brush my teeth, is to read that thing. The first thing I do in the morning after I shower is shave, so I have to read that thing. But then, the most important one, when I come home from work when I get back to the hotel, I have to look at that mirror and ask myself in my eye, ‘Did you do what you had planned to do today?’ Right? There are three kinds of goals that people have. They have goals they think about, goals they write on a piece of paper, and goals they can see themselves in. And ask any athlete at the Olympic level which one is the most powerful, and they will tell you, ‘When I see myself on the video achieving the goal it’s much more powerful.’

Andrew: All right. And then, how do you wipe it off, by the way, before you turn over the hotel keys?

Jason: Paper towel.

Andrew: Just a paper towel will take that right off?

Jason: Yeah, that’s why I say; don’t do this with a Sharpie.

Andrew: Okay. All right. The next big idea. So, map out your high-impact influencers, now get feedback from a mentor.

Jason: So, I was working with an organization in Minneapolis, and one of the senior-level executives, though I’d never worked for him, he hired the company that I was coming in to consult. Somehow we wound up meeting, because we’re both runners. That’s probably a whole other story. When people connect with you it’s often on personal and professional interests, not just how good your product is going to be. So, let me come back to that if we have time.

Anyway, this guy, Kevin, and I actually started a five-week mentor program. And what we did is the first week we emailed back and forth a couple of times, and I would come up with the three questions–and we kept it to three–the three questions that I wanted him to ask me once a week for five weeks. And then he would during the week randomly, and we did this on purpose, he would randomly call me, ‘Jason, do you have about two minutes?’ And in those two minutes he would ask me my three questions. I had to give myself a number score, one through five, and I had to give a little bit of dialogue that he keyed into on an Excel sheet. At the end of those five weeks he took that Excel sheet, forwarded it over to me, and then we did a one brief-out call. And what we got to see was over the five weeks where I was high, where I was low, and what were my comments about that. And I could remember one of the times we did this it was all about a big decision I was making regarding the direction that I was going to take one certain product in, one of my services. And over those five weeks it became so abundantly clear that I did not need to go in that direction, that it was going to–what is that called when you separate out–it was going to dilute the work that I was doing. But in my mind I just kept thinking about it and thinking about it, but by having him ask me these questions, write down the answers and then feed that back to me was absolutely critical, I think, in making the decision that was right for me.

Andrew: So, how do you get a mentor like that?

Jason: So, here’s the tactic. I’ll ask you to pull up the first one that has the people’s names around it. So, the first thing you’ll see is I’ve got a lot of people on what I call ‘Team Jason’. So, here’s where you start. Go to a white board, a piece of paper, or pull up a Mind Jet, Mind Manager software, and in the middle of that thing just write your name. So, Team Andrew. Team Jeremy. And around that all these it’s going to be is those five people that you’re spending a lot of time with. But then there’s going to be just a few more. And then, underneath that or associated with it, if you go to that next picture there, is what I did. I just went through and said, ‘Okay, what I get from these ten people? What is it that they are great at, that if I were to speak with them more often than not I would pull in some ideas?’ Now, just hang out there for a minute. That middle one, Irene, it’s amazing that you’re on that one. A great story. So, we went to Paris. My wife got accepted to speak at the Women’s International Network Conference in Paris. One of the other speakers was a CEO of an investment bank, Irene. And she was on stage and talking about some things that she was talking about. I went up after her speech, I shook her hand, and I gave her my business card. I said, ‘There were some things you shared from the stage I’d love to speak with you more about. I get too New York a week a month, could I buy you coffee one time?’ N

Now again, she’s a CEO of an investment bank there in New York City; I mean, one of the busiest people of the planet. I followed up a week later with a handwritten thank you card, ‘Dear Irene. Thank you so much. I really enjoyed your presentation.’ I wrote specifically what I enjoyed about it, Andrew, and put it in the mail. Within two weeks her assistant called me to find out when I could meet Irene for a cup of coffee. We made the arrangements and the week before the meeting I sent her this five-meeting request. And I upped it little bit; I said, ‘ I want to meet with you five times in person within one year.’

Andrew: I see.

Jason: And here it is, here’s Jason. He’s asking for the moon, you know, or star, whatever that saying is, and I’m here to tell you we’ve had four meetings. It has been about ten months. I don’t know if we’ll get the fifth one in within a year, but here’s a person who now is in my fold, my environment, because I took a risk, let her know what I appreciated, and let her know what I could learn from that. Oh, and I share one more tactic about mentors and mentoring that is so absolutely critical. People love to help; they don’t so much love being asked to help.

Andrew: Okay.

Jason: So, that’s a weird line. But what I found is if I can get someone to share their expertise, their experience, their conversation with me, within twelve or fifteen days I’ve done a follow-up letter either email or handwritten of what I got from our meeting and how I’m already implementing the ideas they shared.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: I found this has been one of the most important things for me to do my own de-brief and assessment, but also it’s the least that I can do for someone who has given me 15 or 30 minutes of their time.

Andrew: All right. So, that answers my question about how you get a mentor. And by the way, did we say that as a result of it, this is how you ended up writing your book, and how this book came up because of this tactic?

Jason: Throughout the book you’ll hear me write about my mentors, my coaches, the people on my team. I reached out to Dan Pink, the author of Drive. He wrote a book about left right brain stuff. I started following on Twitter. I added him a couple of times. He followed me; he came across the sandbox. I [DMd] him a couple of times. I got his email address, and in one of his emails he left his signature with his phone number, so I just called him.

Andrew: Okay.

Jason: Well, long long story short, he wound up doing a 17-minute class via Skype just like this, for my Your Best Just Got Better class online. And he’s a guy, you know, I won’t call him every week, but he’s someone out there that by reaching out, and hopefully I feel contributing, to that balance back and forth. The book showed up because I went to South by Southwest a couple of years ago.

Andrew: I see. And so, was it related at all to this conversation with Dan Pink?

Jason: No.

Andrew: It just changed your approach to writing?

Jason: Yes.

Andrew: Got it–to ask him why he writes and to open yourself to thinking about it.

Jason: I’ll share that story really fast. I was in the middle of writing the book. The publisher, we signed the deal in March of last year, and they gave me four and a half months to write it. The publisher said, you know, ‘We need you to do this within four and a half months. And I was a couple of months in and I was really, man, it was a lot, as you can imagine.

Andrew: Yeah.

Jason: In a conversation with Dan I asked him the question, I said, ‘Dan, why do you write? What do you get from writing your books?’ And he quickly said, ‘Jason, I write to figure things out.’ And that was where, as I was writing Your Best Just Got Better, it did take a little turn. The people who are reading the drafts early on, and the people who read the finished product could tell that something had happened. And that’s where, in my mind, and it’s why I still promote, Andrew. I still promote the handwritten process. And I might be showing my age a little bit, but there’s something about putting pen to paper for me that when I get to see the thought stream that comes through my mind I think about things deeper, bigger, and then more specific.

Andrew: I notice you say that a few times; that that’s the way that you think–to think by writing your ideas out.

Jason: And there are people, you know, I’m a strong kinesthetic, visual learner. Of the three learning styles, I’m strongest in kinesthetic. If I can do something once, I’ve got it. Visual, if I see you do it, chances are I’ll be able to mimic it. If you only tell me what you’re doing, I know me. I’m going to have a struggle with that. When I’m working with a client, one of the first things I’m doing, because I work with people for two days at a time. And one of the first things, early in that first morning or even on the phone beforehand, I’m building my own psycho graphic of that person. Of how they are, who they are, how they work, how they engage. And can I do real quick how to read someone?

Andrew: Oh, yeah.

Jason: So, for those of you who are doing phone stuff, if you’re receiving phone calls, making phone calls. If you’re doing pitches, if you’re receiving pitches. All meet someone at their learning preference and then we’ll grow from there instead of trying to get them to understand mine or me understand theirs.

So, real, quick. If I’m in a meeting and someone says, “That sounds good. I hear what you’re saying. I like the sound of that. Will you tell me a story of something you did in the past related to this?” All of those are indicators that they are auditory people. f I’m on the phone with someone, if I’m pitching a client on the phone and I find out they’re auditory, I’ll overnight them one of my CDs.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: Alright. Number two. I’m in a meeting, I’m on the phone, and someone says, “Oh, I see what you’re saying.” Or, “I can picture that.” Or, “Will you show me what you mean?” Visual. So, I’ll overnight them a DVD, by the way.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: Now real quick, let me pause there. Because those are the two prominent ones that I see, especially in the business world. Here’s where there’s a problem. Auditory, visual. Auditory person is not understanding what the visual person is saying. And the auditory person will say, “That, just doesn’t sound right.” And the response is, “Let me show you what I mean.”

Andrew: I see.

Jason: You’ve got Grand Canyon going now.

Andrew: Yeah.

Jason: It doesn’t sound right. Let me tell you about it from this angle. I’m not hearing you. What is it that you’ve heard so far? So, that way I’m meeting them where they are.

Oh, and then the third one is the kinesthetic learner, right. The kinesthetic learner in a meeting, on the phone, while they’re talking, they’ll say things like, “Oh, I get it. That makes sense.” Or, “Just give it to me straight.” And they always do this. Whatever that means.

Oh, but kinesthetic, of course, I’ll overnight them a copy of my book.

Andrew: I see. Because kinesthetic people are going to want to flip through the book. They’re going to want to experience it. I see. And you know what? Doing Mixergy I can see the difference. For example, the person who is listening to us right now, or watching us, has one mode that he prefers to take all of this content in. For some people, even though we’re showing visuals, even though there are things that they have to see, they don’t care. They just want the mp3. They’re going to absorb it so much better that way.

For other people I see, no matter what we say, even though this whole program is visual and audio and that’s the way we create it and we have transcribers who I don’t know what part of the world they’re transcribing, they prefer the transcript.

I know my mentor, Bob Hyler, he helps program this, this whole thing of Mixergy. He will only read the transcripts. And he’ll zip through it and that’s his way of doing it.

Jason: Yes

Andrew: And for him, to think that there’s someone who’s watching it sounds, I think, must sound crazy.

Jason: How do they have time?

Andrew: So, you’re right. And for Bob, if I were to explain something to him and say, “Let me talk to you. Let me talk it through over the phone,” it probably would drive him nuts. He doesn’t want to hear me talk for ten minutes. If I could just write it out for him in an email, he’ll probably absorb it all in five seconds.

Jason: Yeah. I mean, the real thing here and I’ve seen, meetings can go from 45 or 30 minutes down to 20 or 15, just by recognizing that in a room of four people, there’s these three competing learnings.

Now, real quick. We all do all three, okay? I don’t want anybody to leave this and go, “Oh, I’m only visual. If you tell me, I’m not responsible.” That’s not what we’re saying. What we’re saying is when I walk into a room, if I’m looking at 150 people, if I stand behind the lectern and drone on verbally, I’ll get 20 percent of the room. I will. Now, here’s the kicker. I might get the 20 percent of the room. The only 20 percent who are going to fill out the feedback form. And so what’s the coordinator going to read? “Great seminar, loved his style.” Where someone else in the room is going, “Oh, my gosh. Show me something.”

Andrew: All right. Let’s go back to the big board and we’ve got two more big ideas. One more you need to tackle now is “Practice small repeatable steps every day.”

Jason: So, what I wanted to do here, and I . . .

Andrew: I love the visual you’ve got for this, by the way.

Jason: I wanted to combine some of the things that we talked about earlier and pick that up as people are getting ready to leave this class. So, we talked about the noun-verb thing. We talked about the projects, those big verbs. And the lowest common denominator, the actions. So, the software, the tools, the gear out there. Let’s pull up the email one first.

Andrew: You want me to show this email? It’s okay to show it to the audience?

Jason: It’s okay to show it. I went through and I cleaned up what I needed to there. So, on the left hand side is Gmail. So, that’s just kind of the active whatever. And then over on the right hand side . . . and I’ve used things over the years. I mean I’ve used everything from a Ramola Skin Journal [SP] to Palm Desktop to Outlook Tasks. Currently, I’m in this Remember The Milk. And what I’ll do as I’m going through my email inbox, when I read something that’s a task, call, buy, print, draft, I’ll forward that email to my Remember The Milk account.

And then on the right hand side of the screen, if you see these blue tabs. I don’t know if you can zoom in just a little bit if people can read those. You might get too much blur.

Andrew: I’ve got the original here and I’m having a hard time reading it.

Jason: Yeah. Okay.

Andrew: But, these blue things at the top.

Jason: These blue tabs, what I did is I programmed Remember The Milk so that if the word “call” is in the subject line that I email Remember The Milk, it automatically filters into my call inventory.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: If the acronym EM is in the subject line of that email that I forward out of Gmail to Remember The Milk, it goes into my category called “at computer.” So, what I’ve done is made it so that when I drop in, I could be on an airplane, I could be at a hotel, I could be at home. When I drop into my next work session, I’m going to look at doing 30 or 45 minutes of work in 15 or 30 minutes.

And, in this case, I’m going to go into the mode of whatever category that is. Because I know what this says, I can read this. But, underneath the little cow, it says “Inbox.” And then it says, “Computer.” And then right next to that it says, “Internet.”

Andrew: Okay.

Jason: I actually separate my inventories based on internet connection speed.

Andrew: What would you do if the internet was really powerful and what would you do if it wasn’t?

Jason: By the way, if the internet wasn’t powerful, that’s as if there is no internet to me. So, if I’m at some . . . I remember I was in a hotel in the Midwest a couple years ago. And they had the slowest connection. And I just pulled off. I said, “You know what? I’m not going to work on the internet tonight.”

Andrew: And I’ll go to my to do list and look at things that have no internet requirement.

Jason: Exactly.

Andrew: I see.

Jason: So, that’s how I’m looking for . . . this tip is how can I do incremental tasks? How can I find small blocks of time? In the book I write about a period that I worked with a client. I actually got to the client’s site on time, as usual. The assistant came out, brought me up to her office, outside her office. And they quickly told me that the client that I was supposed to work with was going to be about 10, 15 minutes late.

I turned to this little system with me. And I write it all out in the book. I don’t remember exactly what it was, I write it all out in the book. But, I made hotel reservations. I made car reservations. I confirmed a couple of flights. I wrote a thank you card. I sent a couple of emails. I mean, I was so productive in those 15 minutes.

And I actually turned it into a teachable moment for the client. When she walked in, I just launched. The first thing I said to her, I said, “Tell me how many times a day do people show up late to the meetings that you’re in?” And she rolls her eyes. “Oh, Jason. All the time.” I said, “Well, you were, ” and I looked at my watch, “about 15 minutes late. And this is what I did.” And I showed her on my little notebook. So, her jaw hit. She’s like, “You did all of that?”

And that was where I came up with this concept I call “bonus time.” We’re going to receive extra minutes every day. The sudden question is, in those extra minutes, do I look through, kind of like that guy who was scanning his email multiple times in the morning before he did anything about it, or am I going to move one some of those things that I said were the tasks to move on today.

Now, where do the tasks come from and where do the emails come from? If you wouldn’t mind bringing up the Evernote slide. So, I know that Evernote’s popular with the community, I’ve seen a couple of your classes.

Andrew: I’m using Evernote. I think, more then anyone that I know of, I am addicted to it. Everyone in the company here would rather that I use Google Docs for everything but Evernote is so much more convenient, easy to get data into, easy to get data out of. I’m sliding all these images in here and it’s Evernote that’s making it easy for me to pop this in here and pop that in there and anyway.

Jason: I heard you earlier in another class, Andrew, you said that you can email things to your Evernote, I’ll get to that in just a second, and the other one for me is the offline capabilities of this. So I’m on my iPhone, my iPod or my iPad, I can pull up my Evernote right then and then add, subtract or edit. Anyway, what you’re looking at here, this is just one of my buckets, and I’ve got two project inventories. I’ve got projected between now and the next eighteen months and then I’ve got projects that I’ve already committed to for the next one and a half to three years. And so what you got here is, I took this picture you can tell, I took this back on 2/28, there were by the way the highlighted one, so just a running list here. Inventory of what I said yes to that when I look at this list I’m going to start to pick those smaller verbs. So, today I’ve got to submit the article to Laura that was the conclusion that I wrote earlier today that I’ll finish up tonight. We’ve got a design and produce the better coffee mugs, present the seminar for IMS. For each one of these, I’ll think to myself, what is the move I need to make when I get one of these block of time and then again, like you, I can email that task straight into my remember the milk. I know that sometime in the 24 hours I’m going to get these blocks of 15, 30 or 45 minutes, sit down, pull up what is my list of work that I know I can move through right now. I know I mentioned it, Andrew, but the significance of these 15 minute blocks, three of them, number one, we only have 96 a day. For most entrepreneurs who are sleeping five, six hours a night, you can just start subtracting. If I sleep five hours a night I’m now down to 76 15 minutes blocks. I know you and I both exercise, why don’t we subtract another 4, one hour, so now I’m down 74 blocks. One we start subtracting all of these out, were going to get real selfish about when someone walks in a says “Do you have a minute?”

Andrew: I get more “Can I take you out for coffee?” Which will be two hours, a minute would be nice.

Jason: And you just got to know, the person’s asking you for that coffee, that’s going to be eight of your 15 minutes, 8 % of your day.

Andrew: That’s huge.

Jason: I’ve got to start thinking about what’s the return on investment if I invest 8% of my day in y you, what am I getting back? And it’s weird; I know there’s a lot of folks out there who they’ve gone to starting to charge people for lunches and charge people for coffees and those kinds of things. I don’t know exactly where I am on that side of the fence because I’m a people a person and I love hanging out with people but when I started looking at the percentages, if I can guarantee you a 4% return on your money you’d give me everything you got especially in today’s market but if I can guarantee a 4% return on your time what would you backfill that saved time with?

Andrew: I know an entrepreneur who charges for his time but never accepts payment for it. He just puts that charge out there so that when people ask him for time they understand that there is some value to what he’s giving them and it’s better to come prepared and it’s better to be appreciative that’s he’s giving you time and not bitch that you’re not getting more time then you’ve got or wish that you had a half day because this guy should be able to help you.

Jason: I did one month; I did 15 minutes quick calls over the phone for anybody who funded a Kiva loan.

Andrew: That’s a great idea.

Jason: That was fun. People would go to Kiva, they’d fund a loan, they’d send me the little screen shot and then it’ like OK, now I’m in. You’re helping the planet, OK, let’s talk.

Andrew: It shows us some value here to. Measure results.

Jason: Please, please, please. I’ve done something like a weekly debrief, a weekly assessment for years now but Thursdays, sometime in the mid-morning, I just look back over my calendar. That’s the first place I start. And the second place I go to is my [incent] items. Those two, I can’t get more objective than my incent items and my in box. I can get a little bit objective with my calendar, because I can still fudge it, I can still add things and subtract things, right? But just those two measures, if I look back, who did I sent that to, and who did I meet with, connect with, where was I, where did I go, all build from myself a, Oh, WOW! It’s Thursday morning, before the week is over, I need to reconnect with that person; I need to follow up with that program, I need to reconnect with that group. And so, that little review, I mean, take as long as you want. I usually plan for about 30 minutes for that. But what it does is give me a real solid sense of where my time went. And again, to try to pick up all the bread crumbs from this class, Andrew, is you start with what are those most important tasks. You’re surrounding yourself by the people who are heavily influencing. We’re looking at the homeostatic response, right? If I always do what I’ve always done, and if those are the people that I’ve been emailing and those are the people that I’ve been meeting with, do I need to anything different so that when that new app launches, or when that new pitch round starts, I’m ready for what’s next.

Andrew: We have a visual here; should I bring it up now?

Jason: Please.

Andrew: All right, let’s take a look at it.

Jason: So these are two of my favorite websites when it comes to assessing where my time has gone. On the left-hand side it’s this e.ggtimer.com. And you can actually go in and set this for a countdown timer. It fills up my entire screen. So, next time I plan a 45-minute work session, the most important time that I’ve set this up for clients is right after a meeting has been cancelled at the last minute. And I don’t know if this happens to you, Andrew, but from time to time I’ll set something up for 10 a.m., and 9:51 I’ll get an email, ‘Sorry, Jason. Something came up. I can’t make our meeting at 10:00. We’ll reschedule.’ Well, I had planned to be away from my desk. I’d planned to be away from the world, and I’d planned to be away from email and my phone from 10:00 to 11:00. So, as hard as it is, I actually hold myself back from going to email or picking up my phone. I set that little timer off to the side for 59 minutes. It fills up my second monitor, and I work on something with that countdown timer ticking. Someone walks into my office, ‘Jason, do you have a minute?’ Well, no, because I supposed to be in a meeting, and I’ve only got 43 minutes until my timer is done. So, to me it’s a real good way to hold my focus to that.

Andrew: Let me check that out. This seems like a really simple thing to use. Let me click over.

Jason: Click it twice.

Andrew: Is it egg timer, no period?

Jason: e.ggtimer.com.

Andrew: Oh, I got the period in the wrong place.

Jason: Yeah, there you go. Just hit ‘go’.

Andrew: So, it’ll be five minutes.

Jason: And you’ll see that, and I just put that over on the other monitor.

Andrew: And just keep that running, and I could even see myself just in a corner of the screen just keep thing running, and I guess it’s an egg timer. That’s all it is.

Jason: All right. Here’s the deal. This is my experience, Andrew. If I look at the clock and I know that I have another hour before I need to be somewhere I’ll kind of work. If I look at the timer and realize I have 36 minutes until I’m done with this time, I’m going to refocus.

Andrew: I notice how the top and bottom are growing, those bars on the top and bottom to fill up the screen. Yeah, dead simple. And then the other site that you were talking about is the stop the bleeding?

Jason: This one is stop the bleeding. Actually, do a Google search for this, because that’s not it. That’s the name of the program, stop the bleeding, and it’s this little . . . put timer.

Andrew: Okay.

Jason: Put timer, stop the bleeding meeting timer, or something–meeting ticker.

Andrew: And you do have a screen shot of it up there.

Jason: I did.

Andrew: Where is it?

Jason: Click that top one and see what happens.

Andrew: It’s a get hub, so it’s going to take us to a program that will allow us to do it. Oh, you know, it is Get Hub. Actually, I see it in your screen shot.

Jason: There you go. All right. So let’s say you’ve got three people in the room. Type in three, and let’s say the average hourly wage is $250, put $250 in there. And you click start, and all of a sudden . . .

Andrew: That’s what it’s costing us to have this meeting and spend all this time together.

Jason: Now imagine when I do this, Andrew, and I show it because there are 150 people in the room. They’re all bankers so put $450 in the hourly cost. All of the sudden everyone leans forward and they want to know, Jason, what’s the secret. So this one here in a group setting… Oh, by the way, here’s another thing. I’ll start this, if I have a class that starts at 9:00 in the morning, I’ll start that with the attendee list. Say there’s 16 people in the class. Most seminars that I do, we don’t get to start on time, because someone’s late. So we start at what, 9:12, 9:13. I flip to that and I say, just so you know, this is already gone by.

Andrew: That’s how much money we just burned through while we’re waiting.

Jason: It doesn’t always make me the most popular consultant that comes in. But I figure, I’m too young not to tell the truth. When it comes to assessment there’s really that macro sense. Where have we gone over the past several days. In seven days, that’s when a psychologist will debate, is it five days, is it nine days. But within seven days we start losing the details of what happened. So in seven days I want to stop. I like Thursdays, because if I do this on Thursday that gives me about 36 hours before the weekend.

I used to try to do this on Friday, I had a lot of clients who wanted to do theirs on Friday but the problem was if they caught something on Friday afternoon, New York was closed, and Asia was gone. By doing this on Thursday, we could send something out there and we might get that response before the weekend comes. Then on the micro sense is being acutely aware of where the time is going in that focus period that we have.

Andrew: Can you tell the story of Nick, your client? Do you remember the one I’m talking about? He’s a financial adviser.

Jason: I love this story, I love this story. I got hired by a bank in New York, and that was the really nice tie client. Anyway, they brought me in, they gave me two hours of this guy. Now normally I work with someone for two days. But they said, Jason, he’s busy, two hours. So we sit down, and he’s got his six monitors up, he’s got two phones and he turns to me and he says, OK. What do you got? And I could tell, one eye is still on Bloomberg, right. I did my homework and I’ve worked in the financial industries for about a decade now and I just asked him point blank. I said, how many phone calls did you make yesterday? He said, I don’t know, about 20 or 25. I just looked at him and I said, “Bull. No you didn’t.” And at this point, I’m like one minute into the consulting. He’s like oh, god, what just happened. And he looks at me, then with a big smile on his face he says, how did you know? I said, Nick, no one makes 20 outbound phone calls. If you made 20 outbound phone calls you’d be partner by now.

Long story short, the tactic I gave this guy, and I’m looking around my desk. I gave him five quarters, you know $0.25. We put them on this side of his monitor. And I said, look your job today is to move those five quarters to the other side of your desk. Every quarter equals one outbound call, that’s it. And goes, Jason, five phone calls that’s not a big deal. I said, I know, I know, that’s just this week. Five day, I talk about the five day experiment, five days.

It turns out that he started moving quarters and he was moving the piles, one two, thee times a day. And by the way, why quarters? Because for a living this guy was moving money. They could’ve been $100 bills that he was moving he wouldn’t have known the difference. But we got it down to a game. If I could leave the audience with something today , it would be, work is a game. There’s rules, there’s laws, there’s fouls, there’s a cheering squad, there’s all kind of things that to me, mean engagement. And whether it’s putting quarters on the side of your desk, whether it’s writing it down on a note card the big accomplishments you made today. Make it a game you can win.

Andrew: If people want to get more, this is the book right here. “Your Best Just Got Better”. We just touched on some of the ideas of the book, but if you want to get the full book, it’s available at Amazon, Barnes and Noble, Nook, iBook, everywhere. “Your Best Just Got Better’. You’re giving a way a free chapter on your site so people can experiment and see if it really is everything that we’ve been talking about here.

Jason: They can start reading that right now with chapter 1. It actually includes the foreword, the prologue, the table of contents, and chapter 1. So it’s about 40 pages of the book. And then anything I can do Andrew, this community has been so good to me, I’ve learned so much from the other classes. I’m a member and will continue to be, and I really appreciate the opportunity to share with the audience. They can email, text message.

Andrew: Yes, I keep telling the audience that it starts out with these little conversations, they just say thank you, and then I find that incredible things happen as a result of them.

Jason: Twitter, Jason Womack.

Andrew: That’s the way you and I connected today. You’re on Twitter. Jason Womack, and the website is Womackcompany.com. Thank you for doing this session with us.

Jason: Absolute pleasure Andrew.

Andrew: Thank you. And you guys have a bunch of ideas, useable tactics from this session. If you just take one idea and use it, it will make this whole time and investment that you’ve made into this program worthwhile. Even if it’s just saying you know what, what’s my equivalent of making phone calls today, and you stack four quarters on one side of your monitor and every time you get that thing done, you move the stack over one at a time to the other side of the monitor. You’re going to start seeing real progress, real productivity. Real results in your life, and when you do, I hope that you’ll come back and tell me. I hope you’ll tell Jason about it, because we want to celebrate in your wins and we want to be a part of your success. So thank you for watching, we’re looking forward to seeing your results.

Master Class: How to finally get more online sales, in 53 minutes
(Even if you struggle with sales.)
Taught by Rob Walling

Report issues here

Master Class:
Increase Online Sales

About the course leader

The course is led by Rob Walling, a serial entrepreneur who has launched and owned several websites, including HitTail, which guarantees that it’s customers will increase their organic search traffic.

Master Class Toolbox

Course Cheat Sheet

Dot Net Invoice

Micropreneur

E-Junkie

Buysellads

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is going to teach you how to increase you online sales. The course is led by Rob Walling, a serial entrepreneur who has launched and owned several websites, including, there it is, HitTail, which guarantees that it’s customers will increase their organic search traffic and you can read about his entrepreneurial experiences, I have been, on softwarebyrob.com.

I’ll help facilitate, my name in Andrew Warner, I’m the founder of Mixergy.com where proven founders, like Rob, where they teach. Rob, you haven’t always had this figured out, you’ve had issues in the past with getting sales, can you talk about one of them? About maybe Chitchat.net? What was that?

Rob: Sure, Chitchat.net was a really early product of mine, I actually acquired it from someone for 150 dollars and I remember thinking, wow you pay 150 dollars for an entire software product, like all rights to it, and I was thinking of the loads of money that I was going to make. And then I bought it, I was a software developer and I could handle the software part, but no one ever told me that marketing is really hard, and that you can’t just wing it.

Andrew: And so as a result, what happened with chitchat? Here’s the blog post that I saw, on softwarebyrob.

Rob: Yup, yeah, so I spend about somewhere between a year and 18 months just kind of banging my head against the wall, just trying to learn how to market this discussion software. And I learned a ton during that time, but right about the time I decided to sell it was when I had my first, my wife had our first child, and that was really impetus, but in essence it never really made that much money. It made a few hundred bucks a months, and early on my goal was to, you know, turn it into an 8 thousand dollar a month revenue stream and quit my job, and so it was definitely not a success by my definition.

Andrew: I see. What was a success? Can you talk about one of them?

Rob: Sure, sure. Yeah the first success I’ve had, I’ve had a few small ones that I built myself and made a few hundred dollars a month from. And the goal this whole time, the reason I talk about money is because the goal my entire entrepreneurial journey was to quit salary employment and quit consulting. And so I had a certain number, it was between 7 and 8 thousand dollars, and that was the number I needed to make every month, in order to be able to support my family and pay the mortgage. And so the first big success I had was actually a product I had called .netinvoice, and in essence it was invoicing software, and I really was able to turn that into making a few thousand bucks a month, and that was kind of the first thing where it really clicked for me and where I was able to realize that the things that I was doing were starting to work, and that if I reproduced those in other produces that I could hit my goal of leaving the consulting.

Andrew: And what was the biggest hit of all of them?

Rob: The biggest hit has been, oh that’s a good question, it’s funny I don’t think of things in terms of that. But, you know, HitTail has actually, my most recent acquisition has actually done really well for me already. And it’s the one I’m the most excited about because it is the most recent, so I’d say in terms of monetary potential that’s definitely the top of the list.

Andrew: Can you talk about sales numbers for that or is it too early?

Rob: It’s, I mean I can talk about them, it’s early. When I acquired it, it was doing around 1100, 1200 a month and it should do over three grand, this month. And this is sass, so it’s recurring revenue, so it’s not, again these are not multimillion dollar businesses but I have, I own 9 or 10 of them. And so, you know, you kind of stack them all together and they make a good income…

Andrew: And this is in a matter of months right? You haven’t owned this for years, how long has it been?

Rob: That’s right, well I acquired it basically like the 1st of September so what is that? Like 5 or 6 months ago.

Andrew: Wow.

Rob: Yeah.

Andrew: And the reason I wanted to have you come on here and teach is because I’ve known you, I’ve talked to people who’ve learned from you and have seen results, Ruben Gomez of Bidsketch who’s site we’re going to show up later, in an interview said you helped him get customers before he even launched, and that’s specifically why I wanted you here.

And of course, I spoke at your conference where there were dozens of people who came to me and said that they had similar experiences from you. And you’re not a slick salesman, you’re not the kind of person who I feel like, it comes naturally to you, but you’re someone who’s got a good analytical mind, and if you could break it down for yourself and repeat it over and over with these different businesses, many of which we’ll see throughout this course, then we can pick up on what you’ve learned and we can implement it.

And again, Ruben just used one of your ideas, I’m going to write a note here, I don’t know if we have Ruben specifically here, but you told him specifically what to do to help his pre-launch, and let’s see if we can get that into this conversation also.

Rob: Sure.

Andrew: But first, going back to this big board of ideas, these are the ideas that we’re going to cover and I put them up on the board because people say they want to see where we’re 1going with the session and this is we’re starting. We’re starting with ‘Go for Existing Customers First’. What do you mean by that and how do we do that?

Rob: Sure. So, this is one I’ve learned more recently, especially as you… If you were to acquire a business or if you have a business that runs for a few years and you have basically canceled customers. Most recently, with Hit Tail, I had this slew of cancellations that happened before I bought it from the previous owner, and they loved the service. They said the service was great, but they didn’t have… Either there was down time with the service, which is one of the reasons I acquired it, and they also didn’t have time to implement the suggestions that the engine is making for them because, basically, it suggests keywords that you should target in SEO.

Andrew: I see… And here are the keywords, in fact, I’m going to read what it says right here on the website. It says: if you write about towels for children in this one example, you’re going to rank on Page 1 of this of Google.com, and it gives you other suggestions for keywords you can write about. And so people said, ‘Great! I have them all written down on a piece of paper. Now, I don’t have enough time to write this. That’s why I have to cancel my service and stop paying you recurring revenue on HitTail.’ And what did you do as a result of that?

Rob: Well, so I’m in the process of implementing integration with Text Broker, which is an API that allows… Basically, you send it some keywords and they send you back a finished blog post in a couple days.

Andrew: Oh, really?

Rob: Yeah. It’s pretty cool. There’s a couple services like it, but they have 100,000 writers that are hanging around basically waiting for assignments. And so, we’re in the final stages of implementing it. But this is exactly… I could see this being a larger impact on my monthly revenue than a lot of other tactics that I’m looking at.

Andrew: And this is the kind of thing that you’re advising both our audience and you’ve advised other entrepreneurs who come to you and it goes contrary to, it makes sense, but it goes contrary to our expectations for our business. When we’re running a business, we’re thinking, especially in the early days and you’re months into Hit Tail, we think, ‘How do we get more customers? How do we get more prospects? How do we get more of those prospects to buy from us?’ And you’re saying, ‘Wait a second. What might be easier, what is easier, is to go after those people who already are your customers.’ And sell them more or find ways to keep them longer.

Rob: That’s right. That’s right. I’ve also done it with a product called DotnetInvoice where it’s invoicing software, and we built a QuickBooks integration, and it’s just an add-on module. And so, folks pay an extra $99 if they want that, and it’s actually been a really big seller and it’s increased the lifetime value of our customers because we’re able to sell them more. I really do think… You know who does this really well is Internet marketers. Like they have it down where they sell extra, right? They bundle. They up-sell. They cross-sell. These are all tactics that we, in the startup world, I think should learn more from because I don’t think enough start-ups, they focus too much on the product end and don’t think, ‘What else can I offer my…’

Andrew: Especially, it seems like software entrepreneurs. By the way, I do have a browser up here. Our connection is really strong, so I can pull up web pages whose screen shots I didn’t capture ahead of time, and this is DotNetInvoice?

Yep. D-O-T-N-E-T. Yep. There it is. Invoice dot com.

Andrew: I must have gone there earlier today. Do you still own DotNetInvoice? I remember you speaking about it.

Rob: I do.

Andrew: You do.

Rob: Yep.

Andrew: So this is one of the properties that you own.

Rob: That’s right.

Andrew: Okay. So, let’s take a look. The next big idea then is ‘Go for Recurring Revenue’. Why recurring revenue?

Rob: Yeah. This is one of the… It took me so long to learn this. DotNetInvoice, as an example, is a piece of software that you pay a one time fee for. There’s a $300 version and a $99 version. And the problem is that the first day of every month, I start out with zero revenue. Zero revenue. And I have to scramble and hustle to make any money and it’s really, really hard to grow a business under those kinds of conditions. Whereas, with something like HitTail or any type of software as a service application, where you have a subscription base, you’re starting at the level that you were at the previous month. And so you’re always building.

We talk about run rate a lot, where you multiply by twelve. That almost doesn’t apply with DotNetInvoice because I’ve had months where sales jump up to $5,000 and I’ve had months where sales will plummet to $300. And that will never happen with a SaaS app. So, recurring revenue is, perhaps, the number one criteria for myself personally when I’m going to build or buy a new application now.

Andrew: I’ve got to say, I like it, too and I know, sometimes, my revenue takes a hit because people would prefer to pay once than to pay over time, but it allows me to have a consistent revenue stream, which means that I can hire people and pay them consistently. It means that I have the security of almost essentially the security of having a salary with the up side and the creative opportunities of having your own business.

Rob: Yep. Yep. That’s right.

Andrew: All right. And you did this, I’ve got MicroEntrepreneur here. Can you talk about that?

Rob: Yeah, so, Micropreneur.com is actually…

Andrew: Excuse me. I can’t believe I said that. Micropreneur, of course.

Rob: No problem. This is similar to what you do, right? It’s teaching. It’s providing what we consider valuable content to folks who are trying to launch a software product. And I get requests a lot to basically break it up and say, ‘Well, I only need month one.’ or ‘I only need content about SEO. Can you just give me your AdWords stuff?’ And realistically, we’ve kept it to a recurring revenue model and that has… I mean, it’s served us well. It’s allowed us to really build the business up, and it’s, like you said, it’s a much more steady income stream.

And it also allows us to focus on things like how do we make people so excited about it that they stick around. And it’s not about tricking. It’s not about doing anything like that. It’s about… If you’re just selling someone one month of content, then do you care how good that is? But if you have an ongoing membership, you have to provide really good stuff or people will leave. So I actually think it benefits both the customer and the person providing the content.

Andrew: What are you running it on?

Rob: This is on WordPress.

Andrew: And the membership component?

Rob: Wishlist Member.

Andrew: Wishlist Member. That’s what we use here at Mixergy. For your other businesses, it seems like you built your own recurring revenue software. The charges are coming in not from… Membership isn’t coming in from Wishlist. It’s something you built yourself. But here, it’s Wishlist, just a simple plug-in, costs under $100 to install it on WordPress. You’re good to go.

Rob: Yeah. And it integrates with PayPal, is how we actually take payments.

Andrew: Oh, really? You only do PayPal payments on it?

Rob: Yeah. I know. It’s surprising. It’s pretty infrequent… We do get some complaints now and again and we work with people, but, in general, [??] PayPal handles it.

Andrew: Oh, real easy. Why did you decide to go with just PayPal?

Rob: Because when I launched it, I was lean. I wanted to get it out the door as quickly as possible. I didn’t want to write a bunch of code and I wanted to see if the idea was going to fly, and then there hasn’t been a compelling reason since then to go back and spend the 40 hours to write a billing engine.

Andrew: What was the original motivation behind that site?

Rob: I was getting so many emails through my blog and I would reply to people, but I felt like I couldn’t do it justice. So, you get a question about how do I explore an idea, how do I explore a market? And it’s like, ‘Well, here’s a paragraph,’ but realistically, I want to record full screen casts and write1,500 words on this and bla-bla-bla, and I started realizing, ‘Well, if people are actually willing to pay for this, I can totally justify the time. I would love to do this, but I can’t possibly put in this time for free.’ And that’s what eventually happened. I spent 20-30 hours for almost a year building this. As soon as I got two months in, I sold memberships and people were just two months behind my contact creation the whole time.

Andrew: I see.

Rob: If that makes sense. So I didn’t just build it for a year.

Andrew: Right. The reason I wanted to show that side is because it is so easy to impalement recurring revenue. You just plug in with PayPal and Wishlist and you’re good to go. What do you do for HitTail?

Rob: HitTail was using PayPal subscriptions when I acquired it. We actually did spend the time to create a billing engine and hired a developer to do it, and it took about 30-40 hours and it integrates with Stripe, which is a payment processor. There’s a specific reason we did that, though. If you looked at the plans, they’re metered, and if you go over 10,000 unique visits per month, you get a warning and then the next month, you get bumped up to the next plan. So that’s how… We needed the flexibility that PayPal didn’t offer.

Andrew: Right.

Rob: So that’s the only reason. Otherwise, I would have left it on manual PayPal and probably used E-junkie or Amazon or something.

Andrew: All right. Let’s go on to the next big idea. ‘Stop Sucky Copy.’ You had this issue at HitTail when you acquired it. Let me bring up that. I went into Archive.org in preparation for our conversation here to see what HitTail looked like before you bought it, and this is it from about, I think, a year ago. What sucks about this? What do we need to learn?

Rob: Yeah. It actually looked like this until about 2Ã?½ months ago, but… So, what sucks about this is you arrive at this page and you see the big logo and you see a tagline that says ‘Real Traffic. Real Time. Real Results.’ But what the hell does that mean? It’s up at the top, the blue. Yeah. What does that mean? That doesn’t actually mean anything. That’s a clever brand tagline if you’re Proctor & Gamble or someone. But if you’re actually coming to a website. You’ve never heard of it.

The first thing you want to see on that website is what is this site going to do for me. You really want to polarize your audience. You want to grab the people who actually have a need for your service and you want to make it super, super clear. And that’s done a little… What you’re focusing on now, where it says ‘Keyword Tool to Drive More Long Tail Traffic to Your Site Actually’. That is actually a decent headline. Although it’s not because it describes the tool but it doesn’t describe a promise that is being made to the customer. (?) three rules.

Andrew: Yes. It does describe . . . Let me see. ‘Keyword Tool To Drive More Longtail Traffic to Your Site Naturally.’ If I didn’t know the product, would I know what it was? I guess I would have a sense of it. Yes. That would explain, actually, what it was, to me. ‘Keyword Tool’ sounds a lot like Google Keyword Tool. Drive more traffic to your site. Yes. That makes sense. But, what you’re doing now is, you’re guaranteeing.

Rob: Right. I’m making a promise, basically. I’m doing three things in this headline. It’s a formula. You can write good headlines without it but this is how I find that I’d write the best headlines. First, I make a promise to the reader and that’s where I said ‘Guaranteed to’ do something. Right? The second thing is I always have a verb, aside from the guarantee. It’s, I’ve guaranteed to do what? Increase or to dramatically increase. There’s some type of verb in there and, the third thing is, I always have ‘You’ or ‘Your’ in the headline. Sometimes it can be implied. You don’t actually need the word ‘You’. If you go back to DotNetInvoice Books, the headline doesn’t have ‘You’ in it but it does have all three of those elements.

Andrew: To this one? Or no. You’re talking about . . .

Rob: DotNetInvoice (?).

Andrew: Yes. Let me go over to that. That is on the browser. Now, I’ve got all these tabs open and everything, and images open. So, yes, here. ‘Three Minutes to Your First Invoice’.

Rob: Yes. So, what does that say? Number one, I’m making you a promise, that it’s going to take you three minutes. or less. So the promise doesn’t even have to be as explicit as ‘Guaranteed’.

Andrew: ‘Three Minutes.’ What’s the thing that you’re offering me?

Rob: In this headline?

Andrew: In general. When you’re telling us that we need a promise, of verb and the word ‘Your ‘, the promise component of that doesn’t have to be a ‘Guaranteed’, or the word ‘Promise’. It just needs to offer them something clear.

Rob: Yes. That’s right. So, the promise is there, ‘Three Minutes’. The ‘You’ or ‘Your’ is there. And . . . Oh. Man. I can’t believe I forgot my third one.

Andrew: No. The verb.

Rob: Yes. The verb.

Andrew: Actually, there’s no verb in that one.

Rob: Yes. There isn’t. So, I probably need to work on this headline. ‘Three Minutes to Your First Invoice.’ Yes. That’s how I do it nowadays. I wrote this a couple of years ago.

Andrew: So here’s what we’ve got. You’re saying, have a promise, I know some people learn better by seeing, a verb, ‘You’ or ‘Your’ in there. So, if we were to redo that, it might be something like, ‘In Three Minutes Print Your First Invoice or Send. . . ‘

Rob: Yes. ‘Create.’ I would probably say, ‘Create Your First Invoice In Under Three Minutes,’ or something like that and that would handle all three of them. There’s something about being forceful, well, not forceful, but having that overt verb really ignites the human mind.

Andrew: So, I understand the idea of having a promise in there, because ‘I Guarantee,’ to me, when I was looking at this, when I was just pulling screenshots in preparation for the conversation here today, I saw ‘Guaranteed’ and I thought, [sic] Whoa, there’s nothing to lose; I can’t believe he’s willing to do that. Now, I feel comforted by it. I really understand the ‘Your’. You’re really speaking to me but, why the verb? Why do we need to say ‘Increase’ or, in the case of the invoice example that I came up with, ‘Create’ or ‘Print’? What’s the verb for?

Rob: Flip back to the old keyword screen (?). Hit (?) one, and look at this headline.

Andrew: ‘Real Traffic, Real-Time, Real Results.’ It doesn’t tell me what it does for me to get that.

Rob: No.

Andrew: I see.

Rob: So, the verb helps. If you look down to the black headline word, [it] says, ‘Keyword Tool to Drive More Longtail Traffic to Your Site Naturally.’ It does have ‘Drive’ in there, which is a verb but, realistically, having a verb in there helps you not describe your product. A lot of people describe their product. So, if they have invoicing software, they would say, ‘The Best Invoicing Software on the Market,’ or they would say, ‘Invoicing Software Made for Developers,’ or they would say, ‘Invoicing Software XXX.’ Right? That doesn’t help you at all. Putting a verb in there, implies what it does and that is more what the buyer is looking to find out.

Andrew: I see. All right. Let’s bring up that big board again. So, ‘Stop Your Sucky Copies’ or anything else, by the way, is the most important part of having a sales page that converts, in your mind, is it that headline?

Rob: Well, no.

Andrew: That clear offer?

Rob: I would say, the headline and clear offer go hand-in-hand, but they don’t have to be the same thing. I mean, the purpose of headline is to get the person to read the next line below it and the purpose of the next line below it is to get someone to read the next line below that. I mean, that really is what you try to do, and if you look at the (?) tail homepage you’ll see that it’s headline, then a little more addition with the smaller headline. Then there’s the button, the action is right there, so what you said which is having a clear headline and an offer, a call to act, essentially, that to me, that’s the architecture of what every . . . whether it’s a long form sales page, selling any type of product or it’s a short . . . I mean, this is obviously just a very short form sales form, is really what this is, and so, yeah, the compelling text that gets you to read the next line and then a call to action where you want it.

Andrew: Really nice is [on] on that page too.

Rob: Thanks.

Andrew: All right, so on to the next big idea. Don’t let them leave without signing up.

Rob: Yeah, so the idea is here is that [??] reduce sign up friction. There’s a bunch of different ways to do this, but it’s pretty common to come upon a website, as an example, you go to the old HitTail website and you notice that you come there and there’s a bunch of links all over the place, and you don’t really know where to click. There’s no clear path of where you want to go.

As a result, people just wonder off. I was looking at the Google [analysts] for this page and there are links across the top. There is the sign up for free trial on the left, but when I brought this there were even more links on this page. To limit the path it can take is actually quite helpful in terms of guiding them through to the place you want them to get.

In terms of reducing sign up friction, specifically, if someone goes to this sign up page, where they actually have to register, a huge mistake I see is having a sign up form with 15 or 20 fields in it, and HitTail actually had that as well. It’s down to . . . I shrunk it down to three fields in the new version and then I added credit card up front [before] the trial, so I had to add three more fields. So, it’s actually . . .

Andrew: It’s three fields and then another three fields after?

Rob: That’s right.

Andrew: But it was the first . . . What are the first three fields?

Rob: The first three fields . . . so, this is kind of a big deal. I see this happen a lot in common mistakes where people ask for a username and then and email and then a password and then a confirm password, then a time zone. I’ve seen this all the time. OK, here’s what you can do. You get rid of username and use email. There’s no reason not to.

Andrew: Get rid of username and use email as the username.

Rob: As the username . . .

Andrew Right.

Rob: . . . that’s correct. Then you combine two to one. Then you have password and confirm password. There’s no reason to have a confirm. If they mistype it, they will reset it; they will email you. It’s going to be 1 in 50 people, so don’t reduce your conversion rate cuz you want [??] password.

The next thing [??] I’ve seen a lot of time zone. You can detect that with Javascript. People also ask for company, first name, last name, unless you absolutely need that info, you should leave it off the form.

Andrew: Let’s take a look. Let’s go over there. I don’t want to keep hitting HitTail because then people think that we’re just promoting HitTail, but . . .

Rob: . . . [??] that’s right.

Andrew: . . . it’ll be a good example to go for, so I’m going to go with HitTail.

Rob: Yeah, definitely.

Andrew: [??] Wishlist earlier, when we talked about Wishlist, they do that too. They ask for . . . I mean it’s an out-of-the-box solution, so you kind of are forced to use their forms, so they ask for username, then first name, then last name, then email. I think they might ask you to confirm the email, but I know for sure that they ask you for the password once and then again. We got rid of that by actually having a developer build a solution that gets rid of that.

I hired two different developers to do that. One that would allow me to just collect email address and another one that said, don’t even collect email, if they’re paying you through PayPal or whatever, they’ve got . . . . We got their email address and name, just use that.

Rob: Yeah. Yeah, that’s great advice. Every form element you eliminate from a form is absolutely going to increase your conversion rate by . . . . [SS] . . .

Andrew: That’s a pretty easy thing too, from what I’ve seen, to hire someone on Elance to do for under 100 bucks. Just say, look, the solution that I have has all these forms; I need a quick solution to see if I could increase conversions by removing all these fields from the form, solve it for, and this is how I want you to solve it. I give them a logic and they come up with it like, take the username . . . take the email address they give us and make it their username and their email address.

Rob: Yeah.

Andrew: I was asking you earlier about what you have here. You say, give me the email address, and of course, you need that to keep talking with them. You want their password so they can log back in, in the URL that you’re going to base everything on.

Rob: Yeah, and realistically, I could get rid of password and just auto generate one and email it to them, but I’m OK with this approach.

Andrew: You’re what?

Rob: I’m OK with this approach. I mean I do think it might increase my conversion rate a little bit, but it would be more of a headache for the customer, if you went that far.

Andrew: We do that. We actually just generate a password and email it to them and let them change it, but I know what you mean. Some people like to use their own password.

Rob: It’s a trade off. Yeah.

Andrew: I on the other hand always use a password generator, so whether you generate a password for me or I generate it, I want a secure one. Then you ask, of course, for a credit card. Why do you ask for a credit card before you get their email and close of sale?

Rob: Yeah, because it dramatically increases the number of people who wind up sticking around. It’s reducing friction for when their trial is done. I’ve seen a number of test of this. In generally, collecting credit card upfront is the way to go. It will reduce your upfront conversion rate to trials, but it will . . . you’ll convert a lot of folks to paid accounts later.

Andrew: What do you do to watch your conversions?

Rob: I use costmetrics[sp]. I also have one customer port that I hired a developer on Odesk to build using classic ASP against our data base.

Andrew: I’ve got a screen shot that I collected earlier based on our notes, based on your notes with Jeremy [sp] about Ambassador . . . .

Rob: Yes.

Andrew: You want to show that here?

Rob: Sure, sure, yeah, I mean this is a good example of a pretty slim form. He asks for a company name; he asks for email and username and password. I’ve informed him to combine email and username. Company name is actually quite important here because this is an affiliate. It’s turning people into affiliate, so they actually do need the company name upfront.

Realistically, then all he’s asking for is a little bit of plan information and then he asks for credit card down below. He doesn’t have any optional fields, that’s a big thing. If it’s optional, it should not be on this form. You should get it later. I just like the sleek look of this one. I think he’s done a good job of narrowing it down.

Andrew: All right. Actually, aboard. You don’t want to let them leave without signing up; you want to reduce the fields and . . . [??] . . .

Rob: . . . [??] . . .

Andrew: Next is have a call to action on every page.

Rob: Yep. This is perhaps the biggest mistake I see when I review websites. I do a lot of website reviews just for entrepreneurs and the home page, specifically, should definitely have one or multiple cause to action to the same thing if the page is long. Every other page on your site, the customer when they, or the visitor when they get to the bottom of that page they should know what to do next.

If they read through a bunch of FAQs or if they read through a bunch of testimonials when they get to the bottom that page, it shouldn’t just be empty, and it shouldn’t just have a return to the top of the page length. What it should have is a button; where do you want to them to go next. DotNetInvoice is an example of that. HitTail is obviously, but I know we don’t want to keep going back to that.

Andrew: Here, let me do this. I got DotNetInvoice. Here’s a clear . . . Now, I noticed that you have three different calls to action on the right side there, view demo . . .

Rob: Yeah.

Andrew: . . . take tour, buy now.

Rob: Yeah. I think if I were to re- . . . so, this site was designed about two, a little over two years ago, and if I were to do it today, I would remove that buy now. I would just have view demo or take tour. The reason is because if people are going to buy then they’re going to figure out a way to buy, if they’re that motivated . . .

Andrew: Oh, really?

Rob: . . . and [??].

Andrew: Is that people . . .it seems now that a lot sites don’t even have the buy now button, it just says take a tour.

Rob: I design sites these days for first time visitors because the majority of people who hit your site are coming for the first time, and so you really don’t want to think what’s a returning customer who wants to log, what are they saying, or what’s someone who’s coming back to buy it what do they want to see. It’s really, how do I get someone introduced as quickly as possible with as little visual noise as possible.

Andrew: By the way, who do you get to design your sites?

Rob: This site was designed by a firm, an offshore firm I use in Bangladesh. These guys are pretty good. They’re about 15 bucks an hour and they . . .

Andrew: 15 bucks an hour to get you a design like this?

Rob: Yeah, yeah, they did the whole thing, man. It was 10 pages. They did the custom design . . .

Andrew: Wow.

Rob: . . . and then sliced it, [??] out for 1200 bucks.

Andrew: That’s incre-, that’s impressive.

Rob: Yeah, they’re good. Yeah, they’re . . . [??]

Andrew: You also wanted to show Bidsketch. I’m going to also bring up a web page in a moment for us to look at. I see on Bidsketch Reuben, on his site, has a call to action on the left, see plans and pricing. Then on the right he also says, see what your clients see. It seems like it’s a second call to action. I know the guy test everything.

Rob: Yah.

Andrew: He’s obsessive about testing. Why do you think in this case two calls to action help?

Rob: Well, because I think not everyone is going to give you their name and email, and so he wants to have kind of a fallback, which is that see plans and pricing. That’s the secondary. What he really wants people to do is send it to me. That’s why it has the sample thing in red in the upper right to draw your eye. That’s why it looks . . . it’s got that depth of like it’s multiple pieces of paper. I mean, your eye is naturally drawn to that big white space.

Only if someone says, [??], I don’t really want to give these guys my email yet, then they [??] wonder over to the left and click plans and pricing.

Andrew: You want a call to action on every page. I know that he’s got that. He’s a student of yours which is why [??], you benefited . . .

Rob: Yeah.

Andrew: . . . him a lot. I pulled his site. There’s Bidsketch, a Blog post, on the right I noticed right there it says show me how.

Rob: Yep, that’s awesome.

Andrew: There’s always a call to action on his. Who has it underneath a blog post, who is doing that in a way we could show?

Rob: Good question. [inaudible]

Andrew: Sorry, I was bringing up pages, here’s what I was doing. Maybe I could help out by looking at KISSmetrics, does KISSmetrics do that, they do. Underneath their blog post it says…they do. It says: Start here, free trial. It is on their blog post. And you’re saying that Software By Rob, on your site, you also do that?

Rob: Yep. It’s a newsletter sign up, but it converts quite well.

Andrew: So, always a call to action after whatever it is that the person’s supposed to be doing. Let’s click on your latest post…And you can see that, as I scroll, right?

Rob: Yes.

Andrew: There’s always some kind of call to action, whether it’s this, or a button like these guys have.

Rob: Joel On Software does it as well.

Andrew: Let’s take a look at Joel On Software, and see how the bandwidth holds up as I pull that up. Joel On Software. The reason I want to bring up Joel is because I don’t think of him as a marketer, I think of him as the ultimate management and software guy.

Rob: It’s that “Do you want to know more” [inaudible]

Andrew: And you know what, I’ve got an ad blocker on right now…Do you want to know more? You’re reading Joel On Software. No, wait. He used to have more, there’s something that’s missing.

Rob: Yes, he did. Maybe it’s in older posts? I’m not sure.

Andrew: Or maybe I have my ad-blocker on, and that’s interrupting? But you’re right, he used to link over to his other stuff.

Rob: To FogBugz.

Andrew: All right. Let’s see, any other notes on getting a call to action on every page?

Rob: No, I think that’s it.

Andrew: Then let’s go on to the next one. Do not do things at scale. I remember going to NYU and studying business which I loved. A lot of NYU is just sitting around reading Plato, and thinking about the future of the world, and about how unjust the unliberal people outside of Greenwich Village in New York are, and the little business classes that I was able to take there all seemed to say: Scale. Do things at scale. Businesses need to think about scale. You’re not the first entrepreneur to say the opposite, don’t do things at scale. Why?

Rob: Because in an early stage business, it is critical that you focus on some things that just aren’t going to scale. This includes things like going on a podcast, or writing a blog post, or even social media, it doesn’t scale that well. And I think we get hung up on thinking, well, if we’re not going to be the next Facebook, or if want to be some massive company eventually, then from day one, everything has to scale. The problem is, when you’re trying to pick up your first 100 to 500 customers, that entire time is going to be all hustle and all legwork, and it’s going to be things that will only work in the short-term. I think more than the headline there, I think of this more as like: Do things that don’t scale to get your initial customers.

Andrew: Do things that don’t scale.

Rob: Yes. Do things that do not scale.

Andrew: As opposed to do not do things that scale.

Rob: Yes. You have to think of things that scale eventually, if you want to grow, it’s just in the early days, you’ll have to do things that don’t scale at all.

Andrew: So, you’re on Hacker News in the early days. I pulled up the latest screenshot from Hacker News. How does this relate to what you’re doing?

Rob: I wrote a book a couple of years ago, and I blogged about the book, I blogged about the process, and it’s very time consuming to do this. And I actually [inaudible] on Hacker News [inaudible]

Andrew: I’m sorry, you’re saying you were picked up by Hacker News?

Rob: Yes, and that started selling some books. But that’s not something that necessarily scales, infinitely. It’s something that required a lot of time to put together, I put together a series of blog posts about it, and, what I realized is that that’s often enough to get started, to get that fly wheel going, to start getting things in motion so that down the line sales pick up, they get more and more, and you don’t have to put in as much effort. So, it’s like doing things that don’t scale early on is what gets that snowball going.

Andrew: I see that actually. Lots of people will write a blog post and get on a site like Hacker News or Reddit, I have a screenshot of Reddit, I’ll show that too, and they’ll get there and they’ll go, All right, now how do I find 50 other Reddits so I can keep this going, and how do I get on Reddit every single day, and how do I find 50 other hacker news sites so I can do that. And then I realized there aren’t any, it’s pretty much these two. In any other community it’s not as big, or it’s not as targeted and what was I doing here? And you’re saying it got things started for you, what did it get started and how were you able to keep that going if you couldn’t find 50 other hacker news’ and 50 other Reddits?

Rob: Yeah so that’s actually a really good question, it’s a really good point, because I hear that as well, it’s like entrepreneurs want to, they want to just reproduce what they’ve already done, especially early entrepreneurs, they just want to, you know, like you said find 50 more hacker news’. And what doing, the advice I would have for people is that Hacker News or Reddit or any of these things are just a way to kick start it, and if you’re building an interesting product, that people talk about, like the book I wrote, then that gets word of mouth going, that also gets some links back to you so you can get started looking at SEO. SEO is really undervalued in the startup community but that is a huge source for a lot of successful startups. They don’t talk about it, but that stuff takes initial links that you get from sources like hacker news and from people blogging about it.

So yeah, so I think the mistake people make is to think of that hacker news or tech crunch is an ongoing source of customers and it’s not, it has a very short half life. And so you start with the hacker news and the podcasts and the guest posts, and these things that are very time intensive that don’t scale, and you use them, you leverage them into those things that do scale and that do have long term value, and those are things like SEO, incoming referral traffic, and that kind of stuff.

Andrew: OK. All right, lets again go back to the big board that we promised people we would go through and that’s, “see the key words they’re typing”. I tried to change what you’ve written in your notes with Jeremy in the production call, to something that will fit up on the screen.

Rob: OK.

Andrew: And also maybe sound a little mysterious. You know…

Rob: Sure.

Andrew: What I’m talking about there with “see the keywords people are typing”?

Rob: I do.

Andrew: All right.

Rob: I do, so the thought here is to get, to know, to understand how your customer’s are searching for your product. The idea is that every customer does not search the same way, even for the same product.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Rob: And it’s often overlooked, especially by basically anyone that doesn’t know about the Google AdWords keyword tool, that if you, the example I used here is guidekit.com.

Andrew: Let’s go over to that site, I actually didn’t load that up before, so let’s bring it up right now. There it is.

Rob: There it is.

Andrew: Nice looking website, also.

Rob: So this is a colleague/mentee of mine, and he has just launched. Oh, am I coming through OK?

Andrew: Oh yeah, yeah you are.

Rob: OK, so, he came to me and he said hey I’m going to build my site and I’m going to target the keyword, it was something like helpdocs.

Andrew: Yeah help…

Rob: Help documents.

Andrew: But people would search for helpdocs. And help documentation, uh-huh.

Rob: That’s right, and so we sat down and said well how do you know this? And he said well because I think people might, and I’ve asked a few people. And the first step, I said let’s go to the Google AdWords keyword tool, and lets see how many people search for this. And so we did, and we looked for helpdocs, we looked for user documentation, we looked for a bunch of other, you know, combinations of that kind of thing.

And we found out that actually user documentation has a lot more searches than all these other phrases, and what that allows him to do is, A allows him to talk to his customers in a way that they understand, in a way that they’re looking for. And B, it does allow him to focus on some search engine optimization, which can definitely bring valuable traffic to him for months and years to come.

Andrew: So that’s the big difference, instead of helpdocs or help documentation, go for user documentation.

Rob: Yep.

Andrew: And that small change makes all the difference, and the way that you found it was just going to this site, the Google AdWords search tool, and right up here, this is where you were doing it?

Rob: Yep, that’s right.

Andrew: All right.

Rob: That’s right, it’s a bigger difference than people realize, to speak to your customers in a language that they’re using.

Andrew: All right, let’s go on to this last one. I’ve been really curious about this one. How to get cheap clicks. How do you get cheap clicks?

Rob: So, there’s one particular tactic that I’ve used.

Andrew: Uh-huh.

Rob: And a friend of mine named J.D. Connolly actually told me about this, and it works pretty darn well. And I don’t know how long it’s going to be around but it works on Facebook right now, and you can get clicks down to between 10 and 20 cents. And I’ve had it work multiple times. And so what you do is you go to Facebook.com/advertising, and you set up your Facebook ads account, and then you set up, probably around 4 parallel campaigns that are basically the same thing, right, they are very similar ads. But you are basically trying to split test, you just change the headline, you change the image a little bit, and you maybe can change the call to action in the body text but there’s not very much body text in there so you don’t have a ton of room there.

So, it’s mostly the headline and the image, and you set up four or five of them and you let them all run, and what will typically happen is that one of them will have a really high click through rate. Just for some reason, it’ll just work with the audience you’ve selected, and the other four will have lower click through rates, and what Facebook does is their algorithm, if you have a high click through rate, it just drops the cost per click for you, because they want it to get clicked a lot more, because their audience is into it. And so I will have, typically if I do four of them, I’d have three of them that go up to between 80 cents and a buck twenty per click, and I’ll have one that will drop down to like ten or fifteen cents a click.

And then you just crank up the ad spend on that one, you shut the other four down and you take that 10 to 20 cent one and put as much money as you can into it, and you burn it out, you put a hundred bucks a day if you can afford it. And it will typically burn through the audience, and the click through rate will plummet after three to five days, because the audience, you know, they get blind to the same ad. And so you’ll get a big chunk of clicks really quick and you try to get them to either sign up for an email list or sign up for a trial. So this is again, this is not a flywheel approach that will last forever, but it’s a great initial way to get some cheap clicks and get some initial customers.

Andrew: You know, before we go on to the last site that you have, and the second one in this topic, I’m wondering, how do you find out about these things? How do you find out that this is the way to do Facebook? How do you find out that there’s some other new thing that’s going to come out after this and you’ve got to be on top of it? Who do you talk to or what website do you go to, and how can we do the same?

Rob: Sure, honestly yeah, I have friends who are entrepreneurs that I listen to, this particular tip was a colleague. But I get most of my information from sites like Mixer G and podcasts, and reading books, and just consuming different media. I think, for me, I’m a big audio consumer, and so I do podcasts, and I double speed them, so I can still hear them but I consume a lot more. And I bet within the last 30 days this exact tactic that I just mentioned has been mentioned on podcasts, you know…

Andrew: And that’s how you got it? So you’re just constantly looking for what’s the new tactic, who’s got something that you can use, and maybe you can put your own little spin on it.

Rob: That’s exactly right, and the benefit, that’s right, and the benefit is I have multiple products so I find that if this works on one, I’ll run it across all nine of them, you know and see what sticks. So yeah, I think consuming media of any kinds, you know books and blogs and stuff, does have value if you’re able to take notes and apply it to your product.

Andrew: Yeah I’m big on note taking, I do find that I get so much more out of that.

Rob: Yeah me, too.

Andrew: The last big site that I’ve got here to show is this one, buysellads.

Rob: Yeah, so I’m a big fan. I haven’t used buysellads maybe in the last yeah but I did have a couple businesses that really got some good cheap clicks. I don’t have a particular tactic like I did with Facebook.

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Rob: But in general if buysellads has a website in the mix that you’re targeting, you’re going to get some pretty good clicks out of here. And the nice part is they have such a high level of ad inventory that you can change from month to month from one site to another to keep your click through rate high. That’s the big thing is putting an ad on a website for like a year, people become blind to that banner. So you have to kind of move it around, and I would often have a three site rotation on bysellads, so I’d have the same exact banner and I’d run it for 30 day’s on one and I’d move it to number 3 and number 3, and after, you know, another month I’d move it back to number 1.

Andrew: All right, I’ve got a note here. I was about to end and then I remembered, I took notes. It’s a good thing I am an obsessive note taker.

Rob: Yeah.

Andrew: I took a note to come back and talk about what you taught Ruben. Do you remember what you told him about how to launch properly?

Rob: I do, this has been…

Andrew: This is a sticky idea on our board but I think we should include it.

Rob: Yeah, so the biggest mistake that I see done over and over is, one, people that are launching a product don’t create, they don’t gather emails before they launch the product. You should start marketing the day you start coding, or even before. Get a landing page up, get some folks getting there, I mean people are just going to ask you about it all the time, hey what are you doing? What are you up to? And you send them to that page. Twitter, if you have a blog, there’s so many ways to get people there even not through paid acquisition, you know, just through mentioning it.

And so, if you can build up a list of 100 to 500 people, or a thousand for that matter, then as it approaches launch you email them and you say hey, you let them know, like my product’s launching I know you’re probably excited about it, if you don’t want to hear about it unsubscribe now, but I’m going to send you a couple emails kind of describing what’s going to happen. What you don’t do, and I see done the time, is product launches and you email that 500 person list and you say hey we’re live, come sign up. And with that your conversion rate is like 1%.

Andrew: Why? Why is that such a bad, before you show me what you’re supposed to do, that’s what I would instinctively want to do. I’ve finally built up my list, it’s time for me to launch, and ta-DA everyone come. Why is that bad?

Rob: Because it doesn’t build interest. It doesn’t build anticipation. It doesn’t get people engaged in your story. It doesn’t allow you to really tell them what your app. does. How it serves them. How it’s going to benefit them.

The longer you’re able to, the more time you’re able to spend, kind of telling someone about your app. the more likely they are to be interested in it. And so if you can, you know how a sales letter, there’s long form sales letters that are really long, if you can take that sales letter and kind of turn it sideways and break it out over 3 or 4 different emails. That is actually the biggest, the best way to do it.

It’s to kind of take an email and say, hey, you know, we’re coming up. Here’s an intro if you recall the product does x. It’s user documentation for developers. And it’ll be live in like 2 weeks. And I’m so excited, you know, about it. And you kind of, you build energy. And you say, I’ll be in touch in a couple of days with a little more info.

Andrew: So you just keep telling them, this is what I’ve added to it or this is what’s going on with it. Just updates on what you’re building into the product. Will people care about it?

Rob: Well. You do this as you approach the launch. Let’s say you have 6 months from that time you gather emails until you launch. You only do this for maybe the past, the last 3 to 4 weeks.

Andrew: OK.

Rob: And you basically say, hey it’s almost done here’s a sneak preview screen shot of the product. No one else sees this, you get this because you’re on the list. There’s a bit of exclusivity.

Andrew: Got it.

Rob: This isn’t genuine either. Like I do this and I know a bunch of people on my list. It’s not something that [inaudible]

Andrew: Yeah. Yeah.

Rob: You’re really like building anticipation.

Andrew: I have a bad example because it’s so old. But it’s so effective that I’ve got to include it. When I first heard about the trio, the first trio phone. I signed up for a newsletter saying when is this thing going to come out. Because, you know, I’m , I was into the palm operating system. I love having smart phones. And they would send me an email saying, look at how our keyboard has these bubbles up. It’s not flat. And the reason we did that is because, and then they explained why that helps typing.

And then, they sent me another email showing me another aspect. And I remember saying, I can’t wait to just go into the AT&T store and try this thing just to see if the bubble letters actually help me type faster or if the, whatever it was. What else they said was, you could do everything with one hand. I wanted to see, can I really do it or is that for amateurs. And they really got me going.

So, that’s what you told Reuben and you tell other entrepreneurs to do before launch. What happens when it’s finally time to sell?

Rob: When it’s finally time to sell, you let them know, kind of a day before you’re going to do like an internal launch or private launch for them.

Andrew: Just for them.

Rob: Just for them.

Andrew: Uh-huh.

Rob: This is not going to go live. And you’re going to be able, since you’ve been on my list. Like, I really appreciate it. And you’re going to be able to buy at a discount. You’ve got to make that pretty sizable, 25 to 50 percent. And they get that for life. As long as they’re a customer. And typically this works well for SaaS apps because the price is going to go up. So it’s obvious if you’re going to charge like 20 bucks a month, and you’re like, if you buy in the next couple of days, you’re going to get if for 12 bucks a month forever. Then it’s a big impetus. There’s a bit of a time pressure there you’re building.

Andrew: I see.

Rob: And so it’s a [?] thing.

Andrew: Yeah. The [?] influence.

Rob: That’s right. And then, there’s exclusivity as well that you’re building. And so then you say, hey tomorrow at noon, this thing, you’re going to receive this and you’re going to have a couple of days to decide. And then the price is going to go up. So, if you’re interested, you should definitely buy now.

That’s what you’re doing. And then you send them the email at noon. And then you’ll get a lot of questions probably. And then two days later right before the dead line, you know an at 8 hours before you send them a final follow up and say, hey, I really appreciate it, this is the last email you’re going to receive. But I just want to let you know it’s closing out. You know, that you’re not going to have the discount anymore.

So that sequence of maybe four or five emails and everyone especially their influence. And say, look if you don’t want to hear about this then please unsubscribe. You’re not trying to bother people, you’re only trying to talk to people who genuinely are interested in the idea.

Andrew: Yeah. And I can see the exact same product marketed in two different ways. One is the conventional way, hey, the how we launch or we’re going to launch tomorrow. The other is this more gradual system where you tell people what to expect. I could see how the same product could be either a winner or a loser based on that.

Rob: Absolutely.

Andrew: And the poor guy who built up this app. Who spent his time building, whatever the business is, and launches and sees that no one buys or he gets a trickle of purchases. And thinks what did I do wrong with the business? Did I go in the wrong business? Did I go in the wrong direction with this product? Do people not love me? Is there a tech issue?

No. Just he didn’t know how gradually to ease people into buying.

Rob: That’s right. Yeah. The first approach, of just sending a single email, will get between one and maybe five percent. Five percent is a very high conversion rate to sales. Whereas the second approach, I’ve used it and seen it used easily with between 15 and 30% conversion rates on a total list number. So it’s a substantial difference.

Andrew: Yeah. It’s huge when you’re just getting started.

Rob: Yep.

Andrew: Again, Reuben of Bidsketch said that it made a huge difference for him.

Rob: Yeah. It did.

Andrew: All right. So, just like you said in the course, that we need to have a call to action at the end, let me give a quick call to action on my own, and then I’ll ask you for a call to action. What do people do now that they’ve come to the end of this program? And what I’m going to ask is, think about how you can use this. If you can use, of course, just one of these ideas from the board, the time you’ve invested, and the money you’ve invested, and the energy you’ve invested into absorbing what we’ve talked about here is going to be worthwhile, if you can just find one. I’m going to challenge you to think, before you even use it. Just think about, “How can I use one of these ideas?”

I’m going to keep it up on the board for a second because what I’ve noticed is that a lot of the people that I interview who are high performers, when I ask them how they learn, they say things like when they read books, they read a little different than I do. They go in to every chapter, and they think, “How do I apply it? How can I use it? How do I use this with a problem that I’m facing right now?” And I’ve been doing that ever since hearing it in the interviews, and I’ve been actually using more of what I’m learning.

And if you do it, I know you’re going to get the same results, so how can you use the Facebook tactic to get clicks. How can you think about keywords in a different way when you’re targeting by using the AdWords tool? How do you do things that don’t scale today so that you can get customers, and then later on, once that flywheel is set in motion, can you build on it? And the same for all of these. Think about one or two of them, and let us know what you’re going to do in the comments. All right, what about you. What can we ask people to do at the end, now that they’ve gotten to know you?

Rob: In terms of, with this course, or in terms of… [??]?

Andrew: How about for you? I’ve told them what they could do with the course. I think now, if they want to take your relationship to the next level, and I should actually include this with when we do the pre-interview conversation, maybe we need to talk to every course leader about what can the audience do if they want to follow up?

Rob: Got it.

Andrew: So I’m going to put you on the spot with any prep, but…

Rob: Oh, yeah.

Andrew: What can people do if they want to follow up or get to know you better?

Rob: Sure, yeah, probably the best way is on my blog, SoftwareByRob.com. Folks can obviously see what I’ve been working on, realizing that if you sign up for that email newsletter, you get a 175 e-book which is my best of the past six years blog posts. So you get this PDF and e-pub, and that to me is… It’s free. You can unsubscribe from the list if you want. I’m not trying to get people to subscribe, but it’s… That will show you if whether or not what I’m saying applies to you, and that’s kind of a good primer. And then taking it to the next level after that, I wrote a book called Start Small, Stay Small. That’s 19 bucks, and people can …

Andrew: SoftwareByRob, and let’s see what happens when I go to Start Small,
Stay…

Rob: StartupBook.net.

Andrew: Ah, thank you.

Rob: Yeah, sorry.

Andrew: Oh, there it is. StartupBook.net, and where is this? There you go. All right Rob, thank you for doing this session with us, thanks for teaching us. I’ve got a page full of notes, and I hope everyone in the audience has the same. And I’m looking forward to using these ideas, and to hearing from the audience how they have. Come back and let me know how you’ve used these ideas, and I’m looking forward to hearing your stories. Bye everyone.

Master Class: The stunning way to get publicity for your app so it sells
(Even if you don’t know jack about marketing.)
Taught by Andreas Kambanis

Report issues here

Master Class:
Mobile App Marketing


About the course leader

Andreas Kambanis, creator of Bike Doctor, an app that shows you how to repair your bike wherever you are.

Master Class Toolbox

LondonCyclist

Launcheffect

Launchrock

iPhoneapprockstar Resources

Punchtab

Cycling Plus

Turbo Scanner

Springwise

Everytrail

Word Lens

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to master to your app launch. It’s led by Andreas Kambanis, the creator of Bike Doctor. Here is that website and the app. BikeDoctor is an app that shows you how to repair your bike wherever you are. Andreas also writes about how to promote apps on i-Phoneapprockstar.com. So I invited him here to teach how he did it and to learn from his experiences. Andreas, welcome.Andreas: Thank you Andrew.Andrew: I know what my audience is thinking. They’re thinking, how much did this guy make with his launch? Now what were numbers? What did you do in your first month?

Andreas: Yeah, it’s a good question. In our first month, in our first 30 days, we made over $8,000 in sales of our app. And that was the first app we ever launched.

Andrew: First app ever launched. You’re not a professional app creator. You are a guy who runs, what was the website that you ran?

Andreas: Yeah, I run Londoncyclists.co.uk.

Andrew: Londoncyclists.co.uk. And you said, hey, it’s time for me to create an i-Phone app. And you wanted it to not just languish in the store, you wanted it to do well. And first month out you got $8,000 in revenue. And I invited you here to find out how you did this launch so well. Now things weren’t always great. As I said you were an amateur creator. You were struggling for a little bit. In fact there was one time recently where you took a 12 mile walk. Why did you take that 12 mile walk? By the way audience, I promise we’ve got this big list of tactics that we’re going to teach you so that you can get the same kind of results that Andreas got. But I want to just get to know where you were before so that we see how far you’ve come using the tactics you’re about to teach us. So what was this 12 mile walk?

Andreas: Right, that’s right. So if you skip back a couple of years ago things were not going quite so well. You know, I was kind of living off my savings and my parents were pestering me saying, get a real job. But yeah, so I remember quite clearly this one night we had to walk 10 or 12 miles or whatever it was to get back home because neither me or my friend had any money for the taxi. So it’s quite funny to think that then after the app launch and we got featured by Apple on our, you know, within sort of, within the first week of launching. You know, within 24 hours we were the first in our category. So that changed things quite a bit. And then a few months down the line I suddenly found myself flying over to Vegas from England. And we were standing in the queue and the chap that works there came up to us and said, look guys I’m really sorry you’re not getting in tonight. It was just too full, unless you want to get the table service, the bar service. So we just look at each other and thought, yeah right, let’s just do it, let’s just go for it, you know. So I went in there, you know, had the (?) service. I just thought, what a strange little contrast. A couple of months ago I couldn’t afford the cab ride home. And here I am in Vegas having a great time.

Andrew: What a great turnaround. This is the app that did it. Bike Doctor, I’m looking at it on Bikedoctorapp.com. So let’s look at the big board here and this is what we’re promising our audience that we’re going to do for them. We’re going to show them how to master their mobile app launch. And the first step to doing it is do a promotional sprint before the launch. What do you mean by that?

Andreas: Right, okay. So the reason why I would attribute us getting, within 24 to 48 hours, getting to number one in the sports category and then getting mentioned by Apple, getting featured by Apple, is that we had an audience that we’d already created. So we had a list of about 2,000 people that as soon as the app launched we sent them an e-mail saying, like, look, we’re live in the app store, go and try us out. So that gave us that big initial boost of users that then translated into rising so fast up the app store rankings. Which is kind of, this is the dream thing that all current developers look to do. So if we look at a really perfect example of an app that’s doing that right now. And there’s a springwise article that I came across recently. And it was about an app called Leap (?) and the app. So I clicked through to the website.

Andrew: Let’s bring that up. This is the website that you looked at.

Andreas: That’s right, yeah. And on the website they had this great little, you know the landing page already looks fantastic, so, interest is already peaked. So what i did was I clicked on the link that says, you know, be one of the first people to get invited by Facebook. So what they’ve essentially done now is they’ve suddenly got my contact details ready for when they launch. They can send me a really targeted e-mail on the day of launch and say, “Look we’re live in the App Store. Go and download our app.” And so that’s exactly it. And people can really replicate this tactic really easily because there’s a couple of really good services like launchrock and launcheffectapp. And what these basically do is when someone lands on their page they simply enter their e-mail addresses, they’re interested, and then they’re also encouraged, and this is a crucial part, they’re encouraged to share it with their friends. So this is basically what all apps need to be doing. I see a lot of apps that don’t have any prelaunch strategy. They’ll launch the app and then they’ll just immediately they’ll just think, oh, I forgot to put up a website. You really need to get that landing page in place because otherwise you won’t have that big volume of users that’s going to make every single ounce of difference on the launch day.

Andrew: So the actual launch and the sales happen before you launch and before you have anything to sell. And what you want to do is have a basic website up and you want to collect e-mail addresses. You guys got up to 2,000 e-mail addresses. And if someone who’s watching us wants to duplicate it is, they don’t have to create a site. They just have to learn from what this company did, what Leap did. Which is they created a page like this, they marketed it by getting articles on sites like this one, which is . . . well let’s bring that up over here. This is a springwise article. And we’ll talk in a bit about how to actually get, how to get articles like this written about you. But the tools that you want to recommend for creating that quick website. And this is critical, you’re saying is use Launchrock. Because it collects e-mail addresses, there it is right at the center. You can see that Launchrock makes it easy to collect e-mail addresses. And the second thing that they do is they also, after you give the e-mail address, they encourage the user to tell his friends about the app. And if you don’t like Launchrock you’re suggesting to use this site.

Andreas: Launcheffect.

Andrew: Which is, let’s zoom out. This is Launcheffect. So either Launcheffect or Launchrock to collect e-mail addresses before the launch even starts. Do I have that right?

Andreas: Absolutely. It’s so so crucial and I see so many people just forgetting to do this that it’s ridiculous. But you know, the services like Launchrock and Launcheffects app are incredible websites. I still can’t believe to this day that they’re completely free to use. And I know that the Leap, I spoke to the Leap founder recently and he said he’s got a list of 800 to 900 people now. So on this day of launch you send out that e-mail and, you know, 800 people will come flooding to the app store (?) quite incredible stuff.

Andrew: 800 people are going to flood to the app store. How significant is having. Maybe not 800 people. Some of those people are going to flood and some of those people are going to sit back and some of those people are actually never going to see the e-mail because it goes into spam. But it’s small that 800 people. How significant is having hundreds of people going into the app store. In your case fewer than 2000. What’s the point of getting that much? Because it doesn’t seem like that many people.

Andreas: Right, right. I don’t want people to get too caught up by my figure of 2,000. Because a lot of people will say, ah 2000, how on earth am I going to do that, you know, just give up now. But that wasn’t actually a list of people interested in the iPhone apps. If that was 2000 people interested directly in the iPhone app then it would have been even a greater effect. So don’t get too caught up on the figure of 2000 people. You know, 800 whatever, as much as you can basically.

Andrew: I see.

Andreas: But what that would do is, you’re talking around 300 people for example would get you to the top of the sports category, which isn’t a very competitive category.

Andrew: 300 buyers gets you to the top of the sports category you found.

Andreas: Right, yeah. And then you’re looking, I mean. If you’re looking at things like the top 25, I don’t think I’ve written down the figures. I meant to. Something like, you know, you’re talking like 25,000 people to get to the top 25 and things like that. So that’s a much bigger scale, but.

Andrew: Wait, then so how does. Oh you mean top 25 overall of all categories. Got it.

Andreas: Exactly yeah, exactly, that’s the big one. So, what you want to do is. But once you get to the top of a category then the chances are much more likely that you’ll start getting picked up by Apple and some of the bloggers and so forth, because you’ve got such a prominent position in the app store.. So you really don’t need an enormous list to achieve this basically. So you just try and build up a list of, you know, the Leap guys have got about 800 people on there and that’s a really good figure. And that, i think you’ll find that would make a big, big difference in getting your app featured by Apple.

Andrew: And we’re going to talk in about how to get publicity. That’s this point right here which we’re going to get to. We’re also going to talk about, and this is one that I’m really excited about. Using the power of beer to get reviews. We’ll get into that and the importance of it. You also have a specific day, there it is, a specific day that you want people to launch on. You’re picking this specific day of the week and you’re also telling people why and how to get there. And we’re going to talk about how getting freebies increases sales. But are we ready to move onto the next big point about contests?

Andreas: Absolutely.

Andrew: All right. So let’s talk about how to use contests to fire up those downloads. What do we do?

Andreas: right, so I remember a little while back I saw an article about an app called triplingo. So I clicked up onto their website and sure enough you know they had a landing page in place, exactly what you should be doing, and they were giving away an around the world a ticket. So the trip lingo app translates into, it teaches you to speak Spanish and so forth. So you land on their page and they say, right, we’ve got this round the world ticket to give away. Just sign up to our list essentially and spread the word about our app. So that’s a fantastic idea because it gives people that extra sort of, someone that’s standing on the fence and thinking, shall I sign up to this e-mail? You know, I really don’t want to give my e-mail address away, things like that. That gives them that extra push to say, oh right, you know, there’s an around the world ticket up for grabs, why not? And the perfect example of this is an app really recently launched called the serenity app.

Andrew: Let’s bring that up here. This is the serenity app. Wow, they have a really, really long page. Let’s see how much of it we can get in here. I can’t even get the whole page in there.

Andreas: The important thing is well at the bottom of the page.

Andrew: The bottom of the page. Let’s . . . this thing right here?

Andreas: Yeah.

Andrew: Okay.

Andreas: So round about your launch you want to be generating as much press as possible. And a competition makes it much easier to do that. So they’ve got, they’ve basically got a page that says, right, tweet a link at our app and you’ll be entered in a competition. And they’ve got a competition running for ten days and every day you can win something by mentioning their app at social media and so forth. So that creates really good buzz and really gets the message out about your app to a lot more users. And you’ll see people like Tim Ferris doing this around his book launch. But not so many people have used it yet for applications, and it can be just as effective.

Andrew: I see. So they’re saying, if you promote me I’ll enter you to win a contest. In this case to win something in a contest, in this case, what are they giving away? It looks like a stereo? It’s hard to tell.

Andreas: Yeah, a stereo system and some other bits.

Andrew: I’m amazed by how powerful contests are.

Andreas: Yeah, yeah, it’s quite incredible. I think it’s just one of those things that kind of just pushes people to take that last step and to actually tweet it out to their followers and so forth. So what’s, a lot of people would be perhaps a little bit worried about saying, oh you know, but I don’t have enough money to buy someone around the world ticket or I’d be flying around the world myself. (inaudible). If you’re launching an app. Say for example I was launching Bike Doctor today. I would contact a company that sells a repair kit for your bike which could cost, you know, these can run up to $400, $500 dollars or more. And I’d say look we’ve got this app launching soon. We’re going to be creating a lot of interest around this page. Would you like to give me a free, you know, bike tool box, and you’re going to get a ton of free promotion and I get to attract users. So it’s kind of a win win situation. So people shouldn’t be too caught up with thinking oh my god I’ve got to spend $500 now, god, I’m so low on cash and things like that. So you can’t hustle your way to get freebies to give away.

Andrew: I see. and what you’re saying to is that it should be something that connects to the product that you’re launching. You know, an around the world trip wouldn’t necessarily work for, or it wouldn’t be as good an idea for Bike Doctor as it would be for someone who’s teaching languages. If you find something that fits more directly, and it doesn’t have to be expensive, if it’s a bike repair kit, you could buy it yourself even if you can’t afford a 12 mile taxi ride. And of course if you still can’t afford it or you need something bigger than what you can afford, you can partner up with a company that will get some publicity for offering it for free.

Andreas: Absolutely. Or you could also give away, you know, if you even can’t do that then you could also give away some sort of private videos, some hidden videos, some extra content, some sort of free e-book. So there’s a lot of options there and it’s something that you should definitely consider adding to your launch page.

Andrew: All right.

Andreas: The second key part to this strategy is you should use a service such as punchtab or as we mentioned before, launchrock. And the key part of this is is that people get more entries into your competition the more that share the message about your app. So that encourages people to get on their Facebook, get on their Twitter, and.

Andrew: What’s punchtab? I don’t know this one.

Andreas: Alright, okay. Yeah, punchtab is basically, it’s a way of tracking who has (inaudible) works. So you basically say, you basically say it, up on punchtab. And I think they’ve got a sort of free version and a paid version as well and you say right someone gets three points if they tweet a message on my app or someone gets seven points if they upload it to Facebook or wherever. So there’s different ways of rewarding those customers that put the most effort into promoting your app basically.

Andrew: I see that makes a lot of sense and instead of giving them an entry just for adding their email address, you’re giving them more entries based on what else they do on the site.

Andreas: So you’re recruiting your users to recruit more users because the chances are someone that’s interested [??]Perhaps or bike repairs, then there going to have friends that are interested. It’s so crucial to try and tap into them and it’s not to evasive, some people choose not to, some people just give their email address but it’s a great way of generating extra buzz before your launch and during your launch.

Andrew: I love this site; I can’t believe I haven’t seen Punch Tab before. I make a lot of sense and I can see to how it would be helpful. I always thought I would have to code this system. Sorry?

Andreas: You get them on here, absolutely.

Andrew: Well, that’s awesome. That’s the second big idea, which is use contests to fire up your downloads. Next is about publicity which is what I talked about earlier. Let’s talk about that, how do you do it?

Andreas: You know how someone’s always saying to you “Go out go get some press coverage. Make sure you doing this” but it’s such a time consuming thing, it’s tough to get through to journalists because there getting tons of email every single day so with this frustration in mine and after spending a lot of time contacting journalists and not really getting anywhere, I had this breakthrough moment. I thought there’s no point in blinding contacting people, let’s use the 80/20 rule here and let’s focus on the people are really interested in iPhone apps, they cyclists. So I literally searched Google for iPhone apps for cyclists and this is where I wanted my app to be appearing because people – not only and am I targeting journalists that are hugely interested in iPhone apps, cyclists, but I’m also targeting those people that are searching Google down the line and looking for that kids of app. So, I found a few sites that had the content, one of them was mine at the time, so I made a note to myself to make my page and I set the groundwork had already essentially been done for me so I sent them off an email and said “You’ve covered these great apps before where looking at launching a cycling app soon. I was wondering if you would like to take a look at my app.” And this a far more effective use of your time because they chances are they are already going too interested so they are going to be mentioning your app.

Andrew: I see, so instead of going after every journalist out there, which obviously makes no sense, or doing what others might do which is emailing every journalist who covers any iPhone app, you’re saying “Hey, these guys already talked about cycling apps, then there probably a good fit for me.” And I’ve been hearing this more and more as I talk to entrepreneurs who got publicity and it goes counter to my intuition on this. I used to think if there already wrote about a cycling app there not likely to write about mine, they already cover it, they moved on or they picked their favorite and what I’m hearing over and over and your experiences are reaffirming this is, if they already covered it there much more likely to cover it again. This almost their beat, this is what they get excited about.

Andreas: Exactly, yeah, it’s not just a problem just to send an email saying “I know you’ve covered this app that is really similar to mine but we actually added X, Y and features and I think people are really going to like” so it’s really easy to just turn it around and you’ve just saved so much time its ridiculous and it’s much more effective way because as anyone whose launched an app knows, you’re just so busy around the app launch that anything that can save you time, so this tactic is a great one for gaining that press coverage.

Andrew: So this is what you did. You basically went to Google you did this, you ran this, searched right here, where you can see if we zoom in a little be we can see what you’re searching for which is cycling apps for the iPhone. You’ve got all these different apps and once you found that you want to know who reported on these apps and then you went out you contacted those people. You actually have the email that you sent out here in my list to show people. Should we show the email you send out first or the article that you got as a result of it?

Andreas: If we take one quick step back, one last thing to mention here would be that a lot of people spend a lot of their time trying to contact all these blogs that talk specifically about apps but it’s difficult to get in those blogs so you’ve have to think a little bit beyond that. Think about the niche that your app is operating in. That’s some other really crucial thing. So make sure you’re not just focusing all your attention on your tech (?), things like that. Think more about smaller blogs within your niche, that you can target.

So, how this moves on is, I sent a message to one of the UK’s biggest cycling magazines, a magazine called Cycling Plus. I think I’ve got a picture of the article that we managed to get on there.

Andrew: Yes. I think this is it. This is really impressive. Tell me if I’m pulling up the right one. This is it?

Andreas: Yes. Exactly right.

Andrew: This is really impressive.

Andreas: Yes. They’ve got a subscriber base of over 100,000 people. So, I thought, right, we hit the jackpot here. All I did to get in there was to send them an e-mail saying, ‘You guys really haven’t talked about iPhone apps for cyclists yet, and everybody’s using these apps these days. You should really get an article in there.’ The apps that you see in there, are the ones that I recommended.

Andrew: You said, ‘In this magazine, you guys should have an article about all the apps for cyclists and here the apps that I think you should write about. Make sure to include mine,’ and if we zoom in, there is yours right there. Nice placement, and all the other ones, you picked also. That’s really impressive.

Andreas: Exactly, yes. So I thought (?) got a two-page spread in one of the biggest magazines in the UK. Fantastic. Let’s see how much this is boosting our downloads. Did it boost our downloads? Not in the slightest.

Andrew: It didn’t. OK.

Andreas: No. Absolutely not. I guess, long-term, we must’ve gotten a few downloads here and there but, overall, it’s incredible how little an effect it had. So, what actually did happen, in effect, is . . . And I’ve I got the e-mail there, for you. I sent a message off to this website called Roads.cc, and they’re really big cycling blog. So, I sent them a message. You can see the message there. I can include the message at the end, if you’d like. But they, basically, wrote us a story about it and, immediately, I saw the downloads doubled for the day that the story went out. They were also double the normal rate the next day, as well.

So, this is something that I think a lot of people are realizing, now. People like to (?), and so forth. They’re starting to realize that blogs can have a much greater impact on your sales, as opposed to getting mentioned in the traditional media. So, I don’t want people to get too caught up in just trying to get in those big newspapers, and so forth, because it can be really time consuming. You might see a much better effect touting the smaller blogs that have got this really dedicated audience, essentially.

Andrew: I’m hearing that over, and over again, too, that it’s really impressive, and you saw the way that I was impressed, when we were looking at the magazine article. It’s impressive to be in a magazine but it feels like to get better results by being on blogs. That’s been your experience and, as you said, I think Ramit, specifically, in our first interview said the same thing happened to him.

Andreas: Absolutely. Yes. Absolutely.

Andrew: What I noticed that Ramit does, on his website, is he has a logo of the New York Times, because he was in the New York Times. He has a logo of the Wall Street Journal. He may not be sending them a lot of traffic, but it’s good for patting himself on the back, or for credibility.

Andreas: Absolutely, for visibility, it’s incredible, and we’ve got it listed on our app description. We say, ‘As Featured In Biking Plus.’ So, it’s got its benefits but, in terms of download (?), in terms of money in your pocket, at the end of the day, then you’re better off touting those smaller blogs.

Andrew: All right. The next big idea is to use the ‘hottie test’, hot girl, hot guy test, to stand out. Before we get into explaining how to do that, what do you mean by this?

Andreas: So, this is the beautiful woman, good looking guy test. Essentially, this is about getting the basics right. You think about the sort of partner you’d want to introduce to your family, and so forth, you obviously want them to be good looking, you want them to stand out and you want somebody that you can introduce your friends, basically. So, it should be the exact same thing with an app. You need a good-looking app, and I’m talking here about the icon and the design. It needs to stand out and it also needs to be the sort of app that someone will say to their friends, ‘Oh. Check this out. I just downloaded this. It’s really cool.’ So, this is about getting your basics right.

The other really important things to remember is, obviously, the app. So, I guess this is a little bit about what you should do to make sure that Apple features your app. So one of the key things, is make sure your app doesn’t crash. Obviously, that’s a big no-no. That’s quite obvious. But, another thing that Apple is looking for is apps that can be accessed immediately. So, an app that you loaded up and says, ‘Connect through your Facebook,’ or, ‘Enter your name and your e-mail, to go through,’ and so forth, it’s going to be frowned upon a little by. So it’s quite a good idea to have a button that says, you know, skip this and sign up later or something like that.

Andrew: And this is for getting featured by Apple. If you want Apple to feature you, you have to reduce all the friction from, so that users can start using your app right away.

Andreas: Exactly. Because they’re looking for the users to have a nice of an experience as possible. So, it’s really important that you can get into your app immediately and start using it.

Andrew: Were you featured by the way by Apple?

Andreas: Yeah, that’s right, yeah, our app got featured. All three of the app that I’ve launched have been featured by Apple. So it’s kind of a, so that’s why this formula works.

Andrew: Wow, that’s really impressive. Alright I’m glad you’re saying that too. Because that again goes against the way that, it goes against our intuition. We want to lock users in immediately when they try the app, because we know that they may not come back otherwise. So our intuition says grab their e-mail address or make it easy for them to register by grabbing their Facebook profile. And that way if they don’t check back in with the app you have another way of contacting them by e-mail, by Facebook, etc. And that’s the way we think. You’re saying, that’s smart, but it’s not going to get you featured as easily. And so you want to reconsider that. Okay.

Andreas: Yeah, so, absolutely. Apple will feature apps that do have that feature in, but, it’s much more likely if you at least create a button where you can skip through that stage and come to it later. So the other really important thing is the app should be less then 20 megabytes now. I think all developers should know this, but I’ll mention it anyway. Because if it’s less then 20 megabytes you can download it over 3G, you don’t need to connect to Wifi. So that’s another really, really big thing.

Andrew: I forget about that, that’s right. I hate when I want to use a new app and I have, and I get that big alert that says, go find a Wi-Fi spot in order to use this. No, I want to use it now.

Andreas: That’s right, that’s right. Yeah, it’s such a bad idea. And there’s different ways that you can get your app beneath 20 megabytes, so. It’s pretty crucial.

Andrew: Like what, what can we do? And I want to move on to, I want to stay focused on the hottietest. But what can we do to slim it up?

Andreas: Right, sure. Well, one of the things for example would be to download the images into the app afterwards. So say if you’re app was really image heavy you say, you know, once they’re downloaded into the app you then say, right do we sync the images now or it syncs the images on the go, or something like that. So don’t download all of the heavy content into the app straightaway. The other sort of point that I wanted to talk about a little bit under this tactic was standing out in the app store. And I’ve seen a really good example of an app doing this. And I remember because they had this really aggressive logo that looked like a Soviet Union flag. They’ve got the hammer and the sickle on there and they’ve got, you know, the quite aggressive letters and it really stands out. And they talked a lot about how they got there. The app, they attribute a lot of their successes, the app just really stood out. And there’s not a lot of things for people to go on when they’re looking to, whether to download an app or not. So a logo that really stands out can be a really good idea. And we did the same a little bit, if not by accident, with our original Bike Doctor logo, which I think you’ve got there as well.

Andrew: Before we do that here, let’s take a look. This is Colin. I interviewed him on Mixergy a while back, and he and I became good friends. He is really doing well with this app. It is constantly the number one app in the book category. He actually changed this logo. He got a lot of attention with this and it shot up his downloads. I think this is a chart of what happened because he had such a standout icon. But now he’s gone much more professional with his design and he’s just building on the success that he had before. He told me in private all the things that he did. Once you get users it’s much easier it feels like to get more users. And so he’s just been rocking with that app. And even has a second app. In addition to free books he also has a free audio book app and our conversations went from being about how do we grow this business to now he and I just talk about politics via e-mail. How do we have an impact on the economy? That’s where his head is right now.

Andreas: Yeah, yeah, yeah.

Andrew: And he’s done really well.

Andreas: I might have discovered it through your website then, I think that’s probably where I discovered t from. So it all comes back.

Andrew: He’s a big traveler. He happened to be in Argentina the same time I was living there. So we’d get together at these events and get together for private drinks a lot. It was great. Good guy. I could just never pronounce his last name. Helm-hulm, I still can’t. Good guy. All right. You’re saying though, back to the program here. You’re saying you did something similar. Can I show your logo on the top of the charts?

Andreas: Yeah, sure.

Andrew: Alright, let’s bring that up here.

Andreas: So our original logo.

Andrew: This is you. And by the way congratulations you’re right here. Let’s, this is you at the top of the chart for sports.

Andreas: Right, yeah, great moment, great moment.

Andrew: Yeah, I bet.

Andreas: Try to teach people to have these great moments. So, our logo, if you look through the app store really quickly through the sports category, our logo was the only gray horrible one. You know, there was no other gray horrible logo on the app store so it really, really stood out. You know, since then we’ve kind of, we’ve caved in and we’ve gone with something a little more professional looking. But, I think around your launch it’s not such a bad idea to just flick through the category that you’re going to be competing in, see what color’s everyone’s using and just go for the complete opposite, you know. And it really makes your app stand out, so that’s a tactic that I probably originally stole from Mixergy through.

Andrew: So then the hottie test is, if everyone in the room is a hottie you want to be the ugly ducking. And if everyone else is an ugly ducking, you want to be a hottie. Is that what we’re saying?

Andreas: When it comes to the logo.

Andrew: When it comes to the logo. So that’s what you’re suggesting that, do I have it right?

Andreas: Yeah I mean. It’s kind of, it’s difficult really to put down why the logo has such a big impact. I mean, you could get a really nicely designed logo as well and it’s going to do well in the app store because people are like, oh that looks cool, you know. But also you can also go right completely opposite end of the scale and just really, really stand out and be, have a really aggressive logo, you know. It’s a clever little tactic. Something worth finding out.

Andrew: Let me show you this one app that’s become my favorite scanning app, has got the ugliest, ugliest logo in the whole frickin’ store. Here, I have it right there on my home screen because I use it so much. Let’s see if I can show it easily. There it is, it’s. I use of course the camera, and run keeper, it’s on that second from the bottom row.

Andreas: Yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah, yeah.

Andrew: I don’t know if you can see how ugly it is. It is ugly, and for some, it just stands out. I keep saying, I keep in my head saying, these guys should change the design because it’s so ugly. Meanwhile I notice it every time and it’s at the top of the business charts. And once you download it it’s a pretty good app. I just think it stands out for being so ugly. It just looks like they took a stock photo of a scanner, and they just took a picture of it and made that their logo. There’s no border around it, there’s no nothing, and it works. Now I guess they (?) too many angles. Wow, how did I show it a moment ago and now I can’t show it at all.

Andreas: It’s all, screen gone now.

Andrew: It’s all gone. All you can see is my screen. Alright, so, oh I know why. Here we go, there it is. It’s called turboscanner.

Andreas: An ugly logo, it’s not such a bad idea. It’s just in case you’re looking for a little bit of extra exposure. But yeah, but essentially, you know to sum up this tactic, it’s about getting the basics right. Make sure you’ve got an app that looks good. Make sure the logo stands out and it’s the sort of app that people want to introduce to their friends. It doesn’t crash. It can be accessed immediately and less then 20 megabytes. So those are the basics, make sure you get those right, basically.

Andrew: I also have tap bots here on my, here in my notes. Should we bring that up? Is there something you want to say about that?

Andreas: Yeah, sure. The tap box is a perfect example of an app that just looks fantastic. This is the sort of app that, it’s just a pleasure to use this app basically. So you can learn a lot about the way they’ve designed their app. If you’re building an app yourself then it’s one of the ones that you should definitely check out to see what I mean when I say have a good looking app. What a lot of people do wrong here actually is that they’ll find a developer on the internet to create their app, and then they won’t bother to find a designer as well. And developers don’t tend to have the skills in both areas. They don’t tend to be a developer and a designer. So if you’ve got the money in the beginning then invest in a developer and invest in a designer. They’re two separate people, and that’s something I really recommend for creating a good looking app.

Andrew: Alright, makes a lot of sense. And now the power of beer to get reviews. Tell me about that.

Andreas: Right, so around about the launch of my app I basically just abused my friends which is what they’re there for. And I had this one friend, Pat, he’s an absolute Apple fanatic. You know, he’s the sort of guy that stands outside the Apple store, you know, 8 hours before they open to get the new i-Phone. You know, he’s one of these real fan boys. So I said, look, I’m going to buy you, you know a pint of your favorite beer and a couple of shots in our favorite pub, you know, the Loch Tavern. Just when my app launches go in the app store and leave me a five star review straight away. So a few people might laugh at that tactic because you know, it might seem a little bit silly. But you’ve got to think about those users that are going to come across your app in the app store. And they don’t have a lot to go on whether it’s going to be a good app or not, whether it’s worth them spending any time or money on it. So having those few initial reviews in place that are, you know, five star glam reviews. And I think I’ve got a picture of Pat’s review.

Andrew: Yeah there it is, there’s Pat.

Andreas: Yeah, so his is the one at the top. And he’s sort of really, really complimentary of the (?) and it’s really fantastic to . . .

Andrew: Awesome, awesome app. All caps, exclamation point, lots of stars. Downloaded this app yesterday and already used it several times to carry out repairs on my bike.

Andreas: Yeah, so, he earned his beer there really well and truly. So, I think I had about three or four friends that did the exact same thing on their launch page. So, it’s a little bit cheeky but, you know, it works.

Andrew: Absolutely. Colin actually told me that because he was traveling around the world while he was building his app and building his company, he had friends all over the world. And so he hit them all up that way he could have reviews from everywhere.

Andreas: Yeah, definitely, definitely is. Absolutely. I mean it might sound silly but you’d be surprised how well it works.

Andrew: Yup. So you’re saying, well, was it five friends that you reached out to?

Andreas: That’s right, yeah, yeah, that’s right.

Andrew: You just want to have something in the store, some kind of reviews when the app launches.

Andreas: Absolutely, yeah, absolutely. Just because people are, you’ve got to think about those people on the fence about buying your app. So what’s the sort of final thing that’s going to push them to go, yeah, okay I’ll give it a try. And having a few five star reviews there is often enough. And I’ll apologize already for the one star reviews you can see beneath his. That was when we first launched our app and people wanted to see more content. I’ve probably since added a lot of content.

Andrew: And it looks like Pat’s review helped to counteract that. Poor value, far too basic. I like how they misspelled to in their basic. It’s like far too basic, too many mistakes, and then they’ve got a mistake in the way that they did it in their review.

Andreas: So it’s inevitable and I think a lot of people will tell you the same thing. In the app store it’s inevitable that you’re going to get quite a few negative reviews. People….

Andrew: I like by the way that you did that, that you could have easily cropped that out so that we wouldn’t even talk about it. But I like that you kept it in there. Keep this program open by talking about Patrick’s, the way that you got Patrick’s feedback, and honest by including those two negative reviews in the image.

Andreas: Exactly, exactly, yeah. So I’ve heard scenarios where people have listened to their reviewers and gone away and added those features. And then they’ve got a lot of one star reviews. So in some ways we listen to users and we thought, right, we’ve got to get some more content in there. People want to see more content. So we listen to our users in that case. But it’s not always the case that you should listen to exactly what your users tell you. And I guess Apple is the prime example of a company that doesn’t always listen to its users. But yeah, so it’s incredible how many negative reviews you get, you know. Look at the Facebook app on the app store and they’ve got a ton of two star reviews. And you’re thinking, you do realize this is a free app that lets you communicate with your friends anywhere in the world.

Andrew: I guess when I would start out I would buy more than 5 pints of beer. I would see how many of my old friends I can restart relationships with. Hey, remember me, went to kindergarten together? I’ve created this app and here’s what I’ll buy for you. Alright, so, use the power. Here, let’s go back to the big board. User the power of beer to get reviews, that was the section that we just ended. Now we’re moving on to, set your launch date, your launch on the magic day. Is there really a magic day?

Andreas: Right, well yes. Apparently there is a magical day where it is much better to launch your app on that day. And that magical day is Sunday. So this isn’t just me, you know, plucking a day out of the week and saying it’s good. This was actually research done on 91,000 i-Phone applications were tested I believe. And the worst day was found to be Friday where only 10% of the apps made it into the top 240. And so we’ve got the article there. It was on a…..

Andrew: Yeah, let’s bring it up and take a look at that.

Andreas: It’s on a great website that I…

Andrew: It’s on mobileorchard.

Andreas: That’s right. Yeah, absolutely great website for developers that should definitely be following the (?).

Andrew: On just this session. And of course if everyone was watching or listening to this or maybe even reading a transcript and wants all these images to take a look at more thoroughly and more clearly, maybe then we have up on the screen, I’m going to include them. So you guys are going to have this with your session here. So there it is. We’ve got Saturday is the first one on the left.

Andreas: Yeah. I think so. It’s tough, it’s quite blurry here I’ve got here. But yeah, so Friday’s the worst day, Sunday’s the best day. And that’s based on research by a company called Mobywalla, I think, that’s their name. I don’t know if I pronounced that correctly. But, so just remember that Sunday’s a good day to launch.

Andrew: So what is this graph here? What are they showing us? They’re showing us how many . . .

Andreas: Right, so they kept track of 91,000 iPad app applications. They saw which ones succeeded, and which ones flopped. The ones that were far more likely, to be in the top 240, if they were launched on a Sunday, as opposed to launching on a Friday, for example.

Andrew: I see.

Andreas: So, it’s quite, sort of extensive research. It’s based quite heavily on these figures.

Andrew: Let me bring up that page, actually, on this browser. Since I have all kinds of tools at my disposal right now. Here’s a Google search for best time to launch your app; is Sunday; to bring up that.

Andreas: That’s top on that. I think it was . . .

Andrew: Now, I see why it’s so hard to read, even in our screen shot, because it’s hard to read on their site.

Andreas: Yes, it’s a tiny little graph.

Andrew: That was Monday. Over here, on the left is Monday and Monday gets, let’s see, fraction of apps in the top 240. Monday is just over .35, and Sunday is over .4. Clearly Sunday, which is on the far right, is the top day for Apple. The blue line is Apple. The red one is . . .

Andreas: You can also see Android’s there, yeah. It’s quite interesting, because on the Android, it’s much harder to get your app; to get really noticed. For those people who are thinking of developing on the Android platform, I’ve not had a lot of success on there. I’ve launched the exact same app, they looked even better on the Androids, and they absolutely flopped. It’s quite interesting, how the tactics that worked so well on the Apple store, didn’t have the same success on the Androids. That’s a topic for another . . .

Andrew: I see here from your page, that you’re on both, you’re in Android and iPhone. Are the tactics that you are teaching us today; except for that last; in fact, maybe even including that last one. Do they work for both iPhone apps and Android apps?

Andreas: Well, yes and no. Because, a lot of the tactics here are essentially, about getting into those top lists, on the app store. One very major difference, that you’ll see on the Androids, versus the Apple, there’s less room to show off those apps that do really well, because it’s quite fragmented. The app store is fragmented across various websites, and so forth. So, it’s much harder to push your app up that list, and then get picked up by Apple, and then see a steamroller effect, basically. You’ll also find that Android users are far less likely to part with money to buy an app. That’s why Angry Birds, when they launched on the Android, they launched for free. Because they knew users simply; it’s not like the Apple app store; where everyone’s hooked up to their credit card and they immediately pay for an app. I guess we’re going on a bit of a tangent here. But, these tactics are primarily focused on . . .

Andrew: I want to be fair with your time. How much time do you have? Do you have another 20 minutes?

Andreas: Yeah, absolutely.

Andrew: The session’s not going to last as long as 20 minutes. I just want to make sure that we have enough time. Looking here at the board, we’ve got the promotional sprint before the launch, that would apply to Android, there’s that top one. Contest to fire up downloads, there it is, that would apply also. Targeting to get publicity, that would apply frankly, to anything, even beyond mobile apps. The hot guy hottie test, I’m not sure how well that would work actually, in the Android market place. Buying beer for your friends to get reviews. Frankly, that would work even in the Amazon store, if you’ve got a book coming out, or you’re selling something there. The Magic Day we saw from the chart.

Andreas: It might be different for Androids.

Andrew: It might be a little bit different, but it looks like this; we’ve got to ask Andreas to include this link, for everyone in the session, so that they can read this article themselves. But, it looks like Android, on Wednesday and Sunday, still those are the two strongest days for Android. It looks like a tie with a slight advantage to Sunday. It’s not exactly, a one for one, tactic for tactic, in the Android and iPhone’s app market places.

Andreas: There’s an incredible amount here that people can take away. You’re not going to go wrong, if you launch an app on the Android with a huge list of users, basically. It’s only going to help you out. But, I’m just telling people that there are some key differences between the app store on Apple and Androids.

Andrew: Since we talked about how Angry Birds launched for free, before they started charging, let’s talk about free versus paid, and how getting a free version in the market place, in the app store, will help us get paying customers.

Andreas: Right, so I remember quite clearly. Once again I was on springwise, you know, I love that website. I read them on their RSS phase and so forth. And I noticed this incredible launch video of an app called the word lens app. So essentially it just showed someone that was holding up the app against a menu and it would instantly translate on the screen through the viewfinder what the menu said. So I thought, oh my god, this is incredible. You know, I was going out with this French girlfriend at the time and I was always finding myself in France and completely lost and didn’t know what on earth was going on.

So this app was truly a godsend. So immediately I went on the App Atore and I saw right, great, they’ve got this free version. And the free version only translated text backwards. So, I mean completely useless, but it proves that the app works. And then you had an in app upgrade that whereby you could add languages such as Spanish and French and so forth. So it was a really good way of, you know, hooking users in to the app and then selling them this sort of additional in app purchases and so forth. So you’ll find that light versions of apps are a really good way to draw people in. And a lot of people are using this tactic. And as long as the apps got enough features to stand alone as an app, and you don’t pester users too much to upgrade to the paid version which Apple kind of frowned upon. So you’ve got to get that mixture right. But it’s a really good way, because free apps or downloads is tens or hundreds of times more then the paid option. So it’s a great way when you’re new to the app store and you’re launching your first app, to reach a much bigger audience then you could with a paid app.

And a really good example of this is the everytrail app. And so yeah, they’ve got a little screen that says, look, for $3.99 you can upgrade and get all these extra great additional features. So it would take someone that’s, you know, quite stingy not to upgrade because you know those features really make a really big difference. So that’s a good way of doing it.

Andrew: Yeah, let’s see what they have. If you, you get the free version, obviously for free. But for $3.99 they’re saying within the app you’re also going to be able to save the maps to your phone for use offline, which is good if you’re going on trails where you can’t necessarily count on an internet connection. You get to record and share video on your trips. Sync all your own trips and favorites between the app and everytrail.com. No ads, more pro features to come. So just click a button and you get it. And that’s the way that they’re upgrading people from free to their paid version.

Andreas: Right, yeah, yeah. So people, a lot of people want to test out an app, the free version, before they go for the full paid one, you know. People like having that trail edition. So it’s a really good idea. If you’ve got a paid app in the app store, you know, create a light version. As long as it’s got a few features in there that are enough to kind of pass Apple’s test. Then you can get through, and there’s a chance to really get a lot more exposure for your paid version of your app.

Andrew: Let’s take a look at Wordlens.

Andreas: So yeah, Wordlens was the app that I mentioned.

Andrew: This is the app that you mentioned earlier, and, this is right down on the bottom is what they do. They take, I can’t tell what language that is. I guess that’s Spanish?

Andreas: It’s French, French.

Andrew: So they take that Spanish sign that says danger and converts it into English so you understand that there’s strong tides, right. And I did download that free version, and the free version will take that warning sign and just flip the letters around to show you that they have control over the letters and that they can read them and translate them.

Andreas: Exactly, yeah. So immediately you think, oh my god that’s so cool, I’m getting the paid version.

Andrew: Especially if you’ve got a French girlfriend and you find yourself in France frequently with her.

Andreas: Exactly, not knowing what to eat on the menu.

Andrew: Right, it does help with the menu. You want to take a look at this other app over here that you…

Andreas: Yeah, I’m going to take this app with me to Cuba. I’m off to Cuba soon, so it’s going to come in so useful. And the other really big thing is if you go and look at the top grossing apps, you know, the apps that are making the most money on the app store, you’ll find that they’re free. So this is kind of counterintuitive. How is on earth is a free app making all this money? And you’ll see on the left where it says, top in app purchases. So a lot of games are doing this at the moment whereby you can play the game absolutely fine for free or you can also purchase some additional, you know, coin paks things like that, that cause you to either have a greater experience with the game or to move through the game at a faster speed. So that’s sort of the ultimate example of a freemium model whereby you give away a great free app and then you draw them in and then you offer them in app purchases. And for me this isn’t really my favorite area of i-Phone app marketing. But it makes so much money that it’s definitely worth mentioning here. So it’s definitely worth considering. Is there any kind of way in my app where I could add some sort of premium feature in and try and get people to upgrade to that and that’s something that I’m going to be doing with my applications going forward. So it’s a really good tactic and there’s one final thing that I didn’t put this on the list and it’s kind of a, it’s a bit of a sort of hidden tactic. I didn’t really know whether to share this one.

Andrew: Oh good, good. Share it.

Andreas: So this is, you know, just between me and you Andrew. Don’t tell anyone else.

Andrew: And by the way, I’m not editing this out. So don’t email me. I get a lot of emails from people afterwards saying Andrew, I had second thoughts. Please edit it out. No, let’s keep it in. What is it? I’m even going to shine the spotlight right on you.

Andreas: Right, so this is really good stuff. Say that you’re going to launch an app around a certain topic. So I’m going to pick my topic, so bikes or cycling. I might want to release the first app as a free app and then in there, what I would do is include a, they call it the app notification service that you can build into an app. So let’s say I’ve created that first app. It’s been downloaded by thousands and thousands of people. It’s reached a far audience as I could possibly reach, so maybe it’s got 20, 30, 40,000 downloads. Then it’s time for me to launch my paid app. So this is where I’m finally going to get my pay day. So I would then, the day the paid version launches, I would send a notification to the users of the free app and say to them look, we’ve just launched this paid version. Go and check it out.

So you have suddenly, you’ve essentially created this huge list of people who will then rush over to download your other app. So this is a really good tactic and I’ve not seen a lot of people use this very well yet but I expect this is kind of, I guess I’m not helping keeping this tactic hidden, but it’s a really clever way of reaching a much wider audience and this is something that I’m really going to be doing moving forward with my apps as well.

Andrew: So this is, you’re giving away the app for free, collecting email addresses on that and then coming up with a second version of the app that’s paid and now that you’ve got all those email addresses of people who are hot leads. They’re clearly are interested in this product because they downloaded it and they’re using it.

Andreas: Exactly.

Andrew: Then you email them and that’s how you get all those downloads.

Andreas: Exactly. So it’s the equivalent of getting a text message on your iPhone.

Andrew: Oh, right. You’re not even emailing them. You are popping up an alert on their [??]. I see.

Andreas: Exactly. So it’s really, really far more effective even then an email because the users, you know, they’re always on their iPhone and unless they’ve gone out of their way to disable notifications, then you’re going to get through to an enormous group of users. So this is even more effective than the email list. I’d put the email list in place to get your launch a success but once you’ve got a few little apps, you can find you can really cross promote them with each other and that’s when you’re really going to start to go from a developer making good money in the app store to a developer making some serious money in the app store.

Andrew: Well, this has been really useful. One more question, actually. I have a note here to come back and ask you about getting featured in the store. You told us the things that you would need to do to get featured, small app, looks good, not a lot of barriers to using it, like not asking people for their email address, date of birth, etc. before they can get to the action. Did you, in addition to doing all the things you’ve talked to us so far, did you make a phone call to someone at Apple? I know that, I think it was the founder of Zarly [SP], Beau [SP], told me that he contacted Apple and he talked to them. You’re smiling. Did you do that?

Andreas: No, unfortunately, [??] in the interview. I don’t have a contact at Apple.

Andrew: So this is great though. What it says to me is that even if you don’t have an in at Apple, even if one of your investors isn’t Ashton Kutcher, the way it was for Zarly, you can still do these things and end up getting featured in the store.

Andreas: Absolutely. That’s the beauty of these tactics. They don’t cost you anything but your time so it’s really good for someone that’s just launching their first app or someone indeed that wants to launch a new set of apps that are going to really do well and get featured by Apple, which is the Holy Grail of app store marketing, essentially.

Andrew: All right. So thank you for doing this. Here is everything that we talked about how to master. Triple click gets you all the words selected. How to master your mobile app launch. We’re going to give everyone who’s watching this all the tactics here, both as lists that I’ve got here on the board and we’ll also give them the transcript and we’ll give them the images that we showed so that they can take a look at them.

And your website, let’s go over to the webpage here. This is your app. If anyone wants to actually download it and see what we’ve been talking about. They can go to BikeDoctorApp.com and if they want to learn more, they go to iPhoneAppRockStar.com. This is where you talk about how you did it and you teach people how they can do it too. I see you’ve got a blog here where you’re teaching different tactics as you’re learning them. Then of course you’re collecting email addresses because you’ve seen the power of them.

Andreas: Absolutely, yeah. I’ll include a link where people can get a couple of extra details. I’ll send that to you afterwards.

Andrew: Oh good. I’m looking forward to it and of course we’ll include the links within the course page. Thank you all for watching. Looking forward to hearing your results with this and also your feedback. I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy, where proven founders like Andreas teach. Thank you everyone.

Master Class: How to generate $3.3 million from blogging
(By the man who did it last year.)
Taught by Timothy Sykes of TimothySykes.com

Report issues here

Master Class:
Profitable Blogging


About the course leader

Timothy Sykes, who blogs on timothysykes.com, which has generated $3.3 million in 2011.

He’s also parlayed his success as a blogger into a growing collection of web properties including profit.ly, a community of over 12,000 traders who share their performances and trade openly to help each other learn and improve.

Master Class Toolbox

Profit.ly

Covestor

JewGreedy.com

Upsellonomics

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Neil: So hey, everyone, I’m here with Timothy Sykes from Timothysykes.com. And today, we’re going to be talking about how Tim is making money online, as well as how he’s driving the traffic to make that money.How are you doing today, Tim?Tim: I’m pretty good. Check out my view. How can you not be good with this kind of a view? That is Central Park.

Neil: Nice, how much are you paying for rent?

Tim: This is my place. You can’t see the 3D TV. I just hooked it up, it’s pretty cool. I’m paying about a little over $6000 a month. This is New York.

Neil: On that note. How much are you making from your blog every month?

Tim: Between $175,000 and $250,000 a month.

Neil: Is that profit or revenue?

Tim: That, it’s nearly all profit. So roughly $150,000 in profit. Pretty steady. So $2 million a year, that’s my profit run rate. That’s why I can afford $6000 a month a month for an apartment.

Neil: It’s not bad. So for those of you who aren’t familiar with Tim. How do you make your money online? You’re a stock trader. So can you please explain quickly how you make your money online?

Tim: Yes. So I trade, I’m the number one ranked trader out of 60,000 on Covestor. But I also teach because I was on this TV show called Wall Street Warriors. It’s now in nearly 20 countries, so everyone is like, ‘How do you trade?’. So I shut down my hedge fund and I started, I wrote a book called, ‘American Hedge Fund’, I have DVDs, i do webinars, seminars, and just use different tools to try and teach people, what makes them successful and even when I make mistakes, I showed them, ‘Oh, here when I f*** up’, So it’s just fully transparent, just trying to understand what is trading and how to do better and avoid mistakes.

Neil: So unlike most of the web masters online, like the John Chow’s of the world, coffee bloggers and stuff like that. You’re actually not a technical guy, right? You don’t have a technical background.

When you first started out, how did you actually go about it?

Tim: I had to bribe the Samson guy to come over here to help me set up my 3D TV.

So Yes. Now, I’m not a technical guy.

Neil: So how did you actually get your website up and running when you started?

Tim: One word â?? Indians.

Neil: So you outsourced them. I’m assuming it’s pretty cheap?

Tim: Yeah. That was just a few thousand dollars. I mean, I didn’t know pretty much anything about blogging when I first started. I’m still not the master blogger, I still need my Indians. But, the Jews on one hand, and you got the Indians on the other, and we unite and poof, so it’s kind of cool. But yeah. I mean, it’s just a WordPress site. Actually at first, I used a Juemo Website. But one smart Indian up in Vancouver told me, “No man, you have to use WordPress”. I’m like, “OK. man. I’ll talk like you and I’ll use WordPress”.

So I just started blogging. We tried quite a different bit of projects and I’m coming up on my fourth year anniversary but I’ve only been blogging for a few years. So I’m a little ways in the game. So it’s still early, I think.

Neil: With your website, you’re not technical so you don’t know SEO, social media marketing or anything like that, if I’m not mistaken. And you’re roughly at 80,000 visitors a month, right?

How did you start getting traffic to your website when you first started out?

What was the tactics you used, but without paying anyone or anything like that, to help build up the audiences when you first started, you didn’t have consultants, contractors, help build your audience. And you’re making six figure a months before you started hiring people to help you take it to the next level.

So how you actually go from having no visitors to your website each months, to having 80,000 visitors a month, without spending a dollar on consultants and contractors or marketing cost?

Tim: Yeah. It comes down to credibility and value. I’ve written now nearly 5000 blog posts, so the blog posts are showing up on Google, all the keywords. I would work 18 hour days when I first started, I got a little more efficient, and had to enjoy life a little bit. Last year I was overseas and Greece and Italy and Malta, for like nine months, yeah, baby.

But you just write interesting contents and useful contents. I have been number one ranked trader out of 60,000 on Covestor. So people can see okay, here are your trades, this guys is actually good. 90% of traders lose money, so I had huge credibility, thanks to Covestor, and then people were interested in what I had to say. So everyday, I started off writing five blog posts a day, then it was three, now it’s down to one.

I find that it’s better to create much more useful blog posts now. Rather than, quick hit’s, just for Google SEO headlines. But I mean, me and my original Indian, Adarsh, we would stayed up late in the night and just formulate ideas and what to write about, like hot new stories. I remember when the news broke with what’s his name? The governor of New York and he hired a prostitute, and the news broke at 2:00 in the morning. I was up so I heard about it, and we got in Google, and I had, like, 20,000 visitors within a few minutes. That’s not traffic that stays, but tactics like that over time, again and again, you can get these hot stories and you post some interesting videos and stuff like that. People start retweeting it and stuff.

Nothing really goes viral in finance because finance is so boring, but you just try and keep readers captivated. Most importantly, you build your email list over time. The first year and a half I didn’t even have an email list.

You know what? If you want to come to my website, come to my website. Then again, I took some smart advice, and I was like, let’s build this email list so now I reach out and I send out a weekly mailer when one of my most interesting blog posts and I say, “Hey, check out this.” I get quite a few thousand people because of that, and now I have a 30,000 person email list.

Neil: Got it. So I want to actually dive into the exact tactics that you use. So, one of the things that I noticed that you’re really using to build up your traffic is message boards. So, can you break down what you are doing on, more specifically, I believe it’s Yahoo messages, and you’re getting thousands and thousands of visitors a month. Can you break down what you do in the Yahoo Message Board to drive these visitors to your website?

Tim: It’s all message boards. When I first started, it was EliteTrader.com. I just post interesting commentaries, the same thing. It starts with good commentary in the form of a blog post or a video or a free video lesson. And then, you go to relevant message boards. Your stocks are very cool because everything can be divided by a ticker.

So, I just wrote a post the other day about the downfall of NetFlix and Research in Motion. I went to those message boards, and can you check out this blog post that I wrote. It creates a whole line of commentary, like people said: NetFlix is done for. Research in Motion is going to come back. So, it creates a debate and when that debate happens, people want to see what you’re saying. So, they come to my website, and some of them who like what I have to say or like the analysis and think that there’s value there, they join my email list or they subscribe to one of my premium services because you know what, this guy works hard. I could always use more research. So, that’s what it is, just trying to be valuable and useful.

Neil: When you’re posting on these Yahoo Message Boards and you said you would say, “Hey, come and visit my site. I have a blog post on that led to a promotion or whatever it needed. In other words, you’re self-promoting. Have you noticed any backlash when you self-promote, or does it create issues or do people usually accept it and you can go on doing the things there.

Tim: I mean, there’s always going to be some people that disapprove of everything that you do, but all I’m doing is expressing my views. I don’t consider it spamming. I’m not posting on Cisco’s Message Board and talking about NetFlix. I try and keep it relevant to the debate because that’s what message boards are. They’re debates between Internet commenters, so I’m just throwing in my view, and I’m not necessarily going to post my view on somebody else’s website.

I think a lot of people who are giving content away on Facebook and Twitter, they should be like, why are we helping these companies build multi billion dollar businesses with content on other sites? Let’s create our own site, put our content on there and use those tools to bring people. I think people have social networking kind of reversed in my mind.

Neil: And another tactic that I’ve noticed that you use is commenting on blogs. I’ve seen you get in heated debates with certain popular bloggers, like Tech Crunch’s [?] and people coming back like [?] boy or ShutUpDVDBoy because he sells DVD, and granted that does make you a few million bucks a year which isn’t bad at all. What’s your strategy for driving traffic through commenting on other blogs?

Tim: Yeah, I just joke and provoke people, like people like to comment and they say, “First or they really leave a heart felt message like ‘Shut the fuck up'”. No one wants to read that stuff. Be funny or be controversial, and that way people are interested. Again, you can be funny or controversial, but then you’re just Jersey Shore. You need value behind it. So, when I say that, I get in a fight with Arrington. Michael Arrington wrote about this penny stock pump ‘n dump, and he didn’t know it was a pump ‘n dump. I constantly link to that, and in case you haven’t noticed, my blogging career has outlasted his even though he sold his company for over $30 million. I’m making 2 million a year, so in a few years I’ll over take that and he’ll just be the big fat guy that he normally is.

I get into trouble if you a Google search for ‘Maria Bartiromo, fat’. She’s one of the CNBC anchors I come up first. Porter Stansberry scam, is another big Google term for me. Because I write about these people. Maria Bartiromo is fat and she’s a bitch, so I called her out on it. Porter Stansberry, I think, is a scam, he was fined by the FCC, 1.2 million dollars for claiming he had inside information. That is scamming, so I write about it. So I’m not backing down on my opinions. I don’t like use bloggers who are like, they half ass, I say what I think, and I try and back it up.

Neil: So what’s sounding like is, you actually able to create and generate a lot of traffic through controversy. Whether it’s through message boards or through commenting on other blogs through controversy or just writing about touchy subjects that most people won’t touch. You’re pretty much willing to write on it and get the traffic for it.

Tim: Yeah. I mean it’s controversy, but again that’s just to get people to the site, I mean, you can be controversial, but people will get to your site for like a minute, and it’ll be over. So you need to have something to back everything up.

So I write, I spend much more time writing, the useful blog posts, and useful research, and useful commentary, and then I just think about like little kind of tactics just to get people in there. Because I know what works, I mean, you have like websites that, I can ask cheeseburger, you know where you have cats little commentary on them, it’s not exactly useful but millions upon billions of clicks everyday, so that’s what people want, light hearted internet is very popular. And that, there is room obviously for those who want that heavy research and the heavy commentary.

But it’s just not going to work to get people to your site initially, so you just have to try different stuff, and so you find your audience. I didn’t know what my audience wanted at first, I just throw all of my thoughts out there, I just found over the past few weeks, like, people like photos of traders. So I posted today, like, it’s called the embarrassing photo of this guy, this trader was dancing with this girl, who kind of looks like a man, and I’m like, ‘that’s a man, baby, that’s a man’. And this guy, like 2000 clicks in a few hours, just to see if it’s a man.

Neil: So the last time, we wanted to cover when it comes to traffic building before we started to move on to monetization, is Twitter. It also seems like a lot of your topics coming from Twitter. You don’t have a ton of followers like Mike Arrington who are the few top marks of the world, and Ashton Kutcher. But yet, you’re still able to drive a lot of traffic from Twitter. You’re not using any tools or anything like that to boasts up your counts or tried to scam. But at the end of the day, you’re using organic approach, even if you don’t have a ton of followers you’re still able to drive thousands of visitors.

What do you do to get traffic from Twitter? Is it same through controversy or?

Tim: I mean, yeah. I don’t have the followings of the new Patels of the world. But I mean, it’s a start, I have 16,000 followers. But if you look at the conversion ratios, and I wish there is a website that does this. You geeks out there creates something that tracks, how many actual clicks, just like you put a little plus sign at the end of the gifting link you can see how many clicks each links gets.

And I get a huge amount of clicks because I phrase my tweets in a certain way, I’m like, ‘Wow, look at this picture?’. You know, I don’t say, I don’t explain what the whole blog post is in the tweet. You actually keep a little bit of a mystery. I mean it’s almost like a game trying to get people to your site. What will do it? And if you just lay it out, you say like, ‘ Here’s a chart that will turn $12000 into $2 million’. OK. That, you just gave away what this chart is. And yes, I did do that, yes, that is impressive, so it looks good on Twitter. So sometimes you need to build credibility, if people aren’t going to click it. Then they just reminded, that this guy did turn a few thousand into a few million.

But if you wanted to get more clicks, I would phrase it like, ‘Amazing chart, like best chart I’ve ever seen’, or something. You give out a little mystery into it on Twitter. And I have my Twritter account linked to Facebook, and on Facebook I have like 15,000 people who have liked me, obviously there is some over lap. But you have roughly 20, 25 thousand people who see this stuff and lots of people are curious so, your average tweet gets few hundred clicks and that’s good.

Neil: That’s not bad. And you tweeting so often, and posting often on Facebook, that drive a lot of volume. So it sounds like doing mystery, you’re able to drive a lot of traffic, even though you don’t have a lot of followers.

I mean it’s 16,000, that’s what you said so that is a lot now, but before I still remember you were in the low thousands, you were still able to get hundreds of clicks through, using those tactics.

Tim: Yeah. I mean people would be interested, if you post interesting commentary. But then you just have to frame it, and you can’t tweet too often, can’t tweet too rarely. I found that it’s best to tweet every three hours. I don’t know, that works for my audience. I’ve tried every hour; I tried like once or twice a day. So I do like five or six tweets a day. Just spread out through out the day. and I time it, I use just a free tool SocialOomph.com. I know some of you use HootSuite. There are lots of tools where you can just schedule tweets. But I also learned from few others where you don’t just tweet a blog posts once, like one time you tweet, you said, ‘OK. This is an interesting photo’. Another time you say, ‘ People are loving this photo’. So tweets go away very quickly, and people’s feeds on Facebook. So you really have to try a few times, to get maximum impact, I think. When I write a blog post I usually, tweet it, three or four times over the course of the months. Just so that it’s not wasted effort.

Neil: Awesome. So I actually like that approach, a lot of people don’t do that but it’s a really simple tactic that could actually double, triple the amount of traffic you’re getting, from Twitter. By just mentioning it multiple times within a given month.

Tim: Yeah. And mention it, in different ways, I know some people that posts like the same title over and over. But I have to trick my audience. I don’t have that big of an audience, maybe that’s why I don’t have that big of an audience, because I trick them sometimes. But you really don’t care about people who have been following you for many years and they haven’t bought anything. Like piss them off, like piss off, you poor people like, you haven’t bought anything from me, so it’s nice that you follow me, I can’t believe that you still here after not buying my more valuable product. Which I think would’ve made you more money.

But it’s more interesting to try and capture the attention and curiosity of newer followers who are, “Wow, I’m looking for more content”. You have to give them stuff, I mean, if someone signs up and you don’t give them anything for the few days or few weeks, they’re just going to lose interest. You have a very limited window where they are very interested. And during that window, they’re going to read a lot of stuff about you. They’re going to read your commentary and during that, let’s say, 30 day period, you had the greatest chance of up-selling them on some research or educational tool or whatever I have. I’ve dozens of products, whatever fits for them. But the key is getting them interested, making them say, “Hey, I want to learn this”. because finance is notoriously boring, it’s very difficult to get people to want to learn. Most people just want hot stock picks. I don’t want to get, “Oh, this is my next hot pick”. That’s boring to me.

So I want to teach them frame work, but you have to say, teaching kids to eat broccoli, you can play like a little airplane, with a little kid like, “Oh. The little broccoli is coming in”. And the kid likes that. Otherwise, no way would he eat broccoli, he wants like Cheetos.

Neil: So now, you want to transition into how you make money right?

I don’t want to talk about how you making $200,000 a month or $150,000 in profit or what ever.

I want to actually drill down on how you went from making no money off of your website, to making your first thousand?

So what did you do to get from zero to thousand dollars revenue, monthly revenue?

Tim: Yeah. At first I tried the advertising approach. So I had banner ads and I did like sponsored blog posts. This was back in 2007. And no matter how hard I worked, how much my Indian partner, tried to sell ads, we couldn’t make that much.

So about 6 months in, listening to the audience to what they wanted. At first I only had a book, and a DVD. And I was like this is how I trade, and you can see my trades after the fact. And I be like, “Look, I just made all those trades. Here’s the book and DVD, how you can learn.” .

I only started blogging to promote the book at first. That’s the only reason why I started the blogging in the first place. So I wrote the book and then I think, how am I going to promote this. Let me start a website, “Oh wait, blog is the new hot shit”, back in 2007. And then I only created the DVD because the book wasn’t selling as much, and people also, there’s two factors, it wasn’t selling, I thought I was going to make like a million dollar selling the book, that was naive. I came out with the DVD, because people wanted something more technical and instructional DVD, which is more technical, you can sell it for more money. So I was selling it for like $400, and we were selling a few of them per month. So I was making $5 or $10 thousand within 6 months, with just this one DVD and one book.

Then about six months in, everyone’s like, you know we want real time alerts; we want to see this stuff live. So, you know Jim Kramer is the leader in this, he has action alerts plus, but if you do a Google search for action alerts plus you might find my blog post. And the reviews suck, so I thought, you know what, Jim Kramer’s, he’s an ugly guy, he’s bald, he’s only right like 40% of the time, but he’s on CNN so he has a massive platform. I don’t have a massive platform, but I think I’m more talented and better looking. You know, my performance shows that, he wins forty percent of the time, I win seventy percent. So, I created Tim alerts, and this was in June 2008, and I went from making five or ten thousand a month, we still did some ads but mainly it was book and DVD sales, and then all of a sudden everybody wanted the alerts real time because they wanted to learn. You know, trading is exciting to learn in real time. So, I began making thirty or forty thousand a month. Then it just became, you know we added another newsletter where it’s not just trade alerts, oh there’s video lessons and now I have four hundred video lessons. So, there’s a hundred hours worth of instructional videos that you can watch online, which you know is $99 a month as opposed to Tim Alerts which is just $49 a month.

So, I went from thirty to forty thousand a month after a year or two. When I started making the video lessons then I was at like, you know, eighty or ninety thousand a month and then I came out with more DVDs and I do private coaching and webinars and then, it adds up. You just keep adding products that your customers or readers want and, you know, some products fail. I made this cheap DVD for $99, it was all the basics, it was two hours, and nobody wanted it. Everybody wanted my DVD packages or like six or twelve or even fifteen hours. They retailed for between $400 and $1,000, and those sell better than a $99 DVD.

Neil: Wow.

Tim: So, you find the right price point. I didn’t expect it, so I think I sold like seven of those $99 DVDs, it wasn’t even worth the few thousand dollars in production costs.

Neil: So, you said the magic words a bit earlier, which, sell what your customers want. How do you figure out what your customers want?

Tim: I take polls constantly. You know, I’m very Neil Patel in that I analyze what they want and I ask them frequently and I use data to see what they want. So, like if I do a blog post on my new DVD or my new newsletter and I see which is more popular, and then I see what I should focus on. So, I’m constantly looking, I’m obsessed with my kiss metrics, and all this analytic software that I just try and see what people like and then I create products around that.

Neil: Cool. So, I know you’re a busy guy. I just have one final question for you and I’ll let you go.

Tim: Sure.

Neil: For all the people who are out there, you have a pretty big brand. How did you end up going from not being known to creating a pretty big image and brand online, which is pretty respectful, which has helped build traffic as well as help create, make you look like an authority figure, which you are now, so that that way you can end up making more money from your web site through selling your products and services?

Tim: Yeah. I mean, it all comes down to helping people and trying to be of value. You know, I charge between $50 and $100 for those newsletters so, if you buy that newsletter from me and you make $600 that month on a trade, look you just made between fifteen times your money. You’re definitely doing very well compared to what you’re paying. And the education is yours forever, so you do that enough times and now I have nearly two hundred thousand subscribers in over sixty countries.

These people will talk, in my experience in finance, unfortunately they’re not going to Tweet you very much or Facebook you very much because they don’t want the word to get out because they think that if too many people know about it, it will stop working. They might have a point, so they’re not as social as some other industries, but the core value is there. I get people all the time, you know people, I have random $2,000 DVD packages being sold every few days and we have no idea. Like, my dad who works for me, we looked at the data and we’re like, who is this guy and we e-mail him and we’re like, how did you find us, we’re very, very analytical when it comes to how you found us and what inspired you to buy and they usually say, I heard from a friend that you’re spot on or you helped my friend make a few thousand dollars.

So, I also created a web sites called Profitably and Investimonials, just to show off all of my trading data, Profitably shows all my trades and you see that I’ve made 2.6 mil in trades. Investimonials not only shows my reviews, but my products have about 500 reviews between them, but now there are over 14,000 reviews. So, it’s the same business model, when I showed my data, and my reviews. And then you can, compare it, to other guru’s. I’m showing exactly why I’m so valuable, and I’m showing day after day, and [??] ahead, working all these people. And some people don’t need money, and that’s fine, I don’t have all perfect reviews. But if you are valuable to more people, than not. I mean you can make a lot of money, very quickly if you use these sketchy and foliate, networks. And you use manipulative internet, techniques, but you’ll get shut down by the F.D.C, or something. Or you’ll get busted, or your just have a very hated brand. The reason I have Porter Stansburys’ scam, I’ll get so many visitors is because, he charges several thousand dollars for his newsletters. And based on the reviews, on the Internet, their not making their money back.

So they Google Porter Stansburys’ scam. You don’t find that with me, because my products are cheaper, and it’s very difficult for me to lose or any of my students to lose. Because in every single product, I’m saying cut loss is frugal. That’s my number 1 rule. So, if you don’t scam people, if people don’t lose a shipload of money, and ideally that make money, and they want to tell a few of their friends. It really builds on itself over the years.

I’ve seen a big difference between year 2, and year now, heading into year 4, just because I’ve been around now, for several years. And it was kind of like that, when I had a hedge fund. No body wanted to invest in a hedge fund, without 3 years of performance numbers. Because it was just too new, and it’s just too risky. So the longer you can stay on the Internet, the more tradable you can become, the more people that you help. You’re on the right trajectory. And you just can’t rush it, this is a long term business. I think we’re in the first half of anyone with the Internet. There’s some amazing tools coming out, and you just have to be useful to people, and valuable. And pick your pricing so that, their making more money based off what they’re paying you.

If some one is teaching you to be a heart surgeon, they can charge probably 50,000 because a heart surgeon will make 10 times that in the first year. So, you just have to understand, what the risk reward is for your customers, and readers, and then try to position yourself, in a good place.

Neil: Awesome, thank you for doing the interview, and more important, thank you for sharing your numbers as well as the tactics that you’re using to get traffic, and how you’re using that traffic, and [??] it.

Tim: Well thank. . .

Neil: [inaudible]

Tim: [inaudible]

Neil: Thank you for being so analytical, and teaching me to be analytical. And I’ve got to say, you’re a big inspiration for me, so without you and without people, like John Chow. Despite his inability to speak English, he can really inspire quite a few people. So, it’s pretty sweet. And I hope, I can do the same.

Tim: Yeah, John is an awesome guy [??} and naturally, going to be [??]. Yeah, thank you for everything, and if I can ever do anything for you, always feel free to hit me up, anytime. [??]

Neil: Take care and have a good one.

Tim: Yeah.

Master Class: How to sell on LinkedIn
(Even if all you have is hustle)
Taught by Los Silva

Report issues here

Master Class:
Selling on LinkedIn


About the course leader

It’s led by Los Silva, he is a lead generation and relationship marketing expert.

Master Class Toolbox

Schmooz.me

SurveyMonkey

MeetingBurner

QuickNote

LosSilva.me

MillionaireMarketing

Jason Falls Tweets

Boolean Logic Details

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how you can get your next customers from LinkedIn. It’s led by Los Silva, he is a lead generation and relationship marketing expert, who apparently does not like having a website. I had to push him to even have him show me his personal blog because he does most of his business on social media sites like LinkedIn, which you’re going to learn about directly from him today.Me, I’m Andrew Warner founder of Mixerg.com, where proven founders teach what they do best. And Los, the audience wants to know you a little bit about you before they learn more from you and really, frankly, more what they care about is themselves and they care about is how you can get them the results that you have gotten. But let’s show them where you were before you learned about what you’re going to teach us and then talk about the results that you got. So the first the big question that I’m winding up here for is, where were you before you learned this, what were you up to?Los: I used have a construction home automation company; we used to do lighting control systems and all that. Things were going amazing, I was doing six figures and things were just growing exponentially and when the market crashed I wasn’t even feeling and as time just kept going by it started to hit the builders that I worked with and hit them and them and it just got to the point where I didn’t have anyone to work with anymore so essentially I had to close my doors.

I started looking for different things to do and I was incredibly confused, didn’t know what to do. I had just gotten married and we decided to move back to Orlando, we were in Ft. Lauderdale, and from there, basically, I just had to try and re-invent myself and find something different to do. I looked into social media and things like that and honestly I was bombing at first. I was just going to meetings, I had no idea what I was doing and I was just at a terrible place. At one point I didn’t even have anywhere to live because we tried to get a house and the guy had seller’s remorse so we were living at my parents for a while.

Andrew: Wow. And you then you figured out social media, you figured out how to use the web to build connections. And I love that you figured out connections but tell me about business, what happened to your business as a results of this.

Los: Well, I stopped trying to do the whole listen and engage and all that social media stuff and I just started trying to get leads online and that’s when I started really using LinkedIn and being more direct and strategic and using sales copy knowledge and things like that to try and get clients to go to meetings who were from out of state and that’s when things really started picking around. I started getting more clients, more relationships; one guy would take me to one relationship which would take me referral and things just really started blowing up.

Andrew: What kind of business were you getting your clients for?

Los: At first I was getting doctors, real estate agents, things like that. But now I’m doing things with resorts, big time shares.

Andrew: I mean, what were you doing for them?

Los: I was doing what I do now which is lead generations and I was helping with branding techniques and things like that to try to get some results on line because everybody just has no idea what they’re doing.

Andrew: And you’re in a position where you couldn’t afford a home, you couldn’t afford to spend tons of cash on advertising so this free form of customer marketing is what help you get your customers. You wife, she was with you when you guys where basically homeless, well you still had your parents’ home, when you were going through this difficult period after this, what was her reaction?

Los: At first she was just very nice and supportive. She let me do my thing. I told her I can’t have a job, I don’t know how to work so I have to have my own thing and she was supportive about it. It took about four months and she was actually pregnant at the time, and things started picking up at the time and she started getting so excited she would start crying, that made me choke up at one point. I remember the day exactly where we were it was, we had our own little place, things were going good. Yeah, it went from good to terribly, terribly bad back to very, very good. Now I actually consult with a startup called Schmooze.me that focuses on lead generation and consulting and things like that using LinkedIn specifically.

Andrew: Really touching story. Congratulations on the turn around. You and I talked about this beforehand and I wanted the audience to get to know you this way and see what you were able to do with the tactics your about teach them so that they have an understanding of what they can potentially do if they follow along and absorb everything your about to teach us. You can’t see this on your screen but I’m about to show this to the audience, this is audience. This is the outline of what I have here for the conversation. We’re going to talk about specifically how to segment and target the right people, how to test your idea and even how to pre-sell using surveys.

I’m going to talk about how to join groups and send messages offering to help. We’re going to talk about how to move people from LinkedIn to your webinar to your landing page to your phone. I’m going to talk about attack by stratagem. We’re leaving that intentionally curious, but we’ll learn more about that in the session. And finally, how to use a secret weapon, weapon of Boolean logic. And we’ll learn more about that in a moment.

Let’s start off with the very first tactic which is to segment and target specific people. Show us what the end result is that we’re going for, and then how do we get there? I’ll turn it over to you to bring up that second tab on your screen.

Los: Well, what we want to do is basically create . . . I’m going to go to the groups, here . . . what we want to do is, and you guys can see the groups here. I have them segmented, for example, this is a group of staffing. What I do here is I segment them so I can start essentially either messaging them for an event, or to take them to a webinar, or to survey them. So, if I have my groups and my people segmented it’s easier for me to go in here and kind of do surveys, take people to webinars, test landing pages on people. You have your own little private data group, basically. And not a lot of people actually do this on LinkedIn. And I’ll show you how to do it.

Andrew: Yeah, and for me, I don’t know that I have 8,800 connections on LinkedIn, but whatever number I have they’re all in just one big lump group, all lumped in together. You’re saying, break it up based on their interest, or based on who they are, and then, and I can see here that you’ve got staff in one, staffing two. Staffing One has 50 people; Staffing Two has 50 people. So, my guess is that you can do there is send one group of staffing people to one landing page and an other group to another, and see which one works, and expand on that.

Los: Exactly. And here’s an example of this guy, who I’m basically going to be tagging right here.

Andrew: So what you did is you clicked on all your contacts, and you’re clicking ‘tag’ to tag the person. Are you doing this all manually, or are looking at each one, one at a time, figuring out if they belong in staffing or social media, or the Mixergy group?

Los: Oh, yeah.

Andrew: How do you do that? How do you know what bucket to put these people into?

Los: Let’s take a look at this guy.

Andrew: Okay.

Los: Right now I can see that, and can’t really say his name, he’s a [??] project manager and he’s into web design. So I’m going to put him in the web design group. You can do this in LinkedIn easily because you just click on someone and you can literally see everything that they do.

Andrew: Okay, and then within this page, where would you ‘tag’ them? I see, on the bottom right on people’s screens where it ways ‘tags’, you can edit tags. So, while you’re looking at them you would tag them?

Los: Exactly.

Andrew: Okay. I got to be honest with you and tell you that you’re in a place where you had more time and patience than I have. I would never sit and tag a thousand people. I wouldn’t even do fifty people. I would probably have an outsourcer do it. I would say, look . . .

Los: And you can get your outsourcer to do that. Once you do this and can at least make a video about it you can have an outsourcer do this all day long.

Andrew: Perfect.

Los: You can hire someone in the Philippines do this for $5.

Andrew: Perfect.

Los: And the easy thing is, most people will tell you what they’re doing. For example, this guy is in software. This guy’s a chief technology officer. This guy is a resource development manager, program manager, city department of education. So from here directly you can pretty much just click and go to your ‘edit tags’ and add him as a colleague or whatever the case may be.

Andrew: Okay. All right. Cool. And I like this because it means that if the person is watching us is starting out they could sit there and they could just keep tagging people themselves, while they’re watching TV, while they’re I don’t know, sitting on the couch doing something else. Or is they’re a little bit further advanced they could . . .

Los: I do this while I listen to Mixergy.

Andrew: I don’t know why I didn’t even think of that. While they’re listening to Mixergy they could sit and tag, and now they’ve bucketed everyone. All right, so that’s the first step. What you want to do is take this big group of people who you have in LinkedIn and organize them properly. Before I move on to the next step, you’ve got 8,000 people in your list. Do you have a tactic or two to tell us about how to grow beyond the number that we’re currently at? How do we get closer to your number of contacts on LinkedIn?

Los: This is a tactic that I actually used with a friend of mine. Basically we bought a list. I haven’t bought a list for myself, but we bought a list. He was a financial advisor, and what we did is we bought a list of local doctors. And if you send something in email you’re basically going to be spamming them, you know what I mean? So we didn’t want to send anything in email, so what we did is we imported the list onto the CSB of LinkedIn and essentially they started ‘friending’ him, little by little, and accepting the invitation.

Andrew: Where do you buy lists of doctors?

Los: You can buy lists of doctors anywhere. There are so many different places to buy lists.

Andrew: For example?

Los: I think Mantra [SP] is one. You can Google. God, what’s a good place to buy lists? Now, I’m having a blank, but you can just Google places to find good lists. If you really wanted to, you could use scrapers and get lists from Gmail and things like that. I don’t do that, but you really can. The whole thing is don’t send emails out because when you send emails out it’s spam, but if you port them to your LinkedIn, then you’re just saying, hey, I want to be a connection. The people that accept you as a connection, you can’t spam them any more. Now, you can messaging them. You can talk to them so that you can start approaching them. You segment that group.

If I buy a list of doctors, for example, and 50 or 100 of them say, yeah, I’ll be friends with you. I’ll connect with you. Now, I can segment them and say hey, guys, great to connect with you. I’m having this special for doctors, or I’m interested in doing this for you, and you’ll get a lot of responses. A lot of times what I see when I do these little surveys is that people will, if I’m interested in something and I want to offer it to them, a lot of times they’ll just say yes, that sounds good. Give me a call. So, it’s a lot more direct.

Andrew: We’re going to talk about how to take this offline to a phone call. First, let me address this with the audience. This is the kind of thing that I’ve heard people tell me in private, that they buy lists and then they upload it to LinkedIn, but they don’t ordinarily say it on a public website, like their website. They’re not going to broadcast it, even in a Mixergy interview. It’s here.

You guys can be critical if you want to, or you can just learn the tactic and say: this is what people are doing. I can tell you that this is what people are doing. I don’t want you to be blind to it, but I want you to understand it and decide for yourself whether you want to do it or not. So, that’s the one thing I want to say to any hesitation that people have about me broadcasting this in these courses. The courses need to be real what you’re really doing in your business.

The second thing that I’m taking away from that, Los, is that you want to add as many people as possible on LinkedIn. What many of us thought the LinkedIn community is like, it’s much more restrictive. If someone wants to friend you or add you as a contact, you’re supposed to be really discriminating and only add the people who you truly know very well and have a tight relationship with.

What I’m learning more and more from you and from others who used LinkedIn well is add as many people as you can because all of these people are potential contacts or you do business with, or potential people to test out your ideas as you’re going to, show us in these surveys, customers, etc. I always added everyone because I didn’t want to insult anyone. I didn’t want anyone to try to add me and then get a rejection and feel that they didn’t like me because I need to be liked by everyone in my audience. Beyond that, there’s a real business here.

Los: It’s also less threatening.

Andrew: Sorry?

Los: It’s also less threatening. Let’s say if I wanted to be friends with you on Facebook. We don’t really know each other. We haven’t ever really talked. Your Facebook is a little more private, and it’s not a real Facebook fan page. So, you’re not really going to accept me, and if you do, most people don’t. But if I say, hey, let’s be a connection on LinkedIn, it’s almost immediate. They’re going to say, yeah, sure, let’s connect. Then you can send that message and complete that relationship somewhere else.

Andrew: Yeah. You’re not going to see a picture of me in my Speedos on the beach if you add me on LinkedIn where, who knows, what you might see on Facebook. All right, fair enough. Now, this is how we get more contacts by basically adding everyone that we know, accepting as many invitations as are sent our way. In some cases, people are buying lists and uploading them to LinkedIn. That doesn’t allow you to automatically market to them, but it does mean that you have connections to them if they accept your LinkedIn invitation. And then, you can build on that.

All right. So, that’s the very first step which we said. Here, let me bring it up on the screen which is segment and target specific people. The next step is what? Test your idea and even pre-sell by surveys. Can you show us that?

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: Teach us.

Los: Basically, what I had and we had a little bit of technical difficulty so I can’t find the exact one, but I’ll find it and I’ll give it to the class. Basically, what I did here is, for example, this staffing group, I’ll send a message, and I actually did this just recently with real estate agents. I said: hey, I’m creating a product for real estate agents on how to better use LinkedIn, Facebook in social media. Would you guys be interested in buying something like that? I sent it to about 100 people, and about 30 people responded and said: no, I’m not interested in this. My broker won’t let me do ads. Yeah, give me a phone call.

So, you have everything. It’s free. It’s a free way to segment people that are either close connections or you’re trying to build some sort of connection, and you can know. I’ve got about 40 responses of people that said: yeah, I’m interested and I’ve got some phone numbers so I can test that a little bit deeper. I can do a little beta test, and if that continues to go, then they can expand me to their networks inside of this. So, it’s a great way for you if you just have an idea, if you’re doing consulting, if you’re doing software as a service, whatever the case. Just do some mini testing with that. Just do it.

Andrew: All right. So, what you’re doing is emailing them a survey, asking them about a business idea of yours or you’re asking them about a product you’re looking to sell. Is the goal of the survey to really learn what they want you to create, or is the goal to really sell them? What do you do?

Los: The goal is to try to see what their paying points are. Basically, what I try to do is I try to create a mass customized message which if I don’t know any of these 50 guys or girls, I’ll just say, “Hey, guys, I know we really haven’t connected on LinkedIn and it’s so important for me to really build these relationships. I’m actually doing something for your industry, and then you continue and say whatever it is. Is that something that you want to do? Is that something that you want?”

Don’t ask if they’re interested. Just say, “Is it what you want? How else can I help you?” And you will get responses. The more direct you are about it on the survey, the more actual response. If you leave it up in the air and say, “Are you interested? Could that work? They’re going to say: I don’t know or they’re not even going to bother responding.

Andrew: I see. All right. So, if I were an entrepreneur who created, say, iPhone software that creates wire frames, I would target the web designers in my LinkedIn community. I just have them bucketed out. I would just send them an email and say, “Hey, I’m thinking of creating this iPhone app that allows you to create wire frames on the go, on your mobile phone. Is this something you’re interested in?”

And if they are, and you get enough of those yes’s, then it’s something that you can potentially just go and create and, of course, all the people who say yes, you’ve got as potential customers when you do launch.

Los: I would say, “Do you want it?” Because if you say interested, you get, “I’m interested. Tell me more about it. We’ll talk.” It leaves ten more conversations out there. If you say, “Now, we talk about possibly selling to you.”

Andrew: If you want it means…

Los:

Andrew: I see. We lost the connection there for a moment there. What you’re saying is if you as, “Do you want it” you’re much more likely to get a potential customer. If you say, “Are you interested” then you’re getting people who don’t want to hurt your feelings.

Los: Mm-hmm. Exactly.

Andrew: OK. The other thing that I’m learning from this is because you’re not going to have tens of thousands of people in this community. You’re going to have thousands of people. It’s not necessarily the way to sell small value products to lots of people. It’s a way of maybe, selling the higher cost products.

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: OK.

Los: LinkedIn is a marketplace where you can get so much more on whatever products if you want to charge more. The average person makes $110,000 a year. The average person on Facebook, I think, makes $33,000. There’s millions and millions more people on Facebook, but CEOs, executives and such are on LinkedIn. If they need something, if you can resolve something for them, they will pay for it.

Andrew: I see. You know what? I just talked with an entrepreneur who sold an iPhone app, and he said that the first thing that he did to make this app successful was build up his email list of potential customers for the app. I asked him: how many people are on your list? And he goes: 2,000. And 2,000 was a lot for him.

Here, I’m looking at Facebook, and I could see that with Facebook even if you just accept all the invitations that come in, even if you just do that plus email out invitations to everyone in your email address book, you’re going to end up with more than 2,000 on your list. So, it’s an easier way to grow the people you want to reach out to when you’re starting out.

Los: Yeah. Yeah. And it’s also an easier way to connect with more apps [??] client.

Andrew: Right.

Los: So, that’s a huge reason why I got into LinkedIn first rather than anything else. It’s because I was looking to do higher end sales.

Andrew: OK. All right. I want to move things along here. Let’s go on to the next big idea. I’m going to bring up my chart of ideas here, the chart of tactics we promised people we’d teach them. The next is join groups and send messages, offering to help out. Tell me about this groups. This is something that I’m learning that expert LinkedIn users are engaging in and the rest of us are often ignoring.

Los: Yeah. Basically here, I’ll give you an example of something that I did a while ago. I’ll go into a group.

Andrew: By the way, I’ve been calling you Los. I’m looking up at the screen, and you’ve got Carlos as your name there. What’s the deal with the name, Los, while you’re bringing up this page?

Los: When I first got started, I hired some people to do some SEO for me and kind of bring up my page and things like that because I had a little blog. But it was very difficult because there’s a thousand baseball players named Carlos, and there’s twice as many soccer players named Carlos. So, then there’s this little me and everybody, since I was young, my dad’s name is Carlos also, always called me Los, so I figured it would just be an easy branding strategy if I just said, hey my names is Los. People remember me more because they have that [?]. Is it Carlos? Is it Los? I remember Los. At least I stay in people’s heads, so it kind of works.

Andrew Warner: I’ve got to tell you that it helped me. I usually will look up people before I start recording a course in my calendar and to look for Los brought just you up. If I would’ve looked for Carlos I don’t know how many people it would’ve brought up.

Los: Yeah, if you Google it I’m going to come up.

Andrew: Right.

Los: So it’s better.

Andrew: While we were talking your brought up, this is a group that you created, Orlando, what’s the name?

Los: No, this is just an example of a group and this is a networking group in Orlando.

Andrew: Are you a part of this group?

Los: Yeah, I am a part of this group.

Andrew: OK.

Los: And what you can do here is you can see over here this are the influencers of the group. I can actually check out group statistics at the bottom. LinkedIn gives you a graph of who’s here, who spends their time in here and see that 80% of the people are from Orlando.

Andrew: What did you do to get to this screen? It looks like it just popped up on my monitor by magic.

Los: Right here in your groups at the bottom you’ll see a thing that says . . .

Andrew: Group statistics on the right.

Los: Yeah. So what I do is I go in and I study the statistics of groups.

Andrew: OK.

Los: If it’s a group that’s active and it’s involved then I’ll go in there. I’ll go in and out of groups.

Andrew: I’m sorry, right above group statistics, those names of people, the Casablanca Transportation, Mitch, these are the top influencers this week. The people who are most active and I guess who are being commented on the most. Is that right?

Los: Exactly.

Andrew: OK. All right. So then you clicked on group statistics and I interrupted. What happens when you click on group statistics?

Los: Basically, I’ll click again and you can see here that most of the people in this group are senior executives, there’s a lot of managers and owners of things and directors, a good amount of entry level people too, but there’s 3467 people in here. It’s a good active group, so it would be important for me to become an influencer in here.

Once I become an influencer in this group people start to notice you, people start to pay attention and then I can contact the group owner and I can try to help them out either being a manager of the group or normally what I would do is I would say, hey let’s do a little event and let’s take this offline. I try to take as many things as I can offline, either to a phone call or to an actual small event or something like that.

Basically what I could do here is connect with this guy and say, hey as you know I’m an influencer in your group and I’ve started some conversations and people want to have a workshop for this, or I’ve created a Webinar and I’d like you guys to promote it. If he says yes, now I have the group owner who’s interested in promoting a Webinar let’s say for whatever I want to sell, let’s say software.

I got to him, I said, listen I have this software that can help people and it’s really useful. You see that I’m an influencer in your group, I’m a part of your community. Why don’t you help me? I’ll even do a little bit of a revenue share if you’re interested in that.

Andrew: I see.

Los: Most of the time they will be interested in that.

Andrew: And they take you seriously because you’re not a stranger, you’re someone who has a lot of influence within the group, so you’ve clearly been helping out the group and the group itself is more likely to be receptive to you because you’re an influencer and have been active. How do you get to be an influencer? What specifically do you do to become an influencer there?

Los: You just engage. A lot of people would say you have 50 groups that you can attack. I would go to one or two and I would dry them out and then I’ll go to another two and then I’ll dry them out and basically just kind of be a group leech.

Instead of just being active kind of in a couple of groups, you don’t have time for that. This actually takes a little bit of time, so either you’re going to do it or you are going to have to train an outsourcer to do it and to do it to 50 groups really can take you all day.

Andrew: So it you do it to one or two groups what are you doing? Are you commenting on other people’s posts? Are you posting yourself? What gets the most bang for the time spent?

Los: Posting relevant information. Posting your own videos more than articles because people click on videos. I think there’s and article on people click on videos about 30% more than they do on actually just articles on LinkedIn. So doing videos and then consistently being a part of the conversation.

If someone posts something write a comment and say yeah that works and this is why and things like that and then reaching out inside of the groups. If I want to for all 3,000 these people because we’re group members, I can send them messages inside because we’re technically part of that little community.

Andrew: So, as long as you’re in the group, you can message everyone in the group?

Los: Almost everyone. They’ve got some new rules where if you don’t want to be messaged, you don’t have to, but 90% of the people don’t know about it and the other 10%, they were never going to be a client so you don’t have to worry.

Andrew: So, you can send them one message at a time. It’s not the whole group gets a message from you, right?

Los: You can message the group. If you want to share something, you can message and stuff like that, but that’s a little bit spammy because they are in a diverse group sometimes. Orlando is just people in Orlando, so I don’t want to just send them one mass message. I’d rather segment them and send them a personalized message.

Andrew: So, it’s better to go through the group organizer, the group leader.

Los: Exactly.

Andrew: OK. What else do I want to know about this? The video. I have that here on my notes to show on the screen. You create a video just for the group? You just turn on your web cam and you say, “Hey, everyone in Orlando. What I noticed this week that this is going on and whatever”.

Los: You can.

Andrew: It’s you looking at the camera and recording a message just for the group, or are you talking about a video that you found online that’s relevant?

Los: You can do a video. You can do a webinar slide with some voice, “Hey, guys, I recorded this for you because it’s important.” You can actually… The example I was going to use is we had a friend who needed a job. She was jobless for about…

Andrew: She’s [??]

Los: Yeah. Yeah. Yeah.

Andrew: OK.

Los: She couldn’t even get a job in a restaurant. People just weren’t hiring. Things were terrible, and what we decided to do is go on a couple of strategic groups and basically start segmenting people and sending kind of like a video resume. So, we would get ideas because in the LinkedIn you can actually see if you go on groups, who’s hiring jobs and different things like that. So, we would attack that way, and within seven days she got a job.

Andrew: I see.

Los: She was sending resumes. She was about to lose her car. She was sending resumes daily. I’m telling you, restaurants wouldn’t hire her, and in seven days we got her a job because of that technique.

Andrew: This is her creating custom videos and putting it in this screen that I see in the discussion, or is it her emailing people?

Los: It’s her not putting in this screen. It’s her basically going into these groups and looking for jobs.

Andrew: Job boards, and that’s where she does it.

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: When you’re telling our audience who’s not looking for a job, when you’re telling them that they should be putting videos up, do you mean putting them up where? Putting them up in this discussion forum?

Los: You can do it both ways. If you want to put it in the discussion forum, that’s great because you’ll share content with the relevant group, but if you want to, let’s say, you are an SEO company or you have a website, I can go in, I can look at your LinkedIn page. Let’s look at this guy’s page. He’s an entrepreneur, gifted communicator and writer, LinkedIn chainer, whatever the case.

Andrew: I like his Twitter handle. It’s computer legend is his Twitter handle.

Los: [laughs] So, this guy might be hard because he seems to be a pretty bad ass. OK. Well, immediately I can send a video. I can record this, do a screenshot recording and say, “Hey, computer legend, I know you’re awesome in computers, but I see you’re not so great at websites because you have no landing page. We need to create a landing page so you can start tracking emails and sell more of your computers or whatever the case.

Andrew: Ah.

Los: So, you do a personalized message. A lot of times, that honestly is about a 90% response on a sale, if you really take the time. I study people because with LinkedIn you can actually take the time to study people, see what they’re doing, see what their position is, and kind of, almost, read into their paying points and make a video touching those paying points. That will 90% result in a sale.

Andrew: OK. All right. So, I see what you’re saying. Segmenting, I don’t understand that within the groups. I understand how to segment when people are your own contacts, but you said within a group you segment them, the members of a group, so you can contact them separately, or did I misunderstand that?

Los: No. The segmenting was in the tagging section.

Andrew: OK. And that’s just for individuals, not for…

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: Individuals who are your contacts, you can tag. You can’t tag non-contacts, can you?

Los: No. You have to make them contacts.

Andrew: That’s what I thought. All right. Before I move on past this, there’s an if, then, that, there’s a thisthenthat.com tab up on your screen. Is that relevant to this discussion, or should we save that for another point?

Los: Yeah. That was what we did with Sally. We had her connect with this and I don’t know if people know what [??]

Andrew: That’s ttt.com. I wish they had a better domain than that. That’s such a hard one to talk about. But, what is Sally doing with this site?

Los: Well, let’s say right now I can create a task and, I don’t know if you can see it, it says if this, then that. If this, I can go on Craigslist or I can even some groups only [??] have RSS feed. You have to actually search which ones have RSS feed.

I can go on Craiglist and basically figure out where people are asking for jobs and things like that and I can post that URL. As I create that trigger, then the [??] and I can have that go directly into my email so every time a job posts, I get an email from it.

So if I have that email, I can search for that job posting or that job description on LinkedIn and send them a personalized message saving me probably from the long line of people that are applying on Craigslist.

Andrew: I see. Can I also do it this way? Yeah, there’s an RSS for this discussion, so can I have, if I was in the SEO business, Search Engine Optimization, can I do an if this, then that on the discussion on that LinkedIn community that you just showed a moment ago and if anyone says, ‘SEO is stupid’, email me a link and that way I can quickly follow-up with them and say, no, here are the results that I got for other people.

You’re clearly passionate about this but you missed a big opportunity and I can show you why you should be doing SEO.

Los: I used to have it connected to where it would say if hiring SEO or hiring social media, I would get an email so I would immediately hit people back.

A lot of times they’re looking to hire someone in-house but if you send them a message saying, ‘This is why you shouldn’t hire someone in-house because I’m actually cheaper in the long run and this is what I’ve done’ and you send a couple of examples, or what not. It’s just a free way of getting leads.

Andrew: Right. These are real hustler tactics but it makes a lot of sense. You’re doing a search. You want to see who’s complaining or looking for what you can solve, get that quick email, and then follow-up with them. If you are part of that group, then you’re able to then email them directly.

Los: People are doing it daily. I mean if you connect it to certain LinkedIn groups and you connect it to Craigslist, you literally have leads every day so if you’re not closing leads every day, then you need to figure out how to sell better.

Andrew: All right.

Los: That’s all it is.

Andrew: Right. What’s the next big tactic? Is there anything else on this one or should I bring up the big board and we look at what’s the next big idea for us to talk about?

Los: Let’s look at the big board.

Andrew: Let’s look at the big board. It’s kind of funny, because I’m saying, ‘Let’s look at the big board’ but because it’s up on my screen, you can’t see it.

Los: I can’t see it.

Andrew: But that’s all right. You’ve got the notes here on your screen. So the next big idea is once you’ve got them in the group and once you’ve engaged with them either through that group or through the tags that you created and emailed them, the next big step is you say, to move them to a landing page, or on the phone, or to a webinar. Take it away. Show us how we can do that.

Los: Basically, there’s not a huge way to show it but after you send, I’ll show you one of my messages. And, I already took care of that one but let’s see this one for example, most of the time, people will either want more information and/or they want to know what’s going on, what are you sending them.

The easiest strategy is to start testing, when you do your messages, and you can get an outsourcer to do this. You are probably going to have to do it yourself. Figure out your own way of doing it and then have your outsourcer do it the same way. What I do, I send about, I have my guy send about 100 messages a day on LinkedIn. And I switch them, 50 will basically have one message and 50 will have another message.

On one, I can take them to a landing page and on the other one, I can basically try to take them to a phone call or I’ll try to take them to sign up for a webinar. Another thing you can do, I had a client that I did this for, he was doing high-end executive coaching so what we had them do is basically go to a sign-up sheet where it said, who are you, how much do you make, what are you interested in, basically taking them to a survey. And from there, that survey directed them almost to an immediate phone call.

You had all those lists answered. They didn’t know you were basically answering everything they were going to talk to you about. That’s pretty much the tactic on that.

Andrew: OK. Before you move on, let’s make sure that I’ve got this right here. What you’re doing is, you showed us how you segment people. You showed us how you reach out to people on Linked In earlier. What you would do is you want to find a way to take them off LinkedIn and find a way for them to become customers. One thing you do, I’m imagining is you create, I’m imaging you probably use Survey Monkey? I’m on Love with Survey Monkey. I like their daughter side, I guess, is what it’s called. They bought Wufoo. I really love that for surveys.

So you say, if you’re a coach, fill out this survey about your coaching needs or about the problems you’re going through. The person goes in, fills out the survey, at the end of it you say, ‘All right. I can help you with this. Here’s my number. Call me and we’ll talk about it.’ Or maybe you ask for the phone number as part of the survey and then you follow up with them. But you want to somehow move them off LinkedIn to a landing page that’s designed to warm up that relationship and then let you sell?

Los: Exactly. Basically, LinkedIn, the way that I use it I don’t use any ads on LinkedIn, and that’s because I’d rather honestly spend my money on Facebook ads, because LinkedIn ads aren’t good. So, what I do inside of LinkedIn is just spend my time leading generating from essentially from one-to-one marketing. So, if you can take enough people out there you can build a substantial amount of leads by combining both strategies.

Andrew: Tell me about the hotel group that’s used this?

Los: Yeah, I had a hotel group. I don’t know why I said ‘we’. But I had a hotel group that . . .

Andrew: It’s bigger. Yeah, I get used to saying we, too.

Los: I think everybody does that.

Andrew: Anyway, you had a hotel group. What were you doing with them and how do they relate to this?

Los: I was helping them with lead generation and things like that, and one thing that we did is we started going one-to-one marketing techniques from inside groups, and trying to find different kinds of clients and taking them to landing pages directly. So, instead of them buying really ridiculous leads for, you know, [??] leads or so, we were getting smaller amounts of leads but they were targeted. They were going directly to basically a landing page that offered a particular kind of package.

Andrew: I see.

Los: And they were spending about $50,000 a month; when we got done with everything I think we started saving them about $20,000 a month. And now we’re employing different kinds of tactics and different kinds of webinar techniques that they can [??] webinars.

Andrew: Okay. Speaking of webinars, that seems to be a more and more popular way to convert people from prospect to customer. Do I have this right? I’m looking at my notes; you don’t use this software that I’m using right now to record this. You use Meeting Burner.com?

Los: Yeah, I was using Meeting Burner for awhile since the Beta, and sometimes we use GoToWebinar, and sometimes we use Meeting Burner. I just bought a new program that actually does webinars inside of Facebook. I just test any kind of webinar program that’s out to see what’s working.

Andrew: Yeah, Meeting Burner has a lot of potential. They’re free, I think, and . . .

Los: They just got out of their Beta, I think, last week.

Andrew: I see. And what’s good about them is that there isn’t this big installation process.

Los: Yeah, yeah, you can actually do it with Skype.

Andrew: All right, I also see here in my notes there’s a Swipe file that you want to give people, or you can potentially give people?

Los: Yeah, I was going to give this Swipe file for basically just kind of a template that you can use to drive people for a landing page.

Andrew: The email that you send people to get them to go to the landing page?

Los: Yeah, to get them to sign up for something. And I also have the other landing page that we were using, the high-end consultant. If anyone wants it you can basically just take it and kind of use it for yourself, if that’s something that you think you can use, or if not, just tweak it for your own use.

Andrew: All right, I’m going to write this down so that we can make sure to follow up with you and get that. But I want to make sure that this is right. The landing page and the email that leads to the landing page, you’re going to give my audience so that they can just Swipe and use it themselves?

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: Awesome. Email to landing page. I want to make sure to keep following up on these commitments that we’re making to the audience to make sure that they get what we’ve been promising. Awesome. So, back to the big board, right?

Los: Back to the board.

Andrew: Attack by Stratagem. By the way, I don’t even know that you recognize the way that I’ve phrased these. I’m looking at your notes here with Jeremy from the pre-interview process. And I keep looking for ways to summarize it and make it a little intriguing for the course. Do you know what I’m talking about? No, actually Attack by Stratagem, that’s exactly out of your notes. All the others I’ve rephrased. That one I left alone, and I was hoping you could tell us. What does that mean and how do we use it?

Los: It’s basically a technique or trick to get a result. And basically what I’m doing with that as an example, I used research and development on, more research, less development, but I did some research on the event section of LinkedIn and I found that Richard Branson was having an event. Let’s see if I can get to it here. And Richard Branson was having an event I found out.

Andrew: Okay, that’s under the ‘more tab’ and you go into ‘events’ and now you’re doing a search for a business 2012. And it is searching, searching, there came up with a bunch of options, and somewhere in here is a Richard Branson event?

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: Okay, let’s look for that. I see, now you’re searching for Richard Branson directly. I saw it a moment ago on your screen.

Los: Yeah, I have it right here. But basically, how I got to it was by doing research on LinkedIn events. I found that that was going on, and then I started kind of researching that with online. I went to their Facebook page and their LinkedIn page and I saw basically the people that were involved in it, and the people that were kind of running the marketing. So I attacked those people inside of LinkedIn. And I didn’t do it on Facebook, because I didn’t know them. So, if I don’t know you, I’m probably not going to just jump into Facebook and try to be your friend, because we’re not actually friends, and it’s just a little bit easier to create the relationship from a business perspective.

So what I did is I basically approached them and said, ‘Who’s doing the LinkedIn community building for this event?’ And they said, ‘Nobody. We don’t really know what that is.’ So I said, ‘I’ve actually helped Jason Falls from Social Media Examiner build his community and he actually has an event in Dallas. He’s a big social media guy. I would love to be a part of this.’ And now we’re in communication with emails and hopefully something will come through with that.

Andrew: So you found out about the event through LinkedIn, great. You wanted to find out who the organizers were. How do you do that?

Los: I checked out the event. This is the whole thing. You can’t be lazy.

Andrew: But I’m checking out the event right here, and I don’t see who the organizers are and how to contact them on LinkedIn. Do I have to click the ‘in’ button in order to see that?

Los: I checked out on their Facebook.

Andrew: Okay.

Los: Can you see my Facebook now?

Andrew: Yeah, it’s coming up right now. Yeah.

Los: All right, so from here I just started reading and this guy . . .

Andrew: Let’s give it moment to boot up. Yeah, I see [Viv] is on there. So, Viv is responding, so you know he’s the one who owns this group.

Los: Yeah, so he was giving information out and helping, so obviously he had something to do with it. So what I did from there is I copied and pasted his name, took him to LinkedIn, created a relationship with him, and said, ‘Hey, what are you guys doing with LinkedIn. I saw that you’re doing this event.’

Andrew: How can you send him a message on LinkedIn? Do you first have to get him to accept your connection request there?

Los: You do. And if you don’t have any information on them what you can do is you can actually do some research and see what groups they’re in. Join that group, and then go ‘friend’ them and say that you’re a member of the same group, put a little conversation starter at the bottom; don’t just say I’d like to have you in my network. Add something relative in there. And 95% you’ll get a response and someone will add you to their network.

Andrew: Because otherwise, if you just try to connect to them directly you need an email address, don’t you?

Los: Exactly. You need an email address, or you had to have worked somewhere together, and you still need that email address. So the only way to actually do it is to join a group that they are a part of, and make a connection in that way.

Andrew: Right. If you’re a paid member too, you can directly reach out to them.

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: Okay.

Los: Yeah, or with an [in-mail], but you have to pay with an in-mail. This is 100% free.

Andrew: Right.

Los: I am a paying member . . .

Andrew: This is the strategy we were talking about here. The free way is the way to do it.

Los: Everything that I’m teaching you, you can literally do for free. So, it just takes a little bit of time, but I mean, if you’re getting started, all you have is time.

Andrew: All right. I like the way that you reached out to them. So you connect with them, and you find out who’s leading the group, who is running this business. You connect to them on LinkedIn, and that way you send them a proposal and get them to work with you.

Los: You try to build a relationship, but the relationship has an end, you know, you’re building something, you guys can be great friends and all that, but at the end of the day you’re trying to get an action out of this whole thing. You’re not just building the relationships just to build them. You know what I mean?

Andrew: Right. All right, back to the Big Board, or is there anything else on this one idea?

Los: That is it.

Andrew: Back to the Big Board.

Los: Actually, was that the one? Yeah, yeah, it is.

Andrew: Okay, so the last big idea is, and you’re going to talk about how to use Boolean logic like a secret weapon.

Los: Yeah. Boolean logic and I’ll add, I have it here, but it’s a very big comprehensive thing on how to use it. It is basically on how to use Boolean logic. I want to add it to you guys. So I’ll give that link to your class.

Andrew: What is this? You’ve got a note for yourself on this? What’s this program that you’re using to get all of your notes? I’m guessing these are you notes from your iPhone right?

Los: I have Quick Note and I have Evernote.

Andrew: OK. And they both connect to your iPhone and everything else. All right, so in Quick Note you have all the notes that you need on Boolean logic.

Los: Yeah. I had prepared a [inaudible]. . .

Andrew: Is it wrong that while you’re doing the search I’m checking out what else is in your notes? Mixergy class . . .

Los: Oh, no I don’t care.

Andrew: . . . [??] schmooze, Fizzly Hub [sounds like]. If you want to hide your screen I could tell you how to do it, but otherwise we’re all looking at what you’ve got on your screen.

Los: I don’t mind. I can’t find the Mixergy class.

Andrew: Oh there, I saw it right there. January 26.

Los: Oh, here we go.

Andrew: See, so my snooping actually helped.

Los: There we go. And this is a little thing I prepared, I had notes I had prepared for when we, but with all the problems that we had on the signing up, it was a little, kind of, erased [inaudible].

Andrew: Yeah, we should say that we’re using GoToMeeting here because my whole set up with Skype and CamTwist and everything else for some reason wasn’t working, but, GoToMeeting came through.

Los: OK. So . . .

Andrew: All right.

Los: Boolean logic is basically kind of like a mathematic thing for computers where basically what you do is, you say, and this is an example that I had, I’m going to be looking for consultants and advisors or CEOs of companies but I don’t want them to be social media consultants and I don’t want them to be internet marketing consultants. Because I kind of do the same thing.

Andrew: So minus social media means not social media in their names, right.

Los: Minus social, plus media because social media is two words

Andrew: I see.

Los: And then I would go again, minus internet, plus marketing because internet marketing are two words. And then I just press search and entrepreneurs, and basically I’m going to get consultants and advisors that have nothing to do with social media.

Andrew: Got it.

Los: I don’t know how I popped in there. All right. Yeah. Innovation consultants, growth architects, CEOs. I don’t know, I shouldn’t have this marketing guy in there. But that’s the whole concept of Boolean logic.

Andrew: So what you want us to take away from this is that when we’re ready to really narrow target people, we want to do a search that eliminates all the people who are outside of our target, but include all the people who are in our target and that’s . . .

Los: This is a small example of, this is the link that I’m going to give you guys to better understand Boolean logic.

Andrew: Let’s get Andrea to include the link in for this. The link, Andrea, is internettutorials.net/boolean.asp.

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: OK. All right and that’s how. . .

Los: That’s a comprehensive page on how to exactly use it and test it and start messing around with Boolean logic. The whole thing is you can use Boolean logic to do super advanced searches on LinkedIn.

Andrew: Do you want to tell me about how you met Matthew this way and what the impact of meeting Matthew was?

Los: I was looking for consultants, and that’s why I used that, who were in sales and things like that. And Matthew Kimberley came up and I kind of built a relationship with Matt. I didn’t even know but we both knew Clay Collins. And we started a relationship on LinkedIn and I was trying to get Matthew to basically make an introduction to you. But he barely goes on his LinkedIn now so we talk more through e-mail and things like that. But that’s a funny story on how basically I used that to try to connect with you using the whole Boolean logic thing.

Andrew: I see. You were doing a search to find . . . I see. All right. How did you connect with me, by the way?

Los: I’m a member of the . . . oh, I sent you an e-mail.

Andrew: Through LinkedIn.

Los: I actually connected with you on LinkedIn and from there I think we just chatted a little bit. It was a while back. And then I became a member of the premium site and I saw that you guys put that course out saying, ‘Is anybody interested in teaching a course?’ So, I think I sent you first email saying, hey, we know each other from LinkedIn, and this is what I have for you. This is something that could help you. I actually said no at first, and then I said: well, I actually think that I have different strategies for you guys that might be something that people have because we use these strategies. I’ve been involved with a couple of startups, and we use these strategies just in mass messaging and things like that.

Andrew: Yeah. I did say no first. I say no to a lot of sessions because today I told you…I recorded two today. I recorded one yesterday. We’ve got more requests that I ever could handle for people who want to lead these courses, and I want to make sure that what we’re teaching is actionable not just hot.

I know that LinkedIn right now is hot, and people are hearing that there’s revenue to be had there, that there’s customers to be gotten on LinkedIn, and I know it’s a hot topic right now. But I want to make sure it’s really useful. I did challenge you. I said I’m not sure that there’s anything new here, that we can really get people customers. To your credit, you just didn’t go away with that, but you said: I see what you’re looking for. I can prove to you that there are customers, and I can show value to your audience.

Andrew: Then, you got on with our producer, and you put this whole course together with him. I can see the value in this, and I know that the audience can. Before I say goodbye and thank you for doing this, let me make sure that there’s nothing that I missed from all the work that you did leading into this.

So, back to the big board. There’s something here that I think we didn’t talk about. Where was it?

Los: If you want to, and I think this is something else. If you want to pay $20 a month, you can do an advanced search on your contacts. This is just one of the things that you can get out of your $20, and you can do sine super hyper targeted messaging, also. For example, if I just want to hit Fortune 50 people, I can do that. Fortune 500s, Fortune 1000s, potential employees, consultants, contractors. You can do this deep of searches unless you have this account, and it’s $20.

Andrew: I see, $20 a month gets you the ability to do even narrower searches than what you just described.

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: But, actually, there’s a way of narrow targeting. You may not have the ability to use [??] logic to do a search for Fortune 50 customers, but in addition to finding Fortune 50 LinkedIn users, you might also want to find people who are in marketing but not in social media marketing. So, they work together. They’re two separate ways of doing searches.

Los: Yeah. I’ll give you an example. I just created a little mini course called “Hired in a Week”. It’s basically just how to get a job as fast as possible using social media and LinkedIn and things like that.

Right now with this I can targets volunteers or students and interns, and I can just tag them. It’ll give me a list of people, and I can start sending messages, “Hey, guys. Have you found a job yet? How’s the market? Listen, I’ve got a little program. It’s 30, 40, 50 bucks, and it’s going to teach you how to get a job in seven days or a little bit more.” So, that’s just a quick way on how you can use it. If you don’t have a job, you can… potential employees, it’s immediate. Consultants, contractors, it doesn’t matter what you’re looking for, you can find it here. It’s definitely worth the $20 a month.

Andrew: All right. There’s a story here that I didn’t give you a chance to ask. Bring up the big board. It was under the topic of sending out a survey, the second big idea. You were going to talk to us about Phil, and I didn’t give you a chance to talk about Phil. Do you want to tell his story a little bit?

Los: Yeah. Phil is the guy that we actually purchased the list of doctors for. He’s a financial consultant, and he was going to be at nine meetings which are like $300 a month to be a part of. He was going to chamber of commerce meetings which are another $500 a month, and then you pay a monthly. He was going to all these meetings and shaking all these hands, and everything he was returning was just cards.

He came up to me and said: listen, I need to do something. I need to get clients, and I really need to just expand my connections. What do I do? I said, “Let’s try to do something on LinkedIn. Let’s get a list. Let’s buy it. Put it in there. Segment your contacts, and once we segment your contacts, take them to a potential event. Say, “Hey, guys. I’ve got some great information for your guys. I’m going to be doing this event or I’m going to be taking you out to dinner at Ruth Chris just for applying. Let me know if you guys are interested.”

A couple of those people did, and he actually ended up getting $60,000 worth of sales on it. So, I know people might have a good or bad reason for buying lists and putting them in LinkedIn, but I think it’s worth $60,000.

Andrew: And I could see how it would be especially valuable to Phil, a financial advisor, someone who generates a lot of revenue per client.

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: All right. So, there it is. But it works for that. It also works for you as you were saying earlier. If you want to find people who want to buy one of your… It was an eBook that you were putting together, and you’re looking for volunteers and students who might be interested.

Los: It’s a video marketing class. It’s just basically going to show people how to get jobs and things like that. I actually have a more detailed course coming out on LinkedIn as well.

Andrew: All right. Where can people connect with you? You’re the first people, I think, who I’ve had on Mixergy who did not want to show his website. You said to me, “Andrew, I do all my work on LinkedIn and Facebook. What’s the point of a web page in comparison to the power of those sites? But if people want to connect with you, should we send them to the website where we showed them…

Los: Yeah. Send them to the website. The website is lossilva.me.

Andrew: Let’s put it on the screen, if you don’t mind.

Los: Yeah. That is it. That’s…

Andrew: Is that you on the left?

Los: Yeah.

Andrew: All right, Los.

Los: That’s for a photo shoot I did. That’s it.

Andrew: I see the page, but where is the way for them to contact you? Is it at the very top of the page?

Los: Yeah. You can sign up for the email, or you can just contact me at contact@lossilva.me.

Andrew: All right, Los. Thank you for teaching us. Everyone else, thank you all for watching this program. As always, I want to hear about your successes. I also want to hear about what you’re doing along the way as you’re learning from this session. So, do me this favor. If you got anything valuable out of this program, let me, let Lois know and do yourself a favor of going through all these big ideas that we discussed.

I’m going to bring up the board again. If you just take a moment right now and say to yourself, “How could I use one of these ideas?” It’ll be more valuable even than just having to listen to this program or watched it or reading the transcript. Think of how could you use Boolean logic to find somebody in your business. How could you use groups and send messages to people in groups to get a customer in your business?

Just think about everything you learned could be used for yourself. Be a little selfish so that you can get the most value out of this program and frankly out of… You see all of these books behind me? One of the things I’ve learned from people who get a lot of value out of books that they read is they pull out the tactics and they say: how does it apply to me? Not how interesting is it, not how great it is for the author that he got this famous and published these ideas, but how can I use the idea that I used in chapter one? How can I use the idea that I learned in chapter two in my business? Personalize it.

And then, as you’ll see, it’ll make those ideas much more readily available to you when it’s time to actually use them in the real world. So, there are the big ideas. There is Los. Thank you, Los, and thank you all for watching.

Master Class: How to create a marketing plan that will ship customers to you
(Even if you don’t have a single customer yet)
Taught by Amit Kumar of Lexity

Report issues here

Master Class:
Marketing Plan


About the course leader

The course is led by Amit Kumar, founder of Lexity, which offers simple advertising for e-commerce businesses.

Master Class Toolbox

Follow Amit on Twitter

Pinterest

Modko

Shopify

Magento

Big Commerce

OnStartups

Optimizely

Retargeter

Adroll

Curebit

Launchrock

Referral Candy

ShopLogic

Course PowerPoint

Transcript

Download the transcript here

Andrew: This course is about how to create your simple and powerful marketing plan so you can increase sales. The course is led by this guy, Amit Kumar. He is the founder of Lexity. Lexity is the company that offers simple advertising for e-commerce businesses. I invited him here to teach how you can create your marketing plan. I’m Andrew Warner, founder of Mixergy.com, where proven founders like Amit Kumar of Lexity teach. Amit?Amit: Thank you so much for this opportunity. Today I’m going to talk about five tactics to improve your business and take it to great [??].Andrew: Before you get into it. These are the big tactics that you’re going to be teaching. But before you even start teaching, here’s the first thing that I know my audience is going to be wondering. If this is so good, this is so powerful, what have you been able to do with it? So I want to spend most of our time talking about the tactics that people will use, but just tell me a little bit about what you’ve been able to achieve with what’s on the big board and what we’re going to be talking about?Amit: Yes, I started Lexity two and a half years back, and even from the very first day we new that our own product needed to found by people who were looking for similar solutions. Then, over a period of time we would give them [??] right channels and get people talking about it, and become loyal customers.

As I spent some time in my previous company working with really large businesses, travel agencies like Kayak, and Expedia and what not. Helping them improve their sales, I realized that they still wanted the same things month-over-month. A bottle of champagne, a little bit of smoozing. I didn’t really care about the bottom line as much and when we applied these five tactics for our customers at Lexity we noticed that not only were their business sort of taking off and making more sales, getting more repeat customers.

But the people who were running these small businesses were happier. They were happier because they had figured out where to spend their energies instead of trying everything under the sun and ended up spending more time with their family, spending more time with their kids.

Andrew: Tell me about Mark. I like to understand big ideas with single stories. One guy that you work with, one of your customers is Mark. What were you guys able to do for Mark with the ideas that you’re about to teach us.

Amit: Mark was spending hours a day managing his ad words account and not getting a lot of success out of it. And with Lexity he was able to switch that over, let Lexity manage it, and then those few hours a day that he saved, he ended up spending with family. He’s very grateful for what we were able to do for him. But this course is not about Lexity. It’s about these marketing tactics that you can build with or without Lexity, and save those hours a day to enjoy life, because that’s what it’s all about.

Andrew: All right, I’ve been there, too. Where I say, it’s time to for me to go buy advertising so that I can grow my business. So I start buying ads on Google, I bought a little bit on Facebook. Then I said to myself, where’s this going? It’s not really working out for me. I don’t really know what direction I’m going in. I just have been told that buying ads on those platforms is effective, and so I’m buying ads on there kind of like a monkey just paying without any clear understanding of where I’m going. Which is why I wanted you to come here and teach. Which is why you put together this set of tactics that we’re going to be teaching.

And the very first one which I highlighted over here is, ‘Use social media and buy ads to find customers.’ Tell me how to do that, maybe give me an example there to if you could?

Amit: The first thing I want to focus on is building awareness. Twitter is a great medium to do that. You know people are already talking about their pain points, talking about what they need, and that’s a great way to find them. In fact [??] barbeque truck that’s very famous in LA, and they have this truck and they keep moving it around and they get hundreds of customers lining up. And one fine day they park in front of a conference venue and there’s no one.

The guys realized that people are not aware that we’re here. And so they tweet about it, and they suddenly see all these people from buildings around them sort of walk to the truck like zombies. It reminded me how powerful Twitter is, and you can do the same thing, you can see are people looking for a fancy contraption that you’ve built.

And also, as you’re searching Twitter for this, you can also see people who are [selling] their products. So, it’s a great way to get competitive insights as well. You can use that as a customer discovery mechanism, for example, and take that next level by going to Facebook. What Facebook allows you to do is really hone in on the kind of targeting

For example, if you have a product that’s really useful for married couples or people who are already married as opposed to

you can target that, or if you want to focus on people that are working at certain companies, you have a product that would be really helpful to people who are working at the Gap. It’s a certain kind of a shoe for people who are standing on their feet all day, you know, waiters. You can find people at the right companies to target. That’s very powerful, and it’s also very cost effective.

Andrew: I want to challenge you in a moment, but first make sure that I understand what you’re saying. You’re saying: the very first step to creating my marketing plan and also my precious, precious audience, for them to be able to create their marketing plan. The first step is just search to search Twitter to see what their customers are complaining about and what they’re saying about your business already. To go to Twitter and see what they’re saying about their competitors. Once you have an understanding or who they are and what they’re saying, go to Facebook where you can narrow target those customers and buy ads, right?

Amit: That’s right.

Andrew: OK. So, here’s the thing. I‚Äôm thinking about the person who’s listening to me, and he’s saying: again with the Twitter, again with the Facebook. All these guys are telling me that the world starts and ends with Twitter, and they’re saying to themselves: I’ve had Twitter. We’ve had Twitter accounts, they’re all saying, and nothing big has happened.

So, help me understand and help the audience understand, why Twitter, why Facebook, and how does this fit in with a real marketing plan that is going to help them see results.

Amit: Yeah, so let me take a step back. So, if you think about any business as it grows, the focus for a business changes over time. Take a simple example. You start a business today. You can’t focus on: hey, how do I get repeat customers? Well, you don’t have one customer; how are you going to focus on repeat customers. So, there’s something called Adsell that I talk to and use internally at our company and talk to our customers about. And this is the Adsell method that I want to talk about for a minute, and then we’ll go back to the tactics again.

Andrew: OK. This is the framework that you’re going to be teaching, and this is the framework that’s behind the marketing plan that our audience will be implementing for themselves.

Amit: That’s exactly right. And it’s a simplification of a lot of research that has been done in this area. If you go to Wikipedia and search for literature, it will be saying similar things in a very sort of complex academic way. We have simplified it for smaller businesses where you are not a tycoon yet. You want to be one day, but this is sort of the thing that you can gather. Now, it is five points.

The first point is you’ve got to build awareness for your product or service. People don’t know about what you’re trying to do, that’s not going to work. And the examples with Twitter and Facebook are relevant to that. If you have a great product or service, something you invented, if there’s no one who really knows about it, there’s no point. So you’ve got to build awareness, there’s no solution to that.

Andrew: And awareness what you’ve told me before we started recording is, sometimes it happens one at a time. And that’s why Twitter’s effective because it’s a free way to connect with people one at a time. And if you want to go a little bit broader, you’re saying Facebook is a good place to do it because it’s a way to micro target just the people that you want, as you mentioned earlier. Just married couples living in Chicago who happen to love the Beastie Boys, or whatever it is that’s yours.

Amit: Exactly.

Andrew: And so, we start small by building awareness. And then, what’s next?

Amit: The second would be: get distribution. As it turns out, and if you just think about how you look for products. If you’re trying to buy something that you have a feeling is listed on Amazon, that’s where you’ll go. If you’re like, maybe, there’s a website that sells it. You’re searching on Google. Every consumer, every target consumer that you have is looking for your kind of products, some that are specific. So, you’ve got to get distributed there. You’ve got to be present at where people are looking for your kind of a product or service. Even if it’s completely new, they’re looking for similar, something already, and you’ve got to be there. So, that’s the distribution part.

Now, let’s say, people have kind of heard about you and are able to find you and land on your website. You’ve got to absolutely make sure they check out as soon as possible and buy. So, you need to optimize your site conversions, get those first few sales, and in this day and age once you have these people hooked in, they’ve bought, they’re enjoying your product. You’ve got to make sure all of their network knows. You’ve got to drive ‚Ķ

You’ve got to enable evangelism. You have to make it easy for someone to tell their family, A, you know, I love this pair of leather shoes, sort of custom built for me. You should get them, too, right. And that’s critical in this day and age of Facebook and, you know, Google Plus and Twitter. People are talking, and you want to help them talk more about your product and service. And, finally, you have to drive loyalty. You know, someone who has already bought from you, already trusts you, and hopefully you had a good enough product that they want to buy again. And that’s the easiest sell, right, just tell them, ‘Here, by the way, you bought a barbecue, you know, sauce from me two months back. Probably, you ran out of it. Here’s a coupon. You know, buy it again.’ And in this talk, in this workshop, I’m going to tell you specifically what you can use in order to do each one of these.

Andrew: OK. All right. First, you’re building awareness for the product. Then you’re getting distribution or going where the distribution is. Then you’re going to convert the people who are getting aware of your product, and who you’re reaching through your new distribution, convert them into customers. Then you empower them to go and tell their friends, and then you drive loyalty so that they come back. So, now, what telling us is, Twitter and Facebook are the way that we’re going to get awareness.

Amit: That’s right.

Andrew: Anything else that we need to understand about this part before we continue? I want to make sure that we really understand every part of it. Don’t let me push back so far that you back away from the message here. I just want to sharpen the message, based on what I anticipate our audience is thinking.

Amit: Yeah, absolutely. And, so, you know, many of the listeners are thinking, you know, why I’m not talking about Google AdWords, to build awareness, for example. You know, the [??]. There’s a lot of [??].

Andrew: Sorry, the connection’s just going out a little bit. What you were saying a moment ago was, many people in the audience are saying, why aren’t you saying, use Google AdWords to build awareness? And what was your response to that?

Amit: And, you know, some of these traditional channels, and, you know, I count AdWords as a traditional channel at this point, are becoming very expensive, to do things like awareness-building, to get your first 100, first 1000 customers. And the newer, sort of more social channels, [??] and target your message much better, are more effective about that. So, for awareness, I was really, you know, assuming that you are starting out and, you know, you are strapped for cash. I would start off by looking at more sort of newer channels. For example, Pinterest is another example where, if you have a very visual, you might want to go pin that on Pinterest, and, you know, have other people sort of like it, and the word spreads from that. I’ll have something to say about AdWords later on, but this is what we should have for awareness.

Andrew: OK. Very first thing, build awareness. Think of that small taco truck that was a nobody for a while there. They parked outside of the conference, no one showed up. They start tweeting, and people walk in, as you said earlier, like zombies. They start, they seem to just come gravitating towards the truck.

Amit: That’s right.

Andrew: And that’s what we want to do, just build that awareness, one at a time. Don’t look for huge avalanches of customers as soon as you start tweeting. You’re looking for just a little bit of awareness. Next step, let’s go to the big board, next step is to get distribution where buyers already exist.

Amit: Yeah, and it’s funny . . .

Andrew: Do you have an example of that?

Amit: You know, I want to start with that one example. So, our first big break, for Lexity, was when we got featured in the Shopify app store. And in some sense that was, in fact, you know, in no uncertain terms, that was the distribution for us. We are an application that helps e-commerce merchants. Well, Shopify is an e-commerce platform. And, you know, that’s where our customers are, they are using Shopify. So, you know, we got featured in the Shopify app store, and a lot of our customers found us there, including a store called ModKat. And, you know, that’s an example of us finding unusual customers. They were one of our initial customers, modkat.com. And they sell, you know, these fancy-looking, very modern-looking cat litter boxes. You know, who would have thought?

Andrew: Mm-hmm.

Amit: But, because of the fact that we were distributed through the Shopify app store, they found us. And we, in turn, helped them distribute their products, right? So we said, well, you know, where do we need to get listed? And Amazon.com, of course, is where a lot of people, you know, buy fine products. So they’re now listed on Amazon. And you can buy Amazon product ads through a very simple sort of account they can create. If you already have an e-commerce store, you can connect to Amazon, and, you know, be able to sell there. And that’s an example for an e-commerce merchant.

If people are already searching on Amazon, instead of trying to find other avenues, just find out what it takes to get listed on Amazon. They make it really easy, and that’s a great place to start. And all this for the free opportunities. So for example, Google, right? Google’s trying to get everyone to come to their site instead of Amazon. So what did, did the launch, well they launched Global product search a while back. And, because they want to be competitive, they made if free. So if you’re selling an e-commerce product the first thing you’ve got to do, get your product listings on Google product search. Right? It’s free and they get tons of traffic. So that’s again a thing about sort of from a distribution perspective. Where are people searching? On Google, on Amazon. How do I get my products there? Now, you can also use Google ad words. Ad words is also a, you know, if you think about it from that perspective it’s, you are searching for a product on Google, your ads show up, that’s perfect.

Now it tends to be a little more expensive, it tends to be hard to manage, so you can use third party tools. Of course Lexity has its own tools to help you simplify Google ad words and you can sign up and use that. But again it’s a sort of a way to think about it from a distribution perspective. People are searching on Google. Maybe they’re searching for my, you know, custom built leather shoes, and then they’re going to be able to find it if you’re on a Google ad words ad. So this is, it’s all about distribution.

Andrew: I see. And by the way, this is something that I should have, that I should have done when I started my business here at Mixergy. But let me make sure I understand this and then I’ll tell you how I think I should have done it to help Mixergy grow faster earlier on.

What you’re saying is, ask yourself who already, what platforms already have your customers. In your case Shopify is an e-commerce platform. They already have merchants, you guys work with merchants, you’re courting more and more merchants as your customers. So of course it’s a natural to work with Shopify. If someone is selling a product, a physical product obviously, Amazon has the platform that has their customers and they should be working with them. So just keep looking for those platforms. If you are a software vendor and Facebook has your particular audience, build on that platform. But look for those distribution platforms.

What I think, first of all I see you’re nodding, so I’m on the right track with that. What I should have done with Mixergy is, when I launched and I was a nobody and couldn’t get any traffic, couldn’t get any customers for these courses and for the interviews. What I should have said to myself is, which platform already has those people? Maybe it’s the American Express, I forget what they’re called but they have some kind of, some platform there.

Amit: Open Forum.

Andrew: What was it? Open Forum, exactly. So American Express open forum. I should have maybe partnered with them and only done on their platform first. Or maybe partnered with one of the magazine sites. But said to myself, not how do I get more people to my site but who already has my people? What other platforms that already distribute to my audience? Build on there.

Amit: That’s right. Because the reality is, you know, even if you are venture funded up the wazoo, you’re always running short on cash and short on time. And you know it’s much easier to piggyback on someone who already has the kind of people you’re looking for. Build a partnership with them or use tools to get there. So Amazon and Google product search for example, sort of like you’re partnering with them. But you kind of happen to know that they have their audience already that you want to distribute to, so go there. Make that happen first.

Andrew: I see. By the way, as you noticed and all my audience notices, in the intro I don’t give a long paragraph of information about what the course leaders business is. Because I know when I’m in the audience I don’t care about that person’s business. I care about my business, right? And that’s why I zip through that. But at this point we’ve gotten to know a little bit about your business and we’re using your business as an example. We should understand, what exactly does Lexity, does Lexity do?

Amit: Yeah, you know, our core mission is very simple. We wanted to make simple, affordable and effective for e-commerce businesses to be able to become big businesses, right? Start small, you know, get distribution, get awareness, you know help like you know on product site conversions. You know just sort of succeed. And the way we do that is by looking at all of these tactics, you know. Whether it be Facebook ads or AdWords ads or Better ads. And we put it all in simple packages.

We say, what’s your goal, what’s your focus on? Is it to make more sales? You know, is it completely focused on sales? Or you’re like, no, I think I need to build awareness first, or I know there’s tons of people coming but they’re bouncing. And we make it really simple for people to come in, spend as low as 20 bucks a month and increase their sales from that point on. All these people want them to spend up to 10 thousand a month. We don’t even take bigger guys than that. If you want to spend 100 thousand dollars a month, you know, please go talk to our partners down the street, not us. Because we really, really laser focused…

Andrew: Starting from 30 bucks a month.

Amit: 20 bucks a month.

Andrew: 30. Oh 20 bucks a month.

Amit: That’s right.

Andrew: Starting for 20 bucks a month you help them get customers, you help them think through what their marketing should be.

Amit: That’s right. And as they grow bigger and bigger of course that 20 bucks a month doesn’t give them great traffic, they want to spend more, get more, and they can build a business with us.

Andrew: Okay. Great. And now I can see if you’re working with e-commerce stores as I said earlier, you want to know what platforms like Shopify. Did you go to any of the other platforms? Did you go to Big Commerce, anyone else who has e-commerce sites?

Amit: We actually support all e-commerce platforms. There’s a few where our integrations are deeper. But anyone on any e-commerce platform can come in. So for example, we have (?) with Magento, MagentoGo and Big Commerce is coming up and (?) is coming up, (?) is coming up and (?) is already live. I mean there’s a bunch of platform relationships but you know, and you can sign up for what we call Lexity Live right away.

So if you are not interested in marketing right now, you just want to look at your storefront. Like, you know, people walking into your store, walking around, which products did they view? Are they buying? You know, what’s the conversion path? All of that in fact we give out for free so you can just sign up and if you’re on Big Commerce you can just have it for free. And like enjoy looking at Lexity Live. And when you’re ready to spend money on marketing, 20 bucks a month, you can start that right away from the Lexity Live interface.

Andrew: Okay, and again this is what our audience needs to be thinking. Not so much how do I bring people to meet in the early days. It’s who already has my people? How do I build on them? You use Shopify as the one example but you’re on Shopify, Big Commerce and as many of these platforms as possible. And frankly that’s what I should have done. Not just American Exchange Open Forum but, excuse me, American AMEX open forum, but also Mashable and Onstartups.com and every frickin’ site out there and the same thing goes or our audience.

Why by the way are you saying, why do you have it in this order, and then we’ll go back into the tactics. But why do you say first go to social media and find some customers of your own and then go and look for distribution platforms. Why don’t you just say, look, you’re going to struggle at first. Just go and get your distribution platforms worked out. They have customers. And then look for your own customers.

Amit: You know so the thing about starting with awareness is actually in a sort of an irony it brings you awareness about your own products and the way it’s being perceived. So imagine if you had a conversation with a random Joe who tweeted about this need he has and you tweeted him back saying, hey I’m building this, what do you think? And he’s like yeah it’s interesting, but 10% of it is interesting. The other 90% I don’t understand, like I don’t know what’s going on. So this process of building awareness of your brand by one on one interactions, by talking to people and exposing your message to Facebook, etc., will give you awareness of your own, you know, product and what you need to fix before you get to distribution.

Because the honest truth is that the further down the pipe you go sometimes it’s more expensive. So imagine that you start you know, advertising on Amazon, spending 100 bucks a day and you find that half the people return your product because you haven’t thought about what makes it successful. So it’s somewhat important to go in that sequence but honestly you know, nothing is as cut and dry. It might be that you get this distribution deal because you happen to be talking to someone and you’re like, you know what, let’s just go get it. You know, honestly, American entrepreneurship is all about taking a chance, grabbing it and running with it whenever you find it. So I’m not saying don’t do it, but if you, the logical progression sort of helps in sort of thinking through these issues.

Andrew: Alright, that’s a good point. Because if I would have gone for distribution before I created my first product and gotten some feedback from my first users, I would have been awful. I mean, I couldn’t sit on mic and feel comfortable talking. I was asking terrible questions and not leading the conversation well. I see, you want to practice with people and you get feedback from people one on one, people who really have a vested interest in you and then take this better, maybe not super polished product, but improved product and give it the distribution power of working with whoever has your customers.

Alright, speaking of moving things along, I don’t mean to keep you on these first two points for too long. Let’s go onto the third one. So now we’ve gotten to know our customers, what they want, who they are and made some sales to them. Then we’ve moved onto distribution partners and broadened our reach. You’re saying at this point it’s time to optimize and retarget. Tell me about that. How do I understand that?

Amit: Yeah, it’s, I have an interesting story about that. So one of our customers signed up and they sell these fancy leather bags. And our customer support person, Katy, she really loves you know handbags. And she said, oh this is awesome, this store signed up. I’m going to give them our first sale by buying it myself. And she goes in and chooses the color, starts checking out and discovers that the buy it button is missing. So in fact the store could not have made any sales because the buy button was missing throughout their entire site. So you know, you spend all of this time on awareness and on distribution and you’re like, okay, now the sales, their just about to come. And they’re not.

So it’s very important for you to sort of keep an eye on how the site is doing. Now, of course this is an extreme case. You know I feel making thousands of sales and suddenly they’re going to zero, you know something is going on. But as a, if you’re just starting off you’re like, well, you know, I get a sale month in the first couple of months and maybe that’s just what’s going on. So it’s very important to look at your site and what’s going on. Site, you know Google analytics is a great tool, great free tool for you to look at your site. Look at how people are converting, what sort of “define like” how are people progressing through your website. And then not only look at it, right, because it’s like, it’s just data. How do you react to it? So there’s a great tool called Optimizely which can be used to vary things around.

Maybe you have a front page where you’re trying different messages and you want to swap them out and maybe change the button or change the message, you know your call to action. And you can use Optimizely to change these things very simply without requiring like IT departments and whatnot, if you don’t happen to be technical. So I would really encourage using that. And this is only to fix the conversions for people who are already pretty decided they want to buy. They’re on your site and maybe there’s something troubling them and through all of these experiments and (?) data you improve site experience. The honest truth is, and if you just think about yourself, how many times have you just gone to a site and bought? Just like within 15 minutes you’re done, right? Here it is, you know, click, here’s my card, buy. You know, half the time you are at the office and your boss walks by and you turn off the computer. You know, just stuff happens right, you can’t just like buy all the time. Or even if you’re really convinced that you want to buy.

So roughly 2 – 3% of people who will come to our site will make a sale. So 97 to 98% will leave. So there’s this new technique, it’s you know, a few years old. It used to be used only by the big guys but now it’s available to a lot more people, it’s called retargeting. And the idea is that you try to find the 98% of the people who left without buying and you show them an ad again. Right, so they come to your site, Megasite.com and then, you know (?) their browsing CNN or Amazon.com and they notice an ad for your product. And they’re like, yeah I was there a few days back and I don’t know what happened. I think I should go buy that great product that I was interested in. So there are some companies retargeter, adroll (?) where we go back and you can create these ads that will be shown to people who came to your site and did not buy. Which if you think about it is incredibly powerful.

It’s like ten times more (break in audio). You know like (break in audio), don’t buy that actually buy from your site and yet they came to your website because they were interested. It’s not like (break in audio) random people, they’re just very interested committed people who just didn’t buy that made that purchase decision. So you want to make sure you give them as many opportunites as possible to come back. And that’s what I’m going stress in terms of conversions. Think of it as a site conversion. It’s not advertising in a traditional sense. It’s just you’re (?) the site conversions by reaching (break in audio).

So number one, understand your site patterns and characteristics. Number two, improve call to actions, text and test them using Optimizely. And number three absolutely try to do retargeting as long as you have enough traffic coming to your website to get the people back.

Andrew: I see. Right. That’s a really good point that when you start out, when you don’t have a lot of customers, doing AB testing is a pain in the butt and it really doesn’t get you much results because AB tests in order to be statistically relevant need a certain number of people to come to your site, a certain number of people to go through your flow. And at that point it doesn’t make sense. So you’re saying first, get that awareness of people. Talk to them one on one. Sharpen your product and then once it’s good put it on other platforms where you can start getting more traffic, more customers, and then make it better by using these tools. Optimizely, I like Visual Website Optimizer but I also love Optimizely, Google website optimizer is pretty good but it’s a pain in the butt to use. It’s a little complicated for what we need sometimes. And that’s what we do to sharpen the product.

Amit: Yeah, I want to sort of underline what you just said. It is very important because all of us have very little time. We are running from A to B. Is to know where you spend your energies. You’re exactly right. If you focus too much on optimizing your conversion flow before you have the traffic coming to your site, you’re really wasting your time, because even if you did own your messages, it might be that when the real swarm of customers come in, they actually wanted to hear a different message. So you super-optimized for a message that you liked or your early audience liked, but the vast majority of your late customers might be looking for a different message. So, this understanding of when to focus on what is important because it’s just going to save you time and money.

Andrew: Right. I like your example of the company that doesn’t even have a “Buy” button by accident. They deleted it or left it out. But I think you’re right, that’s an extreme example. What’s more likely to happen is what happened to me at Mixergy where we were getting customers and everything was good, but what I didn’t realize was, I didn’t make it obvious. I didn’t make the buy process obvious. I thought everyone knows, go to the top menu and select the premium membership and that’s where you buy.

What I didn’t realize is most people don’t know that’s where it is, and so the bigger the button, the more orders we get in. That seems to be the kinds of issues that you can solve. We actually solved that issue by using Visual Website Optimizer. I said, “Let’s see, most people really know where the button is. I think most people really know how to flow through our site”. I did an AV test, sure enough, increased sales. Most people didn’t know. I knew because I was on the site everyday. I knew because I built it.

Amit: Right.

Andrew: Back to the big board. Now we’ve got our customers. We’ve sharpened their experience so that more prospects are becoming customers. It’s time for us to take those customers and convert them into evangelists so that they can go and grow our business. Do you have an example of someone who has created evangelists out of their customers?

Amit: Yeah. In fact, one of our very early customers that we worked with was Dodocase, and Dodocase makes these beautiful iPad cases out of bamboo. It looks like a moleskin notebook. We were talking with them and they said, you know, a large number of our sales come from people who buy our product and then tell their friends about it. Almost like a premium product, where if someone comes into the website they’re like, yeah it looks nice, but I don’t know what it feels like in practice. A majority of their sales, if I’m not wrong, came from people referring other people to that product.

And that’s one of the examples that really taught me the power of these referrals. Intuitively it makes sense, right? Yeah, if you tell your friend… But that process used to be really tough, 6 years back and before then. With the advent of Facebook, it’s really simple to post a message. Tools that help you promote your products are really making it simple to do so. For example, there’s a company called Curebit, there’s another called Referral Candy, Shop Logic. Some of them are available on Shopify if you’re an ecommerce merchant. Some of them are general purpose like Curebit. Each one of them makes it really easy for the buyer. What happens is someone buys a product.

On the final confirmation page where it says “Hey, thanks for making this purchase!”, something will pop up saying “By the way, thanks for making this purchase, but if you refer this product to your friends via Facebook, we’ll help you choose which Facebook friends you want to refer. We’re going to give you 25% off your next order and your friends who buy will also get 30% off.” Some sort of coupon, some sort of an offer. And that works extremely, extremely well.

That’s a great way to increase the reach of your product via these social networks. And you really don’t have to do much. You just install this script or just push a button to install and you’re good to go. Really, really use these tools. They’re easy. And if you’re not an ecommerce merchant, of course, the way you implement this may be different. Maybe you have to send an e-mail as opposed to an on-site buy experience or a thank you mail or something like that. But the bottom line is, use these evangelism platforms to help your customers get you more customers.

Andrew: I see. Curebit, Referral Candy, Shop Logic, you put them on your site and after someone buys from you, it incentivizes them to tell their friends to shop from you too. And actually what I’ve heard for non-ecommerce sites is, I talked to the founder of Launchrock and he told me that that’s a product that’s often used by people who get free users to tell their friends. You get the person who’s signing up for your free product to use Launchrock. After they give you their e-mail address, the confirmation page says, “Great! If you want this extra incentive, just get two of your friends to come in and join for free, also.” And they give your users a special URL to do that.

Amit: That’s right.

Andrew: All right. Mm-hmm?

Amit: That’s right. That’s right. Well, I have one tip on that, is that, you know, people tend to forget e-mail. E-mail is still a very, very strong driver of, you know, evangelist traffic, if you will, right? So, if you make it easy for people to forward an e-mail or, you know, share this sale via e-mail, that has a huge impact. So, Facebook and Twitter are really, really great, but e-mail, e-mail is still the big daddy, so never forget e-mail.

Andrew: And how do we use e-mail to, how do we get our customers to use e-mail, to promote us, to evangelize us?

Amit: Yeah, so, for instance, if you use one of these tools and SAO, you can help your customers share, via e-mail, or by Facebook, or by Twitter. Make sure that you’re allowing e-mail-based sharing.

Andrew: Ah.

Amit: Similarly, if you send a thank you e-mail, you can say, ‘Hey, thanks for buying. Just forward this mail to your friends for them to get a discount.’ So you’re making it really easy for people to just forward on these messages. And really optimize the e-mails that you send for forwarding, in order for evangelism to really happen.

Andrew: I see, OK. It’s these tools, but make sure that you’re also, that e-mail is part of the way that these tools work.

Amit: That’s right.

Andrew: OK.

Amit: That’s right. And, in fact, e-mail is, you know, segueing into loyalty . . .

Andrew: Yeah.

Amit: . . . e-mail . . .

Andrew: Let’s take a look. So, the last item on our board here, the last piece of the marketing plan that you want our audience to use, is to incentivize past customers to buy again.

Amit: Yeah.

Andrew: Tell me about that.

Amit Yeah, absolutely. So, you know, it is not a surprise that if you have personally had a great experience buying something, or bought a product from a brand and it really worked out, you’re going to buy again. But, again, we get busy, and we might not remember or sort of think about a particular, sort of a particularly good sales process. You know, I have a two and a half year old, and when we were expecting, we signed up at Baby Center. A while back, you know, three years back now. And every week we would get an e-mail from them about something. You know, about the growth of the baby in the womb, and then, when the baby was born, like, what to expect. And, you know, week one, week two, what should you be doing? And all of this sort of, all of these informational messages, but, you know, some sales messages begged in. You know, if you’re buying a stroller, it’s time to buy a stroller. You know, here’s a discount, buy it through us and you get a discount. So it was transparent, right, but it was sensible. We were like, yeah, we know what you’re doing. You’re giving us information to sort of keep us involved. And yet, you’re providing us really interesting deals that we would need anyway.

Andrew: Right.

Amit: So this kept us as a loyal user of the Baby Center website. [??] as returning customers for the kind of affiliate deals that they had. And that’s pretty important. You know, it was very easy for them to keep this relationship going once I’d already permitted them to send me e-mail. So think of it in the same way as your relationships with your customers. In some sense they’ve given you permission to interact with them, by virtue of having bought something from you.

Now, you don’t want to spam them, that’s really bad. But it does allow you to go back, at reasonable amounts of time, saying, oh, you bought a barbecue sauce, you’ll probably be done with it in three months. You bought a stroller, maybe you need three years. And, you know, if it’s a long-running business, you can have those kinds of long-range engagements. So, really focus on that. You know, it’s an easy sell. Now, if you’re selling a car, maybe, you know, you can’t sell another car in a couple of months, unless it happens to be a tycoon, like some of the people you would interview Andrew. But, more often, that’s not going to happen. But it’s an important component of your business if it makes sense for the kind of products and services . . .

Andrew: You know, speaking of a car, I bought my car from BMW in Santa Monica. Every few months they would send me an e-mail about, because I also had the warranty on it, and it came with all kinds of service.

Amit: Yep.

Andrew: Every few weeks or months they’d send me an e-mail saying, ‘Andrew, you’re entitled to this service.’

Amit: Right.

Andrew: ‘You’re entitled to having this done,’ and that’s how they’d stay in touch with me. Long after I left the country, I’d moved to Argentina, I was still getting e-mails from them.

Amit: Yep.

Andrew: I sold my car, I was still getting e-mails from them. But they stayed on top.

Amit: Yep, yep. And, you know . . .

Andrew: All right. And these, of course, there’s so many tools for e-mail. These are just two. We could have filled up this, not just this slide with lots of different tools for e-mail.

Amit: Yep.

Andrew: We could have filled up this whole screen and this whole session with different tools.

Amit: Yep.

Andrew: But, Mailchimp is a great program, Constant Contact, I think. Who else? AWeber, which we use here at Mixergy.

Amit: Yep.

Andrew: And, of course, there’s the Roll Your Own. And, what is it, SendGrid has a way of getting your e-mail delivered if you’re using your own system to create the e-mail messages or to send out the e-mail messages.

Amit: Say, you know the most important thing that most of these tactics is to just get them in, right to just get started. So we wrote this great blog post on you know, blog.lexity.com on how to choose the perfect e-mail provider where we discuss all of the options that you mention, Andrew, and try to figure out which ones would be best for you. But the bottom line is if you just start with something (break in audio) and just send an informative e-mail to all of your customers once every two months, that’s a great start, right? You don’t have to over think it. Just get that started.

Maybe ask people for feedback on the product that they bought. Hey you bought this two months back, you know, did you like it? And that’s it. You know, just like as a way of engaging and that will get you rolling. And that’s a secret for all of these five, really. You know, whether it be building awareness, raising distribution, you know, improving site conversions, evangelism and loyalty. Figure out if this is the right time, right? And I’ll give you a few examples of what the right time is. And do something simple. right. Don’t over think it, just get it going and then build on top of that.

Andrew: What do you mean by if this is the right time? How do we figure that out?

Amit: Right. So, you know, the if you’re just starting out focus on the first few customers. Raise awareness among a target audience, get them talking or talk to them. Number two, once you have figured out this is a product that works, people understand what it is and are happy to talk about it, use it, find where more of those people exist, get distributed there. This is, you’re looking at tens of sales. Once you have hundreds of sales, or between tens to hundreds of sales, start looking at your site, right? Presumably they’re buying, that means the site basically works. But is, are people dropping off? What is the conversion rate?

So you know you sort of get into hundreds. I understand time where you know that there are extensive sales, and fifties of sales, there’s enough people that think that your product is worth buying. Well if they think it’s worth buying it’s probably worth some of their network to buy. So make sure that you start thinking about that at that point. And you know, loyalty you can wait a little bit. Again, because if you have infinite time or if you have a lot of time or people helping you, obviously you can (?) some of those. But the loyalty will come a little later where you’re like, you know what, I have my conversion flow without, you know, people are talking about it. But let me make sure that the people who bought I bring them back in again. So it’s sort of more towards the end of the spectrum.

And always look at your metric. So let’s say you’re five years in, everything is going perfectly. Okay, so what do you focus on? Well, you can look at proxy metrics. So for example you can say, my site, how many new visitors versus returning visitors. So let’s say almost all of the people coming to your site, which you find out from Google analytics, are returning visitors. What that tells you is that even if you’re making a lot of sales, even if there is a lot of activity, you’re not finding new people. It’s just the same people coming back again and again, there’s no new visitors. So you’re like, ah, I’m five years in but I guess I got to work on awareness. Just for some reason there’s no new people coming in. And that might sort of give you a clue.

Same thing with evangelism, right? Which is that, oh I’m looking at incoming traffic, almost all of it comes from like Google. And like 0.1% is coming from Facebook. This is kind of odd. You know Facebook is the biggest site on the web and people are not talking about my product on Facebook? Why is that? Maybe I should encourage that.

So you know, you can look at some of your data to figure out where you need to be. But the bottom line is that as you grow the business this is a good sort of waterfall for you to start off with, and then you optimize the (?).

Andrew: All right, so I’m actually going to give of course, everyone who’s watching this session I’m going to give them this document. Little secret. I’ve just been working off of a PDF here. I’m just flipping through a PDF on the screen. So of course I’ll give everyone this PDF. Let me see if I can even show you it scrolls. There it is. Just this whole PDF that I’ve been scrolling through as we’ve been going through this session. I’m going to give this out to everyone who watched the course so they have it for themselves to review along with the transcript and links to everything that we mentioned.

But I also want to thank you Amit. Thank you for doing this session and for teaching us and I urge everyone who’s watching. I keep going back to my keyboard so that I can bring up different screens. I’m doing my own production here, I’m in real time showing all the screens, all the websites and I want to make sure to show people this site. This is your site, Lexity, where anyone who’s watching is running an e-commerce site they can come here for $20 a month minimum? You can help them grow their sales. You can help them get more customers.

Amit: Absolutely. I’m really, really honored to be part of the Mixergy experience. I’ve been following you for a long and I appreciate the work you’re doing in helping people like myself understand, grow and learn from the greats. I’m going to keep myself out of that list of greats, but everyone else on your site is great.

Andrew: I’m adding you to it.

Amit: Great.

Andrew: And for the audience, let me say this. The reason Amit and I met is because he’s not just watching these sessions, he’s also contacting me and I urge everyone who’s watching this, even if you’re not sure how you’re going to use this, if you’re planning to use what you’ve learned here today shoot me an email, shoot Amit an email and say, hey thanks, this is one idea that I think I can use in my business.

That exercise, the mental exercise of thinking about how you can use these ideas is going to be more valuable than just watching it and letting them flood you and hoping that one day you’ll use it. Why don’t you just say I can visualize myself using this idea over here. I can visualize myself using social media and connecting with two customers the next week.

I can visualize myself partnering with this one platform that I’ve been thinking about, but didn’t realize how important it was to partner with them. The name of the platform is, whatever, Shopify, I can possibly partner up with them. Having those kinds of thoughts will help you use what you’ve learned here today and I urge you to do that and to help hold you accountable I urge you email me or Amit. Amit, can I reveal your email address or is this too private?

Amit: Absolutely.

Andrew: It’s amit@lexity.com, A-M-I-T@lexity.com.

Amit: And Twitter is a great way to connect with me. I’m @akumar on Twitter.

Andrew: Right. All right. Thank you and thank you all for watching.

Who should we feature on Mixergy? Let us know who you think would make a great interviewee.